- ~ -- _._ Ib.?'"zLor g ~'. `-? NANDBteK,^;.i,.x;Gt.A~MMi i:!R ~:.;...::' -::.t i{ i.:::,:!i<-.,;s:,~'':':.i:-:!::ii i ' —".: ~ t'_ ~" f..-.' 0':: " i ' '" '.': ' '-.':,.,-:-~:".~ —:.' -.. -. L"' 'fANGUAQEg '-S,5...~........:...-... i3<ii?,::~.!g:R..;.i, '?.-. 's.':": - '.-?!!'Tg... --?:i-.;;,?i!:iix,-t:.'. *. '.::-..:.:........" '?.:....:.......;:-. aXGUAG E- 0.,:..::!' -".:? ~-..:'i:';..:.:-'":i!ii.ii:::';.:,'-,.:-... *.:'L..,.,....,0 ~ -'.,.~:;::-!: GI:A ~: M 1; 6 ~t r N P;..;i,;' ':. - r;; i.~ i-~ ~ \':~.\: i,,,'~ ':,; ~;i 'I ' ^| ' -, F +d; S 0s+, 'X' ';,, 1:', '; ', '; r:'= 0 | so — X' X E'X'''' '-'i'>i- '1:::'-;, GE,^ '~4: ~:::l:i -.:..;::-fF.,. W0- <..,i-..... M;... ~ ~a...........:..':::~ ' 'evg' - I B 864.292:,.'.... ~~~~~~~~~~..,;.:... _ i.: -:.. -:......... * ';!.. j, - -,: '.. ~...':.... ': '!: ':.: '... '::"::~ ~ ~ ~~~'''-'::.:.. '~ i ~ ~." -.i::;,i?.,.'. ' *i '':.. ':..,"'...::, ',, 0 '' ' ' ' ' ]:.~:'-,.1:'S '.' '"'- ': ''''' '' '- ""J...:" '",,:' '''t.."' ": ~ ".:~.~-. ~~ \;.'.. ~ ' ~` -- - 'i- - `~:I~::I:1 *'' 1:i [ —i:i-:~,.:~.)~ -i 1 ~C~ 1~~ - ' r ~i I '' I, t |.' '. "l"', 'u.. \' '~' ''''-.;.1:'.1' ~. .-:. i-:: ~::1::. ~:I::I:: -:i:: il:::c::i::.:1:;:i: ~i:i:::.~~,~:,; ~I;.:if...i;.~1 hi::. ~i:~:::::,.::,~ .;:~ ~ I I-i;::. -i.:; ~ ~'t i::I~ ~~:~:!: ~ i -:;~:~::~;::~~.~:.!; 1:::;:;:;:~: —~ ~~ ~1;1, ~:i~.t; ~~-: ~::~ ~: i~ ~ -.i~i:::::;_.;:i ~ —~;' -...: ~::: ~: ~jij:t~:j::~.I;- i:-~ I:~~~ t...;I ii.-:. i..- ~~ ~r~~:::::'.-ii 'Ij::::: '::::lj::: " ~-~~; ~::L:::.:.:~::: i i..r.. i' i 5 i: i t I. Fb:, ~ ~ V - LIBRARY NATIONAL WAR COLLEGE 16 /.;9.-1 GPO THE CELAI~ CCCM SHOP U SA. 1., T n.,- '. ^!i i. I I! ii l II i. i rr...:,.'~ A HANDBOOK AND GRAMMAR OF THE TAGALOG LANGUAGE. FIRST LIEUT. W. E.X W2ACKINLAY, First Cavalry, U. S. Army, Member American Oriental Society. ARMY WAR LLEGE, LIBRARY. WASHINGTON: GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE. 1905. 5 -A/6 WAR DEPARTMENT,7 IDocuiment 'No. 260. OFFICE OF CHIEF OF STAFF. 2 ERRATA. Page 29, ninth line from bottom. For- " (Sp.) " read " (Sp.;- from Aztec.)" 1Pag~e 45, twentyv-seventh line from bottom. For "Longos" read "lofl0." Page 62, eleventh line fromibottomi. For "pauaing" read "pauang." g7 '. I..- 'It?PLoS4 '3 [Extract.] W\AR DEPARTMENT, OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF, rWashington, August 30, 1905. SIR: I have the honor to transmit herewith the manuscript of a work entitled "A Handbook and Grammar of the Tagalog Language," consisting of 399 pages of typewriting, which I estimate will make about 200 pages in print. I would suggest that the work be bound in a substantial waterproof cover, similar to that used for the latest edition of the "Soldier's Handbook," and that the size he 8 by 5~ inches, or approximately so. I would also invite attention to the folders accompanying. * * * It would be best to have the left-hand edge of the folders begin at the outside margin of the printed page, so that when extended the student could read the corresponding text to the synopsis at the same time and not be obliged to turn the pages back and forth. * * * * * * * Very respectfully, WILLIAM E. W. MAcKINLAY, First Lieutenant, First Cavalry. Maj. WILLIAM D. BEACH, Chief, Second ( Military Information) Division, Washington, D. C. 3 I PREFACE. Shortly after the arrival of the author in the Philippines he, in common with many others, felt the need of a work upon the Tagalog language in English, and began to prepare this compendium, working upon it from time to time as other military duties permitted, and, upon being ordered to duty in Washington for the purpose of having better facilities for the completion of the work, has been enabled to bring it to such completion, under the direction of Maj. W. D. Beach, Fifteenth Cavalry, chief of the Second Division, General Staff. As the Tagalog, belonging to a very different family of languages from those with which Americans are familiar, has extremely dissimilar characteristics from English or any Aryan tongue, the writer has devised a type scheme, presented in the folder herewith, by which the salient points of difference may be seen at a glance and vividly retained in the memory, thus enabling the student to use correct and intelligible Tagalog. Supplemented by that constant practice necessary for the ear, it is believed that the copious index to this work, together with the type scheme, selected vocabularies, and plain nontechnical (as far as possible) explanations of the grammatical structure of Tagalog, will prove to be of value to those whose duty or inclination may lead them to consult this book. Such, at least, is the hope of the writer. The Tagalog language is easily pronounced, regular in its forms, and although its structure is complex, yet when once grasped it is so plain that it is not only clearly comprehended, but is a key to all the Malayan tongues, especially to those of the Philippines. It is an idiom which builds up its sentences and parts of speech from roots by means of particles which are prefixed intixed, or suffixed to the roots. Several of these particles may be combined with the same root, each having its share in the modification of the inherent idea of the root. Attention is also invited to the great use of the "definite" in Tagalog, the so-called "passive" of the Spanish writers upon this subject. The index, which has been made very full and copious, should be consulted, as every probable combination of particles has been noted, as well as Tagalog roots and English words occurring in the work. For example, every word preceded by the compound particle ipinag has been listed, thus enabling the root to be found at once, and so on in like manner. The writer desires to express his appreciation for assistance received from the military authorities both in the Philippine Islands and the United States, from many of his brother officers, and from Profs. Friedrich Hirth, of Columbia; E. W. Hopkins, of Yale (secretary of the American Oriental Society); Paul Haupt and F. W. Blake, of Johns Hopkins; Otis T. Mason, of the Smithsonian Institution, and the late John W. Huett, of Luther College, Illinois. Valuable suggestions were also received from Messrs. Pedro Serrano Laktaw, author of a Tagalog-Spanish dictionary; Luis Torres, and Vicente Albert, all of Manila. 5 I A HANDBOOK AND GRAMMAR OF THE TAGALOG LANGUAGE. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF TAGALOG. BOOKS CONSULTED IN THE PREPARATION OF THIS WORK. It is scarcely necessary to mention that authorities upon Tagalog have not been very plentiful, even with the great revival of interest in the Malayo-Polynesian languages which has taken place within the last few years. The number of works, old and new, large and small, upon this subject, or bearing upon it, is very close to forty, and many of these are of little value or are obsolete. The number of reprints, however, brings the aggregate up to about one hundred, but this has no bearing upon the material available for study. The isolation of the Philippine Islands under the Spanish regime also contributed to the neglect of the Philippine languages, and it seems almost as if Spanish and foreign workers in this field studiously avoided consulting one another's researches, or else were ignorant of them. In the review of books written upon Tagalog, or containing notices of it, works written to teach Spanish to the Tagalogs, novels-generally romances of the type current in the middle ages in Europe-lives of saints, and miscellaneous works, which make up what may be called the Tagalog literature, have been omitted. The total number of works in Tagalog may be estimated at from four to five hundred, and very few can be said to have a literary value. The energy of those who are able to write Tagalog well has mainly been absorbed in newspaper work, and no great work has as yet appeared in the language. It can scarcely be doubted that if some of the great works of the world were translated into Tagalog and placed where they would be accessible to the common people, who do not speak or read Spanish, and are almost too old to learn English well, that the results would be of great and immediate importance in the mental development of the race. The honor of the first written treatise upon the Tagalog language probably belongs to the Friar Agustfn de Alburquerque, who arrived at Manila from Nueva Espafia (Mexico) in 1571, and after three years' residence in Taal, Balayan, and other parts of Batangas, became Prior of Tondo in 1575, holding the position until his death in 1580. This treatise has never been published, and the assertion is opposed by the Franciscan order, which claims the credit for the first work upon this subject. (See Vol. II, p. 563, " Estadismo de las Islas Filipinas, de Ziufiiga," edited by W. E. Retana, Madrid, 1893; " La Polftica de Espafa en Filipinas," afo VI, num. 134; and the "Catdlogo Bio-Bibliografico de los Religiosos Agustinos," Perez, Manila, 1901.) To the Franciscan friar Juan de Plasencia, or Portocarrero, who came to the Philippines with the first mission of his order in 1577, is attributed an " Arte y Diccionario " of Tagalog in 1581, which has remained in manuscript. (See " Catailogo Biografico de los Religiosos Franciscanos," Moya, Manila, 1880.) 7 8 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. However, the most important point is when the first printed work upon the language was published, and this was undoubtedly in the year 1610, when an " Arte y Reglas de la Lengua Tagala," by Friar Francisco de San Jose of the Dominican order, and who arrived in the Philippines in 1595, was printed in the "Partido de BataAn," probably by Tomas Pinpin, a Tagalog. The book is a quarto of 327 pages of rice paper. One copy exists in the Museo-Biblioteca de Ultramar at Madrid. Other editions of this book were printed at Manila in 1752 and 1832. (See Retana'sedition of Zufiiga, pp. 101-105.) This work was followed in 1612 by the "Vocabulario de la Lengua Tagala," by Friar Pedro de San Buenaventura of the Franciscan order, who was in charge of parishes in the present province of La Laguna, and whose work was printed in Pila by Tomas Pinpin and Domingo Loag, Tagalogs. The book is described by Medina in his "La Imprenta en Manila," Santiago de Chile, 1896, and a facsimile of the title-page is given. The Franciscan friar Juan de Oliver, who died in the Camarines in 1597, is said to have written a treatise upon the Tagalog, but his work seens to have been limited to correcting and adding to the "Arte y Diccionario" of Plasencia. Another of the same order, Francisco de San Antonio, who was in charge of Baler from 1611 to 1616, and from that time until his death in 1624 resided in the present La Laguna, wrote an " Arte " and a Tagalog-Spanish vocabulary, which works existed in manuscript in 1745, the author being known also as "Orejita." (See Cat. Biog. Rel. Fran., Manila, 1880; and the preface to the "Arte" of Totanes.) The Augustinian friar Juan de Quifiones, who died in Manila in 1587, also left a work upon the Tagalog, which is said by Beristafn to have been printed in Manila in 1581. (See Beristafin, Biblioteca Hispano-Americana Setentrional, Amecameca, Mexico, 1883-1887, 2d ed.) The first edition was printed in Mexico City in 1816. (See Vol. II, p. 464.) The matter seems to be doubtful. The Franciscan friar Geronimo Monte y Escamilla, who died in 1614, is said to have left in manuscript an "Arte" and "1Diccionario" in Tagalog, but the work, if extant, is in the archives of his order. (See Cat. Rel. Fran., Manila, 1880, p. 60.) A similar manuscript is said to have been written by Francisco de San Antonio, of the same order, who came to the Philippines in 1606 and died at Pila, La Laguna, in 1624. (See Id., p. 139.) The third printed work upon Tagalog was the "Arte de Idioma Tagalog," by the Franciscan Agustin de la Magdalena, who arrived in the islands in 1665 and lived in Tayabas and Laguna for some years. Returning to Mexico he there gave his manuscripts to the press in 1679, and in 1684 returned to Manila, (lying in Santa Cruz de La Laguna in 1689. (See La Imprenta en Mexico, Medina, Sevilla, 1893, No. 1784; and Cat. Rel. Fran., Manila, 1880, p. 292.) The Dominican friar Teodoro (Quiros) de la Madre de Dios, who came to the islands in 1627 and died in 1662, has been credited with an "Arte" of Tagalog by some bibliographers of Philippine literature, but Medina marks such a work as doubtful, as far as the printing is concerned. The eighteenth century witnessed a revival of interest in the language, and in 1703 two works, both of which have been reprinted, were printed. The first was the "Compendio de la Arte de la lengua Tagala," printed in Manila. This excellent treatise was reprinted at Sampaloc in 1787, and in Manila proper in 1879. Both the early editions are now rare. The author was the Augustinian friar Gaspar de San Agustfn, who came to the Philippines in 1668, and died in Manila in 1724. He is better known as the author of the work "Conquistas de las Islas Filipinas," Part I, Madrid, 1698; Part II, Valladolid, 1890. The third edition, however, retains many obsolete words. The second work was a "Vocabulario," or dictionary of the Tagalog, written by the Franciscan friar Domingo de los Santos, who came to the Philippines in 1665, and after administering parishes mainly in La Laguna, (Facsimile of first Tagalog grammar written.) VOCAI VLARIO DELENO GVATAGALA. *. ELROMANCE CASTE-.. + LLANO)PVESTO O co PRIMERO. r, ~ PR1IMERA, Y SEGVNDA?'ARTE. f Por Fr. Pedro de San Buena Venturalinutil e in cedigno Religiofo Francifcano defcalzo.e, DIRIGIDO A.D.IVAN D E SI LVA CAVA LLERO DEL ORDEN DE S. rIAGO GOVERNADOR Y CAPITAN General dels Iltas,y etcfildet de fu Au-dienia y Chanidlliia RelJ. N(1,^~~^ ( c$ ^ C' ),J:- C ) i 4P _4 4* j 9 4 Al/^S ^ W S, I —, = \ Aj ~Con rceoda Imprfdo cla aoble VillHde Piha, Por Thoma Pinpin, y Domntsgo Lo ev Tagalos. Ao de. *t:*,% (From reprint by Medina, Santiago de Chile.) TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 9 died in Majayjay in 1695. His work was printed in the town of Tayabas in 1703, and but two copies seem to be known. One is from the Marsden collection, and is in the library of King's College, London, and the other in the archives of the Franciscan order. Some leaves of a manuscript "Arte" by the same author are also preserved in the archives. This dictionary was reprinted in Sampatloc in 1794 and in Manila in 1835. It is now obsolete. (See Cat. Rel. Fran., Manila, 1880, p. 294; Biblioteca Filipina, Retana, Madrid, 1898 [referred to hereafter as R.]; Nos. 77 and 148; Id., Nos. 26 note, 66 note, 66 and 594; and Cat. Bio.-Bib. Rel. Agustinos, Manila, 1901, pp. 133-134.) The next work upon this subject was the "Arte y Reglas de la lengua Tagala," by the Augustinian friar Tomas Ortfz, printed at the convento of Sampailoc in 1740. The author came to the Philippines in 1690, was a missionary in China until about 1712, and died in Manila in 1742. (See Medina, La Imprenta en Manila and Cat. Rel. Agustinos, p. 169.) In 1742 the Franciscan friar Melchor Oyanguren de Santa Ines, who had lived in the Philippines, mainly at Los Bafos and Sariaya, from 1717 to 1736, gave a work to the press in Mexico entitled "Tagalysmo." This interesting book, which has never been reprinted, compares with Tagalog the Mandarin dialect of Chinese, Hebrew, and Greek, the Tagalog being reduced as far as possible to a Latin basis. (R., 39.) In 1745 the work of the Franciscan Sebastian de Totanes was printed at Sampailoc. This valuable treatise, entitled "Arte de la lengua Tagala y Manual Tagillog," was reprinted at Sampaloc in 1796, at Manila in 1850, and in Binondo (Manila) in 1865. (R., 42, 79, 202, and 329.) The author came to the Philippines in 1717 and remained twenty-nine years in the islands. During his residence at Lilio and Pagsanhan, La Laguna, from 1732 to 1738, he wrote the foregoing book. He died in Madrid in 1748, having left the Philippines in 1746. (Cat. Rel. Fran., Manila, 1880, pp. 390-391.) In 1754 the great "Vocabulario," or dictionary, of the Tagalog, explained in Spanish, was printed at Manila by the Jesuits. The main authors were Juan de Noceda, S. J., and Pedro de San Lucar, S. J. A second edition, with a Spanish-Tagalog appendix, was printed in Valladolid in 1832, which is now very rare, nearly all copies having been lost by shipwreck en route to the islands. There is a copy in the Library of Congress. Another edition, with additions, was printed by the Augustinian order at Manila in 1860. This work, although many words are obsolete, is the standard on Tagalog as yet. It is also becoming rare. (R., 48, 136, and 268.) The next work containing a notice of Tagalog is in English. In Johann Reinhold Forster's "Observations made during a Voyage round the World" (London, 1778; German translation by his son, Georg Forster, Berlin, 1783) a list of 47 English words is given, with their equivalents in Tagalog, Pampango, Malay, and several Polynesian dialects. From some rare words the Tagalog would appear to h~lve been taken from Noceda and San Lucar. Forster was born in Germany in 1729, a descendant of the Forester family of Scotland, and accompanied Captain Cook in his second voyage to the South Sea (1772-1775). After his return he became professor at Halle, Germany, where he died in 1798. His book is especially valuable concerning the Polynesian races and islands. A few years later the German naturalist Peter Simon Pallas (born 1741, died 1811), who had become professor of natural history in the Imperial Academy of Sciences at St. Petersburg in 1768, published there in 1787 -1789 the work known as the " Vocabularium Catharinse," from its patroness, Catharine II. Written in Russian, it gives the corresponding word for nearly 200 terms in 200 languages. In this list Pampango is No. 186 and Tagalog No. 187. The source is not given, but that for the Tagalog is evidently the same as that of Forster. The Latin equivalent for the Russian words is given in the preface. The full title of the work is "Linguarum totius Orbis Vocabularia comparativa." It is in two quarto volumes. 10 TAG ALOG LANGUAGE. At the same time the Spanish author Lorenzo Hervas y Panduro (born 1735, died 1809), of the Society of Jesus, published two works bearing upon Tagalog to a slight extent, but of importance as inspiring other work upon the same line. The first was his "Aritmetica," published in Cesena, Italy, in 1785, and the second, his "Vocabolario Poliglotto," published at the same place in 1787, both in Italian. In the latter he gives specimens of the language of 1593, of 1604, and his own time. The Spanish edition, printed at Madrid in two volumes in 1801, has his observations upon Tagalog in the second volume. In 1803 Prof. Franz Carl Alter, librarian of the Imperial and Royal University of Vienna, published a work of 60 pages upon the Tagalog, with the title "Ueber die tagalische Sprache." This work seems based upon a manuscript vocabulary from the library of Count Wrbna at Vienna, supplemented by words from Pallas and the works of the Abbe Hervas. The latter seems to have corresponded with Alter, who speaks of Hervas in the preface to his book, and also of Miss Knight, of England, probably a sister of Thomas Payne Knight, the numismatist, as being interested in his researches. A work which is yet of value to the student is that of Johann Christoph Adelung (born in Germany in 1731, died in Dresden, Saxony, 1806), entitled "Mithridates, oder Allgemeine Sprachenkunde." In the first volume, which appeared at Berlin in 1806, on pages 127 and 128, two versions of the Lord's Prayer are given-one of 1593 and the other of current form-with an explanation of the grammatical forms as deduced from the words. The author, who gives specimens from over 500 languages, is best remembered for his great work in German philology, and at the time of his death was principal librarian of the Elector of Saxony, at Dresden. Adriano Balbi (born in Venice in 1782, died there 1848) published an "Atlas Ethnographique du Globe" at Paris in 1826. (See Table No. 364 and pp. 246 to 249, for remarks upon Tagalog.) The catalogue of William Marsden, the eminent orientalist (born in England in 1754, died there 1836), published at London in 1827, contains mention of some manuscript "Artes" of Tagalog not known to have been printed. One is an "Arte" by a Dominican friar, dated 1736, and the other a " Vocabulario " by the Dominican Miguel Ruiz, dated 1580. This, however, must be an error, as the Dominicans did not arrive in the Philippines until 1587. Miguel Ruiz was one of their early friars, but little seems to have been recorded about him. In Marsden's Miscellaneous Works (London, 1834), page 94, are also some observations upon Tagalog. To the genius of the German author Wilhelm von Humboldt the world is indebted for his magnificent work upon the Malayo-Polynesian languages, which was published by the Royal Academy of Sciences at Berlin, in three volumes, in 1838, under the title "Ueber die Kawi-Sprache auf der Insel Java." His dissertation upon the Tagalog verbal system and formations in Volume II, pages 347 to 396, clearly establishes the fact that the Tagalog and allied tongues of the Philippines have preserved the verbal modifying particles to a greater extent than any other members of this great linguistic family, and on page 288 of the same volume he goes so far as to say that at first view the student of Tagalog seems to have come into a wholly new system. This noted philologist, who was born in 1767 and died in 1835, has evidently taken the greater part of his material upon the Tagalog from the second (1796) edition of Totanes, and hence lacked the advantage of having been upon the ground. The Augustinian friar Manuel Buzeta, better known as the author of the "Geographical Dictionary" or Gazetteer of the Philippines (in cooperation with Bravo), published a Tagalog grammar at Madrid in 1850. (R., 199.) The author, whose name is spelled "Buceta" in the Cat. Rel. Agustinos, came to the Philippines in 1827, where he was in charge of the church at Guiguinto in 1832 and of Malate in 1848. He returned to Spain in 1849, and resided at Madrid until 1854, in which year he left the order and returned to secular life. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 11 The work of Sinibaldo de Mas upon the islands, published at Madrid in two volumes in 1843, contains a short comparative vocabulary of Tagalog, Visayan, Ilocano, Ibanag (Cagayan), and Malay. (R., 180.) In 1854 the "Tagalog-Spanish Dictionary" of Rosalio Serrano, a Tagalog of Bulacan Province, was printed at Manila, and second and third editions have appeared, the third being printed in Binondo (Manila) in 1869. A Spanish-Tagalog dictionary by the same author was printed in Manila in 1872. (R., 227, 376, 426.) In 1855 Carlos Cuarter6n, a priest who had also been a pilot in the Southern Islands, published a work at Rome entitled "Spegazione e traduzione," at the end of which there is a vocabulary of Italian, Malay, Tagalog, and Joloano. (R., 229.) In 1872 the grammar of Joaqufn de Coria (Gil y Montes de Santo Domingo) was published at Madrid, where the author had accepted the position of professor of Tagalog in the Central University. The work shows the careful study of the author, who came to the islands in 1831 and resided in the Tagalog region until his return to Spain in 1866. On account of his accepting the chair of Tagalog against the wish of the prelate of his order, he was dropped from its rolls; but, unfortunately, the plan of Minister Moret did not succeed, and the position to which he was elected never became active. The author was bjrn in 1815 and entered the Franciscan Order in 1830. (R., 411; also Cat. Biog. Rel. Fran., p. 656.) The same year, 1872, appeared the popular Spanish-Tagalog "Lessons upon the Grammar" of Bishop Jose Hevia Campomanes, bishop of Nueva Segovia (Vigan). A second edition appeared in 1877, the third in 1883, the fourth in 1888, and the sixth in 1901. All the editions were printed at Manila and are alike, no corrections or additions having been made. (R., 1133.) Here should be mentioned the interesting work of V. M. de Abella, the "Vade-mecurn Filipino," a manual of Spanish-Tagalog dialogues. It contains a vocabulary of Manila local words and phrases. The first edition was published in 1868 (T. II. Pardo de Tavera, Bib. Fil., No. 9), and other editions were published in 1869 and 1871, and the ninth had been reached in 1873. (R., 2524.) All editions were printed in Manila. The most practical of all Tagalog-Spanish grammars appeared in Manila in 1878, the work of the Recoleto friar Toribio Minguella. Interlinear translations, simplicity of arrangement, and clearness of explanation make this little book of great value, and many of its suggestions and ideas have been very useful in the preparation of this present work. In 1880 Prof. H. Kern, a Javan-born Hollander, made a valuable contribution to philology by his list of words in Tagalog which are derived from the Sanskrit. This article, which appeared in the "Bijdragen tot de Taal-, Land- en Volkenkunde van Nederland-Indi " at The Hague, volg. (series) 4, deel (volume) 4, pages 535 to 564, shows the large number of such words and their importance in expressing some most necessary ideas of civilization. This field was further explored by T. H. Pardo de Tavera, who published a pamphlet of 55 pages at Paris in 1887, in which the Sanskrit words which have passed into Pampango are also noted. (R., 1066.) Kern remarks in his article that the scarcity of Sanskrit words in the dialects of northern Celebes indicates that the Tagalog received this element directly from Cambodia and Sumatra, and not by way of Celebes. This is an interesting suggestion, which might lead to something if studied upon. Dr. F. R. Blake, teacher of Tagalog and Visayan at Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md., also read an article on "Sanskrit loan-words in Tagalog" at the April, 1903, meeting of the American Oriental Society, at Baltimore, Md. Doctor Blake has also written articles upon "Analogies between Semitic and Tagalog" and the " Differences between Tagalog and Bisayan." In 1882 appeared the second edition of a Spanish-Tagalog and Pampango vocabulary by E. Fernandez, printed at Manila. This was followed in 12 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 1883 by his Tagalog-Spanish vocabulary, both of which are very useful books. (P. T., 1061, and R., 756.) The valuable "rapport" of Dr. Joseph Montano, Paris, 1885, to the French minister of public instruction, contains several Philippine vocabularies, some of them of little known languages, and also quite an analysis of the Tagalog. (R., 885.) Under the pseudonym of Julius Miles, an unknown author published a small Tagalog-Spanish grammar and phrase book at Barcelona, Spain, in 1887. (R., 1054.) In 1889 Friar Toribio Minguella, Recoleto, published a work in Madrid upon the unity of the human race as proved by philology. In this work he makes some comparisons between Semitic and Tagalog. The same year Dr. Pardo de Tavera published his pamphlet upon the origin of the names of the Tagalog numerals, at Manila. W. G. Seiple, of Johns Hopkins University, also published an article upon the Tagalog numerals in the Johns Hopkins University Circular, No. 163, June, 1903, Baltimore, Md. In 1889 also appeared the "Spanish-Tagalog Dictionary" of Pedro Serrano Laktaw, son of Rosalio Serrano, and in 1903 director of the Spanish paper, El Pueblo, of Manila. It is understood that the author is now working upon a Tagalog-English dictionary. (R., 1260.) In 1890 a most valuable little work was published in Manila, under the title "Coleccion de Refranes, Erases y Modismos Tagalos," translated and explained in Spanish by the Franciscan Friars Gregorio Martin and Mariano Martfnez Cuadrado, and edited by the Friar Miguel Lucio y Bustamente. The first came to the Philippines in 1874, the second in 1875, and the editor in 1860. All administered parishes mainly in La Laguna Province, Friar Martinez also serving for many years at Binangonan de Lampon, on the Pacific. This collection comprises 879 proverbs, phrases, and idiomatic expressions as used in the vicinity of Tanay and Pililla, where the authors resided, and embraces but a part of the wealth of the language in this regard. Many of these expressions, marked "T. P." (Tagalog proverbs) have been quoted in the explanation of the language. (R., 1318.) In 1893 Dr. Ferd. Blumentritt, of Leitmeritz, Bohemia, published a translation of a sketch of Tagalog orthography by Doctor Rizal, at The Hague, under the title " Die Transcription des Tagalog, " von Dr. Jose Rizal. The advent of the United States forces at Manila and the occupation of the Tagalog region led to several small pamphlets being issued with the English, Spanish, and Tagalog in parallel columns. One of these was written by Capt. John Bordman, jr., Twenty-sixth U. S. Volunteer Infantry. In 1902 Constantino Lendoyro, a Spanish gentleman of more than twenty years' residence in the Philippines, published his work, entitled "The Tagalog Language," at Manila. It is a very good book, but is full of typographical errors, and in many places the English is not idiomatic. The author deserves much credit for his labor, and a corrected edition would be of great value. At any rate, he is entitled to commendation for having written, in a foreign language, a work upon the Tagalog which shows his thorough knowledge of the Philippine tongue. In 1902 R. Brandstetter issued a work upon the Tagalog and Malagasy languages at Lucerne, which is of interest as showing the resemblance between these two languages spoken at such distant points. In 1903 the " English-Tagalog Pocket Dictionary," of P. D. Neilson, was published at Manila, and, while merely giving the Tagalog equivalent for the English word, is of considerable value. The Tagalog-English part has also been published. Mention should also be made of "Crawfurd's Grammar of the Malay Language," which has also a dictionary attached, London, 1852. Many valuable comparisons are made between Tagalog and other Malayan languages. For a grammatical discussion of authority upon the Malayan languages TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 13 the student is referred to the "Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft," of F. Muller, II. Band, II. Abtheilung, pages 87-160 (Vienna, 1887). THE TAGALOG LANGUAGE. The Tagalog is the most important of the many tongues and dialects of the Philippines, which seen to number well over threescore, a on account of its being the most widely understood, the most euphonious, and the most developed by contact with foreign idioms. It thus occupies a similar position to that held by Malay farther to the south, and to English in the world at large. Spoken by over a million and a half of the most energetic race in the islands, occupying the city of Manila, eight provinces surrounding the metropolis, and a number of outlying islands and districts beyond these limits, it is also generally understood by many far beyond its own territory, especially in seaport towns throughout the archipelago. The language seems to be divided into a northern and a southern dialect, the former being spoken in Bulacan, Bataan, Nueva Ecija, Rizal, and Tarlac, and the latter occupying La Laguna, Batangas, Cavite, Tayabas, Marinduque, the coast of Mindoro, and part of Ambos Camarines. Each of these dialects is more or less split up, each town almost having local mannerisms by which the people of one neighborhood easily dintinguish a stranger. Yet the region above described is clearly the territory of one and the same language, which is different and distinguishable from the Pampangan language on the north and the Bicol on the south by the test of intelligibility. Philologically, Tagalog belongs to the Malayan branch of the great Malayo-Polynesian linguistic family, which extends from Hawaii to Madagascar and from Formosa to Easter Island west of Chile, including New Zealand, Tonga, and Samoa, as well as Borneo, Celebes, Java, Sumatra, the Malay Peninsula, and the Philippines, from east to west, a distance of 180~, or half the circumference of the earth. Considering the rudimentary state of culture existing up to comparatively recent times of the majority of the peoples speaking the languages of this family, its unity is remarkable, and a thorough knowledge of one tongue is found to be of great utility in the acquirement of any other of the great group, especially in the same branch. Tagalog, together with other civilized tongues of the Philippines, such as Visayan, Pampangan, Ilocano and Bicol, has preserved the verbal system better than any other, and the basis for the comparative study of the family must be taken from the Philippine tongues and not from the more cultivated Malay, Kawi, or modern Javanese, all three of which have been profoundly affected by Sanskrit and to a lesser degree by Arabic, something as English has been affected by Latin and French elements. The number of roots or primitive-idea words in Tagalog seems to be about 17,000, there being 16,842 words in the Noceda and Sanlucar dictionary of 1832, according to Crawfurd, the distinguished Malay scholar. ("Malay Grammar," p. cxiv.) Of these some 284 are derived from the Sanskrit, and are evidently borrowed through the Malay. Many of these are names for things unknown to the primitive Malayan peoples, but others are abstracts and various words, some of which would seem to have supplanted a primitive Malayan word. Thus in many cases American and Tagalog use words in their own languages which are from the same remote source in India, and coming around the earth east and west meet again in the Philippines. Such a word is pad, "foot," from the Sanskrit pada, which has descended into English "foot'" and Spanish "pie." The origin of these words is marked after each in the handbook. The names of the chief workers in this field have been given in the list of books consulted. a The Philippine Bureau of Ethnology, however, has given out as a result of its researches, that the number of distinct tongues is not over 15 or 16, the larger number being made up by counting very similar dialects. 14 TAG ALOG LANGUAGE. The Japanese language seems to have furnished no words to the Tagalog, although many Japanese came to the islands during the seventeenth century, owing to the expulsion of Japanese converts to Catholicism, who found a refuge in Manila and the adjoining provinces, mainly in Pampanga, where it is said many of them settled around Macabebe. It is thought that some Japanese expressions still exist in the Macabebe dialect of the Pampangan language. Notwithstanding a comparatively close contact with the Chinese for several centuries, and certainly antedating the Spanish conquest by many hundred years, very few words seem to have come into Tagalog from any of the numerous dialects of that Empire. The Chinese element in Tagalog seems limited to a few commuercial terms, some household implements, and a few miscellaneous terms, some of which are confined in their use to Sangley or Chinese-Mestizo families. These words are noted wherever they occur in the handbook. Professor Hirth, the Chinese scholar, thinks that the first notices of the Philippines are to be found in the work of Chao Ju-kua, collector of customs of Chuan-chou, a city in Fo-Kien Province, between 1210 and 1240. In this work he speaks of the islands of Po-ni (Borneo), Ma-i (Mindoro? or Panay?), and of the Pi-Sht-y6 of Taiwan (Formosa). This latter name sounds something like " Bisaya," the native name for Visava. The book speaks also of the San-su, or "Three Islands." Book 3_5 of the " History of the Ming Dynasty (1368 -1643) of China," as abstracted by Groeneveldt, speaksof the Kings (Sultans) of Sulu as attacking Puni (Borneo) in 1368, and of the King of Sulu, Paduka (Javanese " Lord ") Pahala as dying while on a visit to the Emperor at Te Chou on the Grand Canal (Shantung Province). The Emperor then recognized his eldest son, Tumohan, as Sultan of Sulu, in 1417. The brother of Pahala, who was named Suli, made a visit to China in 1421, but a few years after this no more was heard from this Kingdom. From this and other extracts it would seem that the Chinese knew of the Mohammedan settlements at Manila and Tondo prior to the arrival of the Spaniards, and must have carried on a lucrative trade with them, otherwise the pirate Li-Ma-hong would not have made such a desperate attempt to take the city so soon after its foundation in 1571. The Arabic words in Tagalog, which are hardly more than a dozen in number, evidently came in with the Mohammedan religion, and upon the extinction of that faith around the mouth of the Pa-ig, all but a few words fell into disuse. Mohammedanism could have hardly become established in the Tagalog region before 1450 to 1500, as it came very slowly from India or Arabia to Java, and thence by way of Borneo and Sulu to the Bay of Manila and the Pasig Valley. It had apparently not extended to the inland provinces, its farthest northern point appearing to have been Hagonoy. Arabic words which were adopted by the Spanish and thus brought into Tagalog are not included in the above remarks. Spanish, as a matter of course, has contributed a great number of words to Tagalog, many of which have been thoroughly naturalized. They are mainly religious, governmental, social, legal, and abstract terms, including also terms for foreign articles and luxuries. Some names for Mexican articles are not Spanish but Nahuatl or Aztec, owing to the intimate connection between Mexico and the Philippines for more than two centuries, and there are even some Arawak words from the tongue of Cuba, Haiti, and Puerto Rico among these. English has as yet given but few words to Tagalog. Of these the newspapers use four, which seem to have no exact native or Spanish equivalents, viz: "Self-government," "high life," "sport," and "besbol," or baseball. The latter has been verbalized and taken into the language bodily, while the others are still quoted. The construction of Tagalog does not seem to have been influenced by any of the foregoing, but to have retained its Malayan structure. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 15 THE PRONUNCIATION OF TAGALOG. The most succinct statement upon the above subject is that given by Rev. W. A. Goodell, of the Methodist mission in the Philippines, as printed in Stuntz's " The Philippines and the Far East," page 483: " II. The pronunciation of Tagalog is very simple, and there are no sounds to which the American vocal organs are not accustomed. The letter (sound) most difficult to get is 'ng,' which has exactly the sound which it has in the middle of the word 'ringing,' but which becomes difficult when at the beginning of a word, as in the word(s) 'riguni't,' one of the words (terms) translating the conjunction ' but,' and which often occurs at the beginning of a sentence. "But although so simple in word pronunciation, Tagalog is extremely difficult in utterance, for one reason because of the great number of long words (compounds) it contains, and for another and more important still, because of the rhythmic movement of the language, a quality that can not be described and a characteristic for which no rules whatever can be given, but which is entirely as much a part of the Tagalog language as are its words themselves." The "rhythmic movement" spoken of by the Rev. Mr. Goodell, who is an excellent speaker of Tagalog, is what may be called the "national accent," and, like the tones of Chinese and other allied tongues, can only be acquired by long practice. The vowels are really but three in number, although a, e, i, o, and u, with their Spanish values, are printed (ah, a, e, o, oo). Of these " e " and "i" are habitually confused, and "e" can hardly be said to exist in pure Tagalog. "O" and "u" are also confused, the tendency being to drop " o " and substitute "u" in many words, a process which has already taken effect in Pampangan. The diphthongs are ao (ow), au (aw), less nasal than ao, and ua (wa); but there are no triphthongs, as each vowel in such combinations preserves its own sound. The native consonants, pronounced (except rig) as in English, are B, C (K), D, G (hard), H, L, M, N, NG, P, R, S, and T. The sound of F does not exist in Tagalog, and is replaced by P. V is also a foreign sound merging with B to the Tagalog ear. Z is pronounced like S, and is found only in Spanish words. The same is true of X, which is pronounced at the beginning of a word as H. W is beginning to be used in native papers as a semivowel in place of initial ua (wa) and in ao (aw). K is also used by many in place of hard C and Q. Y is used as a part of the diphthong ay (ai), and also as an initial consonant. The pronunciation and construction of the language will be more clearly understood by carefully studying the two versions of the Dominical Oration, or Lord's Prayer, given below with interlinear pronunciation and translation. [From the Vulgate.] Tag. Amt namin sungmasalarigit ka; sambahfn Pro. Ah-mdh ndhmeen soong-mah-sah-ildhng-eet kah; sahmr-bah-heEn Eng. Father our (of us) art in heaven thou; adored (worshiped} Tag. ang rgalan mo; mapasaamin ang kaharian Pro. ahng ngdh-lahn moh; mah-pah-sah-dh-meen ahng kah-hah-ree-ahn Eng. the name of thee; come to us the kingdom Tag. mo; sundin ang 16ob mo; dito sa lupa para Pro. moh; so6ndeen ahng 16h-obe moh; dee-toh sah lo6-pah pdh-rah Eng. of thee; (be) done the will of thee; here upon earth according Tag. nang sa larngit; bigyan mo kamf nrgay6n nang Pro. nahng sah ldhng-eet; beeg-ydhn moh kah-mee ngeye-6hn nahng Eng. to (that) in heaven; (be) given of thee we (us) now of the 16 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Tag. aming kanin sa ttrao-tirao at patawairin MO Pro. dth-meeng lkdh-neen sah aih-row-dih-row alit pah-tow-6th-reern moh Eng. our food upon every day and (be) pardoned of thee Tag. kamf nang aming maiig' iiltang, para nang Pro. kah-mee' nahng dth-meeng maht~g-adh oo6-tahng, IAh-ralt nahng Eng. we (us) of the our (sign of plurality) debts, according as Tag. pagpatawad namin sa mano~agkakautang sa arnin; Pro. pahg-pa-tow-adnd r~h-meen salt rahifg-alig-kah-kah-o65-tahrtg salt ah-rneen; Eng. (are) forgiven of us to those indebted to us; Tag. at houag mo kaming ipahintd'lot sa tuks6', Pro. ahit hoo-lthg moh kaht-mnyien ee-pah-heen-too6-loht sah iook-so'h, Eng. and do not of thee (let) us (be) permitted into temptation, Tag. at iadydi MO kam.i sa dilang masamA. Pro. aht ee-dyadh molt kah-mee' salt deedahng malt-sah-mdh. Eng. but (be) delivered of thee we (us) from all evil. The version from the translation of the American Bible Society, following the authorized, or King James, version, is as follows: Tag. Pro. Eng. Tag. Pro. Eng. Tag. Pr-o. Eng. Ama' namin nanasalairigit ka; Alt-madh ndth-meent nah-nalt-sah-lalihf —eet kalt; Father our(of us) (art) in heaven thou; ang paiigalan MO: dunalting ahng pahTg-adhl-altn moh: doo-madlt-teeng the name of thee: to arrive MO. Gawlin ang iyong kalooban, molt. Gowee'nt altrg eeyo'ng kah-lolt-6-bal, of thee. (Be) done the thy will sambahi'n saltm-bah-hee'n hallowed (worshiped) ang kaharian altng kah-halt-ree'-altn the kingdomn kung, paano sa rt, k-oong pah-ath-no sah if as in Tag. lahi~git, ay gayon din namdn sa lupa. lbigdy Mo Pro. aihfihrg-eet, eye gtiy-ort deent nah-madhn sahlt o6-pah. Ele-big-e'ye moh Eng. heaven, be thus truly also in earth. (Be) given of thee Tag. sa amin ng~ayon aug aming kanin sa 6rao-drao. Pro. 8ah adh-rneen ri-geye-6hn ahing alt-meerng kalti-neen sah Alt-row-a li-row. Eng. to us now (this day) the our food on every day. Tag. At ipatawad Mo sa amin ang aming mari~g Pro. Altt ee-pah-tow-aihd molh. sah adh-meert ahtrg adh-meeng mnaltsf-6th Eng. And (be) pardoned of thee to us the our (sign of plur.) Tag. ultang, gaya namain namin na nagpatauad sa Pro. oo6-taltng, guyah nalt-midhn ndh-meen nalt naltg-pah-tow-dAhd sah Eng. debt (s), as also by us now (are) f orgiven (to) Tag. maiiga' may iitang sa amin. At houag Pro. mahsiTg-adh my o6-tahnig sah 6th —meen. Ahit lioo-6hg Eng. (s. of plur.) those-having debts against us. And do not Tag. mo kaming dalhi'n sa tuks6, kungdi Pro. molt kali-mee'ng dahl1-hec'n salt took-s6lt, koong-det' Eng. of thee (let) us (be) brought into temptation, but Tag. iligtds Mo kamf sa masamtd: Sapagka't Pro. ee-lig-tatss moh kah-mee' sah mah-sah-rndh: &tlt-padhg-kah't Eng. (be) delivered by thee us from evil: For (because) Tag. iy6' ang kabarian at ang kapangyarihan at Pro. eeyo'h ahng kah-hahree'-altn alit ahng kah-pahng-yahred-lahn ahit Eng. thine the kingdom and the power and TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 17 Tag. ang kaloualhatian, mag pakailinm man. Pro. ahng kah-loo-a/hl-hah-tee-ahn, maijg-pah cahi-eel6hun mahn. Eng. the glory, ever (for ever) also Tag. Siya' naua'. Pro. Seeyah n6wv-ah. Eng. Amen. The same prayer may be taken to show the changes in the language since it was first reduced to Roman letters by the missionaries. From the Doctrina, Cristiana of 1593, reprinted by Hervas in "Saggio, Prattico," p. 129. Also found in Adelung's "M~ithridates," Vol. I, p). 609. "Aini nainin nasaldi-git ca, ipasam~ba nma ang nigala mno; maui (return) sa. amin ang pagiahar! vio, ipasonar (be obeyed) mo ang l0'obvmo, dto sa lupa p~aran sa laii-igit. Big-iain nio cami fiigai6n nang (a0mi cacanmn p.ara nang s8a arao; at pacaualio m ang anmin casRalanan (sins), yagang (as) nIinaualan bahala (equally) nantin sa l6ob ang casaman (evils) nang macasasa (of existence) sa arnin; honag mo carning (atian nang di' cainli) mnatalo nang tocs6; datapoua' t (but) yadia (be delivered) mto cami' sa dilan rnasand." It may be said that this last version shows a comparative want of familiarity withi the language, except as might be spoken by servants, etc., and it has doubtless suffered by reprinting, the, proof having to be read by those ignorant of the language, and hence unable to (letect errors except by copy. An example of the folklore stories is given in the "Tale of the Unlucky Rat" "from the examples of Malavan languages, published at Batavia, Java, in 1868, by J. G. F. Riedel, the Dutch philologist. It is as follows: Tag. N~ayo'n din isang dagA nagwika sa kaniymil Pro. N~qeye-6'n deen eesdhng dahga' nahgwe~eka sah kahneeyd Eng. Now indeed (one time) a (one) rat said to himself Tag. din, nasakit ang atay niyad: " Aydo na ak6'y Pro. deen, nahisahkeu't a/mg ahtie' neeydh: " Eyey6w nah ahk6y Eng. (self), (being) pained. the liver his: " Not wish now I Tag. matirA1 dito, sa bayan ko; ak6'y paparo'on aakyat Pro. mahteeira dei'toh, sah bdy-an koh; ahk6y papar6-on ahahkya'ht Eng. (to) remain here, in town my; I will go (and) ascend Tag. sa an6' sa bundok, titiri-gin nang ibang bayan, Pro. sah an6/h sah boondo'ke, teeteeuiiTgeen nahng eebdhng bryan, Eng. somewhere into (the) mountains, looking for another town, Tag. smian ak6' makakita' nang kaibigan ko, nang pagkain Pro. sdhahn ahko'mahkakeeita nahing kah-eebei'gan koht, na/hag pa/iqgcd/een Eng. where I can see some of friend(s) my, some food Tag. masarap sa dagal, at nang pakabilihay na, mabuti." Pro. rnahsahrdhp.sah dahgdh, alit na/mg pahkahboo'high nah rnahboo'tee." Eng. agreeable for rat(s), and some living (of) good." Tag. Pumnar6on ang (lagA, lumAkad airao-drao, hangang Pro. Poomahro'hon (ding dahgdh, looindhkahd d/hrow-d/irow, /idhn-gahng Eng. Went there the rat, traveling daily, until Tag. dumdting sa baybay, nakitit isang taklobo Pro. doond'hteeng.sah buybuy, nahkeeita eesadhng ta/iklo'hboh Eng. arriving at (the) beach, (it) saw a (one) giant clam Tag. nakarigani-ga, nang kaunti'. Nagwika ang dagA: "An6' Pro. nahkafi-ga/hnga nahng kountee'. Na/igweeika ahng dahgdh: "An6h Eng. opening-the-mouth (of) a little. Said t he rat: "What Tag. ito'? Toto'ong, walA pa akong nakikita' na Pro. eet6/h? Tohto/i-ohng n'ahldh pah ahk6hng na/ikeekeita nah Eng. this? Truly not yet I am seeing (have seen) now 6855-06-2 18 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Tag. ganiyan." Ngay6n pumdsok ang daga sa bibig nang Pro. gahnetyahn. n7quy6hn poomdhsoke cahng cdahgdh sah beebeeg nahng Eng. the like. Then entered the rat into mouth of the Tag. taklobo, tinignan ang laman nit6, inguni't nasipit Pro. tahkl6hbo, teeneegnahn ahng lahmdhn neet6h, r7Too6nee't nahseepit Eng. giant clam, looking at the meat of this, but was caught Tag. siya hangang nasira ang kaniyang ulu, at Pro. seeydh hdhn-gang nahseera ahng kahneeydhhng o6loo, (adt Eng. he until was destroyed the his head, and Tag. napitol ang kaniyang liig. Pro. nahpootole ahng kahneeydhng leeeeg. Eng. was cut off the his neck. FREE TRANSLATION. Once upon a time there was a rat who said to himself, because his liver was out of order: "I do not wish to remain here in this town of mine; I will go and ascend the mountains, looking for another town, where I can see some of my friends, some agreeable food for rats, and some good living." The rat went out, traveling daily, until arriving at the seashore it saw a giant clam (Tridacna), with slightly opened mouth. Quoth the rat: "What is this? Truly, I have not seen anything like this yet." Then the rat went into the mouth of the giant clam (tatklobo) to look at the meat, but was caught (by it) until his head was cracked, and it was cut off at the neck. ACCENTS. From the foregoing examples it will be seen that there are three accents used in Tagalog, the acute (/), the grave (\), and the circumflex (^). The acute accent may fall upon any syllable, but in Tagalog is generally to be found upon the last (ultima) or the next to the last syllable (penultima). The acute accent upon a word ending in a vowel indicates that the final vowel has an open, broad sound, and that the suffixed particles "an" and "in" prefix an "hi" when joined to such words. Example: Magandd, "elegant;" ka;gandahlan, "elegance;" bill, "trade, barter;" ang bilhin, "what bought." Words ending in a consonant take "an " or " in" only, even if bearing the acute accent, which is only written in such words when occurring upon the penultima or antepenultima. Example: Uiiutang, "to borrow;" magytang, "'to lend;" vmagpautcng, " to lend freely (or with good will);" kautaiTgar, "debt;" padt'ang, "credit." In many cases the suffixing of "hln" or "/in" draws the accent one syllable farther toward the end of the word. This also applies to "'an" or "in." Example: PatdyE, "idea of killing or death;" ka(tatcdyan, "death" (abstract noun); ang kamamtaydn, "the place of death." The acute accent is not written with words ending in a vowel, unless the accent is upon the final vowel. It may be taken as a rule that words unmarked with an accent, if ending with a consonant, take the accent upon the ultima, words ending with 1t and s being excepted. Words ending with an unaccented vowel or "n" or "s" generally take the accent upon the penultima. This is also the rule in Spanish. The grave accent in Tagalog merely marks those words ending in a vowel, which take "an" or "in," instead of "han" or "bin." The stress is not laid upon the syllable marked with the grave accent, but upon the one preceding. Example: Batd, "child" (in general), pronounced "bahta," the final vowel having an obscure sound; kabataan, "childishness" (pro. kah-bah-tih-an). The grave accent is not used with words ending in a consonant. The circumflex accent is only used upon the final vowel of those words ending with an abrupt, obscure vowel sound, upon which the stress of the voice is placed. It admits only "an" or "in" as a suffix. Example: Dumalitd, "to suffer, to endure;" kadalitaan, "suffering, endurance;" TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 19 turnuro, "to signal;" katuroan, "signaling;" ang tinuroan, "person or station signaled to." Practice is the essential requirement to become familiar with the accent, which is most important in Tagalog, as many words are only distinguished by the accent, although differing totally in meaning. Example: As6, "smoke;" dso, "dog;" gatas, "milk;" gatds, "path, trail;" sumiang, "to rise" (as the sun); sumilang (ultima), "to pass between;" bumasa, "to read;" bumcas, "to moisten." As has been already mentioned there are some 17,000 "roots" in the Tagalog language, many of which are nouns, pronouns, adverbs, and prepositions, etc., in themselves. Verbs are generally formed by the use of certain particles, of which there are some 17, of which all except one (urn) have a definite and indefinite form. Together with the noun and adjective forming particles, of which there are several, the possible number of intelligible Tagalog words can not be far from 50,000 to 60,000, quite sufficient to express any nontechnical ideas of any language whatsoever. Yet with all this there are some curious facts about the language and its vocabulary. Many general terms can not be expressed in one word, but the modifications of a general act have many words to express them, sometimes far more than exist in English or Spanish. A similar parallel is offered by the lack of a verb in early English to express the idea of motion in general, although Anglo-Saxon had many words for different kinds of motion, which are used daily by all English-speaking people. Upon this point Brian H. Hodgson, the noted oriental scholar, says, in his work upon the aborigines of India, published at Calcutta in 1847, page iii: "* * * Home-bred words are all very particular, and proportionably numerous; while general terms, if more conveniently few, are less characteristic and very apt to be of exotic (foreign) origin; take the English general term 'to move;' it is Latin and one; but of the numerous sorts of special motion (to hop, to skip, to jump, to tumble down, to get up, to walk, to fly, to creep, to run, to gallop, to trot), all are 'genuine Saxon, by the soul of Hengist.'" This idea will be more fully explained under "The verb." In addition to such particularizing words, there are also many synonyms or words meaning the same thing in Tagalog, many of which are local or provincial and are not heard in the same locality. For this reason Crawfurd's remarks upon Tagalog and Visayan, as expressed in his "Malay Grammar," London, 1852, page cxix, are still pertinent. He says: "The languages of the Philippine Islands may be described, not as copious, but wordy. In the state of society in which the natives of the Philippines were formed, ideas are considered more in concrete than in abstract, and by an importance being attached to trivial matters a profusion springs up which, in a more advanced state of society, are considered unworthy of retention, or which, if retained, would only be productive of perplexity and distraction. * * * In Tagalog there are 12 names for the cocoanut, including its different varieties and conditions as to maturity and preparation for use. * * * In the same language there are 11 words to express the verb 'to boil' (with variations), and 75 (really about 50) for the verb 'to go. " It may be added that the verb "to carry" with its variations has some eighty words to express all combinations in Tagalog, and there are many other verbs which have been particularized in this manner, which will be more fully set forth in the appropriate place. The main object of this work is to facilitate the acquisition of an elemlentary knowledge of the Tagalog language. It should be borne inmind that Tagalog is not constructed on English or Spanish lines, either in grammar or syntax. The universal tendency upon using a new language is to translate one's own language word for word, or phrase for phrase, into the foreign one. The native may understand, but the result is not elegant. No language can be learned entirely from books, and to supplement the special needs of each person constant practice in speaking with educated or 20 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. intelligent Tagalogs is necessary. Even with a considerable vocabulary, the American will find difficulty in conveying just what he wants to say in Tagalog, unless he masters the idioms and peculiarities of the language. This will not be a very easy task, but, once mastered, the key is held to all the Philippine languages, and it might be said to all the Malayan languages of the East Indies. To those who have had to depend upon ignorant or untrustworthy interpreters, a knowledge of the local tongue will be felt to be indispensable, and this knowledge will also be a protection to the people ignorant of Spanish or English who in many cases have been so unmercifully fleeced by unscrupulous interpreters. This work has been divided into sections, and the use of technical terms has been avoided to as great an extent as possible. Where cases, etc., have been used, it has not been because such exist in the Tagalog language, but as an aid to the memory of those who are more or less familiar with Latin, French, Spanish, German, and other European tongues. The essential peculiarities of Tagalog are its "roots," which may be made into nouns by the use of the article, into adjectives by other prefixed particles, into adverbs in other cases, and finally into verbs by the use of a large number of particles; and the great use of the definite, which is grammatically a "passive," and is so treated by all grammarians who have been consulted, although many times this " passive " must be translated into English by an "active" verb. For this reason the terms "definite" and "indefinite" have been used in the present work. This point is more fully explained under the verb. Examples have been given wherever possible, and the vocabulary given has largely been founded on actual experience. It is impossible to invent a series of phrases which will serve for any two people. The questions may be given according to the book, but the answer, coming from a speaker of the language, will be constructed out of that vastly more extensive vocabulary existing in his brain, and the whole scheme be thrown out of joint. For this reason a careful study of the examples of the language and the manner of building up the sentences will in the end prove of more solid benefit than the memorizing of a large number of set phrases, which may or may not be appropriate. Some phrases suitable to certain situations have been inserted, such as matters relating to the procuring of something to eat, directions to the house boys, distances to places, the weather, and other similar matters, the careful perusal of which will enable more complex sentences to be uttered with success and a mastery of the idiom acquired. SOME ORDINARY PHRASES IN TAGALOG, What do you call that (this) in the Ano ang panrgalan niydn (nit6) sa Tagalog language? wikang Tag(qlog? That (This) is called in our Iydn (ito) ay tinatadwag sa language. aming wikd. GREETINGS. How are you? Komusta (Como estd) p6 kay6? Well; and you, sir? Aabuti; at kay6 p6? Not as well as you seem to be. Hindi lubhang mabuti na para ninyo. Good morning, sir. Magandang crao, p6. Good morning, sir, to you. Magandang drao p6 namdn. Good morning, everyone. Bigydn po silang lahat nang magandang drao. Good afternoon (evening), sir (used 1Magandlang hapon p6. (P4 used as from noon to dark). word of respect to both sexes.) Good evening (night) (used either lMagandang gabi p6. on meeting or retiring after dark). TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 21 How is your father? (mother?) Well, by the grace of God. Not very well. Is that so? I regret to hear (lit., ''feel'') it. How is the sick one? Getting better now. Is there anything, I can do for you? (lit., Have you any orders for me?) No, thank you. Sit down, sir. Thank you. I am in a hurry. I wish only to speak to Pedro. I will regard it as a great favor if you will tell Pedro that I was here to-day. Don't worry about it, sir; I will tell him. Pedro justleft this minute. Where (lid he go? 1 think (It seems) he went to buy some cloth. I am going away now. Are you going? Until later. Until to-morrow. Until day after to-morrow. Until we meet again (lit., " Until we see each other"). Well, I'm going (lit., " you there") Where are you going? I am going home. When are you going back to Manila? On Sunday. When are you going (down) to Manila? When are you going up to La Laguna? Come up! Come down! Come in! Get out of here! Move on! Clear out! Don't move! Comne near. Mjove away, all of you. WXait a little way b~ack. Come hcre! Accompany me. Wait a moment. Go back (return) now. Come back here. Go quickly. An6 ang lagay nang amd (ind) mot (niny6?) Mabuti, sa aud vang Poong (Dios). (Bat-hala, used by some, is of Sanskrit origin, derived from avatdra, " descent, " th rough Malay batdra, "'a god." There is no connection with the Arabic word Y11ldh, used by the Moros for "God," the latter being derived from al, "the," and JVdh "God," Iallied to the Hebrew El6ah; E16him.) IX p6' lubhang maigqi. Paid? Kun ganiyadn ay dinadaradam ko. Miaano6 ang may sakit? or An6 ang lagay nang may sakitf Gumiginhdua na. Mfayro~n kayong anomnang ipagus'ttos sa a'kin! Ilindi po6, salidmat. Umup6' po6 kay6. Saidnmat. Ak6y nagmamadali. Ibig ko 1dsnang kausapin si Pedro. 3liaiakirng s'tang na loob kikilalanin ko sa iny6 kiin masabi niny6 kay Pedro na ak6'"y napes-ito 7Tqyn JMagwald p6l kayo6 bahala't sasabihin k-o sa kaniy6,. Si Pedro'y kaaalis 1dmang. Scaan pumaroon? Tila namill' nang kani yang babaroin. Y'ayamo na ak6'. Yaydo kayo6 na? Hangang mamtayd. Hangang bdlkas. Hangang makalawd. Iflangang tayo magkitd. Diydn ka na. Saan ka paroroo'n? A k6'y papasabalhay. _Kailan kay6 uuui (magbabalik) sa Aray~ni14? Sa Lingo (Domtingo). Kailan kay6' lulud's sa Maynild? Kailan kay60 susuba sa La Lagunaf Pumanhik ka! Manaog ka! Pumdsok kayo6! Lumabds lea dito! Lumaikad! Sdlong. Houag kang gagalao! Lumaipit kea. Lurnayo6 kay6'. Umurong ka nang kauntit sa likurdn. Pumarito ka! Samahan mio ak6. M3agantay ka sandall. 3Muui ka na. Bumalik ka dinit. Jagmadall ka. 22 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Get out of there! Don't run! Umall's ka diyadn! Houag tumakb6! They do not wish to. Nanalyao sil6i. I did not wish to. He wishes to. Niiyao ako6. Siyd "Ibig. I don't know. I can not understand Auan ko. DI' ak6' naalaman aug what you said. sinabi wniny6'. GOING ABOUT. Driver, take me to the Walled City. Go by Palacio street (Calle Palacio). Straight ahead. Look out! Go to the side. Stop! To the right. To the left. Slowly. Whoa! Let us go by this road. Which is the shorter of the two? This is shorter than that. Are we far away yet? We are near now. What is the distance from here to the river? Three hours riding, seven walking. What are you doing there? I am getting water, sir. Is this good water? Yes, sir. What is your occupation? Housebuilder, sir. Where do you live? My house is here, sir. Where are you from? I live in the country. I am from the mountains, sir. Where is the town (pueblo)? I can not tell you. Show me the road leading to the pueblo. I want you to go with us to show us the road (trail). Don't be afraid and don't try to run away. If you guide us well, you will be paid for your trouble. Ask that person there where there is aspring or well. What are you looking for? I am looking for. Go across the river as far as the crossroads. I want a blacksmith (horseshoer). I want a saddler (leather worker). I need a banca (canoe) with outriggers. One large enough to hold twentyfive people. Cochero, ihatid mo ak6' 8(a lob nong Maynila'. Tamitloy kas8( daan nong Paolacio. Maotuid (derechio). ~Iabi! (Q'uedao!) Tumiabi ka. Iliuminto6 ka (pora). $a kanan (mono). Sa kaiiwd (silla). Hinayhirnog (despacio). Luayluay. (This latter to horse, etc.) Magtuloy tayo sa daorng NJ6. Ain ang latong maik-si sa dalawa'? 1t6 ang lalong mnaiksi 8(1 roo'n. Malayo pa( ba tayo? Mfald!pit na tayo. Ano6 ang ioyo muld' dito haugang 8(1 Ta/long oras kung cabayohin, pito6 kung lokarbi-. Ano6 aug ginagau.d mno diyamn? Ak6'y naigib, p6. Ma4buti ba itong tdbig? Op6l. Ain koya' aug iyong katmigk-ulan? Anloague, po'. Saan, ka nomomnaaon'? Aug badhay k-o, po6, dito. Taga 80aan, ka? A~ k6y unlinamahoy sa bdkid. Toga bun dok- aok, p6'. 8(1(0 nlroofl auig boyan? Hindi ko naabamang sabihtin sa inyo6. Iturb Tho 8(a aki aug dotang Jpahtfugo 8(1 bayoufi. ibi~g kong sumarna ka sa amin pora iturh' anfg daon (gatals). H1ovag kaug matadkot at houag kang turnoakb6'. Knug itu1rb moug maigi, ay magkakamtom ka nong kaapahain 8( iyong pogod. Itanong ma doo'n sa taduoug (mama,) iyaln kun soau moayroon, isang bd'kol 6' bal6u. Ano6 aug hinahainopnio? Hfumahaiuop ak6 noug Tawirin mo aug ibog at lamakad ka han gong sa sau~ga'-doan. [big ko noug 'iboug pandoy (taga poglagay nang balkal sa cabayo). Jbig ko nang isaug mananahit uang balot (tolabortero). AcaldangTan ko il3aug baugkd na may kdtig. Thoang molaki na mnakakadaid nang isoug dalawang pou6o t limang kaatdo. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 23 Steer straight for the ship. Land there at that point. Do not land where it is very muddy. Don't make a noise at the landing place. Port! Starboard! Stop! Go ahead! Astern! See that everything of mine is taken down to the boat. Put everything into the cart. Wrap something around that bundle so it will not get wet. Set that basket down here; I want to get something out of it. Unfasten this cord. From. here to Manila, how many hours by road (walking)? THE WEATHER How is the weather? The weather is fine. The weather is bad. We are in the dry season now. We are having the wet season now. The sun is becoming obscured. There is much fog. Is it going to rain? It looks like it. It has bee~n raining fearfully all day. The rain is coming down now. Give him the umbrella. It is thundering and lightening. A bolt struck that tree. The windl is increasing. It is possible that this may turn into a typhoon (hurricane). Come in under the shelter of this house. The moon is rising now. The stars are coming out. Look and see if it is raining, because I must go now. Come back here at sunset (lit., At setting of the sun, return here). It is growing dark. It is growing light. FOR TAKING LEAVE I must say good-by to you now. Why must you go? Sit down first. I can not sit down, because I am in a hurry. And where are you going? I am going to see a friend who is leaving for Manila to-morrow. I will come back later. Ituid mo ang ~smak.ydin. isatsat ino doo'n 8(a ddkong iydn. Ilouag kang swnatsat 8(1 kaputikan. Houag kang nmagiii-gay 8(1 pagS(at8(t. Sa kaliwd! Sa kanan! IHinto na! Sd'lon~g na! U1rong! JiTgatan nmo ma lahat any dking kasankapan may padala' 81 nsaakydn. 1a gay mo lahat 8(1 ca~rret6n. Sapinain mo iya'ng ba~lutan at bakd basd. Ilagaty mo dito iydng tampipi; mayroom ak6 kukumim. Tasta-41nm mo itong Ni bid. Buhtat dito hangang 8(1 Miaynilal, ilang oras8 lakarin nang daan? ANG PANAH16N). Maano any pamaho'nf kfabuti ang panaho'n. Masaind ang panaho'n. Na sa tagairao tayo si7gayo'm. Na. 8 tagularn tayo s0gayo'n. Nagdidilirn ang arao. (Arao also means "'day.") May maralining tilap. UJeldn bagd? Tila p6l. Katakottdkot nauldn 8a maghdpong Wt. Btunubugso' na amnguldn. Ibigay mno sa kamiyd avg padyong. Kurnukulog at kumikidiat. I1sang lintik ay nahu'log sa iyang kdhoy iyaln. Lumalaka's any har7i-gin. Mard hit it6' a~y maumi sa bagy6. Puma'sok kayo6 8(1 s8110g nitong badhay. Sumisilang ma ang buam. Sumisilang ma any nmauiya bituim. Tigmdm mo kum umuulan, at acdis nas ak6'. Pa~glmbog namy alrao, ay maybalik ka Duinidilirn ma. Lumiliwdmag ma. (SA PAGPAPA.&LAM). Paallam at Po ako6 sa iny6'. Bdkit ka nagpapadlanmd Maup6 ka muma. Hindi ak6 makauup6 sapayka't ak6 'y naymamadali. At swim ka paroroom? Makikipagkitcl ak6' 8ai8(1 kong kaibigan (Jalis pascusa MaynilA bgkas. Magba balik ak6' marnaya'. 24 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. We will see each other in the after- Magkikitd tayo sa hapon. noon. Good-by. Adios (Sp.). PIOUS EXPRESSIONS OF GOOD WILL. May God guard you. Dios ang umitiiiat sa ioy6J. May God help you. Dios anyi tumulong xa hiny6. God be with you. Dios any sumaina sa iny6'. FOR EATING AND DRINKING (SA PAGKAIN AT PAGINUM). Get me something to eat; I am. hun- Bigyadn mo Gk6 riang kaunting makagry. kain; nagugy(dtit ak6. Get me a drink; I am thirsty. Painumnin mno ak6-O; nauuhao ak6'. What do you wish to eat? Ano6 any ibig ninyong kanin? Whatever you have. Kun aa6ornayroon di yan. Would you like roast chicken? Jbig niny6' ang inihao na sisiu? Yes, and a little wine. Oo, at kaunting allak. What else would you like? Ano pa anrg ibig ninyo'? Give me some eggs, if t~here are any. Bigydn mo ak6' nang itlog kton rnayroon. NOTE.-See list for things to cat, pp. 28-29 and 39-40. The meal is nice. Mfasarap any paykain. Wash (wipe) this plate. ]Iuyasar (kuskusin) mo itoi-y mankok. (pingdn) it6. I have eaten enough. Alaraini akong kinain. Eat some more, sir. Kuinain pa kay6 Po'. Just a bit more. Kap~iraso pa. Only a bite more. Isa iia dioa'ng subo. I am satiated now. Busoy na aAo6. Don't give me anything more. Ilouay na po6 niny6' akony biyydn nanyg anoinan. Bring somel water to wash the hands. 3lfaydala' ka nany ti~big pagh~qas nanyg kamiay. (Idiomatic expr. is: Isang tabony (cocoanut shell) td'biy.) FOR THE TOILET (SA PAGBIBIHIS). Shall I get the clean clothes now? ibig ninyony ikuha ko kay6 nany danl it na malinis? No, bring me a towel and soap first, Hottay, dalhdtn mo muna ako6 nang I am going to take a bath..isang pamalhid at sabo'n at ako ay maliligo'. Get some water and put it in the Kumiuha ka nany ts'big at iiayay nmo bath tub. sa, paliyuan. The bath is ready, sir. Ayg p)aliyuan p6' ay handd na. Benigno, put some water in the Beniyno, lagydn mno nany t6big ang wash basin. hilamosan. Lay out a shirt, a pair of trousers, Ikuha rno ako' nany isany baro', isang andl a coat. salawal (It isany amiericana. Khaki, sir? No, white clothes. Kaki p6l? IHouag, darnit na rnaputi'. Bring me my shoes. Daihin mno sa akin any sapin. Hand me that cap. Id but mo so dkin iyany yorra iydn. Get a handkerchief out of the trunk M1aglaba's ka nany isany panyo 8ca (chest). kabadn. Open that door. Shut the window. Buksin mo iyangpint6 iyain. Pindain (8arhdn) mo any durui7jauan (binlana).Take care of the house; I am going Iii~gatan mo any bdhay; at ak6 ay for a walk. maglalakadldkad. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. If anyone calls, say that I will be back soon. What time is it? It is five o'clock, sir. Wake me up later, at six; don't forget what I tell you (lit., "my orders"). Please get up, sir; it is six now. Do you know of 'agood barber? There is one, sir, I know well. Then call on him and tell him to bring a good razor. Do you know how to shave well? Yes, sir. All right, shave me. Does it hurt you, sir? No, it is all right. Cut my hair. Do you wish it very short, sir? No, leave it a little long. How much do I owe you? XWhat you like, sir; what you wish. How much a month, shaving me every other day? Three, pesos, sir. Then come, beginning with to-morrow. There is a man downstairs who wishes to work for you as a servant. Tell him to come up. Have you any recommendations? I have, sir. Where are you from? From Malolos, sir. How old are you? Are you married? Yes, sir. Have you father and mother yet? No, sir. I have not. Stay here and I (we) will pay you 'if you care for it five pesos a mouth, andl if this does not suit you, look for another place. You are falling into bad habits. Look for a substitute right now. Don't be impertinent. Keep still! or Shut up! Where is your employer? He is not here, sir. Don't you know where he went to? No, sir. About what time will he be back? Later, after eight o'clock. Tell him, when he conies, that I have been here. Are you the tailor? This suit does not fit well. Kun mnay sinomang pumarito, 8abdihin moiig sia ak6'y madaling babalik..4nong oras nfla A las ('ifco na p4'. Gisim~gin ino ako' mama yang 4 las sesR; lhouag mong kalilinmutan any bili ko. Gumi~sing p6 kay6; 4 las seis na. Mlay nakikilala kang mabuting mai~ganigahit (barbero)f May isa' p6 akong nakikilalangnmabuti. Kun gay6n ay tauagin mo at sabihin mongnmagdald nang mabuting labasa. (paiTgd hit). Marunong kang undluit na mabuti? Op6. K~un gayo'n, ahitin mno ak6. Nlasasaktadn p)6 kay6? Hindit, ganiydn iJ-ga ang mabuti. Gupitin ma ang buhok ko. Ibig 1)0 ninyong soagad na sa gad? Homig, pabayaan mong mahabd-habd. Magkano (gaano) ang ibabayad ko sa. iy6f Kay6' p6' ang bahala; ang loobin p6 niny6,. Ma~gkanong ibig mo buanan, sa tuing ikalawang drao ay aahitart ma ak6f Tatlong piso, po6. Kun gay6it ay purniarito ka mula' bulkas. May isang ta~uo sa ibabd na 'ibig magpaaiia sa iny6'. Sabihin mong pumianhik. May taglay ka katunayanf Mayroon ak6' p6l. Taga saan ka? Taga Malolos, p6. Mayroon ka nang ilang tao'nf M4ay asdua ka? Op6'. May a ma't nd pa? Hindi p6. Wald p6l. Tumird ka. at uupa~hdn kita' kun libigr mo nang limartg piso isang buan, at kun hindi huinadnap ka nang ibang pan-ginoon. Masamna ang pinagkaratihan mo. Humdnap ka nang kahalili mo siTgay6n. din. Houag kang magpayamot. Houag kang maifig'gay! Nasaan ang pa?7ginoon mo? Wald p6' rito. Di mo naalaman kun saan naparoon?' Hirndi p6'. Anong oras siyd babalik-? Mamayang makd 4 las ocho. Sabihin mo kun dumdting na ak6'y, naparito dito. Ikd6o ba ang mananahi? Itong damit na it6 ay hindi maigi angr pagkagagawd. 26 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. That is too dear. Totoong nap~akamahal iyadn. I mnust have it this week. Kailad~jan ko sa loob nang lingong it6'. MISCELLANEOUS PHRASES. Are you teaching English? What did you teach this morning? I taught arithmetic. When did. they wArite any English? They have written some within a few days. I wish to rent a house. I shall be here some time-several months at least. I wish to rent from month to month. I will pay you in advance. A long time. A short time. I will go there. What do these men want? They wish to speak to you. What do you (thou) wNant? XWhat is your namie? Is that work finished vet that I told you to (10? Not yet, sir. Then, when? To-inorrow, sir. How much is this (all)? How inuch for eggs? There is 1)0 answer. Wait, I am going to write a letter to your employer. I am. under great obligations to you. Don't mention it (lit., It is nothing). You are mistaken. It is the truth. It is a lie. This woman, sir, is asking that her husband be released. Tell her to state her reason for asking. Who, among you, know this woman? Tell me what you did to Pedro. Tell me the truth, for if you do not I shall send you t~o the guardhouse (prison). Why did you leave the barracks without permission? Tell Pedro that he is wanted by the captain. What you did was far from the duty (orders) of a soldier. Ungumadral (nagtuturo') lay6 bagad nang 'irgle's (Any wikang nanig Th i- Jd anericano) In' k-ayang inidral (itinuro') niny6 8(1 agcii Autg inidral (itinuro') ko'y aritme'tica. Ka'i/dln sungmnlat sild'y nang ingleAs. Sungrnd/lat sild'y nang karnakailang arao. Ibig ko 'isang bdhay paupahain. Ak-6y matitird, dinit mard'hil mani-ga i/ang bua0n. Ibig ko urnupad butang-buan. Man gutina aug bayad. Ma ha bang panahorn. Maiksiqg paflaho'n. Paroroon ak6 do6n. An6 any tibig nitong snai7g4 taluo? Ibig n/a' makip~agd'sap se. iny6'. 4n6 ang 'big iio? Ano' aug p~au/jalann mof I cn 1 na baga' any gawang ipinagbilin ko sa iyo'? Ilmindtpa, po'At kailain? Bakeas Po. M31aqkano WtV Maqkakarno ang it/og? U a/aug sagod. Mag/i uay La, susd'lat ako6 nang isang sd/tat sa iyong pafi-ginoon. Ak6 p6 ay ma/uki any pagpapasalabnat Iad p 6 anoinan. Kay6 p' 0 ma/..lto any katotoohanan. fto' 41 bula en. Itonig babaye i6 p6 ay namamanhik napawia/an anyg kani yang asadua. Ipasaysay mo sa kaniyad any katuiran na Iliniltngil nya'. Sino ba sa, iny6' any nakakiki/ala sa babeaye it6'? Maysaysay ka sa akin nang manya ginaiau mo kay Pedro. Sabih in mo any katotoohanan, at kun hindt', ipapadala' kital 8( bi/angoan. A no t ikao lumiaba's sa cuartel nang wa/any sabi. Sabihinvmo key P1edro -a siya'y kailanygan nany capitdn. Iyang ginawd mc iydn ay laban sa rneafid d'tos nang isang sunda/o. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 27 You should always inspect the men's quarters. The rifles (carbines) must be cleaned daily. I especially warn you not to be off guard (or relax vigilance) for a moment. The obligation of a soldier on (luty is to know the orders. Those who dlisobey orders will receive severe punishment. Tell the people here that what we are going to do is for the benefit of all. SECTIO VOCAB Thomas. Tomds. Marv. Maria. JohnA. Juan. Joseph. Jose'. Dadalaoin niny6 tui-tuing ang mairg'd kinalaiagydn nang mnanga sundalo. Ddpat linisin airao-drao ang mafiRgd 1baril. Jlinfigbibiling ko sa iy6 mahigpit na liouag ka maltibaug isniog ouuialt. Naud'kol sa 8undalo taga-pagtdnod usisain aug rnafi-ga' u'tos. Aug lurnaban sa i'ds ko ay kakamtdn nang niahigp.it na, pa(rusa. Sabihin maosa taga dito na ang 6tting gagawin ay kagaliTgan nang lahat. N ONE. ULARY. Father. Amd. Mother. Lnd. Brother. Kapatid na lalaki. a Sister. Kapatid na, babaye.a THE ARTICLE OF PROPER NOUNS (SI). In Tag~alog a definite article, Si, is generally prefixed to the names of pjersons related to or well known to the speaker or writer, as well as with names of relationship and terms of affection. It may also be used with the proper name of an animal belonging to the speaker. In some of the provinces diminutives are much used, especially within the family. There are also some terms of this nature largely used in Sangley, or Chinese-Tagalog families, which are taken front Chinese and will be discussed later. Older brother (first born). Koya,; si koya, my elder brother. The pronoun is understood. Elder brother. ilfaooot (Manila and southern dialect). Elder sister. Kakad; si kaled, my elder sister. My father. ASi amna. My m-other. Si inad. This article is declined as follows: Nom. John. Si Juan. Gen. John's; of John. Ni Juan; kay Juan. Dat. To, for John. Acc. John. Kay Juan. Abi. Froin, with, John.J When a name is to be used in the plural, the article of common nouns,.ang, is used, as: The Johns, ang nmar7fti Juan; or better, ang mairgd tinataiwag na Juan (those who are called John). The article of names has a special plural when coupled with certain words, as of the parents, relatives, companions, or the home. Nom. John and his Sind Juan. (ien. The field of John and his family. Ang bdkid nind Juan. Dat. To, for, Pedro and his Acc. The field of Pedro and his family. Ang kand Pedrong bu'kid. Abl. From, by, Pedro and his ~. J a These two words are derived from " Ipatid " and " ka," meaning "tied with the same cord." "Lalaki" is male and "babaye" isfermale. In Tagalog, however, separate words are used to express "Ielder brother," " elder sister," " younger brother or sister," etc. 28 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Si is not used alone before names of persons unrelated to the speaker except in a joking way; in ot~her clases the Spanish word Sefior, Mr., is inserted as: Si Seihor Blanco, Mr. Blanco. Gino'o is the Tagalog equivalent for " Seflor " and Gat for " Don. " Dayang is " Dofia. " These terms are used by purists. THE ARTICLE OF COMMON NOUNS. The article ang (the) is used with all common nouns, and also those proper nouns not applying to persons-i. e., the Pasig, ang Pd16sig; the Ph ilIippines, ang Filipinas. Sometim~es this article is prefixed to names of cities. It is declined both in the singular and plural, the word mahiga' (sign of plurality) being added in the latter case. DECLEINSION OF "4ANG." Nom. sing. The. Gen. sing. Of the. Dat. sing. To, for, the. Ace. sing. The. Abl. sing. From, by, the. Nom. plur. The. Gen. plur. Of the. Dat. plur. To, for, the. Ace. plur. The. Abl. plur. From, with, the. Ang. Xang; sa.. Sa. _Yang; sa. Nrang; sa. A ng rn a i7qa. Nang mnafi~qa'; sa inao7gd. Sa inaiiTda. Nang iiaiTga'; so maiqit4. Saro tq; narng rnar746g. The forms ni and nind of the article of names and the form nang of the article of common nouns are used when a word in the genitive follows a nominative in the sentence. Examples: The mother of John, ang inad ni. Juan; the house of Thomas and his family, ang balhay nind Tomuis; the darkness of the night, ang kadilirndn nartg gab-i. The forms kay, koand', and sa are used with the genitive when inserted between the nominative article and its noun. Examples: The mother of John, aug kay Juan ina; the house of Thomas and his family, anq kand Tomnds badhay; the darkness of the night, ang sa gab-tina kadifirnadn. Ancient Greek has almost this same construction. THE COMMON NOUN. Nouns in the Tagalog, language are of various classes; some are root words, whose derivation can not be traced; others are built up from roots, and many are foreign words, mainly from Spanish, although some Arabic and Sanskrit words are to be found, as well as a few from Chinese arid other sources. They are indeclinable, and the sign of plurality is generally indicated by the word mnar-gd placed before the noun pluralized. VOCABUTLARY. Banana (in general). Bed. Bedquilt. Beer. Blanket. Bread. Breadf ruit tree. Butter; lard. Carabao (buffalo). Cat, domestic. Sdging. Pdpag. Kzt mo0t. Serbesa (from Sp., cerreza). Mfania (Sp. ). Tindpay (from tadpay, idea of kneading, i. e., kneaded). Antipolo; tipolo. Antipolo is also a town in Rizal Province. f~fantica, (Sp., mnanteca'). '1 fantiquilla (Sp., mantequilla)..Kdlabao; darnt'dag; anuang. First is general. Pusa. Mfusang is Malay for the palmcat (l~aradoxurus). TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 29 Cheese. Chicken; fowl. Child. Chocolate. Cocoanut. Cocoanut oil. Coffee. Corkscrew. Corn (maize). Cow. Cup. Dog. Drinking vessel. Eggs. Fish, dried salt. Fish f resh. Flour (in general). Food. Fork. Goat. Grape fruit. Hog; swine, domestic. Honey. Horse. House. Lamp; light. Man (person). Mango. Mat. Meat (pulp). Milk. Native spoon. Orange. Pepper. Plate. Rat. Rice (cooked). Rice (hulled).Rice (unhulled). Salt. Sheep. Soap. Spoon. Sucking pig. Sugar. Sweet potato; yam. Table. Table knife. Tea. Tumbler. Vinegar. Water. Wine; liquor. Woman. Quiso (Sp., queso). Mfatuk. Bata. Also applied to house boy, servant (muchacho). Siculate (Mex. Sp., chocolate; from Aztec).-.Niog. Also applied to cocoa palmi. Lai~gis. C'ape (Sp., caft; from Arabic, qahwa). Tirabuso'n (Sp., tirabuzo'n). Mfais (Sp., niailz). Baca (Sp., vaca). Ta~sa (Sp.). Aso; ayam (rare), Bicol word. Lumbo;'inumnan (from. mium, idea of drinking). Itiog. Ddting. -Isdd. Galapung. Pagkain. Pauiduro (Sp., tenedor). Kamnb iv g. Dalandan. B 6Ib u i. Paint. Cabaylo (Sp., caballo). Baihty. Iiooofln (from ilao, light). T47ito. Man1gal. Banig (Sp., pet ate.). Laiwin. Gatas. 8Saodok. Suhia; lukban. Lara; paminta. (Possibly from Sp., pirinienta.) Pfingan. Dagd. Kanin. Biga's. Pilay. Also applied to the grain. Ast'n. Ttipa (from Sp., topar, "to butt"),Sab6n (Sp., jabd'n). Cticha-ra (Sp.). Biik (Manila); Kulig (Laguna); Buldo (Marinduque). Asu'cal (Sp., azutcar). Old name tub6, now ''sugar-cane.'' Camote (Sp.). Large yam, ubi. Dd'lang; lamesa. K-ampit (Sp., cuchillo). Sa4 (Chinese, cha). Vaso (Sp.) Su k a. Thbig. Alak (from Arabic, araq). Babd ye. 30 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. The definite and indefinite idea runs throughout the Tagalog language, and the words " to have, " " not to have, " " there is, " " there is not, " etc., bring this out plainly. VOCABULARY. Have (all persons; indef.). Have (def.).Have you (some, any)? Have you (that, this)? I. Indeed; truly. Money. My. JMayro'on (lit., ''there is;'' from d6on, ''ithere.'' N~a sat. 13Mayro'on? i~Moyro'on ka baga'? iiMayf iN~a sa iyo? (lit., Is with you?) Ak6' (form with nominative; indef.)..Aga. Salapt'. Also means half peso. Akin; ko (latter postfixed to definites). No. Hindi. Perchance. Kay6d. Perhaps; some; any. Bagal. There is not. Wale4. What? 1An6; mom6 bagal? Yes. O-o. Yes, sir. op60. You (thou). Ka (formi with nominative; indef.). Akin requires the article and is prefixed or else is preceded by a preposition. Ex.: 1. Have you any rice? (i.Vayr( on kang bigads?) Have you that rice? (iNa sa iyo iydng bigd's?) 2. Yes, sir, I have some (Op)6, mayro~on aok6). Yes, sir, I have it (Opo', no sa dkirt). Mioyro'on is used when asking in a general way, as in the market or in a shop or store; no so is used when a certain object is meant. Mugkmno means "how much;" aya'o is "I do not wish to," and alin is "which." With the foregoing vocabulary all ordinary comforts and supplies, except cloth.ing, can be asked for throughout the provinces where Tagalog is uinderstoo(I, and these words are generally understood throughout the island of Luzon on account of their general similarity to the corresponding words in other dialects. The most conspicuous excel)tion is tdhiy (water), which is danum, in Pampango, Ilocano, and other northern dialects of Luzon. VOCABUIARY. Afternoon. American. Bottle. Custom; habit. Day; sun. Dress; clothes. Every day; daily. Ganta (3 liters). Glass; crystal. Gold. Inkstand. Large jar. Mirror. Morning. Night. Ildpon. Awericano (Sp.); Toga Americo. {Boten (Sp., botella). UgaliL Aroo. Darnit. Arao-6rao. 80101) (English equivalent, 3 quarts Ginto' (said to be froin dialectical Chinese, kin, ''golId," and tdh, 'of,' i. e., 'golden;'' Malay, amas; native gold, balitok). Tintero (Sp.) Topdyan. 8ahuioon (Malay, chadrmin). Ago. Gab-i. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 31 Priest. Ring. Silver. Son or daughter (child). Spaniard. P'are' (Sp., poadre). Singsing (Malay, chinchin). Piiak (Malay, perak, also place name). Anak. Espailol (Sp.); Taga Qastila (from Castilla, Castile). Stone. Bat6. Tagalog. Tagdlog. Town. Bayan. Well (noun). Bal-6n. Sex is distinguished by the addition of the words lalaki, " male, " or bab 66ye, "female,"I with the appropriate "tie" (g, ng, or na). Ex.: My sister (Ang aking kapatid na babdye-lit., The my female brother); my son (any aking an-ak na lalak-i). A few words indicate sex in themselves, but they are very limited in number compared with those in Aryan languages. VOCABULARY. Aunt. Father. Girl, unmarried woman. Male; man. Female; woman. Miss; young lady. Mother. Uncle. Young man; bachelor; youth. Young man, unmarried. Dalaga. Lalaki. IT sed also as adjectives. Babalye. f Binibivni. Inid. Anialin. { Maia. Principally heard in Manila. Binahtd (fromi batc~I, boy, child). Bagongtalto (lit., "new man"1). THE "TI ES."7 The Tagalog ear dislikes the sequence of certain sounds, and for this reason three ties, itg," ' ng," and "noi," are miuch used, more especially when an adjective is prefixed to a noun or a noun in the genitive modifies another in the nomninative. The tie "q" is added to such an adjective or nominative if ending in gin," the genitive following the nominative modified. The adjective may precede the noun, as in. English, or follow it, as is generally the case in Spanish. The tie is added to the noun in the latter case, if it ends in " n." Ex.: (1) Wisdom (karunurfi-gn); great (dakild); great wisdom. (k-arunuzi~jang dakild'). (2) Silver (plilk); mirror (salarnin); silver mirror (salanvini-g puc'1k-). The tie "miq " is added to words ending in a vowvel not preceded by another vowel. U, as in taduo, is considered as a consonant, as it sounds nearly like the English " w," and is written wimth this letter by m~any natives. Ex.: A dutiful child (Batang m~aba4t); a bottle of wine (isang boteng dick); a beautiful woman (babdlyeng magaridd); a MNanila man (isang taluong The tie " na " is used when the first word ends in any consonant (except "n") or in a diphthong. Ex.: A dutiful child (Mc1batt na, batd); a large house (bdhay na malaki); clear water (td'big na, mahinao, or malinao na tdlbig). NO IND)EFINITE ARTICLE. There is no special indefinite article (a or an) in Tagalog, although the numeral isd (one) may be used. 32 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. THE VERB '' TO BE., The English verb "to be" may be sometimes represented in Tagalog by the particle ay, changing to 'y for euphony after a preceding vowel. Ex.: is your horse white? U',ng cabayo mo'y mnapulti?) The bird is singing (Ang ibon ay hungrnithun-i). Generally in questions the verb "to be" is understood, as: ZAAn6 acog Sabi mo?9 (What did you say?-lit., What the said your?). The verb is understood also when a predicate adjective is used; as, My father is good (Mabuti ang dk-ing ama'). -A? also connects two clauses of equal force; as, If John comes, go away (Kursn dnarnting Si Juan, ay urnaish ka). FUTURE AND PAST OF "iAY." The particle ay is invariable as to tense, the idea of past or future being expressed by the answer or aa adverb of time. Ex.: Beautiful then, she is is ugly now (Mia gandal siya' no~rn, 'sTgayon ay pa'77git). You will be sick to-morrow (Bd'kas ikalo ay masakit). Some Tagalog writers use ai ia place of ay, especially in newspaper work. THE CONJUNCTION "9AND."y At, changing to 't, under the same circumstances in which cy changes to 'y, represents thieconjunctioan"and~." It may also stand for "because" in compound sentences when a cause is expressed; as, I can not read, because I have no spectacles (Ilindi' ack6 makababasa sa pagka 't wald akong salarnnrn). When ay and at are followed by a monosyllable, as sa., the vowel is not dropped. SECTION-, Two. The principal interrogative pronfouns5 anti adlverbs are as follows: What? iAn6?f When? iKailain? Who? i~ino.? How? 1,Pap a- an6?f Which? iAlin? How mutch (value)? iglagkano.?~ Where? iSaadn? I low many?' 4lan? Ano6, ''what,'' is declined as follows: SINGULAR. PLURAL. Norn. What? A no'? No change. G-re n. Of what? 1,84 cno? iNang ans6.? No change. Dat. To, for what? — 8a an6? No change. Acc. What? iSa ano6? i-Nng ano6? No change. Abl. (Loc. ) In, at what? lSa ano6? No change. Abl. (Ins.) By, with what? i Ncn g acrs6?' No change. This pronoun is used only in speaking of things, never of persons. The expression iAn6 ka.? means " What (10 you want?" i~ino?, "who," is (leclined as follows: SINGULAR. PLURAL. Nom. Who? iSino? iS'ino-sino? Geti. Whose, of whom. iKanino? i.Nino?a iKanikanino?_ b Other cases. 1,~a kanino? iSd kanikanino? a Used only when the question is not heard or understood. b Not kanino-kanino, as the first form is a trisyllable, and in Tagalog repetitions stop at at the second syllable (or letter, as the case may be). Kalninonsg mnaiijgd and sa kaninong are also used. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 33 Example: -~Kaninoiig bldkid iyain? (Whose field is that?); M-( copitan (Of the inayor or presidente); iNino! (Whose?); A8a caJpitdn sa ba? (in (Of the mayor of the town). From. early times the title of the mayor of a town or "pueblo" was "4gobernadorcillo" (little governor). This name was changed in 1893 to " tcapitain municipal, " and in 1898 to " presidente, " a named retained under American administration. Natives ignorant of Spanish generally speak of the " capita"'n." While ao6 is used for things and sio for persons, the pronoun alln, ''9which," is used for both. it is (leclinedl: ISINGULAR. PLURAL. Nom. Which? i~Albln? i~llin-alin? OGen. Of which? &olin? iNang alin? iSa atin-oiin? Dat. To, for what? iSa olint? iSo aolin-alin? Acc. What? iSa aliti? i~ang alin? iSa aolin-alin? Loc. In, at which? iSa olln? iSa oli'n -ol Iin? Ins. By, with, etc., which? il~ong olin? gAlang olin-olin? Soawith the genitiv~eis preferable in answering aquestion. iAling maos-gad may also be used for the plural. The formn i.Vafi-ga alin? is rather inelegant. Thus the English " Which men? " may be expressed by " iAlinaling taduo?" "iAlin mafrTga taiao?" or "i,1or7Jga oling taluo?" THE INTERROGATIVE AD)VERBS. These adverbs present no peculiarities and are used as in English.? Ilorn? (How many?) obviates the use of the pluralizing particle mafgd; as, illong taiuo? (How many men?) In inquiring the price of an article in the market the restrictive forami aogkakano is generally used; as, "iffagkakono ang rnar7i-ga itlog?" (How much for eggs?) But in speaking of purchasing the entire quantity rnogkano is right. THE DEM~ONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. These are four in Tagalog, two being translated by "this," another by "that,"I and the fourth by the poetic form "yon." The first is yari, and means " this." Strictly speaking, it should be used only to indicate an object nearer to the speaker than to the person addressed, but practically this pronoun is dropping out of use. For example, Yca-ing diking pd'so (This heart of mine), while more exact, is little heard, the following word ito6 (this) being used: itong &king pd'so. Yeri is a dialectical form. Yari is declined as follows: SINGULAR. PLURAL. Nomn. This. Ya ri. These. Yaring, maoiigd. Gen. Of this. Niri; dini so. Of these. Niring maigad. Dat. To, for this. Dini so. To, for these. Thni so momfgd. Acc. This. Niri; dini so. These. N~iring mafrtga, etc. Loc. At, in this. Dint so. At, in these. Thai so mafi'gd.. Ins. By, with this. Niri. By, with these. N~iring maorTga. The ordinary wordl meaning " this " is ito6, and strictly denotes objects or persons equidistant from. both speaker and the person spoken to. It is declined as follows: SINGULAR. PLURAL.. Nom. This. it 6. These. Itong ma rtgd. Gen. Of this. Nit6; ditM sa. Of these. Nitong mafiiq4, etc. Dat. To, for this. Dito so. To, for these. Dito so mani7ga. 6855-06 ---3 34 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Acc. This. Dito sa. These. Dito sa mai~gd. Loc. At, in this. Dito sa. At, in these. Dito sa m?na7gd. Ins. By, with this. Ni t60. By, with these. Nitong mnaiigd. "That" is expressed in Tagalog by the word iyain, especially when applied to persons or objects nearer to the person spoken to than to the speaker. It is declined as follows: SINGULAR. PLUTRAL. Norn. That. IAdn Those. Jyang?Paii-gd. Gen. Of that. Niydn; diydn sat. Of those. Ni yang niar74ga, etc. Dat. To, for that. Diy6.n sa. To,7 for those. ]Xyadn sa otanga'. Acc. That. Niyaln; diydn sa. Those. NViyangmra0Tga, etc. Loc. At, in that. Niyain sa. At, in those. Niyaln sa angaig. Ins. By,with that. Niyaln. By, with those. N-yolag marnga. The fourth demonstrative pronoun, yao'n, means "yon," although at present generally translated " that.' Yo0n, is a dialectical form. It is declined: SINGULAR. PLURA L. Noni. You (that). Ya on. Yon (those) IYa 6) g, rna;7fj a'. Gen. Of yon. Niy~ao'i d6on sa. Of yon. Niya6ng marga', etc. Dat. To, for yon. M)on sa. To, for yon. DMon sa miar7g. Acc. Yon. NiycamJn; d Jon so. You. Niya(ong mnar~i- Loc. At, in yon. DMon sa. At,7 in yon. DMon sa maT'ja. Ins. By, with yon. Niyao'n1. By, with yon. Niyaong iar~g6d. The particle sa follows the pronoun in each case as given, but it, as well as the pluralizing particle nurJ-ga', belongs to the person or object pointed out, and not to the pronoun. These four demonstratives have a peculiar idliomatic use in that they are repeatedl in the nominative after the person or object modified as well1 as preceding the same, in the latter case agreeing in num-rber and case. Examples: This man (Itong tauong ito6), both nominative singular. That boy's clothes (Any damit niywng bcatang iyatn); first, genitive singular; second, nominative singular. That man (has) much money (Mfararning salapi niyang (rniyaong) tdluong yao'n); lit., " much money of that man that." (Generally with nominative.) Jtong bulakiak na ito'y di yan, sa batang iyamn (This flower is for that child). In the second clause, the first pronoun is in dative and second in nominative. AD)VERBS OF PLACE. From the four (lemonstrative pronouns the following adverbs of place are derived: Here (close to the speaker). Dini. Here. Dito. There (near addressee). Di yan. Yonder (there). DMon. With the particle na prefixed to this class of adverbs, the idea of "am," "is, " " are " is expressed. It will be noted that the initial letter d is softened to r where the particle na is used alone. Am, is or are here (close). Narini; nayeri; nandini. Am, is or are here (more distant). Narito; rmait6'; nandito. Am, is or are there. Nariydn; naiydn; nandiyadn. Am, is or are yonder. Naroo'n; naya6n; nandoo'n. The particle di' with the same class of adverbs expresses the past tense. For euphony the particle changes to do with doo'n. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 35 Was or were here (close). Dirini. Was or were here (more distant). Dirito. Was or were there. Di'iiyan. Vas or were yonder. Dor(0on. The particle pa with the same adverbs expresses the future. Will be here (close). Parini. Will be here (more distant). Parito. Will be there. Pariyan. Will be yonder. Par6on. Ex. Is the man there? (Nariydn bagd ang tduo?) He is not here, he is yonder ( TWald rito, naroon). Where is Captain Tino (Faustino)? (iSadn 'naroon [or naando6n] Si Capitdn Tino?) In Manila (Nasa Maynild). When will he come back? (gKailan babalik?) Possibly within a week ( (Marahil sa isang ling6). Who is his agent? (gSino ang kaniyang katiwala?) The Chinaman Ong Laico on Calle Real (Ang insik Ong Laico sa Calle Real). Thank you (Salilmat). THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. The personal pronouns in Tagalog should receive careful study, as they exhibit several peculiarities of form and use not found in English. All personal pronouns have two genitives, the first form being prefixed to the accomnpanying noun or verb, and the second form suffixed. The two forms are not used in the same clause, the second form being preferred with the definite form of the verb. However, if the sentence commences with an adverb or negative particle, or is a question, the suffixed forms are placed before the verb. The first person plural, like nearly all Malayan and Melanesian languages, has two forms, the first corresponding to "we" in a general sense, and including those spoken to, while the second form, like the editorial " we," excludes the person or persons addressed. There are also two dual forms, which may be translated "thou and I." These dual forms have the same meaning, the first form, kitd, being more general and used in Manila, Rizal, Laguna, Batangas, and Tayabas, while the second form, katta, is found in Bulacan, Nueva Ecija, and the Tagalog-speaking parts of Pampanga and Tarlac. Bataan probably follows Bulacan in style, while in Cavite the usage is like that of Manila, etc. In the use of the personal pronouns together, a very different order is observed from English. The Tagalog order is "I (we), thou (you), and he, she (they)," ignoring the European custom of mentioning the listener first, the absent or third person next, and the speaker last. The Tagalog says "I and you, "I and John," and with the further peculiarity that he literally pluralizes the first pronoun and gives the pronoun or noun following its genitive form in the correct number. The examples will explain the matter more clearly. The use of the word "it" is avoided by speakers of Tagalog. It is only used when objects are personified, as in stories, etc. See example. FIRST PERSON SINGULAR. Nom. I. Ak6. Gen. Of me; my. Akin (prefix);' ko (suffix). Othercases. To, for, with, by me. Sa cikin. INCLUSIVE FIRST PERSON PLURAL. Nom. We (and you). Tayo. Gen. Of us; our (and your). Atin (prefix); natin (suffix). Othercases. To, for, etc., us (and Sa atin. you). 36 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. EXCLUSIVE FIRST PERSON PLURAL. Nom. We (not you). Gen. Of us; our. Othercases. To, for, etc., us. Kamin. Arini (prefix); namin (suffix). (U annt. FIRST PERSON DUAL. Southern form. Northern form. Nom. We (thou and I). Ki t a. Kaltd. Gen. Of us (we two); our. Kanita'(p.); ta (s.). A ta (p. ); ta (s. ). Other cases. To, for, etc., us (we two). Sa, kanitd. Sa ata'. SECOND PERSON SINGULAR. Nom. Gen. Other cases. Thou (you). Of thee, thy (your). To, for, etc., thee. Jkado (prefix); ka (suffix). Jqi6 (prefix); mo (suffix). A&a iy6'. The singular forlns are still used in Tagalog, and when respect is intended, instead of using the plural, as in English, or the third person singlular, as in Spanish, the particle po6 is suffixed. The plural, also with p6', is used in Manila in many cases, but may be said to be an imitation of the Spanish vosotros (ye).SECOND PERSON PLURAL. Nom. You. Gen. Of you; your. Other cases. To, for, etc., you. Kay6. ]ny6 (prefix); uiny6 (suffix). $a iny6. THIRI) PERSON SINGULAR. Nom. He, she. 'Siyad. Gen. Of him; of her; his; her. Kaniya' (prefix); niydt (suffix). Other cases. To, for, etc., him, her. Ba kaniya'. THIRD PERSON PLURAL. Norn. Gen. Other cases. They. Of them; their. Them (to, for, etc.). Budia. Kanild (prefix); niJ6l (suffix). Ba( kanil'a. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. These are the same as the genitives of the personal pronouns and are generally preceded by the article aug. The following examples will show the variations: My child. Thy child. His (or her) child. Our (of we two) child. Our children (all of us). Our child (excluding person spoken to). Your child. Their child. {Ang dk-ing anak. Ang anak- ko. {Ang iyong anak. Aug anak mio. {Ang kaniyang anak. Ang anak uiya'. {Aug kanitlng anak. Aug atang auak. Ang anak ta. Ang anak ta. {Ang ating nafi~gd anak. Aug maii-gd anak natin. {Ang aming anaL. Aug anak uamnin. {Aug inyorng nuak. Aug anak niny6'. {Aug Lauilang anak. Aug auak uild. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 37 The genitive forms of the personal pronouns used without a following noun are expressed with the article prefixed to the first genitive: Mine. Ang dkin. Thine (yours). Ang iy6. His; hers. Ang kaniyd. Ours. Ang atin (incl.); ang amin (excl). Yours. Ang iny6. Theirs. Ang kanild. The oblique cases with sa and the article also express this idea in Tagalog; as, Mine, Ang sa aikin. Examples of two pronouns, or a pronoun with a noun: He and I (lit. "we of him"). Kami niyd. He and his father (they and his Sild nang kaniyang amd. father). John and I (we of John). Kami ni Juan. You and they (you of them). Kay6 nild. You and we (we of you). Kami niny6. In Manila and large towns these forms are dying out of use, the Spanish style being used; as, John and 1 (Si Juan at ak6). To avoid the use of siyd, "it," to indicate an inanimate object, the word itself is repeated, or in answering a question a particle like nlga (certainly) is used. Ex.: dMabuti bagd any lakatdn [a species of banana]? (Is the lakatan good?) Mabuti fiya (Certainly [it is] good). The third person plural is used to indicate great respect for a person, coupled with p6, and for still greater respect the word kamahalan (excellency) is used. Your excellency (Ang inyong kamahalan). THE AFFIRMATIVE PARTICLES. This name is applied to several adverbs, and also to some words which by themselves have no signification, which, added to pronouns, give them an intensive or indefinite meaning. The following are the ones most generally used. None begin a sentence except kayd. Self; selves. Din. (Rin after preceding vowel.) Perhaps. Bogad. (Generally with indef. verb.) Perhaps; for that. Kayd. (May begin sentence.) Also. Man. Also. Man din. (Southern Tagalog only.) Now. Na. (No meaning alone.) Certainly. Nga. Certainly. gyani. (Southern Tagalog; Bicol, gnani.) Yet. Pa. Actually! Is that so! Pald. (Idea of wonder inherent.) At; in; to; for, etc. Sa. (Greatly used word.) Own. Sarili. Enough now; plenty. Siyd na. Ex.: Ak6rin; ak6 man (I myself). Siyd nga(he, certainly). Iako man (you also). Ang sarili kong cabayo (my own horse). 06 iga (yes, certainly). Iindi nga (no, indeed). The particle man attached to an interrogative pronoun converts the latter into an indefinite pronoun. Ex.: Anoman (anything; something). Alinman (whichever; whatever). Sinoman (whoever). Sinomang tduo (anyone whomsoever). These particles follow the monosyllabic pronouns, but precede the pronouns of more than one syllable, unless the latter begin the sentence, in which case the particle follows, as with a monosyllabic pronoun. 38 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. Besides anoman, alinman, and sinoman, there are several words which may be used at times as indefinite pronouns, and at other times with adverbial force. One of these is bdlang, which can be used for "some, any, and each." Ex.: Bdlang drao (some day). Ang bdlang tduo (any man). Sa bdlang isa (for each one). The numeral isd (one), prefixed to words like drao ((lay), and tduo (man) gives the idea of "one day; a certain man," etc. It is also used with demonstrative pronouns as follows: Itong isd (this one); diydn sa isd (to that other); do6n sa isd (to that other yonder). Isa may be said to mean "other" among a few persons or objects, and the word ihd to designate "other" among Ilany. Ibang tduo (another man completely); ibang bdgay (another thing entirely). Tanan, dlilarn, and paua mean everyone, "all" (persons). "All" (the adjective) is lahat. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. These pronouns, which in English are expressed by "which," "that," "who," etc., are expressed very obscurely in Tagalog by means of the article ang, and the ties g, ng, and na. The Tagalog also has a negative relative pronoun di, translated by "who not," "which not," "that not." Ex.: He who is well behaved is esteemed by all. Ang nmabuting dsal ay minamrahal nang lahat. The book which you are reading is mine. Alng librong binabasa mo'y dkin. I did not receive the letter that you sent Di ko tinangap ang sdlat na ipito me. nadald mo sa dkin. The man who does not disobey the laws Ang tdazong dci,usmaasalansang will be protected in his rights. ipagtatangol nang katuiran. The phrase "each other" is expressed by the particle nagka or magka, together with the appropriate noun or pronoun. Ex.: Do they understand each other? gNagkakkaalam sila (from alam)?. The principal difficulty the student of Tagalog will experience here will be in the use of the exclusive and inclusive forms of the first person plural. The dual forms are little used in the nominative, but are quite frequently heard in the oblique and accusative cases. As has been renarked, these exclusive and inclusive forms are to be found in nearly all the Malayan languages, while in some of the allied M[elanesian tongues, such as that of Fiji, the second and third persons have not only a dual, but a triple form, in addition to the ordinary plural. The Fijian first person has also the dual and triple forms, each of which are divided into an inclusive and exclusive form. SECTION THREE. As has been previously explained, Tagalog root words may be used as nouns, verbs, adjectives, and adverbs in many cases, either by the context or particles affixed or suffixed. Naturally the noun is generally the simplest forn, especially the concrete noun, but secondary or derivative nouns may be quite complicated in their construction. The noun is invariable in form, number being expressed by the word marnqd, or such words as "all," "many," etc., for the plural. Cases are expressed by the article or prepositions, and no gender is known. A great many common nouns in Tagalog are derived from the Spanish, a few from Chinese, and some from Arabic and Sanskrit sources. All Tagalog nouns may be used with the article. The words for meals and some articles of food, cooking utensils, etc., vegetables, and fruits not previously mentioned are: TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 39 Breakfast. Midday meal. Afternoon lunch. Supper. Meat or fish. Broth. Salted fish sauce. Salty or sour sauce. Pickles (bamboo sprouts, etc.). Roasted or baked meat or fish (what baked or roasted). Frogs' legs. Sucking pig. Venison. Wild pork. The jungle fowl. The duck. The tree duck (Dendrocygna). The goose. The peacock. The turkey. The pigeon. The dove. The gizzard. The liver. The heart.. The mudfish; walking fish. A-ng almusal (Sp., almuerzo). Anytanyhalian (tanghall, midday). Any miinindal (Sp., merienda). Any lhapunan (hapon, afternoon). Any ulain (Sp., vianda). Ang.Rabalo. Any patis. Any sausauan. (Sanwausmtv iieans to dip any viand into liqtfid. The word "chowchow," so often heard, is Cantonese or Hongkong "pigeon E~nglish " for food.) Any achiara, (Sp., achia, from Hindustani, achdir, pickles). A nq inihao. (UmTiihao means "to roast or bake ".) Any m~aiiyl hita nany palak('1. La'nin nany b'iik. Laindn nany usd. Laimndn nany babuy damo6; laniain nany payil. Any labuyo. Any Rik. Pap~an. Any yansd (Sansk., hafiisa, not from Sp. yanisa, a goose). Any pario reul (Sp.). Any paro (Sp.). Any kalapuiti (Sansk. pardpdti; old Tag., p.a1(tpati). Any botobato' muntit. Any baloaibalonan (from baton, a well; dimi.). ilny atay. A ny p aso. Anq datay (commonest fish in Luzon; O)phiocephalus). The following fish are much eaten in Luzon, and, having no English names, the Spanish names are given instead: The painpano (Scatophayus). Any kitany (best fish in Luzon). The sa'balo (Caranx). Any basfi6s (large fish, common). The corvina (Osteochilus). Any apdhap. The liza. Any ba'nak. The boca-dulce. Any mnantali. The sea products eaten are: The oyster. The shell of a clam, etc. The lobster. The crab. The small crab. The shrimp. Vegetables. The mongo. The radish. The eggplant. Any talaba'. Any kabibi. (MVacabebe is said to mean "Where there are clams," Pampangan dialect.) Anygniany. Any alimaitygo. Any alimasay. Any hipon. (Bilarany-hipon, village, northeast of Manila, "shrimpdrying place.") Any gtlilay. Any baltony. Any laban6s (Sp., rabano). Any talony. 40 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. The gabe root. Ang yabi. The peanut. Any mant, Arawak (West Indian) word. The loinboy (fruit). Any dt~hat. The guayava. Ang bayabas. The lime. Any daYyop. The apple. Anygmansanas (Sp., rnanzana). The watermelon. Any pakuain. The cook. A ny taga paTyosina. The kitchen (cooking place). Ang pinaylulutoan (from luto', cooking). Crumbs; scraps. Munio. The dining room. Any silid nas kakanain. The fireplace. Any kWa/n; any dapog. Earthen cooking pot (medium size). A ny pa/layok. Small earthen pot. A ny any/it. Large earthen pot. Any katiny-an. The frying pan. Any kawali. The gridiron (broiler). Any ihaman, (from umihao, to roast).. The pitcher. Ang bai~Tia; any yalong. Earthen pitcher. Anyq tcibu.. The bowl. Any mankok. T he jutg. Any saro (Sp., jarro). The saltcellar. ~ ~Ang Jpa/aasinan (fromn asin, salt). The saltcellar. ~~~Any s;ouik- (without cover). The pot cover. A4ny tanon. The sieve. Anq bit/tag. The bamboo tray. Any bi/tio. The basket. Any badko/. The fire. A ny apay.Y The smoke. Any aswl (accent distinguishes from aso, d og). The firewood. Any MiA og nciy pai;y(atony. The names for parts of a house, household furniture andl articles, and ordinary tools, are given in t~he following list. Many of these names are borrowed from the Spanish language: The house. The roomn. The bathroom. The water-closet. The door. The doorway. The window. The ladder (stairway). The step (round of ladder). The balcony. The post or pillar. The kitchen platform. The roof. The gable. The gutter pipe. The corner. The window sill. The balustrade. Any bA~hag (possibly Sansk., valaga, an inclosuire, through Malay, btilei, hall, court; buit the Ilawaiian is idale, andl there are similar words in other Polynesian dialects). Anyi s~ilid. Any paliytuan. (lit., " bathing place"). Any otui~a (Sp. word). Anygpinto'. Arty pdottiu. Any linib; any dtiruit(jaana (front dufi~gyo, to appear at the windlow); any bintana (Sp.). Any haydinp. Any baitaoy. Any tana'tatn (lit., ''watchtower''). Any ha/igyi. Ang /,afi/dn. Any ha/a~ny. Ang ba/isbisan. Any (do/od. Any siui/ok Any pa/aba bahain. Anygqugabatin. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 41 The prop (against winds). The partition (wall). The household furniture. The chair. The table. The clothes press (or cupboard). The bied. The quilt. The pillow. The head (of a bed). The mosquito net. The wash basin. The water. The soap. The towel. The tooth. brush (foreign). The tooth brush (native). The clothes brush. The pail or lbucket. The night vessel. The trunk. The valise. The key. The padlock. The lock. Thread. The needle. The pin. Silk thread. The scissors. The thim-tble. The eyeglasses or spectacles. The picture; image. The household shrine. Wick for cocoanut-oil lamp. Cocoanut-oil lamp. The lamp (old name). Matches. Fire-mnaking sticks. The flint. The steel. The tinder. Rice mill (hand). The rice mortar. The rice pestle. The small mortar. The small pestle. The broomn. The mop (cloths). The razor. Aug suhay. Ang dinydoig. A ny kasankapan Ra bdhay. Any uupdtn (from tnmup6l, to sit down). Aug lam7esa (Sp., mnesa). Auig simpanan. A ug p6pag; ang cama (Sp.). Aug k6uiot. Ang Punan. Aug olohain; aug olondn. Ang kalamb6;. Any hilaiusan. Any tdbig. Aug 8(1n6T (Sp., jabo'n). Ally balindang. Aug cepillo nang?Tgipin (cepillo, Sp. for " brush") Ang sipan. Any (epillo nang damit. Ang timb64. Anyg ihiadn; ang orinolo. (Sp.). Any cabain. Any tainpipi; any takh6. Any susi (Chinese, sosi). Any candado (Sp. word). Any cerradura (Sp. word). Sintilidi (spun, from su'lid, spin). Any kard'yom. Any aspiler (Sp., alfiler). Sinu'lid na sutlct (Sansk., s~tra). Any yantiny. Any dedal (Sp. wordl). Any solamnin sanmatd. Any larauaim. Any altar sa badhay. Auy tinsimi (from Chinese tientsim). Any tirnyloy (from Chinese ). Any somuibo; auy simibo (i'aodin now used). Apuyan; posporos (Sp., f6sforos). Any puyosanl (similar to those of North American Indians). Any pinykian; any pantinygan (local). Any binalon. Any hiiloy. Any yilimiyadn (from giling, to grind). Any lusony (said to be origin of " Luzon, " but improbable). Any halo. Any lusonglusofigyan. Any kamay (lit., "the hand" or ''arin''). Any wail'S (verb walis means "to remove"y). Any paii-yosk-os. Any parTijgiht (froma 'hit, to shave; also called any labaso, from Sp. navajo, razor). Any prinsa (Sp., la prensa, the press). The sadiron (flatiron). 42 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. The tongs. The balance. The hook. The clothesline. The tablecloth. The gaff (used in cock fighting). The bird whistle. The rope. The twine. Chinese twine. The wire. The chain (iron or gold, etc.). Yard (of house). Garden. Plant (any sown plant except rice). The hoe. The sickle. The shovel. The spade. The pincers (small). The vise. The wrench. The saw. The hammer. The hatchet. The ax. The plane. The chisel. The auger. The gimlet. The file. The wood turner. The anvil. The stake. The pulley. The lever. The adze. The rule. The pick. The painter's or carpenter's scaffold. The plow. The beam. The plowshare. The guiding cord. The yoke. The rice field. Ang 8pit. Ang timbari-gan (from timbang, a weight); also aug talar6 (local word)..Aug pangalauit. Aug sanipmana (from sampay, to hang out clothes). Aug mantel (Sp. word). Auiig tadri. Ang paiigati (used to lure or decoy birds). Aug ir'bid. Aung pisi. Leteng. Ang kauad; aug kauar (rare). Ang tanikalad (old word, talikaiad). Bahayan (lit., "house place"). Il1alamanan (lit., " plant place"). ilalaman. Aug asarol. Al'ng kWrit. Aug panalok (from salok, to stir up). Aug p~ala (Sp. word). Any ftian (Chinese word). Ang gato (Sp. word). A rig paminiht nang torruillo (lit.,' "screw turner"). Ang lagari. Aug paino'kpok (from pokpok, to strike). Ang pnutlao. Ang palakol. Aug katam. Aug pait. Ang panqbutas. Aug pusod. Ang kikil. Ang lalikain. Aug palihan. Aug ftuls. Ang kal6'. Aug panghik-uat. Aug dara's. A ng panu'kat (from su'tkat, to measure).Aug piko (Sp., pico). Aug Ipalalala. {Ang arao) (Sp., arado). Au4g sudsod. Aug ugit. Aug sdyud (also means "fine comb"). Aug pamitik (from pitik, to snap with a line). Aug pao'd. Aug palaydu. Practically all names connected with horses are Spanish, as that animal was introduced by the Spaniards, andl the Spanish terms are understood throughout the Tagalog region. The following words, however, are useful in connection with feeding animals: TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 43 Forage; grass. Sacate; dam6o (Sp., zacate). Rice and rice straw. Palay,. Molasses (also honey). Pulot (much fed to native ponies). Shed; shelter. Tay/akad. Stable with lpeaked roof. Barongbarwig. Nearly all names of edifices are also Spanish, but a few are native, or have been invented from other wards. Among thenm are: The church. Anyg sbimbahan (from siiinba, to hear mass; samftba,, to adore or worship). The townball. Any tribunal (Sp). word). Anyi e.sciela (Six. wordl). The schoolhouse.j Balhay nang aralain (from 61ral, to teach; to learn). The warehouse. Anyl k-atn161ii The rice mill (water or steam Any bigaisan (from biga's, hulled rice). power). The sugar mill. Anyg alilisan. The distillery. Anyg alakain (from alak:, wine). The limnekiln. Any apugan. (fromt djnmy, lime). The hut. Ang dampa; any kubu.; anyg sauony (miountain term). The cemetery. Any camipo santo (,Sp.); any libifi~an (Tagalog word also means 4Igrave "). The cockpit. Any sabitit'an (fromt sabuny, to fight with gamecocks.) The street. Any lanysanganu. The road. Any ddan. The trail or path. Any ladna's; agta's (narrow trail). Trail (of animal). Bolaos; onog; bnynos. The dyke. A ny pilaipil. The plantation. Anyg bukiradn; any hacienda (Sp.). Irrigated land. Tubiyan (from ttfbey, water). The bridige. Any tulny. The bamboo bridge. ulnig ttdaay na k-atvaan. The sugar-cane field. Any tabohain (from tubo6, sugar cane). The field; the country. Any bl'tk-id. The ditch. A ny p~ada lnyan. The jail or prison. Anygbilai~quan. (Biltibidisthe Manila prison only.) The guardhouse or sentry box. Any bantayan (from bantay, guard). The asylum. A ny tatayualn. The stocks. Any pairydo. The fire (conflagration). Any s4nog. The spark. Any alipato. The bonfire (signal fire). Any siga'. The cocoanut grove. Any nio'gan. The corral or inclosure. Any karurukan. The maniger. Any labai-igadn. The floor. A ny sahiy. Words pertaining to the office are generally Spanish, although a few are used of native origin. The most useful are: Office. Opisina (Sp., oft mna). Desk (writing). Sulatin; escritorio (Sp.). Book. Libro (Sp. ). Library. Biblioteca (Sp.). Letter. Sfllnt (from Arabic s'uraf, a chapter of the Koran). Pen. Pantilat; plurnn (Sp.). 44 44 ~~TAGALOG LANGUAGE. P~encil. Ink. Red Ink. Mail. Post-office. Letter carrier. Telegraph office. Telegramn. Messenger (orderly). Typewriter. Paper (in general). Blotting sand (fine). Blotting paper. The globe (world). The earth (ground). The mountain. Mountain country. The precipice. The hill. The crack; crevice. The, cave. The wilderness. The hole. The prairie; pasture, meadow. The forest; timber. The bush; the brush. The bamboo thicket. The reedy ground. The rocky Illace (quarry). The thorn bush. The mudd(y country. The spring. The stream; brook. The river. Source of river. The bank. Bank of river or seashore. The pool. The pond. The swamp; slough. The ravine or gulch. Tidewater creek. Deep (unfordable) river. The (1e1th. The shallowness (of river) The ferry. The ferryboat or raft. The bend (of river). Hole (in river). The waterfall. a The whirlpool. The bottom (of river). Muddy bottomned. Lapi~s; lapiz (Sp.). T7inta (Sp.).Tirdtang puld'. {Padalalhan (from dala, to carry). C'orreo (Sp.). Adininistraci6n de correos (Sp.). Axlagdadah't van gs,6ta; carlero (Sp. ). Estaci6n de te1e'grafos~ (Sp.). Telegraina (81p.). Sugo; Ordenauza (Sp.). Maquiva (le escribir (Sp.). Papel (Spanish heavy paper, papel de barba). 311argalia (Sp., com-mon sand is buha fijin, Tag. ). Papel secante (Sp.). Ang sansinukuban; sandaigdigan. Avg lupa. Avg bitriok. A ng kabunduk-an. Ang barT{4u'7. Ang burol; gulod. Ang bitak. Avg luvnga; ang yufi-gib. Avg dlang. Avq biitas. Avg p6trang. Ang gt'ebat. An!! daoouhan. Avg kawayandmn. Avg katalabahaln. Avg batohaon. Avg lkatinikav. Avng kaputlkan (from vI)Utik-, mud). Avg bukal yang ttibig. An!; batts. Anig Vog. Ang liol6. Ang! pavgpanig. Avg dal(II.aompsig. Avg danao (danurn, water in Pam.pago Ilocano, etc.). Avng sailog (sailog, river in Bicol). Avg iati; avg lab6n (Malabo'n, swampy place). AIn1j i/at1. Sapa (Sp., estero). Dog va, iveldlim. Avng k-alalimnan. Aungvmababao na Rlog (also "ford"). Avg ta~v.'ran. Avg tlabao. ling lhk6 (also "curve"). Lunga' (also " cave") Avg tat6v. yang tm'big. Ang u/luhi; avg ipuipu; avg alimpuy6'. Avg ila/llmi slang Rog. Avg 71aiim nang ilog na pnttikani. aThe most famous Tagalog region waterfall is that of Botokan, near Majayjay, La Laguna Province. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 45 Gravelly or rocky bottom. Sandy lbottomed. Steel) bank. Low bank. The landing place. The current. Strong cutrrent. Weak current. Very weak current. Place where there is a strong current. The mouth (of a river). Anyigibilimn -nng Vog 7a( bat olindn. Anyii ihilin rming 'tog na bulinainTinon. J'angpaiig 81(, viat(trik. J)angp(mg fl( ~naboibI. A.imy dalmil1)ip siganf. Anyi agos. Maagqos. 3M-lhinang( (1908. 3ratining a908. A gusa n. Any wt(uaw (also ''bar.'','aS1) aOU means ' mouth '' also; Bicol '' 8abang"). Tagalog is richi in nautical terms,,, the p~rincipal ones being as foillows: The high sea; ocean. Ang liot (Malay, lout). The sea (in general). Ang ddgat. Lake (large). Dagalan. Lakelet. Dagatdagatan. Everything in the sea. 8Sandaglatan. The seas themselves. Karogodan. (singular in Tagalog). D. to Ri. Warm water. Malara got. D). to R. Salt water. Ttlbiy no lal-t. Fresh water. Tsi big no tabang. The coast (sea or lake). AIny baybay. The reef. Auig bankota. The sunken rock. Any ba16 sa daigat. The port; anchorage; landing lplace. Any doo'r7i-an (also dalampnasigan). The bar. Any wlawa (also " mouth of a river"). The channel. Any canal (Sp. word). The light-house. Any parol (from Sp., faro') The ealpe; 1)oint. Ang Lofi-1os; any Tanguay is Cavite Point. only). The island. Any pulo. The gulf. Any) ivald'. The bay. A ny look. The wave. Any alon. The tide. Any alayouak (rare); any marea (Sp. word). High tide. Any laki. Ebb tide. A ny kati. The strait. Any kitid. The principal terms for the heavenly bodies, (divisions of time, points of the compass, and meteorological phenomena are as follows: The sun; the day. The moon; the month. The year. One year. Every year. Each year. Monthly. New moon. Full moon. Old moon. Any aorao. (Ba yan is a rare word for "day." Ex.: maaidlim any bayan, midday or a great day.) Any budin. Any tao'n. fSangtao'n. Taonta6n. Manao'n; marnana6n. Buangb-uan. Bayony budin. {Kabilugan, nany buin. Pababany buain (rare). {Kamatayan nany budn. ~Bugtong (rare). 46 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Time. A ng airao. The star. Any bituin. Venus; the evening star. Tm7!-;lao dagait (lit., "light of the sea" I). The Pleiades; the seven stars. Mapojlon. The morning star. Any tala. The shooting star. Any bulalakao. The comnet. Any bituin may buntot. The sky. Any lar7igit. The break of day. Ang liwayway. The (lawn. Ang madaliny airao. The morning. Any urnaga; aga. MNidlday. Ang taniTghali (Malay, td'Ingah-arri) Afternoon (evening). Any l1apon. Night. Ang gabi. The daylight; sunlight. Any sinag nany drao. Moonlight. Ang sinag vany Wain. To-mnorrow. BT-dkas. Yesterday. Kahapon. Day before yesterday. Kamaakalaua'. A few dlays ago. Kmatwilakan. After a w bile. M3Iwnai~-may~a. (Three) (lays ago. KamalkatatlO. (Ten) days ago. Kamv-ak-apo'o. (Kamaka expresses (lays ago." One week. Isurty lingo (corruption of Sp., Doinongo, Sunday). Every week, weekly (adv.). Lingol-inyo. The names of the dlays are Spanish, Sunday being called Linyo, corrupted from Domingo. Lingo is also used for "week." The word "minute" is also taken from Spanish, and the word for hour is a corruption of the Spanish word hora. The names of the months,, (lays, and other divisions of time from Spanish are given below for convenience of the student. January. En er o. February. Flebrero. March. Ma4rzo. April. Abril. May. Mayo. June. Junio. July. Julio. August. Ayosto. September. Septiembre. October. Octubre. November. Noriembre. December. Diciembre. The month of January. Any bunny enero. Sunday. Lingo (from Sp., dominyo). Monday. Lunes. Tuesday. Mart es. Wednesday. Mie'coles. Thursday..Juezes. Friday. Viernes. Saturday. 86bado. The beginning. Any mula'. The middle. Any p~ayitan. The end. Any Ikatapusan; any han/tn. The hour. Any oras (from Sp., hora). Watch; clock. Orasadn. Half hour. Kalahatiny oras. Minute. Minuto. (Sp. word). TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 47 Second. The dry season. The wet season. The daylight. The darkness. The north. The east. The south. The west. a The northeast wind. Wind or air. The weather. Seasonableness. The heat. The cold. The earthquake. The dew. The earth smiell. The mist or fog. The cloud. The rain. The drizzle. A hard shower. The inundation (flood). The rainbow. The lightning flash. The thunderbolt. The thunder. The storm. The hurricane; typhoon. The cyclone; tornado. The tempest. The whirlwind. The ice. The hail. Heavy rain cloud. The snow. Segundo (Sp. word). sn Aug tagadrao (from drao,su) Ang Iagultin (from uldn, rain). Ang kaliu'anagan (from. liwanag, light; Ilocano, Laoag, capital of Ilocos Norte), noun. {Aug kadilii6.n (from ddimii, dark), noun.,Aug karilinmhin. (D. to R.) Ang hilaga (also "the north wind"). Anq silafiganlan (lit., "rising place," sun, etc.). Ang 1habd gat (also "the south wind"). Aug kaluuiuran (from lunod, drown). Aug a?nihan. Aug har7>ui. Auig panah~n. Kapanahonan; also?nushi. (Kapunahionan also means "opportunity, " in some cases.) Aug init. Heat (abstract), Kainitan. Aung lam ig. Cold (abstract), kalamigan. Auig liudol. Aug hamog. Aug alimoorn. (Smell of earth after rain.) Auig U'lap. Ang alapadp. Rare words are lauauga, a little rain; lawalawa, a drizzle; auuta, Aug uldn. moderate steady rain; Aug ambain. tikatik, gentle, continuous rain, and lourak-, a rain with great drops. Isang bugs6 nang uldn. Aug baluab. Aug bahaghari (lit., "the king's sash'' "). Aug kidlat. Aug lintik. Aug kulog. Aug onu'8. Aug bagy6'. Aug bohaui. Aug.sigwd. Aug ipoipo. Aug hielo (Sp. word. Also tubig na bat6' malamig or "cold-stone water." ) Aug grauizo (Sp. word; rare in Philippines). Aug go6t (rare). Aug uieve (Sp. word; known from books only). a As the Tagalogs were originally sea rovers, the heavenly bodies sunk in the sea to them, so they say, the " drowning place" for the west. 48 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Navigation was considerably developed by the Tagalogs prior to the arrival of thle Spaniards, and a considerable maritime vocabulary developed. The words in ordinary use are: The vessel. Aug sasakydn. The sail. A'ny ldyay. The art of sailing navigation. Any poaglalciyag. Anyone aboard. Any sakay (formerly " oarsm-an, "paddler"). Sailor; mariner. Tagaragat (lit., "sea dweller"). Pilot. Malim (Arabic); prdctico (Sp.). The rudder. Any ugit. The (compass. AZng brmijula (Sp.). The mast. Any paio (Sp. word); ang sundony (rare). The yard. Ang batafigan (Batangas Province). The outrigger. Any katig. The bow. Any (loo'ng. Thle stern. Any huli nany sosakqdn. The boat pole. Any tikin. 1 The paddle. Any sauwdn. The paddler. Any wiatanaywdvan (S. to N.); (Fil. Sp., bin quero). The oar. A ny gaod. The oarsman; rower. Any mai77jagaiod. Paddling. Any paymygwdn. Rowing. Any ])ag-yaod. Sculling. A ay payliuliu (Chinese word, liu). The cover (of boat or canoe). Any karany. The canoe. Any bangkd. The prau. Any parao. Political and natural subdivisions are as follows, in so far as they pertain to social relations: The Philippine Islands. Any kapuluan Filipinas. The Yisayan Archipelago. Any kapuluan Bisayd. Thle Tagalog country. Any katayalugan. The Visayan region. Any kabisatydan. The province. Any lalawigan (formerly this word The jurisdiction (of a municipality, township). The court. The town. The town proper. The fellow-townsman. The house. The neighbor. The settlement; hamlet. The barrio (ward). The head man of a barrio. The mayor-; alcalde. The secretary. The treasurer. meant "ancnorage," "ot) Any saikop. Any hiokomnan (from hokoya, a judge; Arabic hakimi, doctor, philosopher, judge). Any bayan (including the rural barrios). Any kabayanan (excluding rural barrios). Anj kababayan. Any badhay. Any kapidba hay. Anygnayon (Sp., sitio). Any bararTgay (old word for vessel). {Any pulo nany bara7Tyay. Any cabeza nang barafiygay (Sp. term). Any presidente; any capitain (Sp.). Any secretario sa bayan; any kalihimt. (Lihim m-eans "a secret." Ang tesorero; any toga isiTyat yarnan (lit., the "wealth guarder"). TAGALOG LANGUAGE. The chief of the town. Anyi smigunia'n bayon (old name for the eivic head of a town). The tipper part (of town, river, A ty iloyla (lower part of same is ong country). 'ibabd). The terms, for metals, rniineral!,, are mainly native, one or two heaving a foreign origin. They are: Gold. (/intel. Silver. Pda-Ik (from J)eraok, Malayan). II-oil. Badkal. Copper. VTat71q60. Steel. Patalim (from ta/bii, an edge.). The loadstone (m-agnet). Atiq bato'bodioi. Leadl. Thifqd (from Sanskrit, firra, tin). Tini. Thinyd~ni (lit., ''white lead") Mlercury. Azogue (Sp.). Gold. an~d copper (alloy). Tumibaqa (fromn boyog, anything red Lime. Ivory. Whetstone. I ILorn. Rust. Tortoise shell. Sulphur. hot; som-e say from Sansk. tdtomra). Apog. GdJrinq (Malay, yad'ing; orig. Sanskrit.). Batony tayisan. SItITgaY Kalaitaig. Kala. '/onyaua (rare); ozufre (Sp.). The ordlinary ternis used. by fishermen are: Fishing. Casual fisher. The fisherman (trade). The fish lpole. The fish line or line. The hook. The bait. The net (sm-all). Theseine; large net. The fish tra~l. Wicker basket for catching fish. The arrow. The bow. The principal lparts of the human animal bodies, are named as follows: The head. The body, the person. The bone. The flesh. The blood. The pulse. The skin. The pore. The skull. The brain. The nerve. The vein. The membrane. The hair (of the head). 6855-06 — 4 Any i at fid (from isdi, a fish). Atng maim irinuit (from, 1inuit, a hook). AIny mai/7,iii-yisdd. Any balivwd son. A ng pisi. Any taydl (large); any bnunit (small). Any painl. Anyg do/a. An fpiikot. Any ba/dad. Any bobo. A4ny p~alaso'; any pana' (Sansk, vdna.) Any busoy. body, together with some terms for Any ulo. Any koatauan (from tado, human ing, person). Any bat6'. Any l(ondn. Anyg (1u6. Anyi sanhi. Anyi balot. A R Any kibot nany balat. Any bumgo6. C' Avny stak. Any litid. Any upat. A iiy laniad. Any buthok. LI be MY WAR OLLEGN. [BP A V. 50 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Hair (pubic). The crown of the head. The temple. The forehead. The eyebrow. The eyelid. The eyelash. The eye. The pupil of the eye. The white of the eye. The tear duct. The nose. The lip. The mouth. The chin. The cheek. The mustache. The beard. The tongue. The ear. The tooth. The molar. The gum. The hard palate. The soft palate. The throat. The larynx. The lower jaw. The stomach. The intestine. The anus. The neck. The nape of the neck. The shoulder. The shoulder blade. The arm. The hand. The palm. The finger. The thumb. The index finger. The middle finger. The ring finger. The little finger. The wrist. The elbow. The nail. The knuckle. The armpit. The breast. The bosom1. The rib. Bulbul. (Body hair or feathers, bfal(hibo). Ang blumbunan. Ang )ilipisain. Ang no6. Ang kilay. Ang bubong nang matt (lit., the roof of the eye). Ang pilikmnatd. Ang matd. Ang balintatao. Aug bilig nangg matd. Ang daloyan nag luhha. Ang ilong. Ang ltbi (probably from Sp., labio, lip). Ang bibig (Malay, bibir, lip). Ag bba (Sp., barba, chin). Ang })isT'1. Ang bigote (Sp.; old word, umisay). Ang barbtas (Sp.; old words, gimi, batag, ya(o7got). Aug? dila. Ang tirl(/t. Ang l/ipin. Ang ba(gang. Aug giUgid. Anig J(/ala~gald. Alg (/ltil. Ang lal(tamuna. A tg gqllung-gulurTg(an (dim. of (/ilung, a wheel). Aig siihag. Aqg x.ikmnnra. Ang btituka. Aug tu1mbong. Ang liig. A ug tutolk. Aig balik(t. Ang (alldgat. Ang nbara.o (from Sp., brazo). Aug kamay (also " arm "). Ang pullad nang kamay. Aung d(liri. Ang hinlalal(ki. Aug hintutur( (from t'tur6, to point to). Ang d(ato (the chief, datto; Malay, datoli, grandfather). Ang ssisolrtag singsing. (from susnut, to put on). Ang ka('liugk'iui l.. Ang gtlangg(daiTaan (from galalr/an, jewelry). Ang siko. Ang tkno. Ang buk6 nang daliri. Ang kililili. Ang dibdib. Avg.S' Sso. Ang tadiang. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 51 The sidle. The hitart. The lung. The back. The spine. The thorax. The abdomen. The waist. The umbilicus. The lap. The liver. The gall b~ladder. The kidney. lime lbladdler. The, w~on-b (uterus). The lplacenta. The vulva. The, lenis. Trhe testicle. The groin. The hip. Thme buttock. The thigh. The leg. The knee. The calf. The shin. The foot. The heel. The ankle. The shinbone; the tibia. The sole of the foot. Some of the ordinary diseases follows: The cholera. The bubonic p)lague. The smallpox. Sickness (illness); pain. The relapse. The fever. The chills. The headache. Blindness. Deaf ness. Lameness. Dumbness. Insanity. Seasickness. The cough. The asthma. The mumnps. The nosebleed. Strangury. Flatulency. Anyg tagidiran. Any jnmao. Any likod. Alny ga(ingod. Aiimg tiain. An big Yw-ang. Any 1)4isod. A.lng kamhdni-gan. Anyi apdo. Anyti bet/6. A iy part/og..An bigilhy bata (lit., ''child house') Any indn'tan. A ny puqui. 4Any titi. A i!! ba~Iag. -in; s'i ITyit. Anyif balakang. A ny pig!1. Any iMiO. Atny binti. Any Mtmhod. Any (dak-alakab). A n y11r lolod. Anyi 1p(al (Sansk., pada).. Any saikong..Any bd'kongbU'kony. Any bias nany bin/i. Any talampak-an. known to the Tagalogs are named as Any co'lera (Sp. word). Any peste bubo'nica (Sp. word). Anyi~ sakit. Any lbifat. Any lagnat (Sp., calentura). Any pcai~qiki. Any sakit nang ulo. Any kabulagdn (from bulaig, a blin(1 person). Any kabb~7gihihn (from b177!;i, a (leaf person). Any kapilaydan (from pday, a lame person). Any kapip)ihan (from p)ipt', a dumb person). Any kaololain (from WV6, an insane person). A ny hilo. Any ub6'. Any MMk. Any bik. Any 1balingoq ynyg~y. A1ng balisdosao. Any k'b'ag. 52 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. The swelling; inflammation. The discoloration; lividity. The cramp. The hiccough. The corn. The wart. The foot-sore (similar to clilblains). The wound or sore. The inflammation of the lymphatic glands. The boil. The pus. The Aleppo button (ulcer). The pimple. The "dhobe itch." Alng lil)ak. Any ktliug'. A4yg sgn(tt. Ang klani. Ang pigs(d. Ang nand. Anyg agihnap. A ng tagallan)Y. Anig galis (Sp., sarna). Articles of clothing have native names, as a whole, but many have also l)een taken fromh other languages. The leadling terms are: The clothing; dress. The style of dressing. The hat. The native helmet. The coat; shirt. The trousers. The shoe. The drawers. The socks. The stockings. The slippers. The skirt. The underskirt. The petticoat string. The apron; overskirt. The ruff; neckerchief. The handkerchief. The ribbon. The mantilla. The comb. The fine comb. The button. The ring. The earring. The rosary (beads). The scapular. The fan. The parasol. The cane; staff. The staff of office. The pipe. The native pipe (of leaves). The coat of mail. The breech-cloth; sash. A21)g d(n it. Ai7n pmnananait (from damit). (I). to N.) Ang somballo (from Sp., sombrero, a hat). A, g salakot. Ang baro.,-ng salalill (from seluar (Aral)ic), trousers). 2Ang sapi (lit., "underfoot"). A ng calzoncdllos (Sp. word). Ang calcethies (Sp. word). Ang medias (Sp. word). Ang sinelas (Sp., clinel(). Ang sayea (Sp., sa8 (). Ag naguas (Sp., c(laglin). An1g jp(igl,' s. A,lg tapi)s. ng (alaml)pay. Ang )(pny6 (Mex. Span., 2pano, l)an(lana). Ang hston (SI). wor(). An1g lambo7g. Ang sukl(ql. Anlg suyod (also "plovwshare" ). Ang bdtones (from SpI., boton, a l)utton). Ang singsing (Malay, chinchin). Ang hikao. Ang cuintds (frolm Sp., cnuenta, a bead of the rosary). Ang ca(lmen (from Carmen, "'Mt. Carmel'"). Ang paypdy. A ng pdyong. Ang tiungkod. Ang bards (from Sp., vara, ardstick). An7g knako. Ang patlupat. Ang baluli. Ang bahlcg. TAG ALOG LANGUAGE. 5 53 The lprinlcipal p~arts of trees, plants, etc., are named as lbelow: The tree. Autg kahlto (also ''wood') The trunk. Agpaino. The root..lIj ngq1at. The bud. Auig buko (also the young cocoanut f ruit). The flower. ing bitlakiak. Thle shoot; sprout. Aug usbong; ang labong. The branch. A ng sai ga'. Lumber; woodl; timber. Kaihoi.Y The leaf. Aug dahoa. The bark. -.uIg upak. The sap. lung gatas. (Gala~s is also ''milk''.) The fruit. Aug bmo7;a (also used for fruit of areca lpalm). The terms for cigar, cigarette, and tobacco are of S,-panish Origin, but the practice of chewing betel nut, rolled with the leaf of the betel and spiced with slaked limie, has given some native terms. The areca nut. The betel. leaf. The lime (inineral). The '' buivo'' or chew. The nutcracker (long), Thle lime stick. Ang buit-ga (fruit Of Areca caleclhu). Aug 'dm6o (leaf of Piper betel). Aug alpoq. Aung NWts. Aug kalikut. A'ng apugan. (Same word for " limekiln." ) The following list of dignities, professions, and trades, etc., gives the principal ternis used by the Tagalog race: Thle LPresident. Thle governor-general. The provincial governor. The judge. The Pope. The archbishop. The bishop. Thle lpriest. The general. The colonel. The lieutenant-colonel. The major. The captain. The lieutenant. Thme second lieutenant. The sergeant. Thle corporal. The trumpeter (bugler). The soldier. Thle king. The noble. The. noblewoman. The gentleman. The lady. The lawyer. The doctor. ~-l ng Presideute sa An 'uri ca...4lng gobernador-general. Aug gobernador sa ldauatigan. Aug Ihokorn (Arabic word). Aug papa, (Sp. word). Aug arzobispo (Sp. word). Aug obispo (Sp. word). Aug pare' (f rom. Sp., padre, a priest). Aug general (Sp.).a Aug coronel (Sp.). Ang teniente coronel (Sp.). Ang coruandante (Sp.) (also coinmanding officer). Ang capitdn (Sp.). Ang teuieute (Sp.). Ang alfirez. Aug sargento (Sp.). Aug cabo.Aug corneta (Sp.). Aug sundalo. Ang Ihan. Aug gat (equal to Sp., Don). Ang dayang (equal to Sp., Doh'a). Ang magin6o (equal to Sp., Ses'or). Aug gin()o (equal to Sp., Sefiora). Ang tagapaglangol (fromt tangol, to protect). Aug niaagagarnot (from gamuot, mnedicine''). a All military terms arc taken fromt Spanish, except a few like hokb6, arm y. The same is true of naval terms. 54 The milerchant. The seller. The buyer. The teacher. The pupil. The preacher. The clerk. The interpreter; transl. Tlhe writer. The reader (profession The reader (casual). The student. The printer. The chief; head; boss. The partner. The companion. The carpenter (houseb The wood sawyer. The tailor; dressmakei The shoemlaker. The butcher. Tile field hand. The sower. The reaper (crop gathe Tlhe day-laborer. The metal founder. The smith (any metal The maker of The potter. The inventor. The peddler. The washerman or was The cook. The salt maker. The oil mlaker. The weaver. The dyer. The house servant. The collector. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Aig )iaiyaiTgalakal (fronl tl(tk<ad, business). A'ng tagapagbili (from 9iagbili, selling). Avg tagapamiili (from painirill/, buying). lng vmaiTgadral (from dral, teacling, etc.). A)glardalan (from dral, learnilg, etc.). Aug vii(ltanir'gra(l (from dr(i/, teaching, etc.). Ang lmanunrllat (from silat, letter). ator. Alg dhlubasa (from ba.se, reading). A21g sioimousulat (froml s'tlat, letter). al). A17g tagabasa (froin basa, reading).,Alug bzmatbasa (from basa, reading).,Alg nagadral (from dral, learning, etc.). A! ag vmanlilimbag (from lilbnag, p)rinting). A,-1g?pi)1kapuno (from puno, trunk).;lng kats( t1 d ( from sama, association). Ang kasama (from, san(t, association). uilder). Ang anlloagiie Aing 'vanlalagari (from lagarL, a saw). Ar.g miancanalu (from tahit, sewing). A nu g gu ir(gawld hang spi ( frlm ga?'d, to make). Aug uwamawciratay atng baca (from pa(ttaf, to kill). Ang niagsasika, (from sak(t, to till). AAng 7(gt(tItaniril (fromn taniiii, to sow).,rer). Ang?,lfngag(pri.i (froll gap(a., to cut, real)). Ang utpa(ihdn (froml pal), pay, salary). Aulg )iagbubub6 (froml b6ub6, to cast m eetals). ). Ang paiday (Sansk., )pad4, science, skill). Ang iuangagayl d nia(ug (from g(ud, to make). Aetg vtagpapalaylok (from palayock, a jar). Ang maptglal(lng (from lalang, invention). A-ng ui:iglltlal.o ( from lako, to peddle). sher-woman. Ag tagapagla(ba (from Sp., Il(va, to wash). iAng t((gapagluti (from ltoi to cook). Ang tiguapaingo)sin.t ( froin Sp., cocina, kitchen). Ang a(ig(aslt, (fronm asiii, salt). Ang maglalalT;is (fronl la~77gis, oil). Ang rlni)liahabi (fronm labi, to weave. Aug narninina (from tina, to (lye). Ang a(lila. Ang tlag(tapnin7il (froml sig7jil, to collect, dun). TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 55 The cashier; paymaster. The hunter (professional). The creditor. The debtor. The bearer. The predecessor. The successor. The heir. The grass cutter. The nurse. The wet nurse. The midwife. The pawnbroker. The beggar. The thief. The slave. An ig tIagpagb!ayad (from bayad, to pay a debt).,A1g maoTar'gayaso (from (aso, a dog). Ang pilyktgkakautatrgan (from ntang, a debt). Ang mtay.ltang (from ltang, a debt). Ang,-ma ydald (from dald, to carry).,An hi(alinhan (from halili, to follow). Ang k(ahalili (from halili, to follow). An7g mngmiamana (from mana, heirship). Anyg m(ygdadamo (from damrn, grass, herb). Ang tagapagalaga (from alaga, to care for). Ang sisi!a. Ang h iot. Ang lmapagpatubo (from tubo, a pledge). A ntg pulube. Ang 7nagnandkao (from nakdo, to steal). Ang alipin. SECTION FOUR. THE ADJECTIVE. The adjective is a word used in a grammatical sense to qualify, limit, or define a noun, or a word or phrase which has the value of a noun, and it expresses quality or condition as belonging to something: Thus, "blackness" is the name of a quality and is a noun; "black" means possessing blackness and so is an adjective. The adjective is used (1) attributively, (2) appositively, and (3) predicatively. Examples, (1) "A good man," (2) "A man good and great, (3) "The man is good." Equally in Tagalog as in English, this is the meaning of the adjective, and owing to the greater flexibility of the former the construction of such words is much more clearly to be seen. Like English, some root words are adjectives by intrinsic signification and may be called "simple adjectives." Among the simple adjectives are bago (new), mahal (dear, precious, noble), hadmak (vile), hunghan (foolish), tahimik (quiet, tranquil), and tot6o (true). But the greater number of adjectives in Tagalog, as in English, are compounds formed from roots, which may be sometimes nouns, by means of prefixes, infixes, and suffixes like the English suffixes "ly," "like" "able," etc., as in "friendly," "childlike," "remarkable," etc. The ordinary particle in Tagalog used in the formation of adjectives is the prefix ma, undoubtedly a contraction of may,! to have or possess, as there are nouns with which may is still retained with the noun to form an adjective. Among such ma adjectives may be mentioned nmagandd (beautiful), from gandd, the root expressing the idea of beauty or good appearance, and marunong (wise), from dunong, the root expressing the idea of wisdom. It will be observed that ma, like some other particles softens d to r when d commences a word. When prefixed to nouns denoting things which may be had or possessed, ma denotes an abundance of whatever mnay be signified by the noun. Examples: Si Juaan ay maginto (John has much gold); masilid ang bdhay (the house has many rooms). The particle ma has at least nine other functions, which will be explained in the appropriate places. 56 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. May is used really as the verb "to have" in the phrase Ako'y may sakit (I am sick [ill], literally, "I have sickness or pain" ). In asking if a person is ill or in pain the verb is sometimes reduplicated; e. g., May maysakit ka? (Are you ill [or in pain]?). Ma adjectives may be conjugated with the definite infix in to express opinion; e. g., mirnamaruinong ko ito (I think this is wise). Ma is reduplicated to express the present tense; minarlinong ko ito would mean "I thought this was wise." Conjugated with the indefinite particle mag (nag in present tense), the adjective assumes a verbal form, with the implied idea of boasting or pretending what may be signified by the root; as, nagmamtarltnong si Felipe (Philip boasts of being wise); nagngaamagandd si Loleng (Dolores [Lola] pretends to be beautiful). The idea may also be conveyed by "believes himself" (or "herself"), what may be denoted by the root; e. g., "Lola believes herself to be beautiful." The particle na also forms some adjectives, in which the first syllable of the root is generally repeated. These na( adjectives also have an indefinite verbal meaning. Ex.: Nauuhao (thirsty, to be thirsty), from uhdo; napagal (tired, to be tired); patgalin (a tired person): ntmatay (dead, to be dead, from patay). P is here changed to m for euphony. Some adjectives are also formed from roots by the prefix mapag, as mapagturangayao (abusive, insulting [words or acts implied]). Others are formed by the prefix mapa; as, mapamarnsag (boastful, vainglorious, ostentatious), from bansag, ostentation. B is softened to m. The indefinite particles mnag and nag, when prefixed to some roots, generally with reduplication of the first syllable of the same, form adjectives in some cases. Ex.: Magdarai/d (fraudulent, cheating), from day(, the initial d being softened to r; and nagiisd (sole unique, only), from is6, one. The particle maka, in its signification of cause, forms adjectives similar in meaning to those in English ending in "able," "ing," etc., when prefixed to roots capable of such significations. The first syllable of the root is generally reduplicated, but not always. Ex.: Makatotoua (agreeable, pleasure causing), from toua; makatcatduau (laughable, comic), from tdua, and makasdua (disgusting), from sdua, etc. A few adjectives are formed by the prefixed particles mala and pala, as malahinirtga (lukewarm, applied to water), maalakoko (quite warm), and palaaudy (quarrelsome), from audy (quarrel, enmity). Some adjectives are formed by the reduplication of a root when the root has no more than two syllables. If there are more than two syllables the first two only are reduplicated. This rule is general in Tagalog. Ex.: HaIlohalo (mixed), from hilo, root of the idea "to mix;" sunodsunod (consecutive), from sunod, root expressing the idea of following, etc. The restrictive particle ka is sometimes prefixed to these reduplicated roots, implying a lesser degree than with ma or may; as, kasakitsakit (painful), from sakit, root expressing the idea of illness or pain. An example of how far a polysyllable is reduplicated is furnished by the word kagiznhaginhdua (wholesome, salubrious), from ginhdua, idea of relief, betterment, rest. There are a very few adjectives formed by the union of two words of opposite meaning, of which urong-sulong (neutral, indecisive), from urong (to go back), and sulong (to go ahead), may be taken as the type. The particle in (hin after an acutely accented vowel) suffixed to many adjectives gives the idea of a person or object having the quality denoted by the root. Ex.: Masintahin (a loving person), from sintd, love; tanwohin (a useful [or available] article), from tam.6, use, utility, and babasagin (a broken or frail thing), from basag, idea of breaking, fracturing, etc., anything like glass, a plate, the head, etc. The first syllable of the root is here reduplicated. An (han), which is generally a place suffix, is sometimes added to adjectives in which the idea of place or location is inherent, and occasionally with those which do not admit the suffix in for euphonic or other reasons. Ex.: Di madaanan (impassable or impenetrable), from di (not), TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 57 and ddan (road), and matiisan (patient person), in denoting what may be suffered when suffixed to matiis; as, matiisin (what suffered or endured). This, however, belongs more properly under the particles, where the difference in the use of ina and (tn is set forth at length. In when inserted after the first consonant of some nouns gives the idea of like, and one at least is sometimes used as an adjective. It is binartt (youth), from bata (child), and is sometimes used to mlean "young," although bago (new) is sometimes used with the same idea, as in the words bagong tduo (unmarried man or bachelor, literally "new person"). The English nouns and phrases which are used as adjectives are expressed in Tagalog by means of the ties g, vg, or mn, the word which is modified preceding the modifier, the opposite to what is done in English. The tie is attached to the modified word and answers somewhat to the English "of." Ex.: Sl(lunrilqg pi(tak (a mnirror of silver, a silver lookingglass) (g); tinterong butbog (an inkstand of glass, a glass inkstand) (ng); singsingna ginto (a ring of gold, a gold ring); bahay ma bat6 (a stone house, a house of stone), the last two examples showing the use of the tie na. Sometimes the tie is omitted if the modified word ends in a consonant other than n, but it is not considered elegant to do so. Adjectives like the English "golden," "silvery," "wooden," etc., are expressed in different ways in Tagalog, generally by means of the ties or by different particles indicating "likeness," which will be explained hereafter. Negative adjectives like those formed in English by the prefixes u. (Anglo-Saxon), in (before b and p softening to m for euphony), im (Latin), a, an (Greek), are formed in Tagalog by the particles dil (not), wald (without), and sometimes hindi (no). Ex.: Dl malapitan (unapproachable), from lapit, idea of approaching; di mabilang (innumerable), from bilang (to number); di madaaa.n (impassable or impenetrable), from ddan (road); walang bahala (apathetic, indifferent, careless); walang hangdn (without end, lasting, eternal, infinite), and hindi natmumunff.a (unfruitful), from bunga (fruit), with na and reduplicated first syllable of root (softened to m from b) to indicate present tense (literally, "not fruit-bearing"). The use of dl and wald is illustrated by di makabayad and walang maybayad, the first meaning "not able to pay" and the second " without means of payment," both being about equal to "insolvent." As in English, there is no variation in the adjective for gender and case, but the adjective may be pluralized. For the plural (the modified word being understood in some cases) the word manr7d is used with simple adjectivesas, ang man7gd hunghang (the foolish [persons] )-and the first syllable of the root is repeated if it consists of one or two letters for compound adjectives. If the first syllable of the root contains more than two letters, the first two letters only are reduplicated. Maianga is also used by many with the plural compound adjective. Ex.: Ang marurunong, or ang manrgd maruruong (the wise [people]). The adjective may precede or follow the noun modified, and it would seem that the latter form is to be preferred, as it agrees with Malay (as with Spanish) construction. However, with the spread of English it is not unlikely that the custom of using the adjective before the noun may become the usual construction, as it is equally as correct as the other way. Ex.: Ang manqag babayeng nmagandci; ang maniad magandang babaye; ang babayeng magagandd; ang magagandang babaye; ang nmafngd babayeng magagandd, and ang managc mnaagaandang babaye. All six of the foregoing phrases mean simply "the beautiful women," the first four being preferable. The following list of adjectives will give the principal ones in ordinary use. The plan has been followed of giving adjectives with certain meanings, followed by those of opposite significations, or at least in well-defined groups. Words having substantially the same meaning are called synonyms; those of opposite meaning, antonyms. Words with the same sound but different meanings are called homonyms. Some Tagalog adjectives require several different words in English to express their varying mean 58 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. ing, just as occurs in translating English into Tagalog or any other language. P-ractice alone will fully instruct the stud~ent, owinigto the localisms and Iprovincialismns of the language. As many examples will be given as space justifies. Dear; noble; precious; esteemed. Cheap, ignoble, etc. Useful, available (thing). Useless; without benefit. (ood. Bad. Harmful; hurtful; slandlerous. Strong. Weak. Large, big, grand. Sm-all. Bulky; massive. Much; plenty. Excessive; superfluous; remaining. Little; Some. Spacious; ample; wide (as room, road, etc. ). Broad; wide; level; flat. IDisproportionately wi(de (or broad). Narrow (as street, (loor, opening)..Tall; high; noted (metaph.). Deep. Low; shallow; humible (metaph.). Long; also gigantic. Moahal. Aug minania ha!, the esteemed, dear, etc., person or thing. M1ura. Totuohin. Tarno, use, utility, benefit. JJoiang kabolohain. lix.: W1a/arty kabolohdn ang gawI.d rnlo, your work is without value; useless. Mabuti. Mlabutivg tauo, a good person. Mofsarnd. Kasamaan, evil. M1akapapartgianyoya. From anyd go, pant, and mak-a, with pa. A good examiple of the building uip of wvordls in Tagalog. Pai~angyayavg tauo, a mail who destroys the property of another. Ma/aka's. M1alahkas na taito, a Strong person. Jflak/ak's na hato gin, a high wind. MAahina.. Kahinaan, weakness. Malaki. Kalakj-hart, grandeur; size. M1a lit. { 1lfra~mi (from dami. ) Karaomiihao-, plenty; abundance. Moid/Ia'. Lubhd (also means "very' before another adjective.) Lubhang sokf, serious illness. Kaunt'. iMarunong kang Tagaiogl? -Do yuunderstandTagalog? 0p6, Yes, Sir. 1:Ingle's? Kauntil, po6, a little, sir. M1a/uang. Afaluang na si/id, a wide (or spacious) room. Moaidpad. Aalaparan, breadth. Mfalapa~d na i.O/), broad minded. ilfahioag. 3ra/ntag na boob, a miagnaimimous heart (metaph.). I Makp9t. Mfak.Ipot aug ddan, a narrow road. Mlaki/pot na lisip), narrowN7-minded. Kakipotan, narrowness. -Maki/lid. Mlakitiran, narrowness. Mfataas. Kataasan., tallness, height. Mla/a6im. kalal/ioan, depth. Ma/a1 -iim na gad/it, deep anger. Mfaha bd. Kababaan, low ground; also humility. MAababang loob, a submissive (humble) disposition. M1a h a b 6. Mfahabang tulay, a long bridge. Mahabang tauo, a gigantic man. Mfaikil variation (maiksf). M1aikling bl'thay, a short life. Short; brief. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 59 Close; short (as hair, beard, etc.) Square; equal on all sides. Round; circular. Thick (as a board, book, etc.). Thick (as liquor, clothes, etc.). Coarse; rough. Rare; thin. Slender; fine. Heavv. Light (not heavy); easy (metaph.). Strong; intense; heavy. S~olid. Pressed; compact; packed; solidl. Hollow (as a tree, etc.). Clean; neat. Pure; Iim-ypid; clear. Turbid; muddy (as water); bleared (as eyes); thick (as the speech). Pure (and without mixture). Light; fine (like chaff, paper, etc.). Dirty; filthy; (lisgusting; nasty. Dirty; disgusting, etc. (Southern). Filthy; indecent. Innumerable; numberless. Full; complete. Insufficient; not enough; less. S'~dgad. Parislikat (from sokat, to mneasure, and paris, equal, as). (Mabilog. Kabilogmi, or patgkaldofJ, roundness. lMali'ig~n (rare). Makapal. Afalirnit. Mfal'Intit na darniit, thick clothes. Afagadspang. M1agadspang na, koain, coarse food. (Synonymi,?oaydpa og kania.) Mrad~ialig. Afanipas. Kanipisan, slenderness. Afanipis na katauan, slender bodied. Afabligat. Ma bi gat na boob, heavy hearted. M1agadIM. Kagaanan, lightness. Magad)u itong kdho~y, this wood is light.!Vatindi. Matinding gaitbo, strong mnelicine. Katindi, a counterweight or balarce. Mo/balinog oob, heav~y hearted. Maigtioig (this word is provincial andl not generally used to-day). Jfa nni nni. Mlag~mig. ('aumigjan 'itoiql laligi itd,, this harigue (house pillar) is hollow. Malinis. Aalirisan, cleanliness. Mfalirtis nam (arnit, clean clothes. Mali))is na loob, clean hearted. Ma1(imao. Th6big na rnalindo, or malinao noa tdbig, pure or limpid water. M1alindo na loob, pure hearted. Mfalabo. I Va.ya Tahias. Tahas na ginto', pure gold. Kabb (a local word is galbok or galbo). M1adumi. Karumbnan (contr.), dirtiness, filthiness, nastiness. Madumihan, dirty, etc., object. Madiri. Madirihin, dirty, etc., per-,son. Salauold.. Kasalauolaan, filth, indecencv. Di mabilang. (from di, not, and bWang, idea of counting, number.) Ptmn6. agpuno6 ka it6, complete or fill this. K61ang. Kakulaifgin, waste, lack. K4dang na banta, a lacking idea. Pak-uula7gin nwo sa apuy, diminish the fire. Pouang. Also wabang lamd~n, without pulp or meat. Empty; sometimes wide. 60 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Contracted; cramped (as a room)..'Mixed. Consecutive; in order. Entire; whole; unbroken, etc. Broken; fractured, etc. Cooked (as food). Raw; cru(Ie (as food, fruit). Edible; esculent. Poisonous (as toadstools, arsenic, etc.) Venomous (as the bite of the dahong palay, or rice snake). Fresh (as meat or fish, etc.). Spoiled; p~utrid. Impure; adulterated. Sweet. Sour; acid. Bitter. Salty; saline. Peppery; pungent. Rancid. Nauseating; unkempt. New. Old; stable; permanent. Stale; musty (as rice, tobacco, wine). Dry. Wet. Thin; watery; fluid. Thick; dense; curdy. Sticky; adhesive. Juicy. Fleshy; pulpy; m-eaty. Hot.0 Burning; ardent. Lukewarm. Cold. Chilly. Hard; solid; stiff. Soft; flexible; bland. Alrasikip. Ildlo-hidlo. Kahialo, mixture. Mfay kahalo itong adiak, this wine is m i xedl. &SOnd-suno'd (from sunodd, idlea of following, obeying, etc.) Bo'. Basag. Babasagin, broken article, from basaq, idea of fracturing, breaking, etc., as the head, a plate, glass, etc. Jfild'o. ilildo pa, green yet. Makain. Gabon; miakamandag. Malason. Sariud. Alabolok:. Bolok- na, putrid already. 1i~nd' i)ulos (froni hindi, not, and1 pulos, alike; of one color. Mataom is. Katamisan, sweetness. Tinamins, sap of the nipa when freshly (Irawn. Mfatanris na wivkl, sweet speech (synonymn niatarntis na inamjgusap). JMad sirn. Kaasiman, sourness; acidAMapait. Kapaitan, bitterness. Madlat. Kntalatan, saltiness. A lataiatan ino amig kanin, salt the food a little more. Ma hanglhang. { Ala. IMaantd. Masuk-lia. Bago. Malaqi. Palagian mo ilong gawal, make this work permanent. Laon..1atuyd. Basd. O Malabnao. Maidpat. Malagkd. Makatds. MalIaI n an. Mainmt. Kainitan, heat. Mlairtit ang arao, the hot sun (or (lay).t Mfadlob. il1ouag razorg paalabalabin ang nnUTgas, do not add fuel to the flames. MalabinirT'a. (Mfalak-oko expresses a slightly greater (legree of heat.) Malamnig. Magindo. Mfaginauin, a chilly person. Matigds. Katigasan, hardness. Maid mbot. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 61 Spongy; porous; soft. Ductile; flexible. Sharp. Sharp-pointed. Sharpened; ground. Dull. Hacked; notched. Rusty (as iron, etc.). Slippery; slimy. Anything oily or smeared with oil. Rockv; stony. Muddy. Rough; rugged. Sandy. Swampy; boggy. Gradual; little by little. Sudden; abrupt; hasty; eager. Impassable; impenetrable. Difficult; laborious. Difficult; intricate; slow. Inaccessible; not to be reached. Unapproachable. Unfathomable; abysmal. Distant; far. Near. Rare; scarce. Common; ordinary. Bluhaghag.. indi buhaghag, not. porous; iniporous. Makduat. Also a kind of taffy canl v. Malllliln. KAtt(liiatn, sharpness. MI tIdis. Kutlrisir, pointedness. Matagis. 'Tiagis, what ground, etc. M purol. Matomial. Matomnlal 'a, stndang, a dull sword. This word is often applied to business, trade, etc. Binig(do. Also noun with forward accent. Malaki aog b1it/Io nilooy suntt(daog, this sword is very dull (lit., great is the dullness of this sword). Na/lak,(l(lan(a/lan or KOiwkllauarg (from kalalang,q rust). Al so name of town in La Laguna Province with ('. Calanaf.q. Ma dildas; mntr(ldrs. ht(rlorJ/isan or Nabalaritisan. Af(tb(tt. May p)tik; unalusaik. Pusaktkl (rare). Malaki ang kapusakalan nrang btundok, the ruggedness of the mountain(s) is very great. Mabuihna 7 ylin. Kabulhali7in, sandy beach, or sandy ground. Malabon. Also name of town in Rizal Province, Luzon. Unti-tnti. UTnti is probably a variation of nmunti; katolti, means "little," "small," etc. Bigld. Kabiglamn, eagerness. Pdltiki, syn. BijlallIg gawd; pdltik na gawd?, quick work. Di madaanan (from ddan, road. and di, not, with place ending an). Mahlrap. Iah irap gawin, a difficult or laborious task. Ang mncaii7d vwahirap, the working classes. Maliuag. Di malizag, easy. Walang liiaag, without difficulty. Di 0maratiiTgan (from dating, idea of arrival, and di, not, with place ending an). Di malapitan (formed like the above from the root ldpit, idea of nearness). Di matarok (formed like the foregoing from tdrok, "to sound the water" ). Malayo. Maldpit (also babao). Babao bagd ang Pasig sa atin? Is the Pasig anywhere near us? Bihira. Karaniuan. Karaniuang damtin, usual dress. Karaniuang wikd, an ordinary word. 62 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Straight. Matouid. Crooked; bent. Baluktot. Curved. Mali/ko. Likolikong dadan, a road with many turns. Minsan pavg lamtiko, one turn (or bend) more. Fragrant; odorous. Alab a i 7 j. Fetid; stinking. Mabaoh'. Kah~ahoai), fetidity. IDelicious; pleasant. Kalugod-lo god (from iugod, idea of pleasure, etc. ). Noxious; malignant. Makasasaiiod (from sania, idea of evil, the Iparticle iao/ca and tense reduplication sa for present). P~owdered; pulverized. Dorog (means putrefied in 5( mme localities). Sonorous (as a bell). Matunog tfrorn htnog, sound). Eqlual. Kaparis. Unequal. Ilindi paris. Transparent. Ma a ) wi,ag. Opaque. Kogog; koyap (both rare). Concave. Malukoo~g. Malak-ong sic pingart. a deep islate, like a soup plate. Wholesome; salubrious. Kagivnhaginlha'o (from ginhadua, idea of relief, rest). Horrible. Kcakilakifldbot (from kildbot, idea of trembling with fear). Fearful; dreadful. Kotakottaik-ot (from hik-ot, idlea of fear. Kottakotan, fear, dreadl). P~ast. iXakwaan (from dadon, idea of pass-ing). Present. Aqm!106n. Future. DardJtirmg (from ddiing, idea of arriving). Right (hand). Kanon. Kanankanan, alittle to the right.. Kornmnko.no'mon m1o, go a little to the right. AIng rakakaorco,, what lies to the right. Pakanoinka, go to what lies on the right. Left (hand). Kaliod' (same compounds as the above). In the middle. Scagitnd. Gitniang gab-l', midnight. To one side. Sc8 ta bi. A few cif the foregoing are not strictly adjectives, either in Tagalog or English, buit are put here for convenience. All; entirely; wholly. Paua (generally used with adjectives). 1oucmi-g rcogalivtg, wholly good. 1'amoig vaigagaling silaim, they are all goo~l. Paoaig nciitim. sild, they are all black. Ilouag brrong pecoinq taua gin, do not call all. All. Lahaot (generally applied to persons). La/hati mo ming panT~ gungu7(1sa(p1, speak to all of them.; syn., fitvaln (provincial). Taimdng tdaio, all men. All (kinds or classes). Diblin (provincial). Dilarig sdgioq, all kinds, of bananas. Each one. Bdlai-g isal. Ballcng airao, sonic day. Everyone. Badoc't isa'. TAGALOG LAN~GUAGE. 63 The following is a list of what colors are generally used by Tagalogs, with some names also not now ordinarily heard. White. Aftaputti. Kaputian., whiteness. Ang kaputian nang itlog, the white of an egg. Black. Maitiin. Kaitiman, blackness. Red. Mapuld. Kapulahan, redness. Iilirnuld4, blush; redness of the face. Yellow. 3fadilao; wnarilao (from diiao, a root dyeing yellow). Marilao na damit, yellow clothing. Also name of town in Bulacan Province, named f rom same plant (curcuma delagen). Also name of barrio of Manila (San Fernando- (le Dilao). Blue. Bughao (Bataan Province). Btik-hao (var.). Bluish-green. Ginvday (from gulay, vegetables, herbs). Green. Halongtiang (rare). Brown; brunette. Kayumarigi. M(miut 14. Kaputlaan, pallor; palePale; discolored. ness. Hiniutdd, pale, discolored. Bright; clear; light. Ma banaag. Bright; shaining (as the dawn, the Mlaningning. M1anin gnan parang Iistars, gold, etc.). waywvay, bright as the dawn. Dark; obscure. M1adilim). Kadilirnain, (larkness, etc. Houag manyn ipandilirn itong cabayo, (10 not take this horse while it is dark. All of one color; unicolorous. Paius. Ma1(itim na pulus, black all over (as a horse). The following list comprises the majority of Tagalog adjectives pertaining to physical (conditions of the bodyN: old. Matandd. Katandatan, age. Young. Bago. Binata', youth, is sometimes used, as any rnanfgd binata', the youths (from bata, child). Tall (in stature); high. Ilaguayl; nmahaguay. Haguay na tanuo, a tall 1)erson. Short (in stature). Lipoto (rare). Dwarfish; short.. Pandak. Fat. Matabd. Katabaan, fatness. Elegant; beautiful. Maganad'. Kagandahan, beauty; elegance. Pretty. Mlm -kit (from dikit, idea of prettiness). Karikitan, elegance, prettiness. Kariktang wik-d, a graceful word. Ugly; deformed. PbiTqit. Stuttering; stammering. MIagaril. Garilin, a stutterer; stainmerer. Utal-utal is another word. Mute; (lumb. Pipi. Kapipi han, dumbness. Blind. Pisak, variation Lapisak. Pisak ang isang mata', blind in one eye. 64 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Deaf. BiThfi. Kabiui7;ihan, deafness. Bi77qinqbiffifi, totally deaf, but bir7ojibii7tqi, somewhat or a little deaf. (The higher degree is formed with the "tie," tlhediminutive without it. This is a general rule.) Nasal; snuffling (as in the speech). RJiaral. Cross-eyed. Duliga. Blinking. Kikirapkirap (from kirap). Big-eared; long-eared; flap-eared; Malakii any faiihja. large-eared; inegalotine.]uoi(fm iaolp) Thick-lipp~ed (person). Nuon(rmiiuo i) Wry-monothedl. Ngivi. Toothless. Tipo. Ma~n~ipo, lacking teeth. Pockmarked. Gatol-gatot. Left-handed. Kaijuete. Lamne in hand; one-handed; unable Kbnmto. to use hands, etc. Bandy-legged; bow-legged. Sakang. Lamne (on account of having legs of Iliingkad. unequal length). Quick. Madali'; maralt'. Slow; deliberate (in work or Ma h in ay. Possibly a variation of speech). 900hina, wNeak. Hairy; feathered. Mlabalalhbo. DI' pa umakita' any balahob() nang karnay, the hair of the hand can not yet lbe seen; an expression used to express that it is not yet day. Bearded. Ba IT(/ it. (Gray-haired; gray-headed (person). (Uban in. Adjective, niauban. Curled; crisp; curly.(as hair). Kulot. Curly or waving (hair). R/at. Bald (person). Upau in. Hairy (on body). Bo/bolin. Hairless (as somte aniurals, etc.). W a/any buhtok. Horned (aninial). Sas7i~a? in. Suoqt'ay, horn, also a twvining p~lant. resembling the convolvulus or bindweed. Scaly. May kalisk-is. H ungry (person). Magatoiiiin. Kayuo/oman, hunger. Thirsty; to be thirsty. NYannlho. Kauh'ataao, thirst. Replete; satiated. A8a oda t. Tired; to he tired. AalpaJgal. kapa ga/an, fatigue. Numb or " asleep," as the hands, ]Iinanday. feet, to become. Sick; ill; to be ill. May sq/cit. JV'a/aoy sakit, without illness, i. e., healthy; wvell. IPainful. Kasa/citsa/cit (from oct idea of pain; sickness; illness). Wounded (person); having sores. 8uga/ia (froin saqat, wound). Sore-eved. Ma/a. Mvt/ain, sore-eyedl lersorn, etc. Living; alive. Mabtfhay. Dead. Patay. Pato ini, dead p~erson, animnal, etc. N~amataty, to be (lead. The list of mental or moral attributes given b~elow does not, of course, embrace all in the langnage, but the most usual are given: Omnipotent; all Ipowerful. Makapangyarihan (f romn yari, idea of finishing, etc., (compounded wiith pant, maka, and suffix han). TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 65 Brave; valiant. Cowardly. Timnid (person). Abusive (person or act). Bashful; timid; shame-faced. Bashful; modest (especially in character). Modest-eyed. M1odest in sle-ech; mnoderate in lplay. Mlodest.; quiet. Modest; slow. Miodest, (in carriage); slow; deliberate. Peaceable; quiet. Tranquil; quiet. Gentle; tamne; quiet (as animals). Quiet; pa~cific. Quarrelsomie. Odious; rancorous. Fierce; savage; wild. Quiet (in sleep, oir in eating). Abstemious; moilerate. Gluttonous; voracious. Bold; gallant; elegant. Bold; daring; insolent. Vain; proud; haughty; arrogant. Boastful; vainglorious. Neutral; indecisive; undecided. Influential. Famous; celebrated; noted; notorious. Famous; celebrated; illustrious. Famed; honored. Celebrated; noted. Famed; honored (person). Dignity; honor; fame. 6855-06 ) 5 Maidpwng (applied to wine, " 6strong," viatdpang na diak, strong wine. KatapaiTgan, brav'D)ity1..Kadloagai, cowardice. M1bmAok'din (froi (ok-ot, idlea of fear). ihapagfutTgaYao (from tio iT{,yao, insulting words). Mfwi~(il1. Anmy ikami7;'il, the cause or reason of timidity, etc. Ang paiooigngilalhan, of whom or what afraid, etc. i1to/hinhiin. ito aamsid. Mubini. latining. Also means "highpitched, " (as a voice). itahinahai;?iiabanalyod. Mora/man (from dahan, idea of deliberation). iMtdouay. Mabayd. Ma bayang 16ob, a tranquil heart. Mamaori. Kaarnoan., tameness; gentleness. Ang pagkoaaomb, the act of taming, breaking, etc. Maarnoiig 16ob, a gentle disposition. Tahhmik. Katahhiaikanm, quietness. Itahrniik mao armg bibig mao, keep your mouth quiet (shut up!). Paiaduay. K aanuy, an enemy. Any mait-ya kaduay, the enemy. Man77ge kaduayn, enemies. Mapahtanirn (from toaoiin, idea of rancor, hate, etc., with mapag prefixed). Atailap. Kailaparn, fierceness. 3i1atmqil. Matingting. Matdkao. Matik-as. M1apa iTqahas. Kapaui~gahahasan, insolence. Pa/elm). Kapalaloan, pride, vanity, etc. 31apamarmsag (from baiisag, ostentation). Urong-dd'long (from i'tromm-g, to go back, etc.; smilong, to go ahead; to move on). Dakila. Mabantog. Kabantogan, fame; notoriety. Mlabummyi (rare). Ma/ra)m7-gal (froni dari7gl, fame; honor). Bulotlat. Purihin. Kapurihan, fame; honor. Saughaya. 66 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Famie; noted; talked about. Mean; vile; worthless; unfortunate. Mean; vile; worthless-. Loving; amorous (person). Affectionate. Affectionate; loving. Polite (person). Polite; courteous; respectful. Courteous; respectful. Respectf ul. Ironical; sarcastic. Honest; right; straight. True; refined; perfect; pure (in body). Patient.; firm; constant (person). Impatient (person). Changeable; inconstant. Treasonable; treacherous; tingratef ul. Two-faced; double-faced; treacherous. Giddy; thoughtless; careless. Blundering; wild. BalifA. Kabalitang tduo, a noted person. M1agbabalibalitang tduo, a newsmonger. Ano ang balita sa bayau? What news in town? Hf6mnak-. Ildtmak na tduo, a worthless person. Timaud (originally -meant "freedman;" "liberated slave." Another wordl is bulisik-, variation bulis'iksik-, literally ''slave of a slave." Kabulisikan, slavery; servitude). Masirtahin (from.sintai, love, originally Sansk. (hiintd, thought, care, through M~alay c/oento, care, anxiety, etc. ). Maibig. Kaibigibig, amiable. KaibigaJn, affection. Kaibigaio, friend; beloved. (Notice the difference in accent. ) Mtap~agpalayao (froni polayao, affection, and inapag, prefixed). frog means "Igreat love." Masagapin. Aug sagapan, person to whotr polite. Ma~pogpitogan (from pitagart, honor, reslpect, and mnapag). Ang pagpipilagarian, the person honored (from pitagan, prefixed by pag, reduplicated first syllable pi for present tense and suiffix an, here indlicatimg lpersonl, hut generally indicating Jplace). Maolangailang. Aug kiuooalaugalangonan, the person to whom courteous (from uaua galung, idea of courtesy, compounded with ka and in (kbia) prefixed and an reduplicated as a suffix). Magadlaug. kagaloag~au, respect, reverence. Magalami7gin, courteous, respectful person. Moapanuyd. JMo1tuid. Kotuiron~, honesty. 31atiisan. Mayo yarnutin (from yainot, idea of annoyance, etc.). ~Salouahan. Salauahang l6ob, a changeable character. Maliko Pinagli/ilohtan niya auginaamupon, he is ungrateful to his benefactor. So ka b. Matulig, variation rnatuling. Mahilo6. Partial synonym d'ulin-g~as, which means "restless, unquiet" more than "blundering" or Itwild." TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 617 Restless; Restless; Restless; turbulent; fidgety. mischievous. uneasy; mischievous. Intolerable; insufferable. Unspeakable; unsayable; untellable. Untouchable. Joyful; contented (person). Contented. Happy; lucky. Laughter-causing; laughable; comic. Waggish; jesting; scoffing (person). Sad. Just; fair; upright.. Barbarous; tyrannical; despotic. Cruel; rigorous; severe. Agreeable; pleasing; joyous. Jndulgent; generous; liberal. Charitable. Merciful; charitable; liberal. Learned; wise; etc. Discreet; able. (1) Accomplished; (2) excellent. 3fagasldo. Magasido na lduo, a restless person. Gaiso. Ang gasohan, person (listurbed. Miagild'o. Probably variation of inagasao. iJftgaldo ang kamna y niyd, hshand is restless (said of a thief). Kagalauan, mischief. Avggalauin, the mischief. Ang galauan, person annoyed. Dlima(dialtd, (from dalitd, idea of suf — fering, an(1 d', not). D'I vinasbi (from sabi, idea of telling, an (lIt' not)., DI rnias~iarn (from salang, idea of touching, with di', not). Latin, noli mie tai) gere, taken by Rizal as a title to one of his works. He signedl many articles "Dimas Alang ". Mi1atuain, (from loudt, pleasure; content). Kaayaaya (from aya, variation ligaya. Kaligayahan, contentment). Afapdla'1ad. Wakling pailad, unlucky. 3f'akatataud (from laud, laughter, with miaka, andl reduplicated first syllable ta to indicate present tense). Mapagbird'; palabirol. Tauong bird, an inconsiderate person. Alalungkot. ilfardpat (from ddpat). Karapatan, merit. 3iabagsik. Also "power"~ in some cases. Kabagsikari, power; tyranny; etc. Ang pagbagsikav, the oppressed. Ma barT-gis. Kabaii?~san, cruelty; severity. Jiasayd. Mapagbigay. Also mapamigay. Both words are from bigay, idea of 'giving. The second is more properly the adjective. Mauoud. Maauain, a charitable person. Kaauaan, charity, compassion. Mo~pagbiyaya (froin biyaya, idea of mnercy, charity. Mabiyayang ltmuo, a merciful or liberal person). Marlinorng (from dminong, idea of wisdom. KarunoT~gan, wisdom). Marminong kang Ingles? (Casliia?). Do you understand English? (Spanish?). Masik-ap. Kasikapan, discretion; ability. (1) P1aham na tduo, an accomplished man. (2) M~apahan na dlak, excellent wine. 68 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Able; accomplished. Fine (in bearing). Prudent; judliCiou5. Discreet. Thoughtful; grave. Vigilant; awake; known. Incomprehensible; inimitable. Simple; silly. Jlaidt's. Panta's na ta'uo, an able man. Kapwnta-sa, ability. Busa bus. Bnsahusaltus na nmaginoo, a very fine gentleinan. Kabusabusart, excellen(ce, etce. AMoabat. hia/ait na Mtoo, a lprudlent person. Dalagan/g niabait, a l)1udent girl. TI.imin't (provincial word). Afabigat. Really "heavy" (from ingot). Afagising (from gfising, idea of awaking). Definite I's in van, not a n. N g m u L n i d l L g b~ I was awakened by the earthquake last night. (Nnisian, ka no kopo1;jsmono ang asal nom oot I have always known of that cuistoni. Tiinkald. Maang. Timawig, foolish; &ttupid. AlIoigsniang, fool, (dunce; also lack of neienory, forgetfulness. 3Iafifya, variation viaiqal, silly, foolish. Maiiafio7yal, to act foolis~hly. Naignia m nga m n~jn on, to feign stupidiity. This meaning of miarii7!, must not be confusedl with the hom-onymn indicating plurality, which is m-ade up of the particles ma and i7iqu. Ban gda (rare). Bangauin, a stupidl person. Tiksil. Tahriil na tauo, a stuipidl fperson. Kata1ksilan, stupidlitv. Bandaq. Kaibandagan, foolishness. J ng pagkahandaty, the error. Boo ga~kin, one regarded as a fool I or d(un ce. J on q m 0) / a g - kan,d(o not try to fool rae (make a fool of me). Also kaha)Tgalan, foolishness, fromn hmsigal, foolish. T~ui~ak, variation iunyhag. lion glang. TarTja'. M1agtaiTq~Jt(6torTahtan, to feign stupidity. A. rare wordl for "foolish " is lankas. UaiR, variation orny;6. Bailt. Kabalitoan, idiocy. Ba/imm, a foolish or idiotic person. (Jabatyang babaijuin, a foolish or runaway horse. U/ni1, variation alal. Jfiaulolan, insanity. Mas~ipag. Kasipagan, indudtry, etc. Tamad (Mfapagtarnad). Katamnaran, laziness. Malounat. Malouat na kadhoy, durable wood. (M1alouag is "slack, loose," and mnahigpit is "tight.") Stupid; foolish; (as a plate). beast-like; cracked Foolish; stupid. Useless; stupid. Stupid; foolish; malicious. Foolish; stupid; dull; gaping. Childish; foolish. Idiotic; simple. Crazy; insanie. Laborious; (liligent; industrious. Lazy; slow. Slow; tardy; lasting. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 69 True. L~ying. Fraudulent; (heating. Evil-lived; criminal. Drunken. Desirous. Importunate. Obedient (person). Disobedient; contradictory. Bold; shameless. Forgetful (person). Rich; prosperous. Poor; miserable. Miserable; stingy. Miserable. Talkative (as a child). Loquacious (as many persons). Garrulous (as an old person). Silent.; reserved; secretive. Economical; stingy. Economical; saving. Destructive. Totdo. Tinotot6o ko ang wtika, I amn keeping my word. Tihnay has more the sense of real, perfect., rf — thimed. Bidwan. Malndm~laanaiim nailnq $(Ilit mo1, you are lying, in vommir account. SintaiTjdi'ing is a "Iliar" or tiprevaricator.'' J1inmgsRti7wUJ(di-?;hgan ko, I told him you lie. Mlagdaranyd (from day4I, fraudI deceit, with,nag and reduplicated first syllable of root). Nadayaan atko(?ang ldob ko, my heart deceived me. Masiuai. Masiual na tabio, an evil doer. Lasing. Another word is derived from laiTgj6. Kala otjohan, drunkenness. A rare wordl is aslak. Naaaslaika~n ka yata, you act as if you were (Irunk. Drunkenness is a rare vice among Tagalogs. Mapagimsa (from nasa and mtapag). Another word is derived f rom. pita, (lesire, longing. Arao na kapitapita, a- longed-for day. Magpita, kayo0 sa ak'in nang libig niny6', ask me whiat you desire. JbfagliiqTuai (from hhiigt, to ask politely, and mnapag). Miasunori~n (from sunod. See Consecutive). M1asouay. Kasouaya~n, disobedience. llasua~il. Mlalimotin (from limot, idea of forgetfulness). 3l(tayman. K~ayamanan, wealthiness. Dukhd. Ka~dukhaan, poverty. Mi-arramot (from dadrnot). Dmimmot ak6' nang salapil, I am short of money. Makingking. Tauong makinaking, a miserable person. Mfawikcl (from. wikcl, word). -Matabil (from tabil, idea of talking much). 1a~saiitd (from salitd, a story, news). Matinip. Matinip na 1l'ob, a secretive character. Matipid. Katitipda~n, parsimony. Maarimnohanan (from arirnahan). 4 ri — moha~ruin ma itong pilak, save this money. Two rare words for the same idea are maimipok and maagimat. Makasi~sird (from sird, idea of destruction, and maka, with reduplicated first syllable of root). 70 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Traveling; peregrine. Unbaptized; infidel; pagan. Belonging to; pertaining to. Abandoned. Guilty; culpable; sinful. Fruitful; to bear fruit. Other; different; diverse; distinct. Sole; unique; only. Lasting; eternal; infinite. Perishable. Immortal. Hopeful. Hopeless. Public. Reserved; set aside. Secret; to be secret. Occupied; to be occupied. Idle; without work. Passionate; quick-tempered (pei son).Hasty; of a bad disposition. Thankful; to be thankful. Grateful. Naiif~'ibang bdyan, (from badyan, town; town, MIb, other, andl the reduplicated lparticle ima, in the present tense, hience changed to naig and i i 7i. Literally, " from another town "). I1i binyagan (from bin? ag, to bapt~ize, and di, not). Binyag is said to have been a Bornese (Arabic?) word brought by Mobharmmedans to the Philippines. Its original meaning is saidl to have been " to pour water fromt above." Naus'tkol (from r'tkol). Naum'kaol sa Dios at nauu'dkol sa (Jsar, belonging to (lod and belonging to Coesar. Pabaldt. Nagkak-asalid (from saiad). Thalang sala&, innocent, not guilty. Narniumvhku/U (from bsuiTa, fruit, with via (na) and reduplicated first syllable of root, which is here softenedl to mn fromt b). Hindi nainumuikqa, unfruitful. Bu77gahan, a fruitful tree or plant. J\u1giis6 (from 'isai, one). i1"alaing lian gan (lit., " without end," " 'endless "). Nalatapu~s (from tapus, end, finish. Tahnts na, finished now). }Iat(ug i matnuaygun (lit., '' without death") I V(a/aug usa. Maha gag. Kah~ayagan, publicity. Nagkakuabuk-od (from bvkod, idea of reservation, setting aside, etc. Bukdana kko ako6 naiig dalawdt, put two aside for me. Kabvk-oran, reservation, etc. ). Malihtim. Lihimnna gawd, secret work or deed. Naaabauau (from abalu, idea of occupation; the lparticle va (present tense of aiu) and at, reluplicated first syllable of root for present. tense). Aba/ohmi or Maubalab in, a busy manl. TWalang gawd. - Magallitan (from galit, idea of anger). Gata~sd. Kagahasaan, hastiness. Sinasalabiat (from salarnat, thanks; derived from Arabic, saldin at, peace; safety). Nak-aluilugod (from iugod, gratitude, nak-a, andl the reduplicated first syllable of root). Wa/ang lugod; also malilo. Ungrateful. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 71 Licit; legal. Immaterial; useless. Naked. Libidinous; sensual. Asleep, to be; sleepy, to be. Aged; venerable; mature. Tired, to be. Alone; unaccompanied. Companioned; chaperoned. Ignorant. Married. Unmarried. Taxed. Exempt. Present. Absent. Ready, to be. Unready, to be. Salable. Unsalable. Valuable. Clean; neat. Dirty; unclean (as the clothes). Doubtful. Certain. Lucky. Original. Copied (thing, etc.). MANethodical (person). Suitable. Unsuitable. Orderly. Disorderly. Profitable (thing). Unprofitable. Ornamented. Plain; clear (as a room). Manufactured; made up. Raw; crude (as material, etc.). Woven. Spun (also thread). Plaited (as a mat). Mfaitid; also "right,"' 'straight, "etc. Ilondli maud illicit, illegal, etc. l~lanlgI f/am it. Hu bad. MAalibog. 3fati'llog. Mfahtalog bagd kai 6? Are you sleepy? Natut (dog bagd siytil Is hie asleep? Patnioga in W() siyd, let hun- sleep (or tell him, or her, to go to sleep). Mahgtilang. Ang mma?/4a w~agtilang, tme aged; p~arents; ancestors. 3[apd god. Nagio.d'; wvalanig kasamnd. Alay1 kwamwo. I af -i ( 1 I a a l f..1asaal. lWalang as464a. Bumabdyad ntang bouis. Hindi bunmubouis. Narito. Wald rito. MAahandd. Hlindi lhandd. hlcay pag/bibili. Hindi paqbibilt'. Mahalagad. l~alang halagd, worthless. Maglkano ang halagd nito? What is the value (price) of this? N~agkasisinghalagal, of. the same value, at the same price. 3Alasa~ud. 21 rasalto. ilfaosauong darnit, dirty clothes..1 lndaiiTgan. Tanto. MIapdlad. J'alang pallad, unlucky. Nauuna (from una, first; not Sp.). Sinalin (from salin, idea of transferring, transplanting, etc.). Afaparaanin. Walang paraan, without method. Naaayos (from ayos); nauu'kol (from ulkol). Hlindianyos. IHindi dapat, unfot. Maa yos. Walang gulo, without confusion. Magalo. Kagulohan, confusion, disorder. MapakivnabaiTgin (from pakindbang, idea of making a profit, etc.). Walanig pakindibang. Gayfak. Aijualas. Ginawd (from gaud and in). Hindi' yari. Hinabi (from habi, idea of weaving). Sinz'lid (from sidid, idea of spinning). Salwsala. 72 72 ~~TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Cultivated; plowed. Naaararo (from Sp., arado, plow). Hindi naaararo, uncultivated; un1)1owed. Gpen. Bukhis.!Buk-san mo itong pint6, open this (oor. Shut; closed (thing). Pindan~. Pindan?wo ang durur'ifgarain, shutt. the winbow. Some natives say sarhan nio, undoubtedly a corruption of the ~Spanish verb cerrar, to close. Spread; extendled. Latafl. NqVkak-dlat, stretched; taut. Folded; doubled, etc. Tin ikl.op (from tikiop, idea of doubling). COMPARISOIN OF ADIJECTIVES. The Tagalog adjective, like adjectives of other languages, has the three degrees of qualitv to be indicated-the simple form (wvhich is generally called the positive), the comparative, andl the superlative. Of course, as in English, some adjectives are excluded froin comiparison. by their meaning, such as those for "dead,' "alive, ''entire, and some others. The positive adjective is that form discussed in the preceding pages, and the comparative will now be taken up. Of this there may be said to exist three varieties, the comparative of equality, that of superiority, and that of inferiority. I n English the first form is exprcssedl by "as (adjective) as (noun),'' thiesecond by ''er'' or ''more,'' and the third ly ''er'' or'' less.'' In Tagalog there are, three ways by which the comparative of equality may be expressed. The first is by using the adverb poirn (variation paris), meaning "as," "so," etc. In some cases "like" cxlpresses the Tagalog idea best. WVith adjectives or common nounts p)Oira (paris) takes the tie 0IIf but wvith niamyes of persons, etc-., andl pronouns, is follow ed by wxhat is com-pared, which takes the genitive case. I x. Iaralig 711abw (hoxy gOOdl), 27apliti pairmig gatfis (as white as milk ) wiaitin paranl) Vlog (as black as charcoal), poraiig ImtotY (like a (leadl lersoI), parinq /11)/lOp (like a beast) Ak6'y p,,ar no? (Amn I like you') siip'' q porsS ko (hie [4he] is like me), malijit paris /:-o (as small as I a' [smill like me] ]) i 51/0 tna/it para ni Juan (he is as prudent as Juan), mny 4loq sa, Xaga y ioavlouane/ para nang Pasig (the river at Naga [Nueva C aIeres] is as wile as the Pasig). With the lparticle la denoting likeness pora, indiaates equality, the particle being prefixed to the adjective in such cases. Ex.: Para niYong m~oaT touo, kalm~ndni (equally good as these peoIple). This wvord para, which as a root denotes "equality," "clos~e resemblance," etc., should not be confused with theSpanish word part, m('aning "to," "for," etc., as the resemblance is purely accidental. The Tagalog word is Malayan, the Javanese word pad'a having, sublstantially the samne signification. The second way of expressing equality with an adjective is by means of the particle sing, which denotes this idea precisely. Ex.: _[W'y sin qhalu't niy41r (this is as long as that), siyaV?'y singlalc-i Zo (lie is as large as I am), sin glalki si Pedro ri Jvan (Pedro is as large as Juan). It wAill be seeni by the examples that the object or person comlipared takes the genitive case and the subject the nominative. The third way of indicating equality with the adjective is bY means of the consolidatedl particles ka and sing~, i. e., katsing, the syntax. being the same as with sing only. Ex.: 1t6'y ka-sinahaba' niyor (th~is is as long as that), si Pedro'y, kasingtad'sniJuan (Pedro is as tall as Juan). W~hen equality is to be indicated for more than two objects it may be expressed in two ways. The first is by prefixing sing to the root, of which the first syllable is reduplicated. Ex.: Singhalo/abt (equally long [things]), sin gbubuti (equally good [persons or objects]) singtataa's any viaginl nii Bangoy (Maria) (Maria and her mother are the same in height). The TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 78 second is by prefixing keasiug to the root, the particle tnag being prefixed to kasing, forming inagkasing. Ex.: 3fagkasiugda'no7Ig (equally wise [learned]), mragkasingyaman (equally wealthy [rich]), ang rnagina' ni Ban goy (M.,aria) ay maykasingta6s (Maria and her mnother are the same in height [equally tall]), ang ma?'igd cabayoat ang mnaijya kalabao ay mnapkasingdami sa bayan i16' (there are as many horses as there are carabao in this town), mnayro'on- kang boyda biga's na kasingdaiiii nang p~alay? (Have you as much hulled rice as you have of the unhulled?). Equality in quantity inay also be expressed by magkapara, magkaparis, or nagkaipantaq'i, the twvo objects compared taking the nominative, and the root denoting quantity having k-a prefixed to it. Ex.: Auig biga's ko at any bigqus u'iya m iag/aparis k-aramni (hie and I have the samne quantity of rice). Literallv " nv rice and his rice is the same in quantitv. " Those infinence(1 by Spanish are liable to say "his rice and my rice," but the other order is ithat of the Malayan languages generally. The comiparative by decrease is formed by the use of the adverb kalang, (less), preferably with the negative particles dit or Iiindi', as kalalqg alone has m-any times the force of " not.," ".with out," " un-, " etc., but, as in every language, the context serves as the best guide. Ex.: ltong b-igds na it6'Y kd'lang sa akin binili (th is rice is less than t he amount I bough t), a ng halagd itong caba!,o it6'y ktilang sa halagd nauig ibdi (the value of this horse is less than the value of the other), ag maTgd' kalabao kmt'lang vang danai sanlaTq4 cabaga sa bayoan it (there are fewer carabao than horses in this town), ang maugya '~IT qalog ay ktiiang nang taa's so nmoryfd A inericano (Tagalogs are not as tall [literally, "less in stature"] than Americans), any kakulafigan (the (lifference in price, the balance, the difference in amount, etc.). A larT( 'an (lacking, insufficient, etc.) is sometimes used in place of kzilang. Ex.: Aug kayanionan 'ni Oapitan Tino'y ala ffgan sa kagamnanan ni Capitan. Luis (the wealth of Captian Faustino is less than the wealth of Captain Luis), alafi,!jan pa itong bahit it6' (this child is not old enough yet). There are three ways in which the comparative by increase may be expressed. The first is by the position of the words only, what exceeds taking the nominative and what is exceeded the ablative with kay or 8so, thiese two particles expressing "than." The particle ayis sometimes used with the nominative word. The second method is by prefixing the adverb lao16 (more) to the adjective, with the same construction as the foregoing. The third way, which is only used correctly for comparing qualities, is formed by suffixing pa (yet, still to the adjective) either alone or in conjunction with 1al16. Ex.: (1) Mfataads a-k60 sa iyo6, or ak6'y matad's sa iyo6;' (2) ako'y ialormq mataads sa iyo6; (3) wutafaas pa ak6' sa iy6, or lalong rnata6s pml ak60 sa iyo6. All the foregoing may be translated by "I am taller than yCu. are." (1) Pay at ka sa dati (you are thinner than you were before), si. Pedro'y ruasipag k-ay Juan (Pedro is more industrious than Juan), ain ang nmal'ik-si, kay P~edro ni Jutan? (Which is the more alert, Pedro or Juan?); Si Jfuan (Juan); si 1tan ay mabait sa k-anijyd; (2) si Juan ay lalong mobait so kaniy('m; (3) si Jean ay inabait pa sa kaniyad (Juan is more prudent than he [or she] is). (1) Ang kcabanala'y mahal sa kayasnanan; (2) lalong moahal ang kobanalan so kagyarnanon (worth is more precious than wealth), it6' y lalong nmagaling sa diyd'n (this is better than that), iyadn ay lalong maputi sa d-ito (that is whiter than this), lalong marami ang marTga cabayo 8ga marngal kalaba~o sa bayan ito6, rt-gni'-t any ma?7gad taga btikid mayro'on lalong kalaboo sa any mno7t?4d toga bayan; (3) there are more horses than carabao in this town, but the farmers have more carabao than the town people, sgi Ciriaca ay bata pa sa ak-in,?Tquni't any kapatid kong babaye'y merikit pa sa kaniyad (Ciriaca is younger [fiterally, "more of a child yet"] than I am, but my sister is prettier than she is), siya'y lalo6 pang kayumnangi sa kaniyang inad't maliit pa siya' sa dkin (sh 'e is still darker [more brunette] than her mother and is shorter yet than I am). A laconic but correct form of comparison is expressed by using pa after a pronoun, especially in asking a question. Ex.: Hiadi mo nad but, ak6 pa? 74 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. (It was not reached by you; shall I?). Ifindi ko naaalaman; ikao pa? (I do not know it; do you?). For the negative form of the comparative, as in such phrases expressed in English by "without comparison," "there is nothing like it," "there is nothing resembling it," etc., Tagalog has several expressions almost alike il meaning, which are formed by prefixing ka to various roots; the negative wald, (there is no [t]) with the tie n/ preceding the root and its prefix. An is sometimes found as a suffix with these expressions. Ex.: Walang kahalimbdua, without comparison; Walangkahalintilad, without similarity (generally in speaking of objects); Walang kattlad, without similarity; unlike; both the foregoing from tulad; Walanlg kahambing, without resemblance; synonym; Walang kawa/.niis, without resemblance; Walang kaholilip, without likeness (this phrase is rare); Walang kamukhd, without facial resemblance, from muk-hd, face; Walang kapantay, without an equal; referring mainly to height, length, rank; Walang katalamitan, without resemblance (a rare expression); Walang kawangki, without resemblance (also a rare phrase). To ask questions as to comparative equality, inferiority, or superiority is done in Tagalog with ga (how) prefixed to alin (which), or and (what), in conjunction with ka prefixed to the root of the quality. With many adjectival roots ga and ka thus serve to show that the degree of the quality is the subject of inquiry. Ex.: Gaalin kelayo? (About how far is it?); Gaanong kalaki? (About how large is it?); Gaanong kahab6t? (About how long is it?); Gaalin kaputi? (How white is it?). The answer may be given with the same construction, prefixing ga to a delonstrative pronoun or a noun, as the case may be, but if an adjectival root be used, it should be prefixed by ka. Ex.: Gaifo; ganit (like this); ganiydn (like that); gagatas kaputl (as white as milk); ganitong kalaki (about as large as this); ganoong kachab (about as long as that). Gaya is a variation. Canga,g another form, is generally used to indicate plurality. Ex.: G(anga nito kaleki (about as large as these); gangta ni!/ian kahabd (about as long as those). The noun, pronoun, or adjective compared sometimes takes the nominative and sometimes the genitive in these answers. Ga. and its variations may be said to express likeness, and is but an offshoot of ka. In many cases na is also inserted in the sentence. Ex.: Gaalirg na gaito kaonti? (How small is it, like this?). The letter n instead of i/l is used in some phrases. Ex.: Ganan akin (that which belongs to or affects me); ganan inyo (that which affects you), etc. THE SUPERLATIVE. The superlative degree of the adjective may be divided into the simple and the absolute forms. The first, usually expressed in English by the use of the adverbs "very," "extremely," "excessively," "exceedingly," "surpassingly," etc., is expressed in Tagalog by the following adverbs: (1) Lubhd, very, very much, exceedingly. (2) Masdkit, extremely, exceedingly, hard (as in the phrase, "to rain hard"). Distinguished by difference in accent from mnasakit, (ill). This adverb is used more with verbs than with adjectives. In some places sadyd has the sense of "very;" ex., sadyang linis very clean. (3) Di sapala, extremely, exceedingly, from dei, not, and sapala, humble, unworthy, the idea of the adverb being that of plenty or sufficiency. (4) D1 hdmak, extremely, from di, not, and hidak, vile, worthless, mean, the whole idea being "not paltry," "not mean." (5) i) palak, far, widely. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 75 (6) Labis, too, too much. This adverb has sometimes a slight idea of craft, cunning, or slyness. (7) Tolt'o, truly, exactly, precisely. The adverbs formed with di always follow the adjective in the sentence, but the simple adverbs may either follow or precede the adjective. Ex.: - di sapala. [ Matandd 8iy('t (it hamnak. He (she) is very old (extremely, etc.): dibhda. Mlatandad siya' libiS,.? [toto'o. or Labis siya nmatandal: Ilie (she) is very old (too, truly, etc.). TO to 6 The following phrases will illustrate the various idiomatic uses of the adverbs with the adjective: (1) Lubhd any paykapagal k-o (I am very tired; lit., "very great is my fatigue"); (2) rT-gani, lalony mastk-it -an!; kay Pedro (That's so, but Pedro is still more tired; lit., "but more excessive is [that] of P~edro "); JIniibiyg katany masalkit (We like you very iuch); Pinaysisisihan silangniasd kit (They are repenting (leeply); (3) Afayanan di sapala. siydJ (He is exceedingly wealthy [very rich]); (5) Unymulin nang labis (It rained too much); (verbalized) Napakalabis any k-abutihan mo (You are entirely too good [honest]); Linabisan any utos ko sa iny6' (You exceeded \,our orders; you did more than I told you to do); (6) Tinotot6o niayd ang wvikda (He is comp~lying with his word [verbalized form of lot6o]). The absolute superlative degree of the adjective (in the singular number) which is madle in English by the suffix " est " and by the ad verb " most" is generally expressedl in Tagalog by rep)eating the entire adjective, whether it be simple or compounml, by means of the proper tie, which is determinedl by the ending of the adjective. Ex.: M1abutog miabuti (best); mlasamanymason (wvorst); hanoim na banal (most virtuous); Masipay na mosipay (most diligent); vmhal na ma~hal (dearest, most precious); maputing niapnut! (whitest., very white); 'rnitimn na maitimt (blackest, very black). The plural of such superlatives as the for~egoing is formed by using the lparticle ma)T9d with th(,se formed from simple adjectives, and Neither with mari~ga or the reduplication of the first syllable of the root with those comipounded with ma, the superlatives thus formed, either in the singular or plural, generally being printed as two words in order to avoid unnecessary length and also to distinguish more clearly from some (liminutives. Ex.: The dearest [persons or objects understood] (any mnai~dl Mahal na Mnahal). The best [persons or objects understood] (any nmafi-gyd mabutiny mabuti; anyg mabubutiny mabubuti). The worst (persons or things understood), any mnarT-gy mnasamany masamnld; any masasaimnyn mnasasama. The bravest men (any inatiya maaldpang na matalpany no Maoki; any mataotapany )ia mnatatalpany na lalaki). The ugliest animals (any maiTiyd pafiyit no paiTi'fit na ha'yop). What inay be called the relative superlative degree, male in English by adding the expression "of all" or a similar phrase to the superlative, is formed in Tagalog by adding the words sa lahat (of all), so. kanild', (among them), etc. Ex.: ASino sa kanilci'y any lalony matdpany? (Which of those two is the braver?); Siano so. kanila'y any mzat atapanygna msatatalpang? (Which of them is the bravest?); Any maijit sa lahat, siya'y mnatalpany sa lohat (The smallest of all; he is the bravest of all). Superlatives are also formed by prefixing ka and suffixing an (han) to reduplicated bisyllabic words, and in the same manner with polysyllabic words, in the latter case only the first two syllables being reduplicated. 7 6 TAG ALOG LANGUAGE. Ex.: Katamitamnisan (sweetest), froin trn~s; kubanaihanalant (most virtuous), fromn banal; kaginhaginlatuaaaan (moast wholesome), from ginhaoa. The first twvo roots have two syllables anti the last has three. This formn mmay also be applied to abstracts formned withi ka an (1atn (hart), -antI intensifis them. Ex.: Kaitarnisart(sweetness); kI,-amnistarnis(ot (sweetniess itself); A-alhatalart (virtue); kabanalbanalan (virtue itself); katamnaran (laziness); kataitartamroaan (laziness, laziness itself). Verbs have a certain superlative form, which miav be nlentione(I here for the sake of association. It is imade by rejpeating the verbal root unitedl by flanl. Ex.:Hii77ifi aoiglt;hji ~(ask ail(l ask over againi); l('tkad anyglikatlI (walk and walk); ''yes'' naty ''yes'' aiig wrikain mio (say yes over arid over). This form is also found with nouns, etc. SEcTIO.N FiVE. THlE NUMERALS. The numerals form a smiall noun-group by themselves, having the threefold thIaracter of subs,,tantiv-e,adjective, and adverb). WV ile the distinction between adjective and noun is not so sharp as with somne other words, yet it is clear that the cardinals in Tagalog are nouns,,, as they showv by always ptreceding the noun affected that "of" must be understooti. Thus iimanq k-alabao literally ineans "five (head) of cattle," anid this holds good in all cases. In Tagalog there are four classes of numerals-cardinals, ordinals, adverbials, and distributives. Thie cardinals are: One. Isc. Seven. PRO6. Two. Dalauwa. E'ight. Wai610. Three. Ta tl6. Nine. Si~yamn. Four. Ap~at (accent on first sylla- Ten. San gpou06 (contr. of isanY b)le). p)ouo, ''one ten''). Five. Lbund. Six. Anima (accent on first svllable). As in English, diecimnal numeration, by tocns, is that used in Tagalog, and throughout the Malayan~ faimily of languages. But Tagalog uses a peculiar formi in. thle numerals froni eleven to nineteen, inclusive, which differs from the mnethod followeti in every other language of Luzon. Labi, meaning "adtling," and a variation of labis, is prefixed t~o the digits by means of the euphonic tie rii-; poud, ten, being understood. Eleven. htbing isa'. Sixteen. Labing ainirn. Twelve. Labing (dalawda. Seventeen. Labinq pit6'. Thirteen. Lab~ inytati6. Eigh teen. Labiny wal6. Fouirteen. Labio!, 6m1pat. Nineteen. Labiny siyamn. Fi fteen. Labiny lima'. The mlultiples of ten below one hundred are formed by prefixing the tligit used as the multiplier to the word potvd, united by the proper tie. Twenty..Daiawtrtg pou6'. Sixty. Artimntal poud'. Thirty. Tatlong pott6. Seventy. Pitong poud'. Fot. Apat na p~ouo. Eighty. HWalongy poud'. Fifty. Lirnany po'u6. Ninety. Si yam, na I)0u6. The intermediate digits, when used with the foregoing, are joined by means of 't, a contraction of at (and). Twenty-one. Dalawang pouo't isd. Fifty-five. Limarmg pouo't lina'. Thirty-three. Tatlong pouo t tatiod. Sixty-six. Ansim, na pouo"'t dinii. Forty-four. Apat napoud't alpat. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 77 The wordl for "hundred" is ddai), which has a homionymn meaning ''roal.'' It is always lprecedei lby the appropriate multiplier, to which it is connected by the proper tie, d softening to r before na. One hundred. Isang ddan; sang- Five hundred. Limang ddan. ddan. Six hundred. Anmna roan. Two hundred. Dalawang d1(an. Seven hundred. Pit ong (lomn. Three hundred. To(tlong ddan. Eight hundred. 1I along (hlon. Four hundred. Apatrua ruan. Nine hundred. Siyomu no rdan. Numbers below twenty added to hundreds are unitedl with 't, the it of ddan being (Iropped. One hundred anid one. 8on qldmi't isdi. Two hundred and eighteen. Dahtawaing dda't labing wal6. The r is retained with niultiples of ten. Two hundred and fifty-three. Doataoomg (loan linang ponto t tatl6'. Six hundred and sixty-six. Anim na roant anim na ponoj't 6inm. Eight hundredt and eighty-eight. W1(olng dloan walong pom6't walo'. Nine hundred anid ninety-nine. &gyani na rdan siyam no pou 't siya. The word for " thousand " is libo, which is found as rnbo and r~ib in other Philip~pine languages. It is governed, like ddtan, by multipliers and suffixed numbers. The, purely Malayan numerals end with libo, those for higher numbers being of foreign origin. Some higher numbers are said to have M~alayan namnes, hut it is doubtful as towhether their values are definite orinot. They are noted, however. One thousand. Sanglibo. One thousand anti eight. &anglibo't wal6'. Nineteen hundred and five. K~anglib() siyamn na ra'a't lind'. Two thousand. Dalawvang libo. Six thousand. Anim, rut libo. For " ten thousand" the term lak.sa is used. This is from the Sanskrit laksha (one hundred thousand), through the Malay sa-laksa (ten thousand), the latter peopleimistaking its value. Lakh, with the original value of *'one hundred thousand," is used by Anglo-Indians, as in the phrase "a la kh of rupees." For "one hundred thousand " another Sanskrit term is used, also with altered value. This is yuta, from the Sanskrit ayuta (ten thousand). " One million " is now expressed by sangpouong yuta, or "ten one hundred thousands." Gatos and anrigao-angao are given in old dictionaries as equivalent to "million," but the former is the word used for "hundred" in most Philippine dialects, anid the latter seems to have more the idea of "1uncountable," "infinite," etc. In expressing num-bers Tagalogs sometimes give a round number, less the few taken off, as "three hundred and sixty less two" for "three hundred and fifty-eighit;" e. g., kd'lang nang dalawd sa tatlong ddara anirarno 1)ou 6. Cardinals may be preceded by ang (the), when a concrete noun is modified, as in the phrase Ang dalowang pisos na ibinigay mo so akin (the two dollars which you gave me). _1(i-ga6T preceding a numeral indicates the idea of "about," "somne," etc., as in the phrase mnaTga pitong taluo (about seven men). When the exact number is indicated snarigal is omitted as a sign of plurality. Ex.: Mai7ga'c talvo (men, people); pitong t~vo (seven men, persons). By reduplicating the first syllable of the cardinal the idea of "only" is brought in. Ex.: Jisdi (only one, alone, etc.); dadalawad (two only, only two), etc. For greater emphasis upon the idea of limitation the number may be repeated with the initial syllable reduplicated. Ex.: Iisdisa' (one only); dadaladalauad (only two). The adverb lcb-nang (only) may also be 78 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. used for this same idea, the adverb following the cardinal affected. Ex.: Is(t ldmang (only one); dalaw(d lam)ang (only two), etc. It will be observed that the first two syllables only of polysyllabic numerals like dalawd are repeated, following the general rule in Tagalog. The question "How many?" is expressed in Tagalog by ildn? Tagalog has no abstracts like "a dozen," "a score," etc., these phrases requiring roundabout means of expression. "A dozen" may be translated by isang kapisanan nang labinr dalawi, which literally means "a joining of twelve." The same is true of English abstracts like "monad," "decade," etc. "More," with a cardinal following, is expressed by labis or higit, which precede the numeral and are united with it by sa, which expresses "than." Ex.: Labis sa limta, or higit sa limli (more than five). Labis is the more correct, as higit has an idea of excess in weight rather than in number. Ktilang (less) is used in the same way. The indeterminate numeral "some," "a few," is expressed in Tagalog by ilin. With the first syllable reduplicated or with l(d5mang the idea of "only" is expressed; as, iil(di or ilirn Iln(m(a (only a few). "Much," "many," and similar wordls are expressed by marami (from dami), and "a great many" may be translated by maraming marami. By making an abstract of dami and prefixing the definite article of common nouns is expressed "the most," "the majority," etc. Ex.: Ang karactihan. For the meaning of the numerals, see the work by T. H. Pardo de Tavera, entitled "Consideraciones sobre el Origen del Nombre de los Numeros en Tagalog," published at Manila in 1889. ORDINALS. The ordinals, which are the numerals designating the place or position of the object in some particular series, have more of the character of adjectives than have the cardinals. They answer the question Iktilin? (In what order?) and are formed in a very silllle manner in Tagalog for all numbers except "first," which is quite irregular, ika being prefixed to the cardinal. It should also be noted that the first syllable of dalawd (two) is omitted, as well as the initial letter of tatl6 (three) and 6pat (four) when preceded by ika. "Twentieth," however, is formed with ika and the entire cardinal. The ordinals up to "tenth" are: The first. Ang na6na. The second. A ng ikalawc6. The third. Ang ikatl6. The fourth. Ang ikdipat. The fifth. Ang ikalim(i. The sixth. Ang iklnim (initial letter dropped). The seventh. Ang ikapit6. The eighth. Ang ikawalo. The ninth. Ang ika.siyanm. The tenth. Ang ikapoao; ang ikasangpouo. In the southern provinces ang ikapol6 is sometimes heard, due to Bicol and Visayan influence. Pol6 and pol-lo is also to be found in tile dialects spoken to the north of the Tagalog region, and this form may be found in the north, but should be regarded as extraneous to the language. The following synopsis of the ordinals above "tenth" will give an accurate idea of their formation: The eleventh. Ang ikalabing isa. The twenty-fifth. Ang ikadalawang pou6't limai. The thirtieth. Ang ikatlong pou6. The fortieth. Ang ikdpat na pouo. The forty-fifth. Ang ikdpat na pou6't limd. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 79 The fiftieth. A ny ikalimnang pou6. The sixtieth. Ang ikadnint na pou6. The seventieth. Ang ikapitong pou6. The eightieth. A ny ikawvalony pou o. The ninetieth. A ny ikasiyaoi na pou6. The one hundredth. A4ny ikasanydadan. The one thousandth. Any ikasanylibo. The one ten-thousandth. Any ikasanglak-sa. Nouns following ordinals are tied to them according to the ending of the numeral. Ex.: Anygik-alinany tau()o (the fiftlh 1erson); any ikatlony irao (the third day). In Tagalog, contrary to what obtains in Spanish, the ordinals are used for all days of the irionth, and thus agreeing with Engrlish. Ex.: Ik-ail~ln arao i7jay'n nang bunny ito6? (Whatd(ay of the inonth[s hs) ayialawvanygpoun;t pit6 (thietwenity-seventh). Anionygadrao kayd r't~tayo'n sa sany-i linyo? (What day of the week is to-day?); Nygayo'y viernes (to-day is Friday). Anong taon? (What year?); sanglibo,.s iyarn na ra'a't linial (nineteen hundred and live). Anony buan r?7gay6n nany tao'n? (What month is this?); any buan nany enero, po6 (the month of January, sir). An6' ang pafi-galan?no? (What is your namie?); Glicerio, po6 (Glicerio, sir). Anygikalauany party-alan (The second name [surname]?); Afanalo, p6' (Manalo, sir). Taya saadn L-a? (Where are you from?); Batanyas, p6' (Batangas, Sir). 116n ka nany tao'n? (Hlow old are you?); Afayroo'n akony dalawany pouo't linia' (I am twenty-five years old). Saan naroon any preside'rte? (W~here is the presidente [mayor]?); Nariyadn sa ikalawany badhay (There in the second house). Fractions are expressed by the use of any (the) if the numerator is one, the (lenomninator being the ordinal desired, and bahayi (a part) following the denominator either expressed or understood. Numerals may replace any. Ex.: Ang 'ikalawany bahayi (the second part); any ika pat (the fourth ), etc. AlIso isany bahayi (one part); tatlony bahayi (th ree parts). Where the numerator is greater than one it is placed in the nominative andI the denominator in the genitive, the two being connected by nany and the phrase followed by bahayi. Ex.: 74tlo6 nany apat na bahayi (threequarters); dalawd' nany tatlony bahayi (twvo-thirds). "Half" is expressed by kalahati, as kalahatiny tinalpay (half a loaf of bread). The noun "a half" is expressed by kahati, meaning generally a a half-salapi or 25 centavos. It should be mnentioned that unauna mneans "in the first place," and when made an abstract an(l preceded by the definite article of common nouns, as in the phrase any kaunaunahan, means "the very first." In like manner, hnli (last), when made an abstract in the same way, as any kahulihulihan m-eans "the very last." ADVERBIAL NUMERALS. Adverbial numerals, expressed in English by "once," "twice," etc., and answering the question Nakailainf (past tense) and Makaildn (present and future tenses), "How often?", "How many times?" are formed like the ordinals except that maka is prefixed instead of ika to the cardinals. The word for "once" is wholly irregular. In soine districts these adverbial numerals also express the idea of "fold," as "twofold," "threefold." As with. the cardinals the sense of " only " may be imparted by reduplicating either the first syllable of the prefixed particle or following the adverbial numeral with la'mang. Once. Minsan, var. ninsan Nine times. kfakasiyam. (rare). Ten times. Makasanypou6. Twice. Miakalawd'. Fourteen times. Makalabiny dipat. 80 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Thrice. Afakatatl6'. Four times. Alakmlpad, var. 7taka'tpit (rare). Five times. Makalbiand. Six times. Makainimn. Seven times. M a k ap'i t6. Eight times. Makawal6;. Twenty times. M ak-a~dalawang 7)OU0. Tweritv-fiv'e times. 1ak (Ida lawan g jPotlfo't lirnd. One h undlredl times. ilfakasanqdian. A thousandl timies. Ma k a.sang qli o; makalibo. Naturally, as in all languages, the rest~rictive form is not used for very high numbers. Only once. M1iminsan. Only twice. Matnakalawa. Only three timies. Ma(makatatloj. In this connection it should be remembered that kciilciin? means " when?" used interrogatively. D)ISTRIBUTIVE NUMERAJ. These numerals, expressedl in English with ''by'' between the, numnerals, as 'one by one,' 'two by two,' "etc., answer the (question 11dm) iUtht? ( H owv many at a timue?) and are formed iii Tagalo-g lbv the -simple repetition of the cardlinal if bisyllabic, or the first two syllables thereof if longer, no tie being used. One by one. Isaisa~ 'Two by two. Daladahlawd Three by) three. 2t lot otlo Four by four. Apata-Ipat. Five by five. Lnoo~itlona Six by six. Anionnnin. Seven by seven. Pdo~pitol Eight by eight. W~aloa alo' Nine by nine. Siyoarnisioam. Ten by t~en. Sanrlposangpouo'. Eleven by eleven. Labolabinq iso. Twvelve by twelve. Laboolabbog (lalawa6. 'Twenty by twenty. Daoloidola a(mgf pouo'. One, hundred by one hundred. sad ood'oo One thousand b~y one thousand. SanglisaoogldW. Nouns repeated in this inanner acquiroe tle iolea of " every." Every day; daily. A.oao-a'rao. W eekly (also ev'ery Sunday). iogoqoi ooqo Yearly; annually. Pi r;n-ft )n. H1ourly. Oaos-oras (from Sp., hora). The Tagalog wvord for " every " is tuuwi, which may also be uised. Distributives, answering the question Tigiil~tn? (Flow many to each one?~) are formed by prefixing the particle tig to the cardinals, the first syllable of the latter b~eing reduplicated in those greater than ''four". The, first svllable is dropped from dailawa and the initial t from tatl6'. One to each one. Tigiscit. Six to each one. Ti~ga4nim. Two to each one. Tigalawoi. Seven to each one. Tsgppit. Three to each one. Tigat6. Eight to each one. Tigwa'walo'. Four to each one. Tigiipat. Nine to each one. Tigsisi yaoo~. Five to each one. Tigtldimtd. Ten to each one. Tigsasangpou6. These may be also translated by " one apiece," etc. Tig p~refixedI to cardinals may also express the stamped, coined, or fixed value of money, stamps, etc. In this case the initial syllable of those numerals above four is not reduplicated. N~a is now more generally used TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 81 than fig for this purpose. lEx.: ASe!,roig figatawang centavos (a two-cent stamnp); sataping figtirnang pisos (a five-peso bill or gold piece); figdataw-ang pouong piso.3 (a twenty-peso lbill or gold piece). It must be borne inl mnind that the P1hilippinie peso is eqJual to a half (lollar United States currency, and that it is the legal currency in the, islandls. Hence the old (lebates over " gold " andl "miex. " should be relegated to the lpast. Iii the southern dialect fig is sometimes used to express the time at which. something may be done or has beeis done, as in figaga (to do somnething iii the morning); tigha~pon (to do somnething in the afternoon). The particle voan, prefixed to nouns denoting money, weights, and measures, imparts the idea of "each," "apiece," etc. This particle causes cuphonic changes with some initial letters of roots, as follows: b and p change torni, the finalnu dropping from the particle; initial c (k), and q drop out, modifying n to i77j; s and t (Irop out; d drops out in most cases; initial mi, n, and?T(/ als~o (Irop out, and an initial vowel (a, i, o, and u) modifies the final n of the particle to 7-1j. The foriner monetary system was founded upon the salapt', or half peso, nom-inally worth 2415 cents at a gold basis, and now restored to that value. S~d/tpl also means money in general. The peso of one hundred centavos is wvorth two sata~pl. In the old system the satapt' was, divided int~o SO cuartos, and upon these the people reckoned their inarket and other ininor transactions. As these values and term-s will linger for some time to comle, especially in districts where Tagalog only is spoken, the following examples will prove of use: A peso each or apiece. Manzisos. A half peso each or apiece. Mlanalapt'. A al f (salapil) each or apiece. 3langa hat! (from k-ahati, 25 cen tavos). Areal (124 centavos) each, etc. 21aanikalpat (fromn sikaipat, a contraction of sa ik-apat, to the fourth of a salapi). Ahalf red (6 centavos) each, etc. JIroktiho1 (fromn sikolo6, a (contraction of,a ikawalt6, to the eighth of a salapli). Acuartillo (5 cuartos or $0.03125, or Mfasgaliu (from Witt). P0.0625) each, etc. A cimarto (~0.00625, or 110.0125) each, Jfita-ualtta (from. cuatta, a corruption etc. of cuarfo). The only measure of weight incorporated into Tagalog appears to be the tfihol (fromn the Chinese ftact, which was a very uncertain standard). By treaty the haik-wvan fact or custorns tael of China is now 31 ounces avoirdupois. As a monctary unit the haikivan fact varies from 55 to 60 cents, but is only quoted in banking- operations an(I is not used by Tagalogs. The Philippine tihit may be regarded as slightly heavier than a troy ounce, weighing 509.735 grains, the trov and apothecaries' ounce weighing 480 g-rains, andl the avoirdupois ounce 4371:4 grains. One tdhil each. Mand hit. One ipound Spanish each. Mantibra (1.0144 United States pounds). One kilogram each. JMarfigitogranmo (2.2046 United States pounds). One arroba, (dry) each. Maligaroba (25 libras or 25.36 United States pounds). One " fardo " each. Afainardo (33 Sp. or 33.475 United States pounds; use(I in weighing tobacco). One quintal each. 3fa)Jintat (4arrobas or 101.44 United States pounds). 6855-05 ----6 82 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Rice and grain is sold by the caviln and its fractions, which areas follows: One "apatan" each. Marlgapatcin (0.1981 of a pint, dry). One "chupa" each. Mangatang (4 apatan or 0.7925 of a pint). One "ganta" each. Manalop (8 chupas or 3.1701 United States quarts) (from s(dlop). One "cavlin" each. lMaTyjabi7n (25 gantas or 19.81 gallons). There are 8 gallons to the United States bushel. United States dry measure is slightly different from British imperial. To reduce United States to British divide same named measures by 1.031516, and to reduce British to United States multiply by same. For common purposes use 1.032, whichis close enough. Trautwine. A "cavdn" of rice weighs 133 "libros." One "picul" each. Mamikul (137.9 United Statespounds. Two piculs constitute a "bale" of hemp, abakd). The metric system is now official in the Philippines, and its use is gradually spreading to all sections. Among the native measures of length used with man are the following: One inch each. Manananal (from sangdalt, which in turn is contracted from sang, ''one," and daliri, "inch" ). The Spanish inch is 0.91 of an inch. Daliri also means finger or digit, and the length of a Tagalog "inch" almost exactly corresponds to the "(digit" of the early IHebrews, which was 0.912 of an inch. One "span" each. 3lanangcal (from dngcal, a "palm"). The American "span" is 9 inches,while the Tagalog dangcal is onefourth of a vara, hence 8.25 United States inches. One "vara" each. lMamara (from vara, a Spanish yard, equal to 33 United States inches, approximately, and actually 0.914117 of a yard). One "braza" each. Mandiip (from dip6, a braza, equal to 5 feet 5.8 inches United States, approximately 51 feet). To express the idea of "at such a price apiece" the former monetary units were used with in (hin) suffixed to the unit, of which the initial syllable was reduplicated. The article or object of which the price was to be denoted preceded the unit of value, the two words being linked with the appropriate tie, according to the ending of the first word. Ex.: Pipisohin (at a peso each), librong sasalapiin (books at a half peso each), tinlpay na sisicapatin (bread at a real a loaf), tabacong aaliuhin (cigars at a "cuartillo" apiece). These terms will now only be found used with those people still unfamiliar with the new currency, but as these people speak only Tagalog as a rule they will naturally retain the old terms the longest. The following dialogue fairly represents what may be said in making a purchase in the market: A. Magkano bagdi ang halaga nito? (What is the price of this?) B. Isang pisos, p6 (a peso, sir). A. Mahal nat totoo iydn (that is too dear). B. Hindi p't mura (no, sir; cheap). A. Anong mura? (How [is it] cheap?) B. Kay6 na'y tumauad (you set a price, sir). TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 83 A. Tatlong pesetas acrg ibibigay ko (I will give 3 pesetas [60 centavos]). B. Hindirt pong mlangyayari; dpat na pesetas, p6 (I can not do it; 4 pesetas, sir). A. AMabuti (very well [offers a peso]). B. lWcald akong sukll, p6 (I have no change, sir). A. D)(ldn o iga l sat aming blhay, (do(S babayaran kit& (bring it [them] to our house, we will pay [you] there). B. Malayolo yata? (Is it far?) A. lindi, at doon Idmang sa may cuartel (no, it is there close to the barracks [quarters]). It should be borne in mind that "magkakano" is used when pricing objects of which a part only is desired, such as eggs, bananas, etc. "Magkano" indicates that the entire quantity is priced. The verbalized forms of the numerals will be given under the respective particles, as too lengthy explanations would be required in this place. SECTION SIx. THE ADVERB. By the name of adverb is distinguished that class of words used to modify the sense of a verb, adjective, participle, or other adverb, and usually placed near what is modified, as he writes well, I readily admit, you speak correctly, rerC cold, ttttroll!y brave, very generally acknowledged, much more clearly. (All but one of the foregoing are from the Century Dictionary.) Adverbs may be classified, according to the same authority, as follows: (1) Adverbs of place and motion, as here, there, up, out, etc. (2) Of time and succession, as now, then, often, ever, etc. (3) Of manner and quality, as so, thus, well, truly, faithfully, etc. (4) Ofrmeasure and degree, as much, more, very, enough, etc. (5) Of modality, as surely, not, perhaps, therefore, etc. According to Earle, one of the most distinguished authorities on English, there are three kinds of adverbs, the flat, flexional, and phrasal. (L) The flat adverb, which is a noun or adjective used in an adverbial position, is not considered as correct in books and papers, but is to be heard daily in conversation, as in walk fast, walk slow, speak loud, speak low, etc. In German, this form of the adverb is also literary, as ein ganz sch6nes Haus (a wholly beautiful house); er schreibt gut (he writes well [lit., good]). Adjectives of certain classes may be used this way in Tagalog, and especially those of manner or degree, such as magaling (well); masand (badly); madloll (quickly, briefly), etc., which are also adjectives. There are also flat adjectives by signification, which are explained under the section to which they belong by meaning. (2) The flexional adverb, which is that distinguished by a termination in English and allied languages like ward, ling, long, meal, and ly, as in backward, darkling, headlong, piecemeal, and the great number in ly, such as quickly, quietly, rapidly, etc. Tagalog has no particle which thus marks out an adverb from other parts of speech. (3) The phrasal adverb, which is also called an adverbial phrase, is greatly used in English, and is to be found in abundance in Tagalog. Among English examples may be cited at best, at length, by all means, for good and all, on every side, etc. There are also both in English and Tagalog what may be styled the adverbial pronouns, such as yes and no, together with the negatives not, nor, and neither. Unlike English adverbs nearly every Tagalog abverb may be made into a verb if the proper particle is used, and the border between adverbs and prepositions is very indefinite in some cases and must be determined by the aid of the context. As the form and composition of a word is subordinate to its meaning, the Tagalog adverbs hereafter considered will be classified according to meaning, irrespective of form. 84 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. I. Adverbs of place and motion which answer the question sa'an? "where?" are usually expressed in Taglalog bly sa followed by a root. This root sometimes has thie expulsive particle i prefixed. Where. So4an. Where? 8aan? Where indeed? Sdan rTIja. Anywhere, wherever, somewhere. ASian mnan. Every where. ~Sians(ian mFan). AS~ian redIuplicated. Nowhere. ASoo1n ma'y w1a/a'. From all parts, may also mean to or Sa 8(10 Thman. in all parts. W~here are you from? Taga sdan kLa? Siya' "lie" anil iti/4 " they " may be used in place of ka. Sdtan may be verbalized with urn inserted, forming surnu~an (to be somewhere permianently), and also with maed (not), in the latter case taking the idea of to be somewhere either temporarily or perm-anently, as the case may be. Ex.: Au(sau,(n ang 9wilwha/100n l~'og? (Wh'ere is the ford of the river?); Jtasas~ian siya' baq4,? (Where will lie be?). Soon may be further verbalized by pa, in w,%hich case "to go" is inherent in the meaning. Ex.: iYapanian $hia? (Where did lie go?); NXap~tasa'1ar( siyd? (Where is hie going?); Putsasuian siq (J? (Where will he go?). A~aan has been corrupted to Iatan in some districts, owing to Bicol and Visayan influence, the former using haen andl the latter hain. Soon has an entirely (lifferent meaning with pa following or even alone in somie cases, expressing a negative iilea similar to "not yet, etc. In 1locano sian is also the negative lparticiple "no." Stan pa? also mieans " where then? " in rather a sarcastic manner. W~ith di' added to &nian pa an affiri~ative interrogative meaning is expressed, as Sdan pa (it' tot6o? (1-ow can it not be true?0). It must also be noted that in Manila arid lplaces where Spanish is largely spoken that some particles are used in a different manner than is the custom in rural districts. Thus, ''Where are you going?'' is expressed in the country by naian ka, paro'ro~o, hut in Manila by switai L-a p)ap(troo(ji. Other express-ions of lik.e niature are Siatn am, putroroona~n vo? in which the definite is used, andl san L-a nigrnu/i? (Where did you start from?. Another similar question is ~S'aan ka naogaqag/lnq1? (WNhere are you coming fromn?). The answer is generally given with sat in the sense of from: ~Sa, Ma/abo'n (from Malaborn); soa linus (from linus); sa bnihay ka (fromt mly house), etc. There are four siniple adverbs of place, which have heretofore been explained at length, and here only some idiomiatic uses will be set forth. These adverbs are dlini, dit5j, dity6m, and (loon. Dini, meaning "here'' (toward the speaker), is verbalized by urn, in the sense of taking a place near the speaker, etc. Ex.: -Doumrni L-a (take your Iplace here); dunginidini aNa ( am taking ray place here); dnngrniaii ako6 (I took my place here); diriri (ilita (I will take miny lilace he~re). With mag (nag) it is verbalized in the transitive sense, requiring an. object. Ex.: Magr-ini L-a niyaug find pay (put some bread here by me). With pa the idea of motiomi toward the speaker is expressed. Ex.: Parini La (come here toward nie). This last form may be further comipounded with the lparticle pa, definite, corresponding to mtagpa, indefinite, to express the idea of coirinanlding, requesting, etc. Ex.: Paparinnlin 1100 si Oar/as (tell Carlos to caine over here). "Over there" is expressed by sa rini. Dito, meaning "here" (equally close to both speaker and person addressed), is verbalized in the same way as dini. Ex.: Durnito6 La (take your place here); paried La (come here); paparitohin mo si Carlos (tell Carlos to coine here); Pinaparit6 mao siy4? (Did you tell him to come here?). The four adverbs under discussion admit the definites of i and an. That in i is compounded with k-a, forming ika, ikina; and in nmay be used when uanited TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 85 with pa, the definite of magpa, as may be seen in the last two examples. The future is Pap~ariritohinumo siya'? (WVill you tell him to come here?) and the present Pinaparirito'mo siy'? (Are you telling him to come here?). Reason or cause is expressed by ika, ikina prefixed to thle adlverb as a rule, althoughi " why? " can also be expressed by ano? as in 11(016 Aa riI6? (Why are you here?). Thle more idioinatic way, however, is with ikina, as An(; a~ny ikinaparit' mno? (What was the reason you camie here?). lian, is used if the idea of place is to be made emphatic, as 1Srio ba(ga' any In naritohan mno? (Who did von come here to see?). "Time " is generally expressed by panahdn, which also mneans ''weather,' as Ano't dt' ka vaall/Oto' sa kapaoahonan? (XWhy didn't you come here in time?). "XWhat" is expressed by an6, as AYayaanm ka di[o? (W hat is your business here?); Maquaind siyd' dit? (What is hie going to do here?); Anhin bag(JI? (What of that?) or (What is there to do?); Ioaand ka? (What is lbeing done to you?); Inand kaf (W~hat was (lone to you'?); -Ilindi kavisoaaaoo (nothing cami be done to youl). Du'mui 6, with the particle inayka andl its variations, signifies ''to conie here for a particular reason or cause." Ex.: Ay ait nagkcadurnitd ka? (For what particular reason didl you come here?); Any ipinagk-akad'amnit6 ko'y si Cabe~sang Tiniorms (thle ''cabeza'' Tonilis is particularly responsible for my being here). The first of these two sentences is indefinite, grammi-atically speaking, and thle last definite. For their giammuatical construction see the, particle rnagyk(t, which. is usedl with. this signification with all four of the simple adverbs of place uinder (liscussion. For a tabular conjuigation of ditod see the tables of verbs. To express simply the time or reason for "coining here,'' i with. iinaimay also be used, although ikina is more correct. Ex.: A4nd ang ipinarito' rno? (Why did you cornme here?). The indefinite is more usual Avith kjail.,In, "when." Ex.: Kaildn ka naparitd? (When did you coirie here?'); kahapor (yesterday). Diyin, " there " (near at hand), has the same construction as the foregoing adverbs. Ex.: Mlagdiyadn ka nang t1tbig (put some water over there). DXon, there, yondler, is lperhaps more commonly used in its various modifications than the other three sinmple adverbs of place. It may be -verbalized with urn, pa(, puina, andnimay/ca as they are, with the same effect upon the root. Pa; anll magka mollify the d to r. Ex.: DInonon ka (station youirself there). P'aro'on ka (go there). Paparoontin 100 si Carlos, (tell Carlos to go there). Pi'oaparo'on 5(n0 siya'? (Did you tell himi to go there?) (itan ka pa'rorolon? (Where are you going?) Sromie localities, notably Manila, repeat then particle pa with the present andl future of the adverbs of place; but this is irregular and incorrect. It is uniknowNn to thieearly writers. Ahoy,ibatyan any p~aroroontan 55o0 (What town are you going to? Lit. " Which town will be your going place?") An (15 -inomaparoroo' o aAanbi (Wy are you going to Manila? Lit. "What the cause of going there your to Manila?") Ay at m~aykadunmdon ka.? (For what particular reason are you going there?) Any ikinaparoroon k-o'y dalauin any aikiny k-apatid na babaye (I am going there to visit myv sister). Mlay/ca prefixed to ddon alone means "to have." Ex.: Kanyg'mak-aroJon sanai akod nany 7naramnunyg piltak, ay ihindil ak6' mYayk-akatymoito6 (If I had plenty of money, I would not be in this fix). Any pinafqkakaroonan, fiya' any 1Balacain (Ile has considerable property in Bulacmin). A ny ipinay/cakardon niya' any pamana sa kaniya' nany in6 niya'. (He [she] has plenty on account of the inheritance to him [her] from his [her] mother.) The foregoing illustrates thle indlefinite idea of the third singular personal p~ronouni, which nay mean either "lie" or "she." In English this is confined to the plural, "they" indicating either sex, as Tagalog sild, while Spanish distinguishes by ellos, " ellas. " M1an gives the idea with ddon, " to be there," "to have there," 7nayga indicating really "to have plenty." Ex.: Bigyfin mo sild nany mand6on (take one of those over there), isany mando'on (sanydodon) (one out of many things over there); sanddony lasnitany sue/cd (a small bottle of vinegar); 'isany nmadoro'on (a person who has 86 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. plenty). The word may prefixed to d6on for-ms thiewell-knowniand lmuchused indefinite Tnayrolon, to have. Ex.: Mlayr6o'n kang boyd- nanyj tinalpay! (Have you any bread?) 3Mayro'on k-an! paroroonan? (IDo y ou lav-e to go there?) 06 r~iqa, miayrd'on akony paroroonan (Yes, ind~ed, I have to to go there?). Mayro'on kav any ilony tc050 (How 01(1 are you? Lit. have you of how many years?) M1ayrolon akony dolawony pow) (I am twenty; lit. Have I twenty.) With sonie suffixed particles d6on is muodified as follows: D(;on din (in the same place there); diion sa ib(i; ddon dna (in another place); sa d6on (over there); sa ddon momn (anywhere over there). Many phrasal adverbs are made by the particle.4a which means among other things at and in when placed before a root. Among the most iniportant phrasal adverbs of p~lace with sa are: In front; facing. In the presence of; to the front. Behind; back of. bef ore; opposite; Joined to. At the edge or side of. On the other side of; beyond. Outside. Inside; within. Above; up. Below; down. Sa tapat; tapat coj. Ex.: /ony ha/way ay tapat sa sdlat'yan (this house faces the east). Tapot has also the idlea of setting out in rows, regular order, etc., such as trees, plants, etc. Sa hdrap. Sa horap nang caipit(0n (before the captain). ASa licad. Ex.:,Ai niy aliga bJa/iy sa, li/kod vacmy cuartel (the houses back of the barracks). -,my li/c-od (the 1)ack). ~Sa tabi; synonym. so.spinq. Sa ka-bildI. 'With vinyg the idea of "both" is brought in. Ex.: Sa inag/cobilI (on both sides); and by the reduplication of the first two) syllables of the root the idea of "tall" is Cxlpressed. Ex.: Sn miaykabik-/Nbda (on all s-ides). Ao~paro6n sil1i,~t,/co-bildl molly i1oy (they went over there beyondi the river). Sc vnoyk-abdla many kataocmn (on both sides of the body). Kabildl has also the idea of "artlyv" and is used idiomatically when speaking of rice. Ex.: I/any komin a/f kabdaml (this rice is but half cooked). In speaking of anmything else, with the sam-e idlea in mnind, the usage is (luite different. Lx.: Itoroy sisiau ang kobild'y lntt't any kabildy /hindil (this chicken is partly cook and partly not). Sa lbab's. Sa b6ob. This phrase is much used to express the idea of t/oe /heart, slpeaking in a moral sense. Elx.: Sc tanahlqj idob (whole-heartedly; with all the heart). Sa ita'as (fromt tda's and expulsive particle i). Sc iba4A1 (fromt ba-ba, idea of low, humble, with expulsive particle i). This word should not be confused with the following. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 8 87 Upon; on; above. 'Under; beneath; at the bottom of. Halfway (between two points). In the miiddle. Around; about; close to. As far as; uip to. To the right. To the left. Forward. Back ward. At home; in, to, or from the house. In, to, or from town. In, to, or from the country. In, to, or from the mountains. These adverbial phrases can bei with the proper root. Sa ibabao (from babao and i). Ex.: Sn ibabao vang baindok (upon the mi-ountain [mountains] ). Bab(!o, with accent upon the last syllable, means patst, as baboto sa hating gab-i (past or after nmidnight). It also means ''near ' in some places. Ex.: Iobao baga' a10 bayan sa atin? (Are- we perchance near the town?) Malopit is now the ordinary worml used for " near. " Sa ihili~n (froin lailim, root of idea of depth and expulsive Ilarticle i). Sa gibi'Ia. Ex.: Aasogitinf tayo sa paglako(1 (we are halfway in the march [trip) or journey]). Sa po!Jitan (f ron gitnd) ASa paqitan nang lansai yan (iii the m-iddle of the street). Also mneans " termn." lEx.: I1alovg bitnn aug pagitan (a terin [period] of eight months). Sa miaij. Ex.: ASO, may cuartel (close to the barracks). Hangein. Ex.: S~an ang tuTf/o?no? (Where is your trip to?) Hangain Mn aynild. Ilangami dito' (uip to here). Also has the meaning of " 4until. " Ex.: Jiangan bdkas (until to-morrow). Sa kanan. Sn ka I vd. Pa hairap. iPatalikod. Sn b (1h ay. Sn bayanr. Sn bdkid. Sn b'nndok. ndefinitely increased by the use of sa Toward. Dako. Ex.: Dako sdtan ang tufi-go vi Juan? (Toward where is John's trip?) Dnkomg layrnil& (toward Manila). Dako sa'an ang tuar-go mo? Toward where is your trip?) Dakong bayan ko'y arng tusfgo ko (my trip is toward my town). Toga saan ka? (Where are you from)? Bosoboso, p6' (Bosoboso, sir). Dokong kanan (toward the right). Dak-ong kaliwd (toward the left). Approaching. Ddpit. Ex.: Dadpit Mfaynilcl (approaching Manila). Daipit ibabd (approaching the lower country). Dcipit so iy6' (approaching you). DRmpit has also an idea of "beyond, " "on the other side of." II. Adverbs of time and succession, which generally answer the question kail~in? (when?), are quite numerous in Tagalog, showing that the conception of time was well developed for a primitive people, only the hour and its subdivisions being unknown to the language, except as de 88 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. rived from Spanish. However, the day was quite minutely subdivided according to the position or absence of the sun, and while now generally out of use these terms are also given. When? When (used relatively). Then. Al ways; constantly "whenever "). Kail'n? E x.: Kailain sild naparito'? (When did they come here?) Kail~n man (always). With negative, translated by never. Ex.: IKaildin man hindi -(always not or never). Kail~invman siya'y hindi 'imgiflifloanang cape (he [she] neN-erdrinks coffee). Kailain pa mtan (no more), also kaikailan 9a'y hindli. Di itantaka ildn (mnany tirmes). (1) Knn.. Comimonly used only with present and future tenses, bu t may be used with past indefinite if action is represented as customnary. Ex.: Kim dar~iting auig capitoin, alarnin mio al6' (when the (captain comes, let mne know [future]). Anun (14o6y natror6on sa Mlaynla' vapasasalmnida akongy?)Ia ntl it (when 1 was in Manila I often went to the Lumeta [past timie with customary action] ). Kun htuwi (whenever). Kung minsan (sometimies). Kun is also usedl as a preposition, " if ". See under "if " (2) NXang. Used with both definite and indefinite past tenses. Ex.: N a n g ni n ', ( l n l a o o k a a i u rit6i sild', (when he caine to visit them- last night, they were not here). Niwy daemoting siyci niakakain va (ako (when hie caine I was through eating). (3) N~jon, niyo'n, niy6 on. These wordls mean really "in those days,' ''"at that time,'') etc. Ex.: NV~on i.'amq 6(00 ay artgyiart (my paglabok4-i sn boots (on that day the fight at Initis took place). N 6on,7 71arit/n pa sn M aown /n, a ny mnania' Castila (wNhile the Spaniar(ls were vet here in Manila). Perhaps "then" iii some cases would he the best translation. D~o'o. Ex.: Kun ktonain ka, d;on mI'aaalaman wo, kan ano any Annien (when you eat then you will know what you. are to have). With pa following (loon lhas an idiomatic use. Ex.: Ba/ni' pa'!, gunmagawd nany yatito6, (loon p~a kun bunraki? (A boy yet, and doing so, what will he be then when grown up?) (somethimes Tuwli. Lx.: Tuwiving tuwi (htealnang tttwi) mayro'on kang gawal (you have,something to do always). Tetwing sumcdat ka~( whenever you TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 89 write-). As adjective tuuI means "every." Ex.: tun-ing6rtoo (every (lay). In some cases it mneans "as long as." Ex.: Tuwing d'i wpoid~ wig poigkaltaio (as long as manhood is not extinct). Among other expressions may be mentioned wvaling humnpao, without end; walong likat, without fail; 'wvai(mg tOhoo, without sto1), incessantly; wlalinny togot, without rest. There are two exlpressions usedl for 'eternallyN,' formied with the prefix inagpa to a root which is followed lby moman(Mimi. Ex.: Maypatd'loy inan soon; and magparailing (ddtirg) viun &~an. Another phrase is vogpokailan, man, or mzagposakailan won, both of which signify always. N\ever. AKoil~in man —h ndti. S4oietimes. Kung mnminn. MaMinsanmirsan, (from timnetotime; now andthen). MVisandoud' (rarely). Ex.: Mfisan(10u0 lornorg ang pagpairito6 MO (your coming here is rare). Seldom. Bilura. Ex.: Bihirang tungmatafi~gis itong botang ito6 (this child seldom cries). Often. Jfalirnit. Ex.: Afalbidt akong suogmmusd'at (I write often). Since. Tarnboy. Ex.: To-mboy kany natis (argnoolis) (since you left). 31ida'i. Ex.: Muld kahapom (since yesterday). The particle pagka sometimes denotes "since," as in the phrase poykobafld Lo (since my childhood). "From" would be an equally correct translation. Ago; since. Koooiika(,fromnLa andt mako). Kamakaidang droo (soine days ago). Before a cardinal followed by drao, "day," kainoka indicates the number of days which have elapsed. Ex.: Kamotkolowd (day before yesterday), lit.,' 'two days ago;" kanmakalimang airao (five days ago). Ka prefixed with pa following a root also indicates "since." Lx.: Kohapom pa (since yesterday). Ka alone indicates past time, with some roots. Lx.: Kahapon (yesterday), fromi hopon (afternoon). Kagoibi (last night), from La and gabtr (night). As soon as. sSa, used adverbially, denotes iinmediate action, usually beginning a subordinate clause, which refers to a principal clause. Lx.: ~Sa pagkamadlay niya' nang lindol siya'y tungmakbo' sa laba's (as soon as he 90 90 ~~TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Now. Already. Yet. Before; withal; as it m-ay be. Before; a while ago. Anciently. hie felt the eairthquake he ran outsidle.S)asftny iugiIu( wika ai vaiwiho/ (as soon as these wordls were -aidl by him, hie (lied). Pdg, thle (lefihilteof wa~g, somyetimies indlicates this idea. Ex.: Pagsabi kosa 4(.~lauda (as soon asltoldthein). Pagka m-av' also have the same m-eaning, as ])gkiapatgaa rad ho, wnagpapasial /ko (as soon as t have ~studied, I ilgo for a walk). Ngayojn. Agpoyni din (right now). This is also expressed by i7gjay6)i i~'yn Xaf~(o7)anfay('n( or nagpatkan igay(' n (u Up to iiow) Mlagpaitga.yon (for the fnture). Nqayogog irao (this day). NA7a. This particle is in constant use, and is always 1)lace(I last. Ex.: AXapm!1'Wlt Ia si!Pt (lhe has gone already). There are many other uses of na in Tagyalog, which will be set forth as they occur in the exam lles. Pa. This particle, as an adverh, is, like no, always p~laced after the -word modified. lEx.: Ii pa (one vet); mo/ i, nn pa? (Is there anything there yet)? it is also used speaking ironically. Ex.: 2lk p~a ((In9 poaroroon? (Will I have to go there vet?). ludipa (not yet). Bago. Ex.: Bago kang b'tinasa, walisan mno aug sihid (before you read, sweep the room).-L. B!ago pa" (a while ago). Bago, as an adverb of time, always precedes the verb it m-odlifies. Kan gqina, variation kanina. Kaiihginaig t(augha1t (before noon); k-afigimiang uniaga (this miorning a while ago ). Balarnan wo 7young.sinabi kau iuafit (go back to whiat v ou were talking about before). [Return to the thread of your story.] Kar77jikaug-ina pa (a little while ago, a short time ago). Ex.: KasiTjikan gina narito silihi (they were here ashort tyime ago). Sa vna. ASa uua pang sa u'an (very anciently). Ex.:,So unang 6rao (in the days of old). hMon, which always follows its verb, means "first" either in time or place. Ex.: Ma(sok ka sauna (you enter first [polite expression]). Bago kumnain La, grianhunao ka sauna (before you eat, wash first [i. e., your liands] ).-L. Gatirs sno nunna ((10 it first [def.]). Hintay ka muna TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 9 91 Formierly; anciently. Afterwards. Later; presently; by and by. At once; immediately. At once; immnediately; suddenly; abruptly. Instantly; at once. Instantly; like a flash. Suddenly; in a moment. Off hand; suddenly. (Used with verbs of doing and speaking.) After beginning; upon starting, etc. (wait first [indef.]). Mfuna, used with a pronouin without a verb, comes first, and governs the nomninative. Ex.: Ahoa Loin!S (vou first); muia Li na (you aheadl). So( dati. Saka. Ex.: Gin(urd any Paiaqinoon Dios anig ICaU if, sakd aing bipa (the Lord God made time I-eavens, afterwards the earth). Bib. Nittmaot s8y)/ (she laughed ) ait aa (and afterwards?) L. Sakari'tsakdl (long afterwards). 3MarnakanaZ-4 (after a long (lelay). Nagsasakd-4 so~d- (one who is dilatory in his work or (duties). JMamia!1. Ex.: S~isolat ak-a marnayd (I shall write by and by).-L. M3oanayang ImIpon (later in the afternoon). M1anmaqamoad (one time or another, little by little). Ex.: 11o~, niiwon~oarama!d ko (I (lid this little~ by little,). Mfagmayd' (to dlo anything little by little). Mayipa imparts time idea of w.aiting to this root andl its coinbinations. Ex.: gapapaiwiyaniayq ak6 (I am going to wait a little while). Tambing. This word is out of use in Manila. Ex.: Kunanin ka taninbing [indef.]; tambi inT7in mno kumain [def.] (eat at once). Tam biir7gin mongq kunin (take it at once); itarnbing many imbigay (give it at once). kinfld. Ex.: Agarin many yawvin (do it at once). Commonly used in Manila. Alipala. Ex.: Alipala nagailit siya' (hie became angry at once). Also means "one by one" in some places. Ex.: Alipala '1tiking kunin (I will take them one by one). Kagiat. Ex.: Kagiat naytagibulag siya' sa aking mzatal (like a flash he disappeared from my view; he was out of sight instantly). Tagibulag, idea of disappearing or becoming invisible. Kaginsaginsa (fromi ginsa, repet~ition of root and prefix La). Variation kahinsahinmsa. Kaalamnalam sometimes means suddenly (from alam, reduplicated, and prefix ka). Karak-arak-a. Kap~ag Ex.: Kapagkain ko (after I commenced to eat). Kapagpagaral ko (after I began to studly).-L. Kapaydaka (from the beginning), syn. kapagkoudn. 92 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. After fininishing; upon finishing. Until; while. While; in the meantime. Earl y; soon. Late; tardy. Yesterday. Last night. To-day, To-morrow. MNT idday; noon. To-morrow. Kapagka ~. Kapagkapagdral ko (after I had finished studying).L. Kapa(gkaraka (from the beginning; since time eternal). lHatgain. Ex.: lfangdn Uakas (until to-n-orrow). ll1angadn nabubs'hay sii I (while he [she] is living). Bagk.,-4s also means " until". Sa omaida/a. ilfavga (from aga, morning). Ex.:.Magtipon k(mignmaga., kung duuia'tintg aiig arao, houag kang si7tptmapai gapa (get readly early, sowhien day breaks you will not be gropinig around looking for anything). Agappa, root of " to look around in haste for something".-T. P., 3. lie/i. iEx.: N~thu/i.siyad (he was late). Joig huling arao (the last (lay). Kahiapon. Ka/hapon sa hapon (yesterdiay afternoon). Ka gaW. A~gay'n (orao. Bftkas. B64kas sa aga (to-morrow irorning). Tangha/i (evidently from Malay, tanga ari, With the samne meaning). Ex.: A.non~g hores ag idirmaIthig niyd.? (What tim-e [hour] did he [she] come [arrive]?) Aog idina/jog v y(" cog tnoqimal (hie cam e [arrived] at midday [noon]). A1agpakatiomghahi (to wait until noon).1.,ng ipinaypak-(atughtalt (the cause of having been (delayed until noon). JMaoaogha/i (to work or eat at noon). Jongpanangimalian (what (lonie or eaten at noon). But iianaoigha/i, with acute accent, means to travel at midday. B6aks. floig kabaikasan (the following (lay). lTa/ang bubukasin (without care for the morrow). Ex.: Jhtas kutiq iak-a/ipas8, saliogo kuoig mnakltai/ampts (to-morrow w hen passe'l, on Sunday when grone).T. P., 60. Really means " to-morrow and to-morrow and to-m-yorrow,A, Shak., when there is no reason to believe that it is intendled to (10 anything. Bukds is the root of the verb "~to open," and is only distinguished by the accent. f/clraing ga/ft. Midnight. The ancient Tagalog divisions of the (lay were: Cry (crow) of the chicken. Tue gmikimn cog manuk. Commencing to be light. M3agirnaniaraling a6rao. Breaking of day. Bukang liwaywvay. Becoming morning now. Mfagurnaga na. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 9 93 Morning now. Urnaga na. Dav now. Arao na. The sun is rising now. 8Sisilang na ang arao. Risen now. Sungrnilang na. A little up now (the sun). Mfattastdas nw. About 9 a. m. Ipan ngbdllofJ itanuk (lit., "egg laying of the hien "). About 10 a. in. Masa.,whllna(any (irao (lit., "return now of the sun") Midday; noon. Tang/mn/i. About'half lpast 12. Ba gongl nak-iling ang i1rao (lit., "the sun inclines again"). About I p. m. Lamnpasino (lit., "past now"). About 5 p. m. Jiampasin likin ang araoO (l it., ''to be touched by the 'tiquin' or pole used lby casco men"). About sunset. K(uitdin palacol (lit., "to be caught by an ax"). Sun is beginning to set. Bagong.susukquk ang 6rao. Set niow. Lungmubug no. Another expression is lungmiunod va (lit., "(Irowned Between (laylight and dark. M1asilim na. Also takip silm. Night now. Gabi na. Midnight. Katboong gabi'. The usual word at preseut is hiating gabi. The following adverbs of time are also used in Tagalog: Hourly. Oras-oras (fromt Sp., hora, "hour"). IDaily.' irao-6rao. Weekly. Lingo-lingo (from lingo, " week," which also ineans "Sunday," and is derived froin Sp., Dotrningo, "Sunday") Monthly. Buain-buan (from buan, " month and moon''). Yearly. Ta~n-ta~in (from tao'n, "year"). Continually. Parali. Verbalized, this word has the idea of " perseverance," and in the phrase rnagp)arating nian a~an means "eternally." A synonym. for parali, in the sense of "4continually," is paldlgi. Some day. Balang drao. The particle?naka, in addition to its meanings as a verbal particle, signifying power, ability, cause, etc., indlicates completed verbal action with verbs of doing, -saying, etc., translated by the word "after" with the verb. Ex.: Mfakaoyari nit6'y paroon A'a (after you do this, go there). III. Adverbs of manner and quality, which generally answer the questionvmaan6'? "how?" are numerous in Tagalog, miany adverbs of manner being tile corresponding adjectives used adverbially, especially those compounded with ma. Not all ma adjectives can, however, be so used, andl neither can adjectives which are roots by themselves be used as adverbs. Thus adjectives likevmarioio?-g (wise), mabait (prudent, etc.), ului (crazy) are not used as adverbs in Tagalog. How? Mfaano6? Ex.: Mfaano6 kay6f (How are you?) Magaling (well). JMaano6 ang amna niny6? (How is your fathier?) So; thus; in this way. Ganito6 (from. dit,'). 94 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. So; thus; in that way. So; thus; in that way. Like (requires genitive); thus. Like; as; so. How large; how miuch in extent? Ganiy'n (from diy(dn). Guaayn (to act in that manner). GanOon (from do'on). Gay6n (from yut6n). (Guniayo'n (to act in that way). Ex.: Gay6n ni Pedro si Juan (Juan is like Pedro). Gaya. Gaalin? Ex.: Gaalin k-layo? (How far? [about]). Isang lhoras, p6' (one hour, sir.) Ga has been quite fully explained under the comparative of adjectives, to which the reader is referredl. Among some examples mnay be quoted ga bat6' ang lMob 7ii0 (your heart is like stone), andl gaitohin mio (make it like this). "Both alike" is expressed by kapotia, as may be seen by the examples: saU(afl mo kapoual silatg dalawd~ (prohibit them bot~h alike); ang kap~omn mno tamuo (like you, a person [fig., your "neighbor"]); ak6' wari kapozei Mo0, walang bait? (Am I perhaps, like you, without judgmnent?) Intentionally; purposely. Voluntarily; willingly. By force. Especially; only. As well as, etc. As well as; conjointly. Paksd. Ex.: Pinak sd nilad (they did it intentionally). Syn., sadiyd. Another word is tikis. Ex.: Tinik-is nild (they did it purposely). Keum'. Ex.: Kinnusa bagdt n i a a.? (Did hie [she] do it willingly?) Kinusa, nu a (He [,she] did it willingly). With verbs kusd follows the same construction as to the particles as do the verbs. Ex.: Kusain viong tauagin siydt (call him purposely, i. e., do not for get to (all him). Jkusd mong itapon ito6 (throw this out purposely, i. e., you should have throw~n this out yourself). Pagkusaan mong bigy~rn si Joan (give it to John voluntarily). Kusd is intensified by reduplication. Ex.: Wold kang kusakutsasng gumadnaivlmg oaoman (you (10 not (l0 anything with the least willingness). S'apIititan (from pilit). Ex.: Pilit na ak;' yparu on (I am going perforce). Bukod. Ex.: Boikod siyang nataluaq (he was [has been] summoned especially). Bakod ka sa lahat (you are the only one among all). Mtararnii mian ang gin~o'oy bukod mayaman si Capitans Lnis (there are inany " principales, " but the only rich one is Captain Luis). Tarmiijt is sometimes used in this sense. Akbay, var. agbay; agabay; agapay. Sabay. Ex.: Ang Maaki kasabay nang bayabe (the man as well as the woman, or the male as well as the female).-L. S'nsandopik-i (from sandopiki, idea of punishing another). Hurriedly or more quickly (said to be applied only to whipping). TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 95 Quickly; hastily. Except; besides. Except; excuse me; by permission. Hardly; scarcely. Scarcely; hardly. Nearly; almost. Accordingly. Agreeably. Inside out. Upside down; reversed. Slowly; smoothly; noiselessly. Bigid. Ex.: Namatay &iyang bigid (he died quickly). —L. Verbalized. Ex.: Biglai mo any tutol-imo (hasten [abbreviate] your account [or story]). Libabi. Ex.: Libdn sa iy6, walamy ibany viakaparor~on (except you, there is no other person who can go there). Libin sa iy6 any miu/n, ay dili ko ibibigay (except that you are to be the one taking it, I should not give it). Tabil. Ex.: Tabi' p6', ak6'y dardtan (excuse- me [for going before you, for leaving first, etc.].) This is the shout "cocheros" use, Tabi! It literally means thus: "Aside." Tabi' is also used for a polite correction or contradiction: Singtabli sa iyo6, hhidi gayo'n (you will pardon me, but it is not just like that). Tabilian, refuse heap, rubbish heap, etc. Bahiagyad, var. bahagid. Ex.: Bah1ay na makasiya (it is hardly sufficient).-L. A synonym is butinya'. Bihira. Syn. ara; dat-/ia. Ex.: Dat/ia kong inabutam (I scarcely reached it). Bihirdl also means " 'seldom. " Ex., as " hardly: " Birnibihir4 ko na, any nagsipar-ito (I think scarcely anyone has come here yet). Bi/hirang dit rapar~om0 (scarcely anyone was not there); i. e., nearly everyone was there). Ma/mina pa siya'y bihirang makala'kad (she [he] is weak yet., and can hardly walk [is hardly able to walk]). Bihirdl is verbalized with may and magka. Ex.: Pagbihiraitn mo ang kanin (change the food). Nagkakabihir4l sild' mang pagdararnit (they differ in their manner of dressing). Iladlos. Ex.: 11(1osn amiatay siyd (he [she] almost died). Ayon. Alinsdmnod (from sd'nod, to follow, obey). Baliktad. Ex.: Baliktad ka niyadm (indef.); baliktarim mo iyam (turn that inside out). Touar-ik (from touad). Syn. touamdik. Ex.: Touarik na banta' (lightheaded; injudicious). Marahan (from da/ian). Marahan daham or daham da/iam, very slowly. Dumahan, to go away slowly. Maydahan, to go slowly. Maqpakarahani, to go very slowly. Ex.: 96 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Well. Carefully; in an orderly manner. Badlyv. H-ardl; roughly; vigorously. Briefly; quickly. Strongly. 3fgpak-arahan k-ang lurndkad (go very slowly [indef.]). Pak-arahanin nio an!! paghila (throw it deliberately [def.]). -Mapakarahan, to go very smoothly; slowly, etc. Ex.: Aapak-aralhan va (it has slowed up already; it has (luietedl (own already, etc.). There is also a definite with an. Ex.: l~iharain flU) iyang g(vea no (do that work quietly, etc.). Met. alj ect. Ex.: Mfaraharn ang 16ob niya (hie has a magnanimous heart). loot 'inot, very slowly; ''little by little" is not much in use. Lonay~ loua~y, little by little, is about equal to wrhoaF, etc., andl is usedl generally calling to animals. J1la bitti. Mahuting niiabuti, very well. Syn. ilaigi". Mlfahwtsa. Auahu'say na mnahu'SaY, very carefully; in a very orderly mnanner. Ex.: Ito'y1ga e invi/(omg )wd/utsa, (do this carefully) BNdoin mong ni/al/usall (wrap it up carefully). Jfttmitwo,, to put in order; to arrange; to (lise ntangle. Ma1(gjwak(housay, to arrange wvell; to ssettle things with care. Adj.: "well kept," etc. Ex.: Ihisayva bthok- (well kept hair). A,,ng hirn?'SM~ (what disentangled or set in ordler). Ilusay na U'sap (a careful conversation). Ma, ( i i(. Masamiang rnasarndl, very badly. Ex.:. Natailoq akotng mtasar~nd k-agabt' (I slept badly last night). Malakas. Ex.: IHottag wo ((kong lakkasan nang pan guogai~p'sap (do not talk to me so much in such a rough manner). Kalalakhis kang laintaka (walk with vigor). ftinolak, niyd na walaka's ang bangkd(' (he pushed the banca [canoe] vigorously). Mad(ab11, var. maralt'. Combined with both urn and matg, an anomalous verb is formed, miaqdJumall, to make haste, and in turn this is used with a noun to indicate time. Ex.: Maydraig a o ( short while, or time). Examnples as an adverb of niwdalt are: (wiriin miong mnadall' (do it quickly); wtbihi'n mong madalt' (tell it quickly). Matibay. Ex.: Talian mong matibay (tie it strongly). Walang vunang tibay pagk-asir4'y halinhan (there is no repairing stronger than to replace what is destroyed). -T. P., TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 97 Finely. Frequently; often; closely. Wisely. Swiftly. Judiciously; prudently. -Customarily; commonly..Openly; publicly. Secretly. Do you understand? 6855-05 -7 822. Afanibay, to prop up; to suipport; to sustain. Ex.: Jyanig batong alng puwitnbiba yan fl(ing bualh (that stone is the prop of the house). Miigolig. Mfagaliing na mawg(alil/, very finely. Ex.: Ken giamin akong 200,qalitig (I ate finely). Ang nagagaling, person improving (as from an illness). Gurnaling, to grow better (as a sick person). Maggalhig, to prepare. Galo/iigin, what lprepared. Mangaling, to improve greatly. Makaogalinq, to do good. Ex.: Ang niai-iga gamot (ay si yang ikinayqagaing rang?oan75ga' may so/cit (medicines are what cause the sick to recover). Magpaggaling, to prosper. Mo gpaka galiog, to improve; reform, or correct one's self. Ex.: Afagpa/cagalsing kayo6 flung miaritpa asal nhiy6 (improve yourselves in manners). Kagalifigan, goodness. Ang pinagagaling, thing bettered (present tense). Afalirnit. Ex.: Mialimit a/cong naliligo' (I bathe often). Also name of a close-woven basket made around Bosoboso, Rizal Province. Not expressed by a single word, but by phrases, the adjective martinong, wise, being expressed with the subject in the nominative, and the verb in the infinitive. Ex.: Marm'nong iyang umairal (he teaches wisely), not unginadral siyang rna'rsnong, which would be a proper construction if maruinong were an adverb. Matulin. Thmulin, to do anything swiftly. Magtulin, to go swiftly. Ang ipagtulin, the cause of going swiftly. Ex.: Papagtulinin mo ang bangka' (make the banca [canoe] go swiftly). Matuling tuma/cbo to run swiftly). Katulinan [abst.)] swiftness). Sa bait. Sa ugali, also with abstract, sa kcaugo/ian. Sa hdIyag. Sa lihim. Lihim na gawd, a secret deed. Ang gawang lihim ay nahahadyag din (secret deeds are the very ones found out).-T. P., 515. A ng lihirn ay si yang hdyag (the h idden is what is discovered).-T. P., 414. Hani? var. "hanidi" 98 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Differently. Jointly. Inasmuch. Forthwith; instantly. Why not? Why? it would be better. If it were not. Certainly. Truly. Certainly; indeed. Truly; really. 1b6i. This word alsormeans "other,") "different," etc. In some phrases it has the idlea of "better." Ex.: iba angf p~ogong hull no, sa sufi-gaylan dadatkpIin pa(b~etter a quail alreadty caught than a horned animal yet to be caught).-T. P., 443; i. e., "a bird in the hand is worth two in the bushi.' -Cervantes. The earliest form. in Englishisays, " better one byrde in hand thati ten in the wood," H-eywvood, abt. 1565.T. P.,~ 442, is ibd (rngpo~ong huliaa, sa huhulhin pa (better the quail already caught than the one still to be caught). This is found in Greek: " He is a fool to let slip a bird in the hand for a bird in the bush. " &uinpun. When followed by nang, nito6, namaio, etc., the final n is dropped. Syn., pati. Gagaunti' (f rom unit, idea of a little). Ex.: Mufinting ti'big (a little water). Kaunti, a little, as in speaking a language, etc. Sa sandali'. Ex.: Houag kang mabalam d6on, sumandallt ian lamtarg (do not delay there more than an instant). Sa isanq kisap matd (in the twinkling of an eye). Scan pa dt'? var. Sa, di? MS(an pa di' gayonf (Why not that way?) At arn6? Ay an6o? (Who doubts it?) At or ay joined with certain particles means " why?" Ex.: At di? (Why not?) Mahafi-ga. Si m~aharT-ga (better). KahaJ~t~tahcipa (admirable). Kun dafingan. Pakundar7-gan (for the sake of). Tanto'. Verbalized tantod means to undertstand. Ex.: Natatanto'mo. (Do youtunderstand it?) Diliikopa natalanto' (I don't understand it yet). Toto'o miandin. Also toto'o din; tot~oo si7ga; totoong toto'o (very truly). Totoo inanding toto'o (very truly, indeed). r7-a, var. rrganit. Ex.: Siyd Fa n nagnakao (hie is certainly the thief). Din. (Changes to rna after some words.) IV. Nearly all the adverbs of measure and degree have been fully explained under the comparative and superlative of the adjective. It may be noted here that the adverb is made superlative by the reduplication of the adverb, with the proper tie, in the same manner as the adjective. Many exai-ples have been given on the foregoing pag~es. The only adverbs. no~ted here will be idmang, "onlIy; " siya' na; and sukat na, "enough." TAG4ALOG LANGUAGE. 9 99 V. Adverbs of modality, such as "surely," not, "perhaps," etc., have been treated under other adverbs or will be included with the adverbial pronouns an(1 expressions of affirmation, negation, and doubt. Affirmnative adverbs are fairly numerous in Tagalog. The principal are: Yes. II1deed; without doubt. Also; likewise; as well. Should. Would; should; could (idea of comnpulsion). The principal negative adverbs are No. Not. I (don't want to. Not. Not. Oo. 0p6' (yes, sir [or madamj)). Oo ifija andl 6o 7~ijanit (yes, indeed). PaO~o (to say yes).' Angipaoo (what said). Ang pinaoohan (person to whomi yes has been said). Pala. Siyd pala (it is he, indeed). This word is used in asserting when a thing is certain. Ex.: Ind' pala si Pedro ang nagnalcao? (Is Pedro the thief without doubt?) ~Siya' pala (he is, indeed). Kapala pa (it is clear). Ex.: Kapala pa'y paroro'on ak6' (it is clear that I am going there). Kapala pa'y di parorlon ak6 (it is clear [of course] that I am not going there). Namadn. Man (even). Disin. Ex.: Kun siya'y sustflat disin, ay paror6on sana ak6' (if he should write, I would go there). Sana. Ex.: Ibig ko sana' y 8UMtilat, iiquni' t wald akong leapanahonan (I would like to write, but I have no time). Ak6 ang par6on sana, bago ikao,'y naparito6 (I had to go there, before you came here). as follows: Ilindi. Indi. Ind?"pa (not yet). Indi man; indirinf (neither; not either). Indi na (not now). Indi idmang (not only, solely). Indi'iyadn (not that). Aayado ak6. A' [pronounced abruptly] (I don't like it). Kaayauan [abst.] (dislike). Ang inaayauan (what disliked or refused). Di1. Ex.: Di isa man; di' man naua (in no way). Di' man; di pa (not yet). DI' anhin? (What matter?) Di anhin dato na (for it is said that ~). Di u~nan6 (it is said). Di an6 pa? (How can it be?) DI' q7ga, salamat (may it be thus). 1t6'y di maigi (this is not good). Disino (to who else). Ex.: Disino ang daiirgan mo, kundi' ang capitan? (To who else should your complaint be made except the captain?) Dili, varia. dirt. Mapadiri', to say no. Ang poinadiririan, person to whom no is said (present tense). Magpadiri, to say "no" repeatedly. Ang pinagdirian, the person to 100 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. No (forbidding). There are a few adverbs of doubt meaning the same. They are: Perhaps. Possibly. W~hy? For what reason? Perhaps. I don't know. If it could be thus. whom "no" has been said many times (past tense). Padili ka, say no. Dii i n, no indeed. At the end of a sentence diii sometimes means "or not." Ex.: Babalyad silo, diil'? (Will they pay or not?) Ifoiiag. Ex.: Iiouag na (do not do it now [presupposes previous coinmandl]). llouagi iy~ln (leave that! drop that!) Jiouaganimo iyufl(let that alone). Houagan mong ktnin (do not take it). flouagan wnong itapon (do not throw it out). Ilomigan inong tiiT!'Inan (do not look at it). Ifouag kang par~om0 (do not go there). Pahouagin mo ii any Ottuo niygini (tell that man not to do that). Pahouagan ma iyain dim,6rin sa batcl (forbid that to that child). in Tagalog, as well as some phrases B a g. Kayui. Kay' r37a (just because, just for that reason). Used with affirmative sentences. Kaya' ffTgarit (as soon as). Kay('1 77ggani (since). Used with negative sentences. Mak-akayal, to be able (in a physical sense). Kaya' is also any hunting or fishing utensil or instrurnent. Wari. Fx.: At ak-6 wari por6onf (Why do I have to go there?) With neg., -At di' wari ak6 paroon.? (Whly don't I have to go there?) Up-an. It is never put last in a sentence. Aua'n. Do not confuse with aadyao (I don't want to). N~auad. $iyd naud (it may be this way). Used for "amien." THE PREPOSITION. The preposition, which serves to connect a noun to the sentence, in the same manner that the conjunction introduces or attaches sentences, is not as highly (developed in Tagalog as in English, and for this reason the same preposition means what it would take several (lifferent ones to express in English. The principal Tagalog prepositions are: In; to; from; against; at; by; on; Ba. Ex.: (in) $a bayan (in town); per; between; with; of; among; se, MhIay (in the house); (to) sa for; across. all k.o (to my aunt); sa amfain ko (to iny uncle); sa ama' ka (to my fathier); sa inditko (to my mother), these also inean "for" my aunt, etc.;.sa bihay (to the house); sa iyarn b6hay (to that house); (from) sa b~t/hay (from the house); TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 101 (against) laban sa kaauiay (against the enemy); (at) sa b6hay (at the house); (per) tat16 sa saiigdad (8 per cent); (between) sa magaling at iaasamd (between good and bad); (with) saina sa. kaniy'lng ainak (she is going with her child); (of, rare); (amnong, unusual); (for) patmniJo ko sa America (I am leaving for America); (across, rare). Sa is verbalized, the verbs thus formed being explained later. W~ithout. W1aldt. Ex.: Wald akong salapi' (I am without m-oney). M1aagwaldl, to run. away; to get rid of. MaI~wahi, to lose; to miss. Ex.: Aawalaln (Iko,nang lakts (1 lost the strength). MHakawiald, to be able to run. away. Ex.: Hindiviakawahl 777gayon. (it is not possible to ruin away now). Magpawald, to pardoan, forgive. Wald with in also means to remit or cancel. Ex.: W~a/rn mo va any utaung ko sa iyo6 (cancel the debt I owe you). Magkawald, to go apart, to break away. Ex.: Papa gkawalin mo kami (let us quit [as partners]) (exel.). Sinong waldf (Who is absent?) Wald ka kahapan (you were absent yesterday). May ikinawawald ka. nang balang na? (Is there anything you lack?) Walang wald (absolutely nothing). Nawald sa kamay ko (it escaped from my hand). Mauwald mian isang anuang kalakian, houag aug isarnq salitaan (better to lose a carabao bullI than a moment of conversation.-T. P., 869. Rdnt ang may ay-ay sa wald (it is better to have a scarecrow than to be without one ). -T. P., 866. Nagmnamayro'o'y wald (they pretend to have something, but are destitute).-T. P., 867. Mapipilit ang maraimot, aug walady hindi (the miser may be forced [to give something]. but he who has nothing, no). -T. P., 868. Walang masamang kaniyal, walang maiqi sa iba' (faultless what is his, Ygood for nothing what is of another).-T. P., 870. Wald also means " ithe open sea, a gulIf," etc. Magpawald (to put to sea). Ex.: Nagpawald aug ihforo nang kaniyang samsamin (the Moro put to sea with his booty). Of- (and family or associates). Kand. Aug bukid kand ali ko (the field of my aunt and her family). Paka nd sa Juan kand (go to Juan and his family). 102 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Of (genitive of si). Of (gentitive of any). To (dative, etc. of si). Against. From. Fromi. N i. Ex.: Angnioganni Luis (Louis' cocoanut palm grove). Ang baihay rd Tomias (Thomas' house). ANong. Ex.: Any balhay nang ama' ko (.my father's house). Kay. Ex.: htong tunqkod (ay kay Juan (this cane is John's [is to John]). L61ban; l61ban sa. Ex.: Jkao'y ldban sa a'ki (you against me). Isang hokbo la'ban namain sa iba' (one army against another). Mlagldban (to resist or struggle against ). Btlhat. Ex.: M6an ha nagbmtlhat? (Where dlid you come from?) M'ai4. Ex.: Maidd gayo'n (from now on). Sa muld (from the beginning). Ex.: Mfuld' sa lans hangain sa viernes (fromn Monday until Friday). Meuld' sa Maynildl hangain sa Santa. M-esa (from.,Manila as far as Santa Mesa). Magmuld (to start; to commence). THE CONJUNCTION. Genuine conjunctions are ratimer scarce in Tagalog, hut many other words may he used as a conj unction would he in English t~o join sentences together. The principal ones are: And. At. This loses the vowel in many cases, being pronounced with time word precedling as a final t, and in suclm cases is written 't. Together with. Kasaina' (from ka and sinaa). Not only-but. Hlindi 1limang-kund'i bagku's. UnlIess. 11louag 16miang. Even; as well as. Sa b 6y. Or. Kayal. Or not. Dili. Also man. Either-or. Ma1hgin-nmagin. Or. 0 (Sp.) The foregoing are called binding conjunctions as to the first four and alterative conjunctions as to the last four. The following are called adversative conjunctions. They are: But. NZ~qt ni;, kuodli; datapoua; subali; alintana. A19 uoof never begins a prmncipal clause, hut always a subordinate one, andl generally in an answo-r. Ex.: Ibig kosanang kionain,?579uoni't hindi' ak6' mangyayari (I would like to eat, but I am not able to).-L. 't, from at, is almost invariably joined to r~unni. Kinudi is used forsnbordinate clauses, generally when the principal one has a negative meaning. Ex.: hlitdi lalaki, kundi babaye ang ibon (the bird is not a male, but a femnale). JDatapova, whiclm generally take 't, ineans "but" still stronger than TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 103 But rather. Neither-nor. Although; though. Although (more formal than above). Ever so much, although (giving a reason or making an excuse). Although. Since; whereas. No matter if; even if. What; because But; yet. Some conjunctions m-ay be styled Tagalog are: XWhy? kundi, denoting a sharper contrast, as between rich but miserable, etc. ~Sulmli means '' but for,' etc.. as conditional. I liofona, which takes 't inl beginning a clause. means ''but for allI th at,''I etc. Verbalized the two foregoing words mean "to except.".Bogo is sometimes used in thiesense of "but." Ex.: Taingholdi nt, bago'y wvald pa sityi (noon already, but he is absent yet). Kuvdi bogkt'ts. These words may be used alone in this sense, and may also be joined together. Man - mon. Min - manhindt' rin. Ex.: W1ald kami biga's man., itlog man (we have nothing, neither rice nor eggs. Bagamn~n. Ex.: Bagamdn du/cha si Juan, so purl 'naina'y mayabooan siya' (though Juan is poor, he is rich in a good name). Bistd't. Bista't napopoot siy6 sa akin, ay bibigyain din ak6' (although he is angry at me, it will be given to me). 3fatayntaln. Ex.: Mataytnadnak6ynaa koibig parito6, ay dit ko makayanan, (although I wished to come, I was not able to [I had no strength]). Kahit, var. kahimat, kahiiny(I, kahin? a man, koh'i't. Ex.: Kohir~a. 't di' ma'yag sila', paror6on din ok6," (although they do not consent, I shall go there). Polibhoisa (from Sanskrit, pariblids/l, sentence, reprimand, etc.). It is followed by 'y in sentences. As an adverb it is equal to kayd'?J-ga; kay~t pola, as well as to " since and " whereas." As a noun it means " irony." Magpalibhasa (to speak ironically). Sukdain. Ex.: Mogpapakabusog muna siyUo, sukddn siyd'y magkasakit (he will gorge himself tirst, even if hie makes himself sick). Mlayapdt, var. inayapa'f, little heard. Bago. Ex.: Sila'y ang may salo, bago aok6 onq pinarusahan (they are the ones at fault, but I am the one who has been punished). "causative." The principal ones in Bakin? var. badkit. Badkit dlY (Why not?) Balkit also means "tas,"7 "how," etc.,7 in sentences. As a noun b6mkit means an old monkey with developed teeth. An6't? also means "twhy?" Sa p~agka't. Because (giving reason). 104 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. A fifth group of conjunctions is generally that called "conditional." The significations of the members of this group are self-explanatory. If; rather. Kun. Unless. Kun dirn larnang; kun di laimang; liban na. As if it were. K un safla sa. Were it niot for. _Kun, (la/aan; dar~jan. Provided. Kun l(bnang; houag larnang. Lest. Baka, var. mak-d. The sixth and last group of conjunctions is that of the class called "conclusives" in somne grammars and "illatives" in others. In Tagalog the principal ones of this class are: That (relative). Nang. Ex.: ]lfagpagarnot ka, nang That. Consequently; that is to say. Therefore (consequently). In order that. Inasmuch; in so far as. kaeo ay gtonahng ~aiiow yourself to be treated, so that you may be better)..-L. Na. Ex.: Nu,-gsabi siya' na ako'y nalu'log (hie said that I was asleep). DI' yata. Sa mnak-atovid (lit. " in other words" Ex.: Nakita Aleo sii~t A'agab-i, sa miak~aoloo id indi',ilo' sungqmak-a J ( saw themn last night, therefore they did not embark). L~pan. It is never put last in a clause. Yamang, varn. yaqamang; yayang; hayiawang; aimnang. Ex.: M11angyayaring gawin niy'tgoyayanan sigy('1 gobernador-gleneral (hie is able to (10 it, inasmuch as he is governorgeneral). THE EXCLAMATION. The exclamation, or interjection, c-an hardly, be regarded as a part of speech, compared with verbs, nouns,, adjectives, etc., but for want of a better classification they may be treated here. They are generally selfexplaining, and miany seem to be roots used as imyperatives of the verb. The most characteristic Tagalog interjections are: Dear me! Alas! Ouch! W~ow! Oh how!1 (Always follows.) Oh how -~! (Always follows.) Good! Fine! Poor thing! Would that it may be so! that -! Quick! Be silent (to one)! No talk! Silence! Lightning! (Oh, hell!) My mother!I What a pity! Move on! Go ahead! Abdl! Arog! Ara?1! Agaei! (mostly used by women). Bap~io. May be used together, bap('a preceding. Bapa'a is more in use by men. Buti i~tia! Kaoa? 6ata'! )h Kahiimanuari! Naual! Miaano6! Dali'! Houag k-ang magiri-gay! Houag kayong magiri-gay! Lintik! Nako6! NakA! (Contraction from ina leo.) 8ayang! Sulongl TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 105 Look out! Aside! Take care! Tabi! hag! Stand back! Urong! Look! Behold! Here it is! Ifanaai! Tagalog cursing is rather peculiar. It has evidently been derived from native sources and not from contact with the Spaniards. Among the most usual expressions are: May a crocodile eat you! Kanin ka nang buaya! May the earthquake swallow you up! Lamunin ka nang lindol! May a snake bite you! Tukain ka nang ahas! May the lightning strike him! Tinamadn siyd nang lintik! SECTION SEVEN. THE VERB. I. "The verb is distinguished from all other words by marked characteristics and a peculiar organization."-Earle. The eminent philologist speaks thus of the English tongue, but his remarks apply equally to Tagalog. He further defines a verb as "the instrument by which the mind expresses its judgments," a definition which was first enunciated by the Danish philologist Madvig, in his Latin grammar.(Copenhagen, 1841, 8th ed., 1889). Madvig calls a verb udsagnsord, literally "out-saying-word." Other characteristics of the verb have been noted and have given names to the class, such as the German Zeitwort (time-word), and Ewald's Thatwort (deed-word). But in Tagalog the line between nouns and verbs is much less than in English, where it is still less than in Latin, Greek, and other languages of southern Europe. II. The simplest verbal form is the imperative, which consists of the root, followed by ka (thou) or kayo (you; ye). An adverb of time is sometimes added to the phrase for emphasis. Ex.: Lakad ka na! (walk on, now!) Isip ka! (Think!) Aral ka! (Teach!) Daldinod6on (take it there). Da(l( mo dit6 (bring it here). As in English, many of the roots used as imperatives may be used as nouns also. Aral, as a noun, means "(loctrine" or "teaching." Ex.: Ar g iral ni Monroe' y ang dral nang Arerica rtayi?6n (the Monroe doctrine is now the doctrine of America). III. By prefixing ka to the imperative, and reduplicating the first syllable of the root at the same time (sign of the present tense) the idea of quickness, intensity, care, etc., is imparted to the command. Ex.: Kalaldkad ka! (Go quickly! [to one]). Kalaldkad kay! (Go quickly! [ye] ). Kaiisip ka! (Consider it well!) Kadadald mo d6on (take it there carefully). As a general thing the agent takes the indefinite form, as will be seen by the examples, but the definite is used when necessary. Ka with the reduplicated first syllable of the root has a very different meaning with any other person than the second. With the first and third persons it has the idea of " time just past," when followed by pa, as will be seen by the following examples. Sometimes pa may be omitted. Din may also take the place of pa, as may also ldmang. In English the time may be expressed by "has" or "had," according tothe contex. Karardting ko pa (I have [had] just arrived). Karardting ni Gat Tomds (Don Tomas has just arrived). ibig mong makakain sa dmin? (Do you wish to eat with us?) Saldmat, aydoako'tkakdkkain ko pa (thanks, I do notcare to, I have justeaten). Kagagdling nang kapatid na babaye ko sa bayan (my sister has just come from tow vn). Kahihigd ko din (I had just lain down). Kapapanaog ko din at hapapanhik lImang nild (I had just gone down and they had just gone up [i. e., the house ladder]). Kapapasok lamang niyd sa bdhay (he had just entered the house). Kapapadsok din nsgaydn ni Esteban sa basahan (Esteban [Stephen] has just entered the reading place [i. e., the master's place]). Kasusllat ko (I had just written it). Katatapus ko (I have just finished it). Katatagpi ko (I had just mended it). Kauutas na ko (I had already finished 106 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. it). Kaaali. Idmang niyda (he has just gone away). Kaaalis pa nang (king (amsl (my father has just gone away). Kaaalis din n~gayon nang capit6n (the captain just now left). With roots like dral, which have several distinct meanings according to the verbal particle prefixed, ka does not require the first syllable to be repeated. Ex.: Kapa~nqaorgqdral din ngayon nang pare (the priest has just finished preaching). In this case the prefix is reduplicated, malTgaral meaning "to preach." Kapagals din ni Benigno nang damit (Benigno just took the clothes away). Mlagalis means "to take away." IV. Ka has many other functions, which will be taken up later. It is a most important particle and should be carefully studied. It should be noted that the pronouns with the imperative are mostly in the nominative, while with the first and third persons they are in the genitive. V. All such sentences are in the definite or so-called "passive," which is by far the most usual form in Tagalog, but which would look very strange many times if translated by the English passive. VI. The foregoing form is also used to express opposites, the words being linked by ay. It may be expressed in English by "now, again," or "now, then." Ex.: Now he sleeps, then he wakes. KatutAlog ay kagigising niyd. He comes in and goes out. Kapapasok ay kalalabds niyd. He is coming and going. Kararlding ay kaaalis niyd. Sometimes he walks, then he rests a Kalaldkad ay kahihintohinto niydi. little. Now she laughs and then she cries. Katataua ay kaiiyak. VII. When a prefix changes the meaning of a word, it is retained in the imperative. Ex.: Aral ka (teach); pagaral ka (study); paiqgcral ka (preach). VIII. With the exception of the forms already cited, the verb is always accompanied by particles, which sometimes modify the root itself for euphonic reasons. Nearly every word in the language can be made a verb of some kind or another by the use of these particles, which are the striking peculiarity of the Malayo-Polynesian languages, but have been retained in the primitive tongues of the Philippines much more than in the Malay, Javanese, or other cognate dialects. There are some twenty of these verbalizing particles, of which seventeen are used as prefixes to roots, and three are the definite auxiliary particles in, i, and ni. Of these particles, which are tabled at the end of the handbook, the most important are in, i, an, urn, mag, and ma, the last three being indefinite particles. Pag, corresponding as a definite to mag, is also important. The mastery of these particles is the mastery not only of Tagalog, but of every other Philippine dialect, as well as a valuable aid in learning Malay or any similar tongue of the family. IX. The root with any one of the indefinite particles prefixed may be translated as the infinitive, provided the particle is merely attached to give the meaning of the root so modified, but whenever a tense is expressed the particle or the root is modified, and sometimes both. Besides the imperative and infinitive,Tagalog has really but one other mode, the indicative, as the subjunctive, including those modifications known in various European languages as the optative, conditional, dubitative, potential, etc., is expressed by certain words corresponding to the English "could, should, would, may," etc. X. Strictly speaking, there are but three tenses in Tagalog, the past, present, and future; but it is possible to render the imperfect, pluperfect, and future perfect tenses by means of auxiliary particles. The first three, however, are those in common use. The participle is also in use, corresponding literally to the English participle in some cases, and in others must be rendered by a phrase. The same remark may be made of the gerund in English, which is variously rendered in Tagalog. One tense is sometimes used for another, when the context clearly indicates the time of the event, as happens in English. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 107 XI. As in English, Tagalog verbs may be transitive, requiring an object to complete the meaning; or intransitive, in which the meaning is colplete within the verb. These do not always correspond in the two languages, and a Tagalog root may sometimes be intransitive with one prefix and transitive with another, which may reverse or nodify the meaning. XII. Within the tense the verb does not change for the person or number, and requires a noun or a pronoun to indicate the same. XIII. The eminent Indo-Tibetan philologist Bryan H. Hodgson (1800 -1894), in his Monographs upon the Tribes of Northern Tibet, reprinted in Part II, pages 73-76, of "The Languages, Literature, and Religion of Nepal and Tibet" (London, 1874), gives it as his opinion that the (Garung dialect of Eastern Tibet has a very similar structure to that of Tagalog, quoting Leyden and W. von Humboldt (the latter at secondhand) in support of his views. Rockhill, the Tibetan scholar, now United States minister to China, who has a wide acquaintance with Tibetan, says that Gyarung is merely a variation of ordinary Tibetan, and this being the case there can be no possible affinity between the two languages. As Hodgson's error has been given wide publicity by its incorporation as a footnote to the article by de Lacouperie upon Tibet in the Encyclopedia Britannica, it should be corrected as far as possible by any student of Tagalog. XIV. As quoted and corrected by Hodgson, the remarks ot Leyden, as taken from the Researches of the Bengal Asiatic Society, Vol. X, page 209, upon Tagalog are as follows: "Few languages present a greater appearance of originality than the Tagala. Though a multitude of its terms agree precisely with those of the languages just enumerated (western Polynesian), yet the simple terms are so metamorphosed by a variety of the most simple contrivances that it becomes impossible (difficult-B. H. H.) for a person who understands all the original words in a sentence to recognize them individually or to comprehend the meaning of the whole. The artifices which it employs are chiefly the prefixing or postfixing (or infixingB. H. H.) to the simple vocables (roots) of certain particles (serviles), which are again (may be) combined with others, and the complete or partial repetition of terms in this reduplication may be again combined with other particles." XV. Hodgson notes upon the foregoing as follows: "I may add, with reference to the disputed primitiveness of Ta-gala, owing to its use of the 'artifices' above cited, that throughout the Himalaya and Tibet it is precisely the rudest or most primitive tongues that are distinguished by useless intricacies, such as the interminable pronouns, and all the perplexity caused by conjugation by means of them, with their duals and plurals, and inclusive and exclusive forms of the first person of both. * * * The more advanced tribes, whether of the continent or of the islands, have, generally speaking, long since cast away all or most of these 'artifices.'" As has already been noted, the Tagalog pronouns do not modify the verbs, which have the same form within the tense for all persons and numbers. As compared to tongues like Fijian and other Melanesian dialects, Tagalog has made long strides toward becoming a vehicle of a much higher culture than it now enjoys. XVI. W. von Humboldt says in his Kawi Sprache, Vol. II, page 347: "The construction of the Malavan verb (to speak of the entire linguistic stock) can be fully recognized from the Tagalog verb alone. The Malagasy and true Malay contain but fragments thereof, while the Polynesian languages have a more primitive scheme of the verb-fewer in forms. It therefore seems appropriate to present: First, the Tagalog verb complete without any regard to the other languages; Second, the Malagasy (verb), which has in itself very much of the same construction; Third, to show what the Malay language in its discarding and grinding of grammatical forms has still retained; and 108 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Fourth, to make a research as to how the simple but uncultivated Polynesian verbal construction stands in relation to the partially cultivated Tagalog. THE DEFINITE. I. As has been stated before, the definite form of the verb, which is really a verbal noun with tense-indicating particles, is more common than the indleinite form, which is more of a true verb in construction. One of the great difficulties to be overcome by speakers of non-Malayan tongues is the improper use of the definite and indefinite. It is as easy to begin right as wrong, and if attention is paid to the conditions existing, an idiomatic mastery of Tagalog may readily be requirel. II. The true definite particles, in (hin after the final vowel with acute accent, and nin in a few cases for euphony), i, and an (han after a final vowel with acute accent), are used either alone or in combination when emphasis is to be placed upon tie object or there is a special idea implied. These three particles are further combiled with patg, the definite verbalizing particle corresponding to the indefinite wag; i, in, and pagmany times commencing a definite verb with the combinations ipag and ipinag. The root begins after these combinations, subject to tense reduplications, as will be seen by the table at the end. The subject takes the genitive with the definite, the object taking the nominative case. Ex.: Root gawd (idea of making or doing). GUtom(lwd (to make or do). Ano ang gawd io.? (What is your work?; i. e., What are you doing or making?). This isan indefinite question, with the verbal idea almost absent, the verb "to be" being understood. With an adverb of time, such as kahiapoan yesterday), ngay6n (now), or buikas (to-morrow) the verb could be "was," "is," or "will be." But the more usual form is with the definite particle in and the proper tense. Ano' ang giwaucd mo? (What did you do? [or make?]). For the past tense in is inserted with consonant roots between the initial consonant and the rest of the root. Arno (g ginagawd mno dito? (What are you doing here?) As will be seen, the present tense is formed by the reduplication of the first syllable of the root, in which in is infixed. Ano ang gagaOwi mo? (What are you going to do? [or make?]; what will you do?; what will you make?) The future of this verb is formed by reduplicating the first syllable of the root and suffixing in. And ang gagawin nang amain mno niyang kdhoy na iy('n? (What is your uncle going to do with that lumber?) Amain, from amrd, father, with in as a suffix, also means "stepfather," as well as "uncle." K(/oy also means "tree." Isang bahay jg g(mgagain niyi (HIe is going to put up a house). The imperative is formed by suffixing in to the root. Ex.: 1t6'y gacwin ninyong mahtesay (Do this carefully [in an orderly manner]). III. In is the principal definite particle in Tagalog, corresponding to the same particle in Ilocano and to on in Bicol and Visaya, the two last mentioned also using in in combination with other particles. WHICH DEFINITE. IV. While it is not so very hard to lay down fairly clear rules as to when the definite and indefinite should be used (the former laying stress upon the object and the latter upon the subject or the action), it is extremely difficult in some cases to say which one of the several definite particles should be. Asageneral rule, in signifies motion toward the agent, orsomething by which the agent obtains control of something; i indicates motion away from agent, or an action by which the agent loses control of something, and an generally has either the idea of place or of person connected with its use. Ijoined with ka, resulting in ika, and further combimned with in to produce ikina, denotes cause, etc., with roots when joined to them, either alone or with verbalizing particles. For this reason the proper definite to be used in sentences having a definite object without other modifying circumstance is determined by the nature of the action, subject to some exceptions, mainly for euphonic reasons. Such words, however, as require TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 109 an, for example, in place of in are not numerous. I can not be replaced by in or an, and an only replaces in as a suffix, never as a prefix or infix. The following examples will show the different use of the same verb: Root, parhik. Pathik ka! (Go up! Come up!). Panhikin mlo ak6 sa hagdan (come up [to me] by the ladder). Ipanhik mo sa bWhay 'itong ma7ig, siging (Put these bananas up into the house). Panhikan mto ako nitong maigi. siging (Put these bananas up there for me). Prnmanhik (to ascend). Magpanhik (to hoist, or put something upstairs [or up a ladder]).,Ang panhikin (the person upstairs). Ang ipagpanhik (what hoisted or taken up). Ang panhikan (the ladder [stairs or place] ascended). V. With sentences containing but one direct object which is directly connected with the action, the prevalence of cause, instrument, or tiime requires i, and place an. Ex.: Ihanap niny?/ ako isang cabayolg mabrti (look out for a good horse for me). Ang bayan ang 1ahanapan mo anaog cabayo mo (You will have to look around town for your horse). With in a proper use would be: lHanapil i mo ang cabatyoognawald (Look for the horse which has disappeared). Alng pinaghanapan ko ang corral nang cabayo, p6 (Where 1 did look for the horse was at the corral, sir). Hindnap ko ang aking cabao sa bay an ay nah(inap ko (I looked for my horse in town and found him). Humdnap, (1, to look for) (2, to claim). Manhdnap (to scout, to reconnoiter). Ang panhanapin (what scouted for). Ang paghinap (the act of seeking). Ang paghanapan (the place of seeking). Ang panhanapan (place scouted or reconnoitered over). Ang hin(dnap (what sought for [past tense]). Ang hinah6inap (what is being sought for). Ang hanapin (what is to be sought or looked for). Ang hanapan (person from whom something is claimed or sought). Ang ihadnap (the means for something to be looked for). Ang ihindnmap (the means with which something was sought). The foregoing illustrate the ease with which verbal nouns can be formed from verbs and vice versa. VI. When a sentence has more than one indirect object, and stress is to be laid upon one or the other object, the nature of the action determines the particle to be used. The following examples, taken from Lendoyro, show this excellently: Sulatin mo itong sulat sa lamesa nang kimay mo ("Write this letter" yourself at the table [i. e., with your own hand]). Isulat mo nitong sulat ang iayon kdmay sa itong lamesa (Write this letter "with your own hand" at this table). Sa, lamnesa ang sulatan mo nitong sulat nang iyony kabnay (,vrite this letter with your own hand, using the table as a writing desk). It will be seen from the foregoing that many of the definite verbs are verbal nouns with anyg (the) left off. Bearing this in mind the use of the definite is made much easier. VII. Circumstantial members connected with the action should be carefully distinguished when using the definite from adverbs or adverbial expressions. Some examples of the definite with adverbs or adverbial expressions are: Sadiyang ginawad niyd it6 (He did this willfully). Dinalohong nild siyd nang boong bagsik (They assaulted him [her] with great barbarity). VIII. Ipag, ipinag, and ipina, the two first being combinations with pag and the last of i with pa, the definite verbal particle corresponding to magpa, confuse the student at first, but are simple when analyzed. Ipina, ipa, when followed by a root commencing with g, should not be confused with ipag and ipinag, as the idea of pa is "to order to do" what is signified by the root. Combinations with other particles, like magka, are also found, forming ipagka (imp.), ipagkaka (fut.), ipinagka (past), and ipinagkaka (present). It will be noticed that the last syllable of the particle is reduplicated with pagka for the future and present tenses. Ex.: Ipagabutan ninyo iyang manad libro (Pass those books from hand to hand). Ang abutan (the person reached for or overtaken). Sino ang ipinagluluto mo? ( Who are you cooking it for?) An6 kayd ang ipinagutos mo sa kaniya? (What were your orders to him?) Ipaghiuhugys sana kitd nang itong damit fzguni't wald akong sabon (I would wash your clothes, but I have no soap). Kit4 is really "we two," but here means "I." Ipaglaga mo nang sa itong ofi 110 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. cial 'it6' (Make some tea for this officer). Atig iniiagyd (what boiled or made [as tea, coffee, etc.]). Any ipaglag&(~ (the person for whom boiled, inade, etc.). lng lagaain (the teapot, coffeepot, etc.). In the foregoing examples peg is used because the sentence expresses the person for whom an act. is performed. Pay is also used with in arid ain combined in like cases. Ex.: Itong badhay na 'it6'y any pinagauayan nild' (This house is where they quarreled). Root, duay. IX. Pay must also be used with. the definite whenever the sentence expresses plurality of acts or agents, or of feigning or reciprocal actions. The article being generally used, the idea of a verbal noun is most promninent. Ex.: Any ipinaysakitsakiten niygay any hindt' dasahin (He was rnaliiigering so as to escape punishment). Root, sak-it (illness). (Diminutives made by repeating a bisyllabic root or the first two of a polysyllabic one, add an to imnpart a scornful or coiitemptuous meaning). Any cueartel any pinaymiurahan niid' (They insulted each other in the barracks). Pinaysird nany rnerfTyj tul'isain iyany mzaJga b64/a?, (The ladrones have destroyed many of those houses). iliararning ba'hay any pinagsirclt nila' (Many houses have been destroyed by them). X. With verbal roots which have different meanings with urn and may, the definite is accompanied by pay when t~he verb formed by may is used. Ex.: Root, bili' (idea of trade, barter, etc.) Btun/ih, (to buy). Mieygbiii (to sell). Itony bchay any ipinaybili ko, or Ipinaybili ko itony bchay (I have sold this house). Itony balhay any binili ko, or B/n/li' ko itong bchay (I have bought this house). Pay (p/nay) prefixed to bNl with han suffixed indicates the purchaser; the place or the price (past tense). For the present tense the first syllable of the root is reduplicated. Ex.: Any pinaybilihan (past); any pagbibil/han (pr.). Any a/k/iny kapatid na lalaki any pinagbilihan ko n/tony bc/hay (I sold [have sold] this house to my brother [~lit., "my brother was the purchaser f rom. me of this house") Root, s/tang (debt). Umnstang (to borrow)..3fayu'tany (to lend). Magpas/tany (to lend willingly). Miaykamitang (to owe). Ex.: Pinaydlang leo iyang 8alapi sa kaniy' (I lent him that money). XI. The use of the particles gives a great freedom in Tagalog for the variation of sentences, which, however, have the same idea. Thus the English " Didn't I order (or tell) you to do this? " may be rendered by the following with equal accuracy: H/nditlko ipinays/tos sa iy6' na yaw/tn mio ito6? (def.). Hindit ak6' nagu/tos sa iLyong yuiiiawtd rn/t6 f (iiidef., stress on action). Hindi ako6 naypayawd sa iyo6 nito'? (imdef., stress on action). Ilind' keo pinayawal nit6' (def.). Ilindi leo /p/inayawd sa iyo ito6? (def.). Jt~i/pinayawdt ko sa iyo6 it0V (def.). XII. In and iare combined with each other also. Ex.: Ano'anyg/linuliot mof (What are you cooking?) For euiphony the verb with this combination is much varied, there being. also found the forms inaluluto', inilulutb, and even nilulutb'. XIII. The verbs mayro'on and mnay (to have) and wald (not to have) require the definite form of a verb following them in a sentence which expresses what is had or done, or vice versa. Both subject and object, however, take the nominative in such cases. Ex.: Mlayro'on kany gayawin! (Have you anything to do?) Wald po6, waldl aklony gayawin (No, sir; I have nothing). May silang y/nawd? (Have they done anything?) Waldt pI wald s/lang yinawd (No, sir; they have not done anything). XLV. The definite is also used in sentences having a person for the object, or in which the object is mollified by an attribute or attributive adjunct. Ex.: Tauayin mo si Pedro (Call Pedro). Daihin mo r/to6 iYang 1/ibrong b/nasa kong kayab-i (Bring me that book I was reading last night). Hontay many wik-ain iya'n (Don't say that). Lutoin mo itony snanuk (Cook this chicken).- Dalhin m~o iyang tdbiy (Bring that water). XV. Further discussion of the definite particles is reserved until the indefinite has been explained. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 111 THE INDEFINITE. I. The indefinite particles most in use are urn, mag (nag), and ma (na), which will be explained in detail hereafter. These are called active particles by the Spanish grammarians, but indefinite seems to be more appropriate and correct. II. Sentences in which the subject is emphasized have this in the nominative, the verb being expressed with the proper indefinite particle which is sometimes preceded by the article of common nouns. The imperative indefinite does not require the article in any case. Ex.: Siyd'y babasa nitog libro ( He is going to read this book). Ikao nga nagsabi niydn (You said that yourself). The object, it will be noted, takes the genitive. Siyd ang magpapasial (He is going for a walk [lit., "He will be the walker]). Ikao ang tumduag kay Juan (Call Juan [be you the caller to Juan]). Si Juan ay ang nagtn6kao (Juan was the thief). III. The indefinite is generally used in an intransitive sentence, where an object is not required to complete the meaning. Ex.: Sungmusulat ak6 (I am writing). Sungmsilat ak6 (I wrote). Susullat ako (I shall write). Nagadral kay6 (You are learning). Magadral kayo (You will learn). Kungmakain siyd (He is eating). Kungmain kami (We were eating [but not you]). Kakain tayo (We will go eat [all of us]). An object may be called indefinite when the idea of "a, an, some, any" is inherent, or an undetermined part of the whole is indicated, provided that there are no modifying circumstances of time, cause, purpose, instrument, or place in conjunction with the action. Ex.: (1) Marunong ka nang wikang castila? (Do you understand any of the Spanish language?) Mar'nong ak6 laimang nang wikang tagdlog, hindi mari'norig ako manrgusap sa wikang castila, po (I understand the Tagalog language only; I do not know how to talk in Spanish). Magsalitd ka nga sa wikang tagdilog (Then speak in Tagalog). (2) Maglabas ka nang marnga silla (Bring out some chairs). Miagdala ka dito nangfosforos (Bring some matches here). Magdald ka dito nang tabacos (Bring some cigars here). Magdald ka dito nang tdbig (Bring some water here). Maglutb ka nang isang manuk (Cook a chicken). IV. The indefinite is also used with sentences having a definite object if a part and not all of the object is meant. In some cases the place-particle "an'" is used for this purpose, as it does not indicate an object. In or i would b)e used if all the definite object were to be indicated. Ex.: Ako'y kungmain na nitong lamangkati (I have already eaten some of this meat). Uminurm kayo nitong tlbig na malindo (Drink some of this clear water). (1) Magbiqay ka sa akin niyang ttbig (indef.) (1, Give me some of that water). (2) Bigydn mo ak6 iyang tubig (def.) (2, Give me that water). Ibig ninyong magbili nitong bigds? (Do you wish to sell some of this rice?) V. Actions expressed by intransitive verbs which do not require an object take the indefinite unless there are modifying circumstances of cause, purpose, means, instrument, or time in conjunction with the action. Ex.: Natisod ak6 (I stumbled). Ano't hindi ka lungmaldkad nang matulin? (Why don't you walk quicker?) Tungmataud siyd (He is laughing). VI. A sentence commencing with an interrogative pronoun takes the indefinite if the subject of the inquiry is an agent, and the definite if a determinate object is asked about. Ex.: Sino ang nagdaldc nitong manfgd kdchoy? (Who brought [was the bringer] of this lumber [timber]?) Ak6 ang nagdald, p6 (I brought it, sir [was the bringer]). Ano't di ka nangunqgusap? (Why don't you talk?) NahihiJcyd ka bagd? (Are you ashamed to?) Sino ang nagsalitd nang sinabi mo sa kin? (Who related to you what you have told me?) [indef.]. Anong ibig mo? (What do you want?) Anong cabayo ang binili nild? (Which horse did they buy?) Anong is a contraction for ano ang (def.). VII. The indefinite is also used with complex sentences in which the subject is amplified by an adjectival clause. Ex.: Ang tdlvo gungmagaua nang kabanala'y magkakamit nang kapalaran (The person who does right will obtain happiness [be happy]). 112 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. VIII. It must be noted that nmaka in the sense of cause, used with roots denoting conditions, wrongs (torts) and betterments, has a different construction from all other particles, even vmaka with other mIeanings. In the definite, which only exists with i, combined with in in the past and present tenses, the agent takes the nominative and the otlject the genitive, like indefinites of other particles. In the indefinite the agent remains in the nominative, but the object takes the accusative, which is always preceded by sa (not by nang). Some other verbs have this use of sa also. Roots conjugated by mag and man retain the definite forms prg and pan with maka. IX. The Tagalog verb demands that the subject of a sentence shall be expressed, the tense being indicated by the verb or verbal noun. The subject may be omitted, however, when a number of verbs depend upon the same subject, except in the first clause, where the verb must have a subject. As will be seen by the examples, the syntax of Tagalog is very simple, but care must be taken to use the right particles and tenses. If not, some annoying errors are liable to be made in conversation. V. For any common verb see the vocabulary (English-Tagalog). It must be borne in mind that Tagalog has many words expressing variations and modifications of the general verb as well as other languages. These will be noted in the proper place. THE DEFINITE PARTICLE "IN." I. The plain root, if capable of being verbali ed, is sometimes used without a definite particle if an adverb of time or the context makes the tense clear. The definite particle may also be used with an adverb of time, but as a rule, if the tense is to be emphasized or the context is not clear, tense particles, according to the rules of the language, are used in the verbal forms. Ano ang sabi mo kahapon? (What did you say yesterday?) Alno ang sabi mo ngay6o? (What do you say now?) Ano ang sabi mo bUkas? (What will you say to-morrow? [with adverbs of time]). Ano ang sinabi mo? (What did you say?) Ano ang sinasabi mo? (What are you saying?) An6 ang sasabihin no? (What will you say?) Ang sabihin (the person or thing mentioned). An6o bagd ang sasabihin ko kay Ignacio? (What shall I say to Ignacio?) Sabihin mo sa kaniyd na tinduag ko siyd (You say to him that I have been calling him). Aing sabihan (the conversation). II. In (hin after acute final vowel, and nin in some cases) is the true definite particle. In is prefixed, infixed, or suffixed, as the case may be; hin and nin are suffixes onlv. In is prefixed to a vowel root and infixed between the initial letter and the first vowel of a consonant root for the past (perfect) and present tenses. It is suffixed for the imperative and future tenses. The first syllable of the root is reduplicated in the present and future tenses. The tenses called the pluperfect and future perfect may be expressed in Tagalog in two ways. Tie first pluperfect is formed bv adding na to the past tense, and the second pluperfect by prefixing na to ihe root. The first future perfect is formed by adding na to the future tense, and the second future perfect by prefixing ma to the root. These tenses are little used in conversation. Na and ma correspond to the indefinite verbalizing particles naka an(l maka respectively. III. The subject of a verb conjugated with a definite particle takes the genitive, except in the cases already noted. If the subject is a pronoun, it may either precede or follow the verb, the latter usage being much more common than the former. If the subject is a noun or phrase it always follows the verb. IV. For the conjugation of a root with in, whether a vowel verb, or a consonant one see the type-scheme folder at the end of this handbook. V. In prefixed to or infixed with roots of the following classes forms words denoting a showing of the properties of the root or a resemblance thereto, as the word " like " does as a suffix in English. (1) Roots denoting flowers, fruits, or other objects imitated in gems or precious metals by jewelers, TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 113 denote ornaments or jewels of the shape or pattern of the object named, when'in is used as above explained. Ex.: Balbigbing, an octagonal berry; hinnlingbing, a jewel with eight sides like the berry. San~ipaga, Arabian jasmine; sinampaga, a jewel imnitating the sanipaga flower. (2) With roots of colored1 objects in denotes the color. Ex.: Durnero (Sp. roinero), rosemary; din uniero, rosemiary-colored. (hilay, verdutre, vegetables;gi rt 6 1 agreenish. (3) With some objects in denotes rice which resemble's the object in the shape, taste, or sinell. Ex.: Kandii, a lily-like flower; khinndiu, rice, with an odor like the kandal. Kardyor~i, needle; kinaralyom~, needle-shaped rice. Kamailig, warehouse; Lalauigan Kainaligan, Ambos Camarines (province); kinain~l'ig, Camarines rice. Kastuti, musk (froinSanskrit kast'ciri through Malay); kinastuli, rice with musky odor. Ang k-ato, the carabao tick; kinat6, rice of a variegatedl appearance, resembling the kat6. Kastila (Sp.), white person: kinastila, a white class of rice. Alafi-gilan, a tree with fragrant flowers ((~ananga odor-ata), the ilang-ilang; inalai-Iffilan, rice with this odor. Bim-bang, an herb; biniamibang, aclaqssof rice which resembles the bambang when growing. Ang dulong, a very small fish; dinulon.9, rice shaped like the dulong. Batad, a kind of pea-like vegetable; biniatad, rice so shaped. Bulakiak, flower; binulakiak, rice which opens like a flower whnheated, or like pop corn. Porak, the flower of the pangqdan or sabutap; pinorak, rice resembling this flower. Sanki, the Chinese an-Ise; sinangki, rice resembling anise. Samblng, a species of sea fish without scales; siwimbilarig, rice of this shape. Tuma, body louse, grayback; tinuma, rice shaped like a turna. Tamibaga, copper; tinumbaga, rice with a metallic luster. Tumbaga is copper alloyed with a small amount of gold; it is from Sanskrit tadrnraka (copper), through Malay tanmbaga; tembaga Tali hib6, common reed grass; tinalidhib, rice which resembles taldhib when growing. There aren-many other names for different classes of rice, but the foregoing are the princip~al termns derived wit~h in following the rule cited. (4) With names denoting relationship in expresses the idea of persons occupying the place of such relative to some degree. As this condition is regarded as permanent, the first syllable of the root is reduplicated to express present tense. Other nouns also follow this rule, with some exceptions. Ex.:Ai, aunt; innalt, uncle's wifei, Arnd, father; inaam', godfather. A1rnain, uncle; stepfather; innarnain, aunt's husband. Anak, child (son or daughter); inaanak, stepson or stepdaughter, also godson or goddaughter. Asciua, spouse (husband or wife); inaasalva, lover or mistress (concubine). Bayao, brother-in-law; binabayao, husband of sister-in-law. Bianain, father-in-law or mother-in-law; binibiandin, wife or husband of father-in-law or mother-in-law (not parent of wife or husband). Manu'gang, son-in-law or (laughter-in-law; rninarnanu'gang, one regarded as such. Kapatid, brother or sister; kinakapatid, half brother or half sister, or foster brother or foster sister. IHipaq, sister-in-law; hinihipag, wife of brother-inlaw. Bilh'hsis thieequivalent for binab~aya(oor hin-ihipag. Nun', grandparent; ninununo', one regarded as a grandparent; kanununuan, ancestors. Apo', grandchild; inaapo6, descendant. Apo' a td'hod, great-grandchild; ap6 m3a talampakaw, great-great-grandchild. Paninargkin, nephew or niece; pinapa~mangk-iv, one regarded as such. Pin 'onn cousin; pinipirnsan, oiie regarded as a cousin. Pinsning b)oi), first cousin; pinsang makalaw4J, second cousin, etc. (5) With verbal roots denoting the preparing of food, etc., in denotes the food so prepared, provided the root is conjugated in the infinitive indefinite with urnt, although there are some exceptions. Ex.: Maglagdl, to cook with a spit; such as camotes, etc.; Linaga', vegetables so cooked. Mlagsigang, to cook nieat or fish with a spit; sirnigang, meat or fish so cooked. Lurnugao, to stew, to b)oil meal; ang liriogao, the mush or stew. Miaglugao is more usual. Siunaing, to boil rice; ang sinaing, the boiled rice. Magsaing is also more usual. Aifagtamnibong, to cook fish entire; ang tinambong, the fish so cooked. Tukmdpay or magtci pay, to knead; ang tindpay, what kneaded; bread. (6) With verbal roots conjugated by nata, the product of such action is denoted by in, prefixed to a vowel root or infixed 6855-05-8 114 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. with a consonant root. Ex.: Switoraid, to spin; sin'ctiid, thread, anything spun. Some m~ay roots also have the prodluct denoted by in. Ex.: 1aftipipiql, to press, to crack rice, etc.; pin' ig roaste n rc e ie 7 With some roots in forms adjectival nouns, the first syllable of the root being reduplicatd. Ex.: Kuan, known; any kinukuan, the person known. Ma(hal, dear; ang minarnathal, the esteemed (person). Sinta', love (from Sanskrit, chinfil, thought, through Malay); anygsinisinta', the beloved (who loves in return). Any nasintdJ indicates a person loved without being aware of the fact. VI. As in has the idea of attraction inherent within it, there are many classes of verbs, conjugated in the iudefinite infinitive by umo, which take in to form the direct object. (1) According to this rule verbal roots of taking, asking, and appropriating something take in. There are some verbs (conjugated with may which also admit in. Ex.: To buy (general term). To take (general term ), bring or take. To carry; bear, etc. (bring or send). To scoop out, or take anything out of a hole, or insert the hand into a hole. To use. To choose (between good and bad). To select (from among good things). To pillage; to plunder; to loot; to despoil the enemy. To seize; to snatch. To pray for; to plead. To complain; to entreat; to implore, to pray (as to a judge). To request. To borrow. Buinili'. Anygbinili, what was bought. Gamutanyg, to buy rice by the yatany or chwp~a. U-ndmot, to buy oniething out of many. Urnanykut, to buy on credlit. U-inaapito buy fruits of thle cou ntry. Ku oi t /I w. Any kin-aha, what was taken or obtained. Maqdald. Anygdinalid, what brought. Any ipinadw~(, what sent (lit., "6w hat was ordered lbrought "). Dumik-ot. Any dint'kot, what taken out, or what hand was inserted in. GumdmJ~it. A ny yinadmit, what used. Purnili. Any pinili, what chosen. Anygpinilian, what rejectedl (singular). AIny pinaypilian, what rejectedl (plurality of objects)..Hoonirnny. Any hini'rany, what selected. A ny hinira'i-igan, what left out. Sumanaisamn. A4nygsinansanm,the spoil; loot; p~lunder. Uinayao. Any inaygao, what seized Ayao nany tainmi, inaqao nangy asim, somewhat of sweetness, and somewhat of sourness (said of any substance which has this taste, like some fruits) (idiom). Dumabigin. Ang (linalany~in, what prayed or asked for. A4ny dalafigmnan, the (leity prayed to or person pleaded with. Dumayiny. Any dinaying, what relief asked. Any idai inq, the complaint. Any dayi'7ian, the person entreated, implored, or prayed to. IlumnirJ-. Any hiniffTq1, what requiested. Any hifigydn, person requested. Urnu'tang. Any intltang, what borrowed. Ex.: Jndtany ko iyany salapi ibiniyay ko sa kaniyadkahapon (I borrowed that money which I gave him yesterday). Anygiu'tang, TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 115 To borrow (anything exeept money). To demnand a treat (as at a celebration). To catch hold of; to catch on the wing. To absorb. the cause of borrowing. Arg tatTgan, the person borrowed fromt the lender. JIo'ntirant. Ang hiniramn, what borrowed. Ang hibn(In, the lender. Tvoaarahan. Ang tinarahati, what received as a treat. Ex.: Tinatarahan vamnin itong kalanin (we are getting these sweets as a treat). Dnictakip. Any dinakip, what seized thus. Ianotith it. Any hinithit, what was absorbed. VII1. Under this section may be considered in prefixed to or infixed with the personal p~ron~ouns, wNith w'hich it implies the idlea of possession. As a suffix with these pronouns, in (hin) expresses the sense of regarding, holding, reputing, etc., in. ~uie caseb. Ex.: Your. His:; her. Their. Our (all of us). Our (you andl I). Our (but not you). Mv. Jny6. Any iniiny6', your property; your. Inyohin nto, (consider it as your own; take it for your own. Kaniya'. Any kinakaniya', his [her] property. Kakaniyahin ko (I will hold it as his [her's]). Kaniiad. Any kinakanilad, their property. Kanilahin mo, regard it as belonging to them. Atin. Any inntatin, our property. Inatin niya',, he regarded it as ours. Kanitad. Any kinakanita', our property. Kinakanita' ko, I regard it as yours and mine. Amnin. Any inaamin, our property, but not yours. Aminin niny6' (you [plural] regard it as ours, but not yours). Akin. Any inaadkin, my property; mine. Indkin ko (I held it as mine). Inaatkin ko (I am holding it as mine). Aalkinin ko (I shall hold it as mine). VIII. Verbs of calling, whether by voice or signs, also follow this mode of conjugation. Ex.: To call. Tumduag. Any tinduag, who or what called. Any itaiuag, the call, instrument, or cause. Ang tauagan, the person called in order to be given something. Ex.: Sino any tinata~uag mo? (Who are you calling to?). Tinduag ko si Pedro, po6 (I was calling to Pedro, sir). Tauayan rno siya' nany isdad (Call him to come and get some fish). Kurna6n. Any kinao'n, what called, or brought, etc. Kumauay. Any kauayin, what motioned for. Any ikauay, what motioned with, or the cause. Any kauayadn the person motioned to. To call; also to bring; to fetch. To make signs for; to motion to. 116 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. IX. Verbs of "searching for" also take in for the direct object. Ex.: To look for. IHumdnap. Ang hindnap, thing sought for. To search about. Humnalihao. Ang hinalihao, what searched for. To look in every corner for. Sumaliksik. Ang sinaliksik, what looked for in this manner. To go in search of another. Sumungdo. Ang sinungdo, person sought by another. To grope for (as in the dark or like Umap6hap. * Ang inap6hap, what a blind person). groped for. X. Verbs of moving, when not due to turning away of what is moved, also take in for the direct object. Ex.: To move. To move restlessly. To shake (like objects badly packed) or to move (like loose teeth). To move anything. To shake (as something in a sieve); also to rock or dandle (as a child). To shake a basket or measure so it will hold more. To shake the head in negation. To shake anything, as a tree to gather the fruit. To wave the hands while dancing. Kumib6. Ang kinib6, what moved. Synonym: Kumislot; umib6. Gumaldo. Ang ginaldo, the nischief done through restlessness. Ang galauan the person disturbed thereby. Magaldo ang kamay niyd, his hand is restless; i. e., he is a pickpocket or thief (idiom). Kagalauan, mischief. Umugd. Ang inugd, what moved thus). Tumugoy. Ang tinugoy, what moved. Synonyms: Umugoy; umugd (sometimes). Umugoy also means to stagger, to totter. Umugug. Ang inugug, what shaken or rocked. Umulog. Ang inulog, what shaken down. Umniling. Ang iniling, what denied. Lumuglug. Ang linuglug, what shaken, as a tree. Kumunday. Ang kinunday, the waving thus. Ex.: Kinunday niydi (she waved her hands while she was dancing). XI. In is also used to express the result of the action of verbs which signify carrying, cutting, measuring, or weighing, when the result is considered on the side of the agent or ended therein. Umn is generally the indefinite, but mag and other verbalizing particles are to be found. When the result of a verb necessarily falls upon a person, in is used to signify the person. Ex.: To carry (general idea). Magdald. See under verbs of bringing, taking, etc. To drag along. Humild. Ang hinild, what dragged To carry on the shoulder. To carry a child on or suspended from the shoulder. along. lvMeans also "to arrest." Ang hinild, the person arrested; the prisoner. Pumasain. Ang pinasdn, what carried on the shoulder. Ang pasanan, the person who carried anything on the shoulder. Magsabi. Ang sinabi or ang sabihin, the child carried thus. The cloth by which the child was supported is denoted by ang isabi. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 117 To carry on the head. To carry in the arms. To carrv a child in the arms. Tro carry undler the arm. To carry anything in the lap. To carry by the mouth (as a dog, cat, bird, etc., carry food). To carry in or by the hands (as a basket, jar, etc.). To carry hanging from. the hand (as a pail, etc., by means of the handle). To carry anything along (by or in the hand). To carry on a pole (palanca). To cut (general term). To cut clothes (as a tailor). To tear. To chop, to hiew, to cut with an ax. To cut down; to fell (as a tree). To cut into pieces (as sugar cane). Magsvtiotig. Ang 8uno rigin, what carriedl thus; the burden. M1agjiangko. Avg pinangko, what carriedl in the arms. Pangko kin tono itii (carry this in your arms). Kunialonig. Ang kivialong, the child. Kalo~T~yin mio 8Riy(i (carry him in your arms). Avg kalofi-gai, the mother, nurse, or bearer. Afaqkilik. Ar/f; kivilik, what carriedl thus. (With accent on last syllable), rnagkilik, to carry mnuch thus. Mfagcandonfg. Anq kinandong, what carriedI in the lap. Kirtakaridong niya' (she is carrying it in her lap). Maglanqyay. Ang tinaii7,ap, what carried thus. Magsapo. Ang sv/apo, what carriedl thus. Sapohin mo iyi ei (carry that in yoaur hands). Maq bit bit. Ang binit bit, what carriedl thus, i. e., the pail. Afagtaglay. Ang tinaglay, what carried along.;1,z6o avg tatagla? yi mof What will You carry along? Umiusong. Ma~gusorig, to carry on a palanca between two. Aug inuso~ng, what carried thus, as a pig, bundle, etc. Synonym of magusong;7wagtuang. Ang tinuang,what carried thus. Lfsotij'in (tuaT7qin) ninyo6 ito' (carry this on a pole between you). Magp(Uol. Ma'msol, to cut uip (as cloth, etc.) Ang pinf'tol, what cut or cut up, as the cloth, etc. Ex.: Putlin nio it6 nangpahabd (Cut this lengthwise). Tumiab,"s..Ma9taba's, to cut much. Ang tinaba's, what cut out, i. e., the cloth or suit, etc. A ng tinabasan, what left over, also place. Avg pinagiabasan, the cuttings, clippings, remnants, or places of cutting (oit. Gumnisi. Ang ginisi, what torn, i. e., the (1oth or clothes. Tumag,!. Ang tinag&l, what chopped, e. g., the tree, etc. Sumapol. Ma/gsapol, to fell much. Avg sinapol, what felled or cut down. Aug isapol, the means of cutting down, e. g., the axe. Avg pinagsapolan, what remained, e. g., the stump. Umir-id. Avg minid, the sugar cane thus cut up. Kairid, a piece of the cut-up cane. Umarad. Aug araran, the palm thus tapped. To cut the tuba palm. (to obtain the sap). 118 118 ~~TAGALOG LANGUTAGE. To cut into pieces. To cut into equal pieces. To cut up into equal lenigths (as sugar cane, etc.). To cut poles or bamboo into pieces; also to cut at a distance. To cut into pieces (as a log). To cut water grass in order to catch the fish. To cut, as with scissors; to snip off, applied generally to cutting hair, metals, etc. To split open (as bamiboo); to cut against the grain; to peel off, as shavings; to go against the current; (fig.) to oppose. To cut or break a rope, cord, or siniilar object. To cut off the ears or nose. To ineasure (eithergrains or liquids). To gauge; to measure liquids by means of a rod. To measure by palms (8.22 inches). Ma gpa/os..,-ng pinalas, what cut up thusr-. MTan7go palaspalas na taluki, pieces of pure silk. Any ipalas, tool used for cutting up). Uirialnas. Ing iia/as, what cuit thus. Parninlid. Mlaypin/id, to cut much in this way. Anygpininlid. what cut into equal lenigths thus. Anygpinagpin/id, the large amiount cut thus. Any ipin/id, the utensil used. Ang ipoqpIin/id, the utensil usedl inuch. Jlnda.Any pirddpid (1) what cut uip thus; (2) wlmo cut thus. uA)g 'ipidpid, the tool or weapon used. Any pidpiran, the p~lace. Gunmi/ing. Any gini/iny, the wood thus cut up. A.4nygiqi/Iny, the tool used. Any manylydling, the wood cutter. 31agiala's. Anygfinala's, what cut thus. A,,ny pinaytalais, the large amount cut thus. Any ilal(Js, the tool by which cutting was done. Ang ipaf,tabos, thre tool by which much cutting was (lone. Any~ p~ineay/a/asoin, the place where much cutting was done. Gum ipit. Mlaggujnt, to cut onies -ownhair. Any ginupit, what cuit, i. e., the hair or metal. Anf, ginorpitao, the person whose hair has been cuit; or object fromn which something has been cut off. Soimalun got. Any sinailmeqat, what split open or lpeeledl off thus. Sotbion(/catin, f(o itony kauc~tyn, -split this bamnboo. Mayp a tid. Any pineatid, what cut thus. Patesrin (Patdav) m~o iyany lubid(, cut that rope. Muputid, to part; to break in two; to cease (fig. ). Napatid any ktotiyatiy hiniti)a, hie exhaledi his last breath; he ceased to breathe. Maygbtpatidpatid, to break up completely (as a cord or rope); or into several pieces. Pumoi'7;os, variation Pumoififyas. A~ oyg pinong(os, what cut off, as the sev — ered ear or nose. Pinyas has the same idlea, but is generally applied to cutting inanimate olbjects. Tusndaik/. Any tindkol, what mecasuredl. Th/aiin mno itony b'ig6s, measure this rice. Any takal/6n, the measure. Tumnd rot. Any tin 'ro/, w hat gaugetl. Any itdro/, the gauige. Duitiaongkal. Any~ dinanykal, what measured thus. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 119 To comipare measures. To weigh. To balance, to consider (f). To verify a weight,. Sunidbok oriimagetbok. Anygsinfibok, (1) one of the measures thus contpared. (2) Also to observe closely; to ''shadow.'' Ex.: Nubukatn vio siyd (watch him closely). Ilnig pi'nags~tbok-, the two measures thus compared. Ka~svibok, equal to anotlher thing. jEx.: Kasdbok tdno atyg t~big (the water is the depth of a man). Afagk-a~sdbok, to have aim understanding. Ex.: NAy~kakasd'bok sit(' ang bait (they have an understanding with each other). Tahmini bcig. Ang tinimibamg, what weighed thus. Ang timnba~i~1an, the scales or counterweight. Katim~bang, equal in weight. Ak6'y Iatbnlbang mao ( am of the same weight as you are). Tulmalarb. Any tinalarb, what balanced or considered. Tionaya. Ang tinaya, what verified (abs.). XII. Verbs which signify destruction, or change or transformation of the object as a result of the action, take in to express the result of such action, if no modifying circumstances, such as of cause, instrum-yent, etc., are implied. To destroy. To tear down; to raze. To kill; extinguish. Surnirch Any sinirad, what was destroyed. Guniibd. Ang giniba, what razed. Purnatay. Any pinatay (1) person or animal killed; (2) What extinguished. Any ipa tay or pinaypatay, the weapon or means of killing. Any pinagpatayan, the place where a murder was committed. Si ylm pinatay niyd, he killed him. Ang ipinatay niya' sa kaniyad any baril, the gun was what hie killed himi with. Pinatay niyd.siya fang baril, hie killed him with a gun. Mamnatay, to die. Any kaaiataylan, death (abstr.). Any kinaniataydin, the place of death (past time). Any ikinamnatay, the cause of death (past time). Ex.: Patay na siya' (hie is dead now). Narnatayain ak6' nany anma (I have been bereaved of my father by death). Aliny ba'hay any kinamnatayadn niy(m? (In which house did he die?) An6 anygikinamatayniya? (What was the cause of his death?) Naltiritnan s~iya' nany tinik (he was choked by afish bone). Maypatay, to sentence to death; to have another put to death. Afarnitay, to kill habitually. Tigapaypatay, butcher or executioner. Mfanhimatay, to faint away..Magpaka 120 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To set fire to. To rip; to unseam; to undo. To exchange; to barter. To arrange; to disentangle. To blacken. rnatay, (1) to allow one's self to be killed; (2) to commit suicidle. S~um'nog. An~gsimbi og, what burned. Tumastals. Aug tinastds, what ripped up, undone, etc. Puinal it. Ang pinalit, what exchanged or bartered. H1umn'sbay. Ang hint'tsay, what disentangled or set in order. M1agpakahu'say, to arrange well, to settle things with care; also to behave well. JI(iyitimz. Any initirn, what blackened. Any iitirn, the blackener. Kaitiman, blackness. Umitim, to become black. XIII. Verbs of receiving take in for the object of the action; some taking in for the thing affected and an for the person affected, as will be seen from the examples. To accept; to receive. Tumangap. Ang tinangyap, what received oraccep~ted. Avgtangapdn, the person from whom accepted or received; also the place. Any itangap, the cause of receiving, etc. To go out to meet anyone; to wel- Suinalbahong. Ang sinatlibong, the come by meeting, person met or welcomed thus. Maysisalatbony, to be received by many, as a governor, etc. Maykasaim~bony, to meet accidentally. Ex.: Nagkasalb'bong any dalawanq rnagk-apatid na babaye sa Maynil&l, (the two sisters met accidentally [by chance] in Manila). XIV. In also denotes the object of verbs of "inviting," etc. To invite. Urnzdkit. Aing ina kit, who invited. Umanyaya'. Any anyayahan, the person invited. Pumniginy. A.ng piniginy, the person invited. Magpalniq. Ang pinainig, the person invited. Magtaiuo. Ang tinaiuo, the person invited. Tauohin mo siya', invite him. Tauotantohin vto ang pagkakain, divide the food for each one of the guests (i. e., put it on plates). To invite a person to eat. Umalok. Ang inalok, the person so invited. XV. In generally denotes the person affected by the action of a verb, with those verbs which necessarily have a person for the object, on account of their nature and meaning. To prevail upon; to persuade with blandishments. To wait for. Magarogd. Any inaroyd, the person so prevailed upon. liumintay. Ang hinintay, the person waited for. Ilintin mo sila,9 wait for them. 3fayhintay (1) to wait and guard something for an TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 121 other; (2) to delay. Ex.: Ilouagniong ilvi~nhy sa bilkas aing pagparoon mio ((10 not delay your going until to-morrow). To carry in the arms, (as a child); Surnaklu14. Ang shiakiulu' (1) child, (2) to aid, to succor, to protect etc., carried thus; (2) person aided, (rare in Manila). etc. To reprehend; to reprimand; to find Sumala'. A~ng sinald, the person rep fault with. ritnanded or found fault withi. Ex.: Salahin 7no siyd anung kani - yang ginagawd (reprimand him for what he is doing) [ginawdt, what he has done]. Afagsat6, to find much fault, or for many to find fault, etc. 3fugkasal6, to err, to commnit a fault, to sin. Ex.: Ilotag mong ipagkasala'1 it6 (do not commit this error [sgin]. ipinagasaldh koaung pakikipaganay sainy6, (I am doing wrong in quarreling with you). ITpinagsala' niya' anq pakiki~pagauay sa inyo6 (he did wrong in quarreling with you). Ipagkasasal6idila'angpakik~ipagauay Sa kaniya (they will err in quarreling with him). Afagkakasala6, with reduplication of last syllable of particle, means "to forbid." To ask; to inquire. Tumanong. Ang tinanong, what asked; the question. Magtanong, to ask about. Ang iiinanong, what has been asked, or the reason for asking. Ang rnapagtanong, person fond of questioning. Ang matanoffgin, the questioner. Ang tinanofi-gan, the person questioned. XVI. In generally denotes the catch, result, or quarry with verbs of hunting and fishing. A few other verbs also follow this rule. To hunt (in general). Umdkad. Ang indkad, what hunted. To hunt with dogs or hounds. Ma'ffgaso (from aso, dog). Ang inaso, the chase, the game caught. Ang ipinafiigaso, the dog used thus. Ang masi~gasiTgaso, the hunter with dogs. To hunt with a " bating" or net Bumating. Ang binating, the deer (generally for deer). or game thus caught. Lx.: Ang binating ko auig bundok (I was net hunting in the mountains). Ang binatiriTgan, the place of " net hunting." To huuit wvith a shotgun; to use a Allarmaril (from baril, shotgun). Ang shotgun. miamamaril, the hunter with a shotgun. Ang pinamnaril, what shot thus. To catch birds by means of a bird- Ma ffg atit; magpaifg'at (from kati. (all, or by a snare, or with another Ang pinaTgati', what has been bird. caught thus. To fish with a hook. Marninuit. Angbininuit, whatcaught. Ang ibinuit, the hook. Ang mamiminuit, the fisherman. Ang 122 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To fish with the seine or net, called "lainbat.'' To fish using a light (as also to bunt with a flare). To fish (in general). To sweep. pinaminiiwititan, the canoe or lplace from which such fish ing is being dione. Alfawlaim-bat (fromt lauial. ) Any Iifl(tillbat, thecatch; the haul. A ug ipanlaoidbat, the means for fishing t hus, 9i. e., thre seine or net. Ma it lao. A ugi J Tf(O ila 0a, the lplace where such fishing or hunting was done. Augy pinanygilao, what caughit thus. Ma-igisdd (fromi isddl fish). Ang pirtai~isdd', the fish which have been caug t. Ing )wr7qjii-qiisdd, the fisherman. Maywtalis. Auig inwalis, the sweepings; what was or has been swept up (from walis, brooni). XVII. In is also used to denote the ob~ject with verbs of eating, drinking, swallowing, and analogous acts. To eat. To drink. To swallow (food) greedily. To swallow (gulp) liquids. To sip (as soup). To suck at (as sugar-cane). To bite. AKamain. Au.),g kirnaiu~, what was eaten. Ex.: Kirtain any kapatid na lataki ino any tinupay, your brother ate the bread. Kanin, food (cooked rice). Kakaniio, delicacies. Ang kandin, the eat~ing place. Any A-ak-an6v, the dining room; or platter. Mayk-ain, to eat much or by mnany. Umiu out. Aug ininuiii, what was or has been (irunk. Inumin, drink. Any inuman, the (drinking place; trough; cup (drinking vessel). Magnrumt, to drink much or by many. M1aypairunir, to give another something to drink; (2) to water animals or fowl. Ex.: (1) Pai hutnin ko siya' nang tl"big? (Shall I give him some water?) Ilonay, pa'inumin ma slya nanvg alak- (No, give him some wine.) (2) Pinaiinurn nruny() baga' any mafga' cabayo? (Did you water [give drink to] the horses?) Opol, (Yes, sir). l~apainuin la k-ay Toonas (Ask Toma's to give you something to drink). [indef. ] Lumiamnon. Any linamolol, what was or has been swallowed thus. Var. Lmononioui. Lumagok. Any liinagohk, what gulped down. ilworuigop. -Anyhiniyop,whatsipped. Puntaiy6s. Any pinanybs, what sucked at. Kumagat. Aug kinagat, what bitten. Mayk-agatan, to bite mutually (as two dogs.) Mfagk-aatkagatani, to pretend to bite mnutually. Naykakagalkagat any dalawany aso (the TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 128 two (logs are only pretending to bite each other). JMaga gat, to run aroundl biting, as an animal in a rage. To snap at. Sto~iiyhglal. Any siniiiyhal, wxho or what snappcd at. To bit~e (as a pig at people). Kuioobko(b. Any khiabkab, who or what bitten by a pig thus. To chew. Ny9ionoyad. Any 2T-ginoyd, what chiewed. XVIII. Acts of the senses, either general or modified, admit in to express the (lefinite results of such acts, with two exceptions. These are htnri~iifin (to look at) and tumiirtin (to taste liquor) which take an as a suffix for reasons of euphony. To see; to look at. To look at. To watch for; look out for; to sight. To look attentively, turning the eyes or head. To look mnuch at things, noting and considlering them; to inspect. To look sideways. To behold; to view. To hear. To bear. To listen to; to pay attention to. To smell. To scent; to Iperceive a strong odor. To taste. To relish; to like a taste. To sample; to try; etc. To taste without swallowing. To taste liquor without swallowing it. To feel; to touch (general). Kuinitd. Any k'initd, what seen or looked at. Tto iifj-in. Any tifi-jnain; amy tinifi7-g odwhat looked at. To'mando. Anygtinana"o, what sighted. Tatnauan, watchtower; lookoutplace. Maiaruooo, watchmnan; lookout. Luinid71'o.Anyg livii7ijdnv, what looked at thus. E~x.: Dt' no ako' linii~jd~;n (vou did not turn -your head to look at me). Unmoninao. Any inaninao, what inspected. Stuindiyap. Anyg sinuli yap), what looked'at sideways. Pan6od. Any pinanolod, what beheld. DumiTigyi. Any d'inigi~gi, what heard. Any diTgain, person listened to. Maykinyig. Any kininyiy, what heard. Buvotiay a. Any binatyay, what listened to. Var., kinamiatyay and n(Ityag. Urnatmoy. Any inomn-oy, what smelled, 1. e,., odor. Am-oyfin v?o it(' (smell this). Suwtanyhtod. Any sinanyhtod, what scented. Lminasa~p. Anyglinasap, what tasted kuinainmrun. Any ninamwnrnt, what relished. Tainikin. Any tiknninb, what samnpled. Twnipiny (r.). Any tipid~gan, what tasted thus. Tvniimtim. Any tinlinmna, what tasted. ihumipo'. Anyg 7hiipo% whiat felt or touched. Ex.: TVdYIionigiah ihio'sa kaniya~ng bhaq. [idiom] (there is nothing to touchi in his house, i. e., hie is very Ipoor). 124 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To press down; also to close or seal a letter. To touch lightly. To touch any part of the body lightly hut suddenly. To touich sudldenlv. To run into; to collide with. To touch carelessly an(I affectedly. To touch with the lips. To feel for in the (lark. To pinch; t~o soften. To ruib; to soften; to annoint. To pick (as a guitar); to pluck at (as a sleeve). MIagdiit. Ang diitan, what pressed or closed. Pandiit; seal; wax; gum. houiiarnko' (r.). Ang tinangk&', what touched Syn. Tvmariykil. Ilumipik (rare). Ang hipikan, person touched. Syn. taghi6' (also rare). Durnantik (rare). Ang dantikan, the person thus touched. Magqparonron, var.niagpar~orong. Any j)uiwygco'oroiwo, what touched. Au~g ip~inagparonroni, the cause of having touched thus. Saimagi, var. S~umoayoy (latter rare). (Jtnuurnil (rare). Variations of this root are gainil, gob~il, andl gonubit. Magdaki'~yit (rare). This is not the verb "to kiss," which is hanialik. flu uik-ap. Au4ig hinikap, what felt for thus. Pumisil. Ang pinisit, what rubbed, etc. Pislirn ruo it nang karnay mo (rub this with your hand). fluinitot. Any hinitot, what rubbed, etc. Any hitlotan, the person rubbed, etc. Hilot (n.), midwife; manlhitiot, m assageur. 3fagkatab~it, var. maykalbit. Any Pinaykatabit, what plucked at or picked thus, i. e., the sleeve or the strings. Any ipinaykalabit, the instrument or means, i. e., the fingers or plectrum (pick). Ang pa~galibit, the instrument played upon thus. Tulluoytug. will or mind. Uniataata, to remember (purposely). Ma kaalaata, to remember (casually). Any inaatoata, what is remembered purposely. iMayinday. Any pinagbubtnday, what is being calculated, i. e., the result. Um"ibig. Ang iniibig, the person who is liked (and reciprocates the liking); (2) what is liked; also any ibiyin. Uiniroy. Anyginiiroy, the person being caressedl. SuriintJi. Any sinisinta', the person who ts loved and who loves in return. Aag nasisintd, the person who is loved, but who is unaware of the fact or does not return it. Ma qsintahan, to love mutually. Mfaqisip4. Any ird hip, what is being thoug-ht of.. Any inisip, what was thought of. Anyiiuipin, what will be thought of. MAayisipisip, to To play any instrument or ring a hell (by strokes). XIX. In also expresses acts of the, To remember. To calculate; to consider. To desire; to like. (To caress.) To love. To think. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 125 To esteem; to love. To think. To explain. To inquire; to assure one's self; to verif y. To verify, etc. think deeply; profoundly. Ang pagkoit.,ip,tie opiniion (act). Kais~ipuin (abst.), opinion, thought. Lumiy'oag (rare). A ii1 liniliyoig, what or who esteemed or loved. Sintd is more commyon, but is a Sanskrit word derived through Malay. Painimndim. Angpiwipunim(hin, what is thought. M3agsalaysay, var. magsays(a~/. Ang sinasalaysay, what is being explained. Salaysaiyin mno ito6 (explain this). Urnuiusidid (r.). Ang inuulusithd, what is being inquired, etc., var. alo-.silhd, idea of verifying, etc., also. Umnusisd. Any inuusis&, what is being verified. Tauong walang usiscl, a person without carefulness; a careless person. XX. The making of something from raw or crude material is expressed by using the finished product verbally or as a verbal noun with in, the material used taking the nominative, if there are no limitations of cause, tim-e, place, etc., connected with the action. To put up a house. M1agbca hay? (from 64hay, house). This word has been given as derived from Malay balei, hall; court, from Sanskrit valaya, an inclosure, but it would seem rather to be a Malayan name, as in Ng'ela (Florida or Anudha) Island of the Solomon Group the word is vale and far away in Hawaii is hale. There may be saidl to exist intermediate words throughout. Ex.: Bahayin mo itonq kalhoy (Pnt up a house with this lumber). Magbadhayba'hayan (dim.), (to play at building houses [as children do]). Nagba'hayba'hayan ang ruangd batdl (the children were playing at building houses). Magbaldbal Balabalin mo itong kayo ito6 (make a cloak out of this cloth; or wrap yourself in this cloth). M1agbarb, Itong kayong ito"y babaroin. niya' (hie [she] will make a shirt out of this cloth). An indicates a person as the object of the action. Ex.: Baroan rno iyang batdl iyadn (put a shirt onl that child). Mamaro, to wear a shirt habitually. Magsalanul, from salaual, trousers (Arabic, Seluwar). Itong kayong it6'y sasalaualin ko, I will make trousers out of this cloth. Magsapin (from s~apin, a shoe or sandal). Itong balat na it6'y sasapinin nilad (they will make this leather To roll one's self up in a cloak or " 'bal dba1. " To put a shirt on; to wear a shirt (occasionally), from bar6, a cloth used to make shirts, and also meaning a shirt itself. To wear trousers. To wear shoes (occasionally); to put a pair of shoes on. 126 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. into shoes). Ma4niplin, to wear shoes habitually. To put an apron (tapis) on; to xAear Mhtp~ /aym-kgnymonq hiyn any fila tapifs occasionally. pasin viqyd (let her make ail apron out of that cloth). Mavapis-, to wear a tap~is habitually. To carry a cane, or tenyk-od. Mnaglu1nkod. ftouy A4(,Ihoy an,(it6'y tina,?hinn qkod ko (I ani making a cane out of this wood). XXI. In, used with the name, of a destructi\ve agent, denotes the present or past result of the (lestructive action. It is p~refixedl to vowel nouns and infixed with. those beginning with a consonant (et is counted as a vowel) White ant (termite). Anay~. Irei nvy any 'nw7~h16 libro (the books were destroyedl by the wAhi te anits [were white-anted]) Locust. Mbnqy. Biwtbnltang (o g 1m(Ilay (the rice is being destroyed by the lo(lists). IRat. Dqag. J)innadnyda ang bigyds (the rice [hulled] is being destroyed by the rats [lit, is being "rattedl"]). Mandarayd, rat-catcher. Crow Link~~~~~~U(. fnuntak arty sayin-g (the bananas are being destroyed by the cro NN s [being "crowed"']). XXII. In, prefixed or infixed, used with words denoting parts of thec body indicates past or present pain or suffering in the part namned. The first syllable of the root is reduplicated to indicate the present tense. Head. Ui. miob atk6o (I head a headache). Jnuulo niyqd (she [hie] ha~s a heal-;ache). Ma1(sak-it anmy ulo 4ko (my head aches). Chest. Dib~dib. JDinibdib niyd 1(he had apain in the chest). Stomach. Sik-mn etra. Sin isikmiura k-a? (D~oes your stom)ach painl you?) 0~psi sik-invrtt abi (yes, sir; I have a painl in the stonmach). Abdomen. Tiydn. Tiaiydn nikn (niy abdomen painedl.me). Tintn,'nn ako6 (my abdomen lpains ine) XXIII. In like manner, in, prefixed to or inserted v,%-it~h roots signifying tliseases rnay denote the past or presenit state of the disea,~e. rhe first syllable of the root is reduplicated to indicate the prmesemnt tense. If a (chronic state of the disease is to be expressed, the lpatie nt is (lenoted lby the suflixing of in (hin) to the root. (The future tense, it must be remembered, reduplicates the first syllable of the root.) The suffix in may also denote a physical defect or thie result of a disease. Smallpox. Buintonq. A-ny bianbubnlttong, the pet'Ison whioisfhaving,smimallp~ox. Any bi'ninlitori, thme person wvho has had Smallpox. Any bulutorgini, the niarks of small1pox. Maybe dm'dony, to becomne marked by smallpox. Mayik-abuhitony, to have anl epidemyic of smallpox. Asthma. Ifii k. Ifiikaa, ast-lh matic person. Gout. Piy6. Piaohin, gouty person. Abdomen. Ti~yia. ~Tiy(min, corpulent person. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 127 "IN, (HIN; NIN)' SUFFIXED. XXIV. in (hin) suffixed to namies of lbirds denotes galnecocks of the g~neral color of the birdl named. Some words change time accent of the raot, while others retain the original accent. Ex.: Hawk (several species). ( row\\. Lawvin. Lalawinhi, game cock of a brown color, like a hawk. lak. UuaA n, black game cock. It will be seen that the first syllable of the root is redll)licat~ed. X-XV. In (Iine) (lenotes the completed action or result of a verb which reqnuires an object if suflixedl to a verbal root of this nature; provided the root admnits in for the (lirect object. Ex.: To drink. Umininu. Inurnin, drink. To eat. KuDmain. Kanin, foodl. Kakanin; kak-ain, refreshments, sweets, nuts. These last words formed with ka mean "food-resembling." To sew (occasionally). TVmnohiai'. Tahioin, anything sewed; tailor work. Afagtlahi, to sew in company (many) or to sew much. Maiamdi, to sew for a living. Mlanaarwi, tailor; tailoress; seamstress, needlewvoinan (dressmaker)..3faqpataldt, to order to sew. Lx.: 1t6 ang patead niya' sa akin (this is what she told me to sew). To graze. Surnabsab. Ang sabsabien,what grazed, i. e.,I the grass. Avg sabsaban, the grazing place; pasture, etc. XXVI. In used with verbal roots capable of expressing qualities which mnay be acquired or extended to persons, animals, etc., indicates the object of the action. Ex.: To look out (as from a window). To swim. Duinei7f;ao. Ang duar)gauin, what seen by looking out. This and similar forms contain no tense idea. Aug dinu)Tgao, what was or hias beeu looked at thus. Aug dinurun-gao, what is being looked at thus. Ang do rui7Tauan, the windlow. Manu67jao, to look by many thus or sornetimes to appear at the window (also idea of habit thus). Lx.: Hom.ag kang nmaneuiifao sa duruni-g auan (do not look out of [or appear at] the window). MaruTgao, to be at the window. Mfarurufgao siya, he is atthe window. MakaruTgao, to look out of a window casually. Magpadurfgao, to order to look out. Makidufi-gao, to join anotherin thus looking out. Miagkapadtofgao, to look out suddenly, moving quickly in order to do so. Lumaifgoy. Jlfag1lcmi7goy, to swim carrying something..Arng laffgoyin, what gained by swimming, or object swam for. Aug ilaffigoy, what carried while swimming, e. g., the (lothes; also by what means. 128 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To fly. To dive for; to dive (occasionally). To run. Lao goyan, a buoy. Langoyain, a place for swimmiing; where swimmning mayvbedone. PiooigloJgOoyn, place whiere swininiidng was (lone while carrying something. Ex.: oirtoinong koang lumaon goy? Ilind' p6. (Do you know how to swim? No, sir.) Ano./ Toq6 log ko. '1 lhindt?oa'ronoflg Jo~q og oim 7, o'i ( W hat! You a Tagalog and don't know howv to swim?) 71h-ga sulan kaf (Where are you from?) Toga bundok, p6 (I live in the mount~ains, sir). Paid (I did not know it). Lumipad. Ang liporin, the object of the flight. Ang ilipad, the wings, or instrumnent of flight. Ang lip~aron, place of flight.. Meglipod, to fly much, or to and fro. Malopalipod, to cause or teach to fly. Ang pinalipad, what set or taught to fly. S8oiiisid. lug sisirin, what dove for. The reason for (living or the 1)ody submerged, ang is~isid. Aung si~siron?, the diving place. Moagslisid, to (live much. l-Ig phino!/.91il, what (love for much. Mfanisid, to dive professionally (for a living). Mouoi'isid, diver. Tumakbo6. Ang Iokbohin, what may be run f or. Takbolhiu, runaway. Aoagtokbo', to run much. A ng itaklbo, the cause for running, or what is carried while running. Alig takobohoa (1) the place of running; (2) the person run away from; (3) the person for whom something mnay be carried. TVmgakbofokbo1), to rove ahout; to run around; to gad about. Makotokb6', to be able to run. XXVII. In used with mna adjectives wNhich have an attributive sense imparts the idea of holding, considering, reputing, etc., according to the meaning, of the adjective. This has heen fully explained under the adjective (q. v.) XXVIII. 1r suffixed also expresses the act of causing emotion or sensation in others when used with roots which require no ohject, and form the class of verbs called neuters, which are generally expressed in English by " to be " followed by an adjective. It may also be prefixed. To be hungry. Moag~iosn. Ex.: Nagugmiturn ong cabayo (thelhorse is hungry). Honog roong guturnin ang cabayo (don't let the horse go hungry). Kagutumian, hunger. To be thirsty. Mo h o ou g m u iuuh o n aso (don't let the dog remain thirsty, or be suffering from thirst.). Ex.: Nagugu'tum bagal TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 129 kaoy6? (Are you hungry?) Hinditt nauiihao l147nanl! (ako (No, I am only thirst~y). To be afraid. Matdkot. Natatdkot ka? (Are you afraid?) Op)6 77ga, alc6y nat atakot (yes, sir,lIam afraid). Mak-afilkol, to cause fear. Ang ilcutokof, the cause of fright. Ing katal.otarm, the person feared, also thing feared. Ex.:.1n6 ang kinatatakolan mo? (What are you afraidl of?) Anig kimiafkotaii 4o'y atrulmanga' tulisaln (I was afraid of the ladrones [bandits]). Thmdkot, to frighten or scare another. Ang takotin, the person frightened. Takotin mno siydJ, frighten (scare) him. XXIX. It will be seen from the foregoing that in is not used with roots conjugated with wet, except in certain senses, as shown by the above examples. XXX. In suffixed to terms for money forms words denoting an object or material costing the amount relpresented by the money quoted. The first syllable of the root is duplicated, but the accent (loes not change. Ex.: Half peso (25 cents U. S. currency). Salapi. Sasalapiin, a half-peso's worth. Peso (50 cents U. S. currency). P1isos. Pipisosin, a peso's worth. XXXI. Irn suffixed to some nouns when paying compliments, etc., indicates that the party addressed resembles or lpartakes of the qualities expressed by the word used. The Candai (whichbhas asweet odor). Kand6. Kandahin, asweet person. Honey. Pulot. Pulotin, honey (term of endearment). XXXII. Suffixed to roots capable of being expressed with the idea of plurality, in denotes something to have taken place many times. The accent of the root changes invariably. Ex.: Idea of whipping. Ila mp 6s. Ilampasrn, whipped many tines. To lose; to miss. Mawcdld. Wala ii, to lose many times. To sue another; to litigate. Afagimtsap. Usapin, a suit tried many times. Palausap, barrator (one who is continually engaging in causeless litigation). XXXIlI. Ynm, when prefixed to class namnes of human beings signifies a resemblance to the class named. Ex.: Woman; female. Babaye. Baba ynin, effeminate man. Binabaye, has almost same meaning. Man; miale. Lalaki. Lalakinin, masculine ormiannish woman or girl. XXXIV. The object to obtain possession of which an intransitive action is performed sometimes takes in, if niot otherwise expressed. Ex.: To go or come out; to take out. Lumaba's. Ang labasin, who or what sought thus; object for which action performed. Maglaba's, to take out. Ang labsdn, what may be 6855-05 9 130 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To jump. To leap or jump down; (2) to alight. To go or come down (the stairs or a ladder, etc.). taken out, (as foo-d from the cooking p~ot), or what may flow out of the body (as blood, etc.). Ex.: Labs6n mo ak-6 vang kanin (take some rice out for mne). Maglaba'slabls, to go out and come in. Lumokso6. Ang loksohiin, whatj umped for. Ang loksohan, the place of jumping. Maglokso',tojumipmuch, or by many. Magioksolhan, to jump by many in competition. Lutinut-song. Ang lusoii7;in, object, leaped down for or alighted for. A ng lusoi-tgan, the place of lighting. Idiom. Lu'song na palad, a leap (stroke) of luck. Maglu'song, to throw down or push down. Pwiiarnaog. Angpanaogin, the object for which action may be performed. Aug panaogon, the place or person for whom action may be performed. Ex.: Panmaoganrno ak6 nang Mtbig (bring me some water down here). Magpanaog, to bring something down thus, or to go or come down much. XXXV. Some transitive (requiring an object) verbs do not, and some intransitive verbs do, admit in. IN-AN. XXXVI. In prefixed to or nfixed with a root to which an is suffixed at the same time is used to express the result of an action when the said result is a concrete object. Ex: To embroider miats (petates). Magsadbat. Sinabatan,an embroidered mat (petate). To do fine needlework; to do fine Sunnilani. Sinulamnan, fine needlesewing. work, as a handkerchief or other article of fine sewing. XXXV1J. The same construction is also used to express the following: (1) Things prepared for food frorm. the raw material. (2) Acts done with t~he object expressed by the root. (3) The refuse caused by some actions. Plurality with the last is expressed by the use of the definite prefix pag in connection with in (pinag). Ex.: Egg. Honey. To peel rattans (bejuco). To thresh. To saw. To sort cotton or silk; to cull; to pick over. Itlog. Initloga'n, anything made from eggs, as cake or an omelet, etc. Pulot. Pinalo'ta'n, anything made with honey in it. Palotdu., sweets made from honey. Pulot-gafil, honey and cocoanut milk. Kurnoyais. Kinayasau, the peeling (sing-). Aug pinagkayasan, the peelings (plur.). Gumiik. Giniikan, straw. Pinagiikau, much straw. Magifik, to thresh much. Lurnagari. Pinaglagarian, sawdust. Anqgmanlalagarl, the sawyer. Pu'mili'. Aug pinilihan, the refuse; waste. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 181 MA-IN (HIN). XXXVIII. In (hin) suffixed and ma prefixed to roots signifying mental emotions, passions, and involuntary actions form adjectival nouns which generally require to be expressed in English by an adjective and a noun. XXXIX. If the root admits of contraction, begins with 1, or an intensive degree is to be expressed, the first syllable of the root may be reduplicated. These words have the accent on the last syllable as a rule. For examples see under ma. XL. It may be repeated here that acquisition or assimilation is generally denoted by in; the instrument, if allowable, and the reason for the carrying out of the action by i; and the place, or the person from whom, by an. Additional examples: To reach; to overtake; (2) to conclude (as a meeting). To buy. Umdibut. Ang abutin, what reached, etc. Angindbut, whatwasreached, etc. A1g abuttan, the person overtaken or thing reached for. Utnabut, to reach for one's self. Mag6 -but, to reach for another. Ang page but, the act of reaching. Magabutan, to reach for each other mutually. Magabutabutan, to reach many things or pass things from hand to hand in numbers. Makadbut, to take; to be able to reach. Makiibit, to ask another to reach for something. Ex.: Naki6but aki kay Juan narg tilbig (I aske d Juan to reach me [get for me] some water). Burn ili. Ang bilhin or ang nabili,what bought. Ang ibili, the purchasing agent (money or article). Ang bilhdn or ang nabilhdn, the person from whom bought. i. e., the seller. Ang binilhdn, the person from whom something was or has been bought. Angibinili, (1) the money with which something was or has been bought; (2) the person for whom something was or has been bought. Ang pagbili, the buying; purchasing (act). Mamili, to buy much. Anq pamimili, the buying of many things (act). Ang namimili, the buyer by wholesale, or liberal buyer. Ex.: Pinamili ko iyang mangd kaldkal (I bought those goods at wholesale). Makabili, to be able to buy. Ang nakabili, the person able to buy (past). Ang ipinabili, the time, reason, or price in or for which something is or has been bought. Ang mangd pinabilhdn, thesellersthus (many). Ang kabili, the person with whom a purchase has been agreed upon. Ang nagkabilihan, the buyer and seller thus agreed (past tense). Ang pagkabilhdn, the cost (past tense). Ex.: Pagkabilhdn ko man 132 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To sell. To snatch; to pull up by the roots; to take by force. To take. To request; to ask for. To close the hand. nang brhay, paroro'on ak6 (even if it should cost ine my life, I will go).Magbili. Ang ipaybili, what sold. Ang ipinagbili, what was or has been sold. Any pinagbilhctr, the person to whom sold (past tense); the place, or the price. Any naipayb~ili, what has been soldlby error. Avny napagbilhAn, the money realized froinwhatlhas been sold. Any poagbibili, the act of selling. (The act of buying is aug paybili.) Maybibdif, to sell by wholesale. Kumiank-ai. Ang kinamkani, what snatched, etc., thus (past tense). A ng kainkaninin, what snatched, pulled up, etc. (no tense idea). Mfafii~mkam, to go about pulling up things (as a gardener pulls up weeds). Kuniuha..Ang kinuha, what was or has been taken. A-ny ikuhia, the means for taking (no tense idea). Ang kun~in, what taken (no tense idea). Any ikinuhia, the means by which something was or has been taken. Aubg kttn~bu, the place or person froin whom taken. I1umi~ih~g. Any hininy'i1, what asked for. Aug nahifgfyi, what obtained by askinig. Anyghit7g~ii, what asked for (no tense idea). Kumnti ikin. Magkin~kinm, to grasp; to close the hand upon. Any kitnkimin, what grasped. Any kiinimkimr, what was or has been grasped. Any ik-imk-i~n, the grasping instrument; e. g., the hand. THE PARTICLE I. I. The definite particle i, which is almost invariably a prefix and found as an infix with a very few words for strictly euphonic reasons, is used with sentences or phras~es by which the subject is representedl as losing control of something, expulsion, cause, means, instrument, time (not tense), and verbs of adjusting, copying into, transferring, translating, transplanting, etc., in the latter case indicating the object of the verb. II. Sentences or phrases including a verb with i have the agent in the genitive, the direct ob)ject in the accusative (if there is a direct object), and the word (denoting the instrument., time, or cause in the nominative. The nominative word is emphasized by being placed at the beginning of the sentence or phrase. To pinion; to tie the hands. Gumdpos. Any igapos, the meansi. e., the rope. Ex.: Jyapos mo sa bilangoin ifony pantalit ('Pinion the prisoner with this rope). Emphatic: Itong pantal't igapos inw sa bilangoin (with this rope pinion the Irisoner). TAGALOG LANGUTAGE. 133 III. li, meaniing cauise, is generally comibined with ka, the definite form iof maka, forming ike; and further with in for the past and present tenses, ikina. To comec here. Puniarito..4ng ipinarif 0, the reason or timie of coining here. Any ikinpltthe reason or time thus (ps es). Ex.: An6 ang ikiioapaito 0 o (What did you come here for?) )Si Juan any ikinaparito ko (Juan was the cause of my having come here). Sino anygpineritohan mno? (Who did you come to see here?) Si Juian (Juan). IV. Somre verb~alroots have thieidea of going away, leaving, etc., inherent in themselves, anid therefore have the definite in either in or i. Ex.: To go away; to leave. Untalis. Aug ineis, the leaving (pref. to any iails). Kahapon, ang inalis k-o (yesterday, I left.). Any pageits, the act of leaving. JMayaUis, to take something away. Any pagaalis, the action of taking something away. Kapagaahfs ko nit6?7g(ay(;n, (I have just finished taking this away). Makaalis, to be able to go away. Makapagali's, to be able to take away. V. An indirect object following a preposition takes the genitive with a sentence or phrase uising i, but the construction of the rest of the sentence or phirase is unchanged. Ex.. To buyv. Bamnili. Ibili mo any batcl nang kakanzn (Buy somne sweets for the child). To carry; to accompany. Ilumnatid. JIhatid mo ak6 sa baihay nany ainaumo (Accompany me to your father's house [to the house of your father]). Miaghatid, to send; to remit. Miayhatidhatiran, to send to each other mutually. To look for. Humadnap. lhdnap mo ak6 nany isany mabutiny cabayo (Look for a good horse for me). 1h6-nap mo ako nany mariTga' itloy (Look for some eggs for me). VI. The person for whoin some act is done and the indirect object of an action benefiting or performed for the benefit of another, take the nominative.; the verb being used with i and the proper tense forms. Thle foregoing sentences are also examples of this, as well as the following examp~les: To cook; to make by cooking or like Mayluto'. Ex.: Ipaylutb mo any capiprocess. anm many sicolate (Make some chocolate for the captain). Ipagluto' rno ako6 nany kenin (Cook me some rice). To build a house. Magbdhay. Ipagbalhay mo ak6 (Build me a house). 134 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. VII. Igenerally replaces in with verbs which adImit, both direct and indirect objects, i lheing used1 to express the direct object (accusative) and an expressing the indirect object (dative, ctc.). E'x.: To recommend. Magbilin. Ang 'ipagbilin, the recommendation. A,.,ng ipinaqhiii, what was or has been recomnmended. u1g pa{fhiliwon, the person recommended (no tense idea). Ang pinaybilinan, the person who was or has becn recomrmended. To make a gift; to lpresent with. Alfagbiyaya. Ang ipinaghiya ya, what was or has been given, i. e., the gift. AuIg pinagbiyayadi, thieperson to whom something was or has been given. Mfabiyayang tituo, a liberal person. To advise. iJ'fagh~itol. This verb also ineans in some cases to procure women. Ang iluitol, the advice. Aug 'ihin~tol, what was or has been advised. Aug haoalan, the person advised. Aung hinatolan, the person who was or has been advised. Aung ipaghitol, the woman procured. JH~apagh-atot na lalaki, procurer; panderer. M1apaghadtol na baba!,e, lprocllress. To give back; to restore. fa gsaoli. This verb also means to go back, to return to the place of starting. 4ig isinmaoli, what was or has been restored. -, ng inaolian, the person to whomn something was or has been restored. Aug pagsaohlao, the place returned to. To tell; to narrate; to report. Afagsalitad. Au4ig alitin, what told or reported (no tense idea). Aung sinalild; any isinabia~, what was or hasbleen told, etc. Aongsinasalild; atnq isina~sal i/a, whlat is being told, et.Ag sasali/ion; ang isa.s(aita, what will be told or reported. Aung pag&olitaiu, the imerson told or reported to (no tense idea). AuIg pinuagsali/ao o, the person told, etc. (past tense). Aung pinagsasalitadn, the person being told or reported to (present tense). Aug pagsasalitaan, the person to be told or reported to (futuire tense). Aug ipinagwalital, what was told and the reason for telling. Aung,nagsali/4l, the teller (past tense). Aug nagsasali/d, the narrator (present tense). Ang magsasaiital, the teller (future tense). Aug kasalitaan, the companion in telling; the coreporter. Ma~salitd, garrulous, like an agedl person. To talk; to speak. Sumabi. Aug sabihiin, what said or the person or thing mentioned. Magsabi, to converse; to say. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 135 Ang isabi, the reason or cause of the conversation. Ang isinabi, what was or has )een said. Ang ipinagsabi, what was or has been said and the reason or cause. Ang sabihtba, the conversation or story. Ang pinagsabihan, what said to a certain person or said at a certain place. To signal. Trmzuro. Magturo, to point out; to show; (f.) to teach. Ang itinurb, what signaled, pointed out or taught. Ang tinuroan, person shown (taught) or signaled to. Other verbs which have two objects like the foregoing are utmdral, "to teach;" magbalitd, "to report;" magbigay, "togive;" and magbili, "to sell," which have been or will be explained in other places. VIII. In the majority of cases i expresses the means or instrument by which an action is brought about. It is prefixed directly to the root for those conjugated with um in any manner, and to the verbalizing particle in the other conjugations. This applies to all tenses. The first syllable of the root or the last syllable of the particle, as the case may be, reduplicate in the present and future tenses. In the second pluperfect and second future perfect tenses the particle i is inserted between the particle na or ma and the root, whether the latter be simple or compound. (See tables.) IX. The root denoting an instrument, if capable of conjugation, may denote the indirect object, if there is no nominal direct object in the sentence. Ex.: Ano ang ipinata!r niyd? (What was he killed with?) Ibindril niyd (he was killed with a gun). With in the sentence would be: pinatay niya nang b6ril (he was killed with a gun). In the last example the nominal subject bhiril is expressed. (See tables for the conjugation of an instrument with i, and with means for accomplishment of an action.) X. I is also used, as has been stated, to express the means for the accomplishment of an action. Ex.: Wald siyang ibili nitong bdhay (he is without the means to buy this house). Mayroon ako ibabayad sa iyo (I have the means to pay you). XI. I combined with in may express the direct object (accusative) of actions performed for the benefit of others, which may also be expressed by in alone; an expresses place in general with such verbs; and i combined with pag and pinag according to the tense, expresses the person who is, was, has been, or will be the beneficiary of the action. To roast (meat); to bake or fry (fish Magihao. Anginiihao, what is being or meat). fried or roasted. Ang ipinagiihao, the person for whom something is being roasted, etc. Ang ihaoan, the frying pan or roaster. Ang pinagihaoan, the place of roasting. To scald or make, as tea; to boil (as MaglagO. Ang inilaga, what boiled potatoes, etc.). or made thus. Ang ipaglagd, the person for whom to be made. Ang lagadn, the cooking pot, teapot, etc. Ex.: Ipaglaga mo ak6 nang sa (make me some tea). To cook. Maglutb. Ang lutoin, what cooked. Ang inilutb, what cooked (see next paragraph). Ang lutoan, the cooking utensil. Ang paglutodn, the cooking place. XII. When roots beginning with h, 1, or a vowel (including w) are conjugated with in and instrumental i, etc., the Tagalog reverses the particle 136 TAGALOG LANGUIAG E. in to ni or changes it to iia, in or(Ier to avoidl the harsh sounds of the double i, especially with roots commencing with i. Ex.: To throw (lown. Maghuilog. A-ng ihluilog, what dashed to ground or thrown down (no tense idea). i.l ng 'ihim'dlog or auig ittahlulog, what was or has been thrownd(own, etc. Aig ihinulo'log or ang inalihahiflg, what is being thrown down, etc. Auig'ihnhriog, what will be thrown down, etc. (See tables for these.) To place; to put. Magla gagy. Ang ilagay, what placed. Ang ilinagay; ang inilagay or ang inalagay, what was or has been placed. To get rid of; to disappear. Mogwald. Auig iniwald, what was or has been gotten rid of, etc. XIII. With certain classes of verbs such as (1) those requiring two complements, e. g., rnagsalihi, " to tell; " nhagotarg, " to lend; " magbigay, " to give," etc.', arid (2) with those expressing expulsiv-e or dispersive action, e. g., 7nagtapon, " to throw away; " magsnI bog, "to scatter seed, etc.," i forms a true passive, which may be so expressed in English. XIV. 'With verbal roots not included in the foregoing classes i forms an expression peculiar to Tagalog arid allied languages by denoting either the instrument, cause, or time of the action. In these cases the cause, reason, instrument, or time becomes the subject of the sentence in the nominative case, especially if the sentence should include an indirect conmplement expressiv~e of such instrument, cause, timie, etc., in addition to a direct object. Ex.: (1) To give. Magbi gay. Ang ibinigay, what was (2) To throw away. To plant; to sow. or has been given. Ex.: lbrnigay ni Juan itang s(dlap' (that money was the gift of Juan). Maghtpon. Titmapon, to cast (as a net). Ex. with rnagtapon: Itinapan ko am; st'dat (I threw the letter away). An6o au-g gagat?,'irt o nitong isdd/ (What shall I do with this fish?,) Jtoponnmo (throw it away). Ex. with ftumapon: 3fitsang itapon nab lil k-o itong isddt (I caught this fish with one throw [of the net]). Auig taponaun, the fish line; also, where anything may be thrown; the scrap hole or heap. Matgtaiiio-. (2) Also to bear hrate or rancor toward another. Aking itoiafiinon itong polay (I am plantin-g thiis rice). Ang taitin~n, the place of planting. As will be seen, besides being contracted, there is a trauisf)osition with mn and n with this wvord with suffixed an. (See tables for conjugation of sumadboq, to sow, with i.) XV. If the instrument is expressed in full with a verb using the expulsive i, the instrument takes the proper preposition in the genitive. Ex.: Itinapon niya' ang buhan#,in nau~g panhdkay (he threw the sand away with a hoe). TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 137 XVI. (1) Roots which take mag for the primary idea in the indefinite generally have i for the correspondling definite, combined with ill for the past andl present tenses. Urn roots generally take in only for thle simple definite (direct object). (2) Roots which. vary in meaning according to the verbalizing prefix or infix urni, viag, etc., generally retain the definite form. of maq, nmg~ka, etc., with i, forming ipaiJ, ip)nagf, ipa, ipina, etc., as prefixes to the root. (See tables for conjugation of kurn(ilat, to spread, to propagate (of its own accord); magk-altat, to spread widely (by outside avency).I':. (1) To sun; to put in the suni To piour out. To scatter. To add. To heap up; to lay in layers (2) To spreail; to pro-pagat( own accordl). To spread widely (by agency). To borrow (mioney only). shine. illagbilad. Ang ibinilad, what was or has been put in the sunlight, asclothesto dry. Ang bilarain,the place. Aug bilaran, the rope by which suspended, etc. Auqg ibilad, what sunned, dlried in the sun, etc. Magbithos. Anrg ibuhos, what poured out. Alug ibinuhos, what has been lpouredl ouit. Maniuhtos, to spill out; (2) fig. to spread out or run to, as a road. Ex.: SdI an nunuhlos itong daan? (Where does this road run to'?) Nunuhos sa bayan (it goes to town). Maglabuhos, to run t~ogether (as two roads). Nagkakabauhos aug dalawvang daan, the two roads run together. Kabulhos dtig6, of the samne blood, as children of the same mother, Magbulagsak, var. miagbulaksak. Aug ibulagrak, what scattered. Aug ibinulagsalk, what was or has been scattered. Aug ibiuubulagsak, what is being scattered. Ang ibubulagsak-, what will be scattered. Maqdagdag. Aug idagdag, what added. Aug idinagdag, what was added. Aug dagdagan, what has been added to. Aug mandaragdag, the adder. Magp6long. Aug ipaltong, what heaped up or laid in layers. Also used for generations. Lx.: Vain aug pdatong aug nagmula sa Lakandole? (How many generations have there been since Lacandola?) (of its Kumrnlat. Aug WkMa, what may spread. Aug ikinallat, what has spread. outside Magkailat. Aug ipagkadlat, what may be spread thus. Ang ipinagkadlat, what was or has been so spread. Ex. (indef.): Nagkakadlat 8si kuan naug wikaug nakasasamd sa kapoua tauo (what's his name has been spreading bad reports all over about his neighbor). Kdlatkailat ang diR uiyd (he has a most tattling tongue). Umd4tang. Aug utafi~g'in, the loan. Aug utaiigau, the person from whom borrowed. Aug iatdang, the cause.. 138 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To lend (money only). To lend willingly. Magi'tang. (Also to borrow much.) Ang ipinagi'lavg, the loan. Magpaz'tang. Avg ipad.1'tarng, the loan made thus. Avg pautarnqin, the person lent to thus. Ex.: Pautafgin mao ako' yang pisos (lend me a peso). Thang salapi lMnang avg ipavi ttang lka sa iyo6 (I will only lend you a half lpeso). lIpinaittang ko sa iyo6 ang salap'n ico (I have lent My Money to you). Baikit hindi' mno ak6' pinautoitag yatig saiapif (Why won't you lend me some money?) Sa pagka't uald, (because I have none-). Pau'tang, credit. Kautaofgan, debt. XVII. This is also shown by bunmill, " to buy; " and magbilil, " to sell," already explained). To buy by retail (onl a small scale). U.inutay. AvIg inutay, what was bought thus. To sell on a small scale. Afagutay. Ang ipinagutay, what was sold thus. XVIII (1) Ika ('ikiva for past and present tenses) is generally used to express cause or reason, an(1 also time (for thle latter see under vna). To destroy. To be sad. Suoiirdl. Miagsirdl, to destroy much. Ifakasirdl, to be able to destroy. Ex.: Avg ikinasirad yang kaviyang ari avg porgsusugal (gambling was the cause by which he lost his property). Afahaipis. Makahdpis, to cause sadness. Avg ikalt(Jpis, the cause of sadness (no tense idea). Ex.: Jkitahalpis ko avg pagk-amatay fliya' (I was saddened by his dying [death]). Ikinalahapis ko avgpagkarnatay niy' (I am sadldened by his death). IRahah(Jpis mio avg pagkamatay vi Gott Jotan (You will be saddened by the death of Don Juan). Kahapisan, sadness (abstr.). Kahaipish~pis, sad orsorrowful object or spectacle; also great sorrow. (2) Ika (ikina) also expresses well-perfected acts resulting from a slow process or development. To become better. Gunmalivg. Jfaggaling, to adorn. Av47g gali'igin, what adorned. Magaling, to be better; also " 'good, " " clever. " Mavyaling, to become much better. Ma kagaling, to do good. Avng ikagaling, the cause of betterment. Ex.: Avng ma7Ti(J gamat ay siyavg ik-inagagaling vavg inariqa4 may sakit (medicines are what cause the recovery of those who are ill). Avg pavah6'y avg ikinagaling niya' (the TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 139 weather caused his improvement). Ang paginunt nitong gainot ang ikinagalitygnihI, (the taking of this medicine was what caused them to recover). Magpaqaling, to prosper. A nyg pinagag(diing, person or thing prospering. Aug nagagalivg, person improving. Magpak-agaling, to improve one's self; to correct one's self. Ex.: M1agpakagaig kyo nang, rnimig (.Yqai vinyo (Improve yourselves in your customs [or mnanners]). Kagali?Tgan, goodness; improvement. dl to intransitive verbs indicate time M4a gsisi. luIg ipinagsisi, the time, cause, or reason of repentance (past tense). ~Ium isi, to quarrel with openly. Ang isisi, the cause. Miagpakasisi, to repent deeply. Math'log. Natutd'log baga' kay0V (Are you sleepy?) 06J; ibig ko soraa ga rnatd'log (Yes; I would like to go to sleep). Makatillog, to fall asleep. Ang ika'tzlog, the time or cause of falling asleep. (3) Ika, as well as i alone, prefixe, as well as cause or reason. Ex.: To repent. To be asleep or sleepy. XIX. I is generally used alone to express cause or reason with verbs which do not require an object to complete the meaning (intransitives): To obey; to follow. Sa'rnunod. Ang isunod, the cause of obedience or following. Ex.: An6 ang 'isinuswwod nang manaf[; sundalo sa kaianq pun'i? (WVhy do soldiers obey [follow] their corninanding officer [chief]?). Ang panunumpa 't pitaganl ay ang isinusunod mild (Their obedience is on account of their oath and also their respect). To weep (purposely). TmorwiiTjis. Magtar77qis, to weep much or by many. Matati~gis, to weep (invol.). Any itaTyis, the cause or reason of weeping. la gp a t awi jyis, to weep excessively. Makitaii-gis, to join another in weeping. Ex.: -Bakit nananaffyis yoony babaye? (Whiy is that woman weeping [crying]l?). Anygitinatai~yisniy4J'y aug kanmata~yan many anak: (Her crying is caused by the death of [her] childl) To remain behind (letting others go Taoniird. Maytird, to allow someahead). thing to remain. Any itinird, what was or has been left behind; also the remaining behind. Ex.: Ikao any itinird ko dito (I have remained here on your account). Matirdl, to be left behind. Walang natird, not one remained. 140 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. XX. In like manner intransitive verbs also express time (not tense). If the expression for the thime is (letinite, it may either precede or follow the verb, but if the time is indefinite it should always precede. Verbs which require ika ('ikiva) for cause or reason likewise have the same combination to express time: To arrive. To embark or travel (also to mount).To eat. To (lie. Durnuting. Ang 'idating, the time of arrival. Ex.: Ano6 aug oras aug idirn'finq fliyeu? (What time [hour] did he [she] come?). Aug idinditing niyd' ang tagali (Ile [she] came at noon). Ano' aug arao na idara'ti~ny nila'? (What day will they come?). Ang ik-alirnany araonalng bouan (The fifth [day] of the month). &uoiakwy. Aug sak-aydn, what embarked on or mounted. Aug isinakey, the reasomi or tine (past tense) of em barking, mounting, etc. Ex.: Auig taoyg 'is'inakay ko sa Filipinas (The year [inm which] I embarked for the Philippines)..Krniahi. Aug ikina in, the reason or time of eating (past tense). Ex.: Di ikinakain ang bufi-gany luiin) kailan man (green fruit should never be eaten)..2lfaniatey..ny oras na ikiranuatay niya', the hour at which hie dlied. XXI1. [ is also used with verlbs of adjusting, conforming, copying into, transferring, translating, transplanting, etc., to indicate what has been thus transferred, translated, etc. To conforim; to make suitable; to.i-agbd gay. Au~g ibin gay, what was get ready. or has been made suitable. Ex.: Jbuaye 'it doon (Make [do] this like that). Me agbdgay ka nang 2moeuya bata nmaysasayao (Get the children ready for the party). Mfabd gtay, to be proper or suitable; also to be proportioned. Ex. (1) N~ababdgay bag(I sa ismug dalaga ang l'uaudkad va nayi'sa sa, manga lansafu~y an? (Is it proper, then, for a young womian to go alone about the streets'?) Afatbabaydtyan nang9 hi rap ang lai(( nerng kasalanan (The punishment will be suitable for the gravity of the offense). [The punishment will fit the crime.] (2) Dili nabablnigay siya' sa kanilang kataausan (He [she] is not proportioned to his [hier] height). The act of making suitable, ang pagkabaigay. Ex.: An6 aug paykabd'gay uito' doon? (What has this to do with that?) As a noun, bdga~y means " thing, matter, subject, size, proportion, appearance.' Ex.: And (bagd anygbdyay? (What, then, is the matter?) Aywdn ako' TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 141 To compare. To equalize. To (1) transfer; (2) translate; (3) transplant; (4) copy out, and (5) -to change from one vessel to another; to emp~ty. (I (don't know.) An6 ang b6gay v i/(I, Amer-ica no A-img (astila/ (W hat does hie look l ike, an Ainerican or a Spaniard?) Amnericano p6' (an American, sir.) B69ay 8a, " 4as for, " " as t~o. " Ex.: Badgay sa akin (as for mne). Bagay sa. kaniyd (as for hiiii.[her]). Bagqi s8a ibang b~igay (as to other matters), etc. B6gaybd gay, different things (in class; species, etc.). Mfagkaba'gaybaigay, to (differ mnuch. Ex.: Nay.tka~kabagay1ba.gay sihla sa paigdaramit (They differ mnuch in their manner of diress) Mlayhauinbaioa..,Iny ipinaghalirnbaml, what was or has been compared. 1lunildimbdauo, to imitate another. Atiy halimbauaaa, the person im-itated. Kahaiimba'u4 like, alike (obIject). Kahalimbauaan, resemblance. 31ar(pyr(ir. Any ipinaral, what was or has been equalized. Ala gsadin. Any isinalin, what. has been or was transferred, translated, etc. (2) i.4alin mo ito sa wvikang Tagadiog (translate this into Tagalog). (5) isalin mno any lamany nitong busi6' (empty out the contents of this basket). TIIR PARTICLE AN (HAN). I. An (han after acute final vowel), sometimes nan, is suffixed with all tenses of the verb. The lparticle in, either alone or in combination with pag ('pinay), etc., is retainedl in the lpast and present tenses. For the conjugation. of roots with an and law see the tables at end of book. II. An usually represents place, or expresses the case called locative in many European languages, replacing an adverb of place or the preposition which would be employed with another form of conjugation. Thus, if a sentence with a -verb other than those which admit a person or place as the (lirect object, or those requiring an for euphonic reasons, includes an indirect comlplemnent of place relating to the action, the, use of an with the verb expresses the relation of case expressed in English by a preposition. To) gather; to pluck (as, flowers); to Pumita's. Ex.: Ano6 any pinipita's mo break off. diydn? (What are you gathering there?) Ak6'y pungrnipita's Vang bulakiak (I ani gathering some flowers). Avy halainana'y amy loya~r (Sp.) na pinipitasan ni Ambros~ia nany maTqa' bulakiak (Ainbrosia, is gathering the flowers in the garden); lit.., "the garden is the lplace where are being gathered by Ambrosia the flowers. )" To die. Mamnatay. Anygkaniatayaln, the place of death, distinguished by the fimm al acecent f roin k-airmatyan, death (abstract). Ex.: Itong bahay na it6 (ngy kinamaataydn ni amd (father 142 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. (lied inl this house); lit., ''this house was the dying.place of (my) fathier.'' III. If a verbal action admits of a place for its direct object, the latter is generally expressed by an. To (1) open; (2) uncover. To sprinkle from the mouth (as Chinam-yen (l0 clothes); also to bubble up (as water from a fountain or spring). To fill; to make up. To line. To plant; to sow. To cover. 3r(agbuka's. Anog bukasin, whatopened or uncoveredl. Any ipagbuka's, the means by which opened or uncovered. Any bukatsan, the place opened or uncovered; also the person or object uncovered. Contracted mnany tines to buksabn,, especially for the imperative. Ex.: Buksamt. iio any pinto (open t~he door). Magbugyo. Ang bughain, the place of such sprinkling, or the object so treated. Ex.: Hlindi bugha'n mno (inggtia'r7tyj damiit (don't sprinkle the clothes fromi the mouth). There is also an idiom: Butghan?,o natin itony bago mHong dainit (treat us onl account of your new clothes); "wet down your new stripes." Agtrpun6. A nyg pundnt, the place of filling, or m-aking up. Ex.: Haypu6ka vang labing dalawl (make up twelve [a (lozell]). Punuin rno ang rnarTi-9 tasa (fill the cups). Popunein ko baga' ang mnai7g vaso? (ShallI I fill the glasses?) Maypuno,. with grave accent, stress on next to last syllable mneans to begin; to govern; to head; to lead; t~o preside. Jfamnunib, to go ahead or in f ront. Magsapin. Any sapnin, the place of lining, etc., also the imperative. Ang isapin, the material. '-Sapin, shoe or sandal. Kasapin, a leaf (of a book) or sheet (of paper). ~Salpuclapin, many leaves, sheets, or folds of lining. Magtanim, (2) also to bear hate or rancor toward another. Any taruinan, the place or manner of lplanting. Ex.: Tomamnan nniTomas any kaniyang bl"Ikid nany mndkina (indquina) (Thomas planted his field by machinery). As has been noted before, besides a contraction, there is a transposition between n and in with this definite. Tumakip). Maytakip (1) to cover up; (2) to fish f rom. many canoes, getting the fish in between. Any Iakpci~n, what covered or the place. Tak-p(,n mno any tapayan (cover the jar). TAGALOG LANGUAGE, 143 IV. An is generally used to indicate the person affected by an action with verbs vwhich require a person as the direct object. To menace; to threaten. 3fagbabl. Ang pagbalaan, the persoH menaced or threatened. To frighten by rushing out from BumnalagaJ. Afagbalaga', to frighten hiding and shouting. much. Ang bWdaghln or (lfg balagh6n, the person thus frightened. Kababalaghang gawd,, a marvelous work. Kabalabalagd itong gawvang it6 (this [is] a most wonderful work). To diminish (of itself). Bumauas. Mi'agbauas, to diminish by outside agency. Aug bauasin, what diminished. Aug bauasan, the place (corresp. to urn). A.~ng Pagbautasan, place (corresp. to mag), the person to whom something is given thus. Mlabauas, to dimninish (inan, action). Ang namauas, what taken from. Makabauds, to cause to diminish. Magpabautas, to order or request to diminish. Ex.: Bauasan mo iyang ma?7ga' tapayan (take something out of those jars). Mlagbavas ka nang hialaga, reduce the price. Hlindi ma bitasan ko sa liniang J)iso.S, I can not let it fall below P'5. Nabauas na ang haTqin (the wind has diminished now). To give. Magbi gay. Aug ibigay, the gift. Ang 'ibinigay, what was or has been given. Aug bigyadu, the person receiving a gift. Ang binigyadn, the person to whom something was or has been given. Mapagbi gay, generous; liberal; indulgent. Mamnigay, to give much; to lavish. Ex~. Ano6 aug ibinigay mo? (What did you give?) Bigyadn ma ak6' nang kauntingmiak-akain, give me a little refreshment [to eat]. Bigyadn mno ak6' nang itlog k-un mayro'on (give me some eggs if there are any).Si Juan aug binigyang ko (I gave it to Juan). &~ Itom's aug bibigyang ko (I will give it to Toma's). Ang ipamigay, what lavished. Ex.: Ipinani gay niyad itong lahat (he has lavished all this). Ipinamimnigay nila' itong lahat (they are lavishing alti)Ipamnimigay niny6 itong lahat? (You will lavish all this?) To trade or sell rice. Magbiga's. Angpagbigasan, the seller or dealer in rice. lyang pilak ang pinagbigasa~n niya' (he made that money selling (trading) rice).Makibiga's, to ask for a little rice (see particle maki)-. 144 TAGALOG LANGUAG4E. To guard; watch; look out. To charge against (as a debtor). To dress one's self. To deceive. Maybantay. Also means to make a bird snare from bamboo. Mamanfia,, to catch birds with a " bantay." Ang narnantay/, what caught. Any binabantay or ang pinapagbabantay, the person standing guard, watching or looking out. Any bantayan, the sentry box, post; watchtower; look out place. Also Any paybaidayan. Any bantaqa~n (1), thing or person guardedl or watche(I; also imperative without art. Ex.: -Bontayan mno itony ba/ay it (watch this house). BivantapiIn /ko (nig corntel (1 was on guard at the barracks). Binabanta you nqit ang cuarte~l (he is on guardl at the barracks). (2) armis or scales or correctness of the balance. (3) A bamboo bed for sick persons under which a fire may be made. Magbantay~n, to make such a bed. Any bartoyanirn, the material; any bantayanan, the place of such a bed. Jlagbin tony. (2) To bear false testimony against another. AnygpagbintaiT?,an (1), the person charged; (2) the person sworn against falsely. Any ipaybintang, what so sworn, i. e., the testimony. Ex.: (1) PinagbintarTyan ako6 nang saniPouony pisos (I was charged up with tenl pesos). (2) Plinaybinta? jan niya ak6' (he bore false testimony against me). Any paybibintany, the act of swearing falsely. A ny bi eta yanif~t-,,any g nabirdwti7~in, a ny mnapaybintany, the person who habitually swears falsely; perjurer. Duraniaiit. Daramtin, clothes (pres. tense). Any damta'n, the person dressed or clothed. Maydamrit, to dress or clothe another. Anygpaydaraniit, the act of dressing (pres. tense). Ma yparamit, to cause or order to be clothed. Ex.: Paranitcin mo any wvalany datnit (clothe those who are without clothes). BMkit hind!t mo pinadaramtain any ana/k ma? (Why don't you clothe your child?) Sapayka'twald a/cony maibilic nany darnit (because I have nothing to buy clothes with). Mayda~yd. A4ny paydayaan, the person deceived. Any paydaray&l, the act of (deceiving. Mayparaya, to permit deception. M/syparaydl ka, permit the deception. Parayil, to consent or allow one's self to he deceived. Maydaraycl, fraudulent; cheating (adj.). TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 145 To kiss. To be sorry. To steal. To listen to. To teach. To be (charitable. Iluimalik. Anyg hagk6n, the person kissed. Maghalik, to kiss each other (dual). Anyg ma~i7a4 pmayliagq4n (the two who have kissed each other. ) P'ahalik, to request to kiss. Ex.: Pahalik p6 kay6 sa kamiay (permit me to kiss your hand). (Sp. Q. B. S. M.) Mlahin6yang (froni s&iiang, idea of sorrow). A angl kinahmayarmy-!(rn, the person for whom,sorry, or for what reason sorrow is felt. Ex.: Kinahihinay!aii7;fan k-o siy4' (I feel sorry for him-lit., hie is the personI ani sorry for.).3lanhin6 yang, to be very sorry. Aing panylhmayarl7jai, the person for wh om felt, or the cause of much sorrow. Magpahinalyang, to regret a loss of any kind. Maqnaikao. Ang pinagn6kao, what was or has been stolen. Ang ma ri n kao, the thief. A g p g wa/kauan, the person robbed. Rx.: Sino ang magnanikaof (Who is the thief?) &inoanygpinagnakavan mo? (Who did you steal from?) Pak-inig. Ang pakingaiv, the person listening. Ex.: Pakingain ninyo any ciral (listen [ye] to what is taught). Unm6ral. Ang aralan, the person taught. Any idtral, what taughti. e., the lesson. Any iniairal, what was or has been taught. Army ungmaaral, the teacher. Anygpag6 -ral, the act of teaching. Magiayral, to study; to learn. Anygpagaralain, the source of learning-i. e., the teacher or the book, etc. Ang mayaral, what learned. Ang pagaaral, the act of studying. (Note that the "act of teaching" is expressed without reduplication of the initial sylable of the root.) Aral is said to be from Sansk. dchdra, custom; habit; rule; by Kern, but Pardo de Tavera thinks it doubtful. Ajar is Malay, "to teach or to learn" from Javanese. Asal, custom; habit; is more likely to be from Sansk. dchdra. For further modifications of dral with particles, see under man..Maaual, also compassionate; charitable (adj.). Maauain; mapaykaaud, a humane or charitable person. Any auaan, the recipient of compassion or charity. A ny paykaau&, the act of charity or compassion. Kaauaan, (abst.) charity, 6855-05 ----10 146 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To hear (casually). (1) To untie; to loosen; (fig.) to set free; (2) to absolve. compassion. Ex.: Kaauan mo siya (have charity [or compassion] for him). Any kinaauaan, what given in charity or extended in compassion. luig ik-inaaua', the cause of giving in charity or extending com passion. 3fakaaudl, to move to compassion. Magmakaaua, to be able to move to compasslon. (Aud, is generally reduplicated. Ex.: Namayrniakaau~aucn ako6 itong dukhad (this poor [person] moves me to compassion). A ug ipinag?nramakaoa?0, the cause of being able to move to compassion. Paaml, to ask for charity; to plead or beg for mercy, et~c. Px.: Napaaud sya' sa 6k-ir (he begged me for mercy). Jfari~qig. Du'irifigig, to hear purposely. Any narir~gig, what heard casually. Ang diTgin, what heard purposely, as conversation directed to person. Ang difi~qdn, the person listened to. An indicates person, in the thing, with this verb andl the following one, also others which will be seen in other places. MfakariTqig, to be able to hear. _Magkarifi-gig, to be deceived by the hearing. Mayparirij-ig, to force another to listen. lx.: Wald ak-oti dii7{jiy (I heard nothing); lit., "I (was) without hearing.' "Narin-gig mo anyg snabi k-of (Did you hear what Itoldvyou?) ifindikonarifWiygi (I did. not h~ear); " I was not able to hear. " NXakadiriffgig ka bagaif (Did you hear?) Lit.: "Are you hearing? " Nagk-arirfiygdn ak6' (my hearing deceived me). Kuinalag. Aiiy kalyin, what untied or loosened. Any kalgain, person set at liberty or absolved. Any kalagpai-iqao, the jailor's fees in former times, when set free. 'V. In actions by which the subject tries to draw something to himself, an stands for the person from whom that something is drawn. To ask for; to request. H~urniT{;it. Mak-ahiiTqi, to obtain by requesting. -MakihirT-git, to thank for. Aiiy hir7-gin, what asked for. Any hinimfgiz, what was or has been asked for. Any HiiTgaln, the person from whomm asked. Ex.: Ako'y huniimi-l nany niaiTga' bvTya 'y nock-ahhiji~f ak-6 (I asked for some fruit and got it for the asking). M1apayh ii~fIt, an importunate person. See also inaybili', to sell; kumnuha, to take; dumainy, to entreat; humainap, to look for; and TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 147 tumangap, to accept or receive which, among others, use these same forms. VI. Roots which express the ideas of coming or going, when verbalized, take an for the person affected by the action, and i or ika (ikina) for the reason or time of such action. Ex.: To come here. Pumarito. Parito, come here. Ang ipinarito, the reason or time of coming here (past tense). Also ang ikinaparito. Ang pinaritohan, the person (or the place) who was the object of the action. Ex.: Ano ang ikinaparito mo sa Pasig? (Why did you come here to Pasig?) Aling bdhay ang pinaritohan mo? (Which house did you come to?) (Pumarito has been discussed previously. Pumar6on follows the same rule as pumarito and has also been explained.) VI. An is rare as an ending to the direct object of a verb. Some verbs, however, which would naturally take in for the direct object substitute an therefor on account of euphony, as the words are contracted. To salt; (2) to make salt. Magasin. Ang asnain, what salted; inasnan, what was or has been salted. Ang palaasinan, the salt pan; also the saltcellar. Ang nagaasin, the person who eats salt on rice or food. Makiasin, to ask for a little salt. To pay for. Magbayad. Ang bayaran, what paid for; the obligation. This verb also has the idea of covering up, and originally meant "to buy or sell slaves." Ex.: lyong bayaran ang utang mo (your obligation is to pay your debt [pay what you owe]). To note; to experience; to perceive. Magmasid. Ang pagmasddn; ang masdan (def.); ang namasid (indef.) what noted, etc. Magpamasid, to order to note. Ang papagmasddn, the person ordered to note. Ang papagmasdin, what ordered to be noted. Mapagmasid, one who notes, perceives or experiences a great deal. To pierce. Tumalab. Ang tabldn, what pierced. Tumalab is also "to become dull" (as a knife). Magtalab, (1) to penetrate deeply; (2) to dye with the talab root. Ang pagtalaban, what pierced deeply. Ang talabin, what dyed. Ang italab, the instrument. To grasp; to hold. Magtangan. Ang tangdn or ang tanganan, what grasped or held. Ang pagtangndn, what held much. Ang itangan, the hand or instrument 148 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. (1) To try; (2) to sample; (3) to understand a person well. To look at; to view. To learn. used to grasp or hold with. Syn.: Mayhiatak, which means generally to hold or grasp by two. Ex.: Miay hauak ako i-tayo'n (I am busy now [or to-day]). Tumikim. Any tikmain, what sampled. (Admits in combined with pa.) Ex.: Patikmin mo iitqa ako6 nitony ailak- (allow me to try this wine). Tikouin nmo (taste it; sample it). TutniitTin, (2) Afaytifi-yin, to look at much or by many. Magytir-yinai,, to look at cach other. MagtiiTgiintihTgiooan, to look at each other closely. Any tinifi-yin, what was or has been looked at. Angtinitifi-an, what is being looked at. Anygtirgnan, what looked at; alone imperative. Anyg pagtii7jgnan, what looked atimnich or by many. Anyi itirTgiv, the cause or with what, i. e., the eye. Anygipo-g-(ipin~ag)-tionjin,thie cause of much lookin~g or by many; also the eyes of many, etc. Mayadral. Any?~ pagaralan, what is learned. Anyg payaralain, the source of learning, i. e., the teacher or book, etc. VII. Some roots used with in with urn, may, etc., take anr when conjugated with maypa. To treat well; to prosper. Maypayaliny. Ex.: GaliiTqlan miosqya, (treat him [her] well). V1II. An sometimes replaces the preposition sa when the latter m eans "to," as an implies that the subject Jparts with somnething, in the following examples. Acquisition with the same construc.tion ("for") is expressed byi. Ex.: Binigyy.nnila'akon'i-eonyb~ig's (theyvgave me this rice). Also expresse'l: ak-6y anybinigy6tnnild nitonyghi ya'. Itwill be clearly seen that the definite is a verbal noun. 8Sino bay an inaybilhain any' nany 'iyony cabot o (to whom has hie sold [did he sell] your horse?) Pinaybilhdn niydJ any kmniyany kaibiyan (his purchaser was a friend of his). Also expressed: A1ny kaibigan niya' any pinaybilhin niyal. IX. An with certain noun or verbal roots indicates place. The first syllable of the root is reduplicated for roots admitting contraction or beginning with 1. Buyo-leaf (piper betel).Bamboo (har busa). ltrn6o. Itmohan, buyo-leaf garden. Kauayan. Kauay anon, bamboo grove or thicket. Mayl kauayart? (Have [you, or is there] any bamiboo?) Kuvmaunon, to throw bamnb~oo weapons at another. Any~ kauayanin, the object or person. Maitygauayan, to cut bamboo. Any panygauayan. the instrument, i. e., the bolo or hatchet, etc. Nioy. Niuyan, cocoanut grove. Kaniuyan, place of many cocoanut palms. Kapunony nioy, a single tree. Kaboonyg nioy, a cocoanut. Cocoanut palm TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 149 Pasture; grazing place. Banana. (Musa par. and others, both the tree and fruit.) Sugar cane. Stone; rock. Water. Nurniog, to throw a cocoanut at another. Anyg niogin, the person or object thrown at. Aug iniog, the nut thrown. Afagniogan, to throw cocoanuts at each other. There are many naines for cocoanut, according to its age and condition. Sabsaban. Any sabsabin, the grass eaten (no tense idea), or what eaten as animals eat (by the mouth). Surnabsab, to graze, eat (as animals). M1agsabsab, to eat inuch. M3agsisabsab, to graze in herds, flocks, etc. Pa~sabsab, to allow to graze. Ex.: 1Pasabsabin wo ifong cabayo; may sabsabin diydn sa harapain (Let this horse graze; there is grass there in the yard). Sungmasabsab any cabayo, p6I (The horse is grazing, sir). Parang is a large pasture. Sabsaban is irore a grazing or eating place for animals. aig..Sagingari, banana grove. Kasagi?7garn, large banana grove or place where there are many bananas. Magsadging, to eat bananas. Tub6'. Tubohadn, cane field. TuboIhanan, sugar-cane land. Jfagtubo6, to plant sugar cane. There is nO Tagalog name for sugar, asdkai, from Sp. azdcar, being used. The Malay uses shakar and gula, the latter fromt Sansk. guda. Bato6. Batohan, quarry. Kabatohan, place of st~ones; rocky ground. Mabatony bdkid, a stony field.. Bato6 also means rice which does not open when toasted; and kidney. Afagbato6, (1) to cut stone; (2) to lay stone; (3) to build out of stone. Ex.: (3) Naybabat6' si Juan vanyq kaniyany bdha~y (Juan is building his house out of stone). Mayinbat6, to turn into stone. Ex.: Any asalua mi Lath ay nayinbatony asin (Lot's wife became a pillar [rock] of salt). Th'biy. Tabigan, irrigated land. Katubigan, place where water may be had. MagytIbig, (1) to put water into anything; (2) to water an animal, etc. Maruibiy, to go for water in a canoe or on an animal. (To go for water with a pitcher is urnigib). Arygpaaubigaln, the place. Pan6 big, to mnake water. Alakitilbig, to ask for water. Si.Juan ay 150Chr. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. Cockpit. Head. Foot. Stern; last part. Bow; first part. To make port (as a vessel). To bathe; to take a bath. nakikabubig sa 'kin (Juan asked me to help him get water). P'atuthigin mno ak6' (Give me some water). T'` big na hihilarnosin, wash water. Sinba han. 8urnirnb', to worship. Sabo'ri-jan. SAm4abong, to fight (one gamecock against another). Magsabong, to fight against each other; also to play one against the other. -,ing sasabonyqm, the gamne (cockfighting). Ang i-(ipag)-sa botig, the gamecock (s). Palasabony, cockfighter by occupation. Ub56. UlTuluin, head of the bed; also a large-h11eaded person. U/undrn, the head idace (pillow). Unan is the word for pillow itself. Ex.: Umnal6 ka rirti (Put your head here). Uluhinvio yari (Put your bead here toward me). Ulhthdn meito NJ(Put your bead on this). Pad (fromt Sansk. pada, foot). The Eng~lish is also from the same Sansk. word. The English paw does not seem to be from Sansk., but to be of Teutonic origin, but remotely may be the same. PaahIan, the foot of a bed; place of the feet. Magpa, to set the foot down; to step in or on. Ang huhl. Iliurnuli, (1) to steer; (2) to remiain behind purposely. Mahliu, to be left behind. Ang huIihdn, the last or hinder part. Kahuiihain, tardiness. Ang kahulihulhaihn, the very last. Ilumuhi is to catch, etc. (note the difference in accent). Un a'. IUrnuna, to lead. Hfouag kong munad, do not go ahead. Ang unahamn, the fore part or place. Kaunahadn, priority. n(flunfld, firstly. Ang kaunalunahain, the very first. Sa und, anciently. Sa und pang sa una, very anciently. Sa unang arao, in the days of old. MamiTjunal, to precede; to guide (in person); to lead, as a guide. Dum( ong. Ang idoong, the vessel put into port. Ang doongan, the place. Lalauigan is another name for port. Alagkcapado~ong, to make port suddenly. Mado'ong, to bein port. Paligo'. Ang paliguan, the bathing place. Ang ligoin; ang paligoin, the water for bathing. Magligo'; rnagpaligo', to bathe another. (See the phrases on p. 24 for use of these words). Pambo is a rare synonym. TAGA LOG LANGUAGE. 151 To make a mudhole under the house. To wound. To scratch or scrape the ground with the hands, claws, feet, etc. To enter a room. To lie down; (2) to go to bed. Mfaypusali. " The place," ang k-aJ)Unawian. Pusaliani, "mudhole." Suuiiyat. Anq gugatfl, the wounded person or animal, etc. Any ikasa.1 -gat, the cause. Ang suqatan, the place or what part wounidedl. Ex.: Asinugatan fliyc sa kaiiiay (hie is wounded in the arm [hand]). There is no separate word for arma andhaw oin Tagalog. Baraso, from Sp. razo, is sometimes used. Pan', foot, is also a foreign word. Russian has exactly the same peculiarity, ruka, meaning both bauid an(1 arm, and noga both foot and leg. Magstmlgat, to wound m uch; maka&6 -gat, to cause to be woundled. Snygat (note the accent) is anothe(r root, with the idea of trading at retail. Sumugat, to buy at retail, or go to a retail market. Magsugat, to sell at retail. Any sugatdin, the place, i. e., the market. Tiangi, aSpanishAztec word, is the usual name for a market. Kirnotkot. Magkotkot, to make a ditch or trench. Any kot kotin, the earth scratched up, or (2) thrown out of a ditch. Ex.: (2) Kinotkot nangmangal sundalo anyg lbpa nang kamay (the soldiers th rew the earth out with their hands). Any ikotkot, the means, i. e., the hands, claws, etc. Ex.: Any kariay any ik-inotkot nany maiga' suodalo ruang lupa (with their hands the soldiers threw out the earth [or dug the trench]). Anygkotkotan, the place. Ex.: 1t6 any kinotkotan nany maTga' sundalo (this was where the soldiers dug the trench). Pafi-yotkot, the instrument used for digging, as a spade, shovel, etc. Suinilid, from silid, a room. Any sidldn (c), the room entered (no tense idea). Any sisidladn, the room. Maysilid, to put into a room or to enter much. Ma4silid, to be in a room. Any pagsis-idla'A, the room entered much. Syn., lino'ob, from M~ob, within; inside. Humig&. A ny hi higain (c), the place; the bed. Mahiya', to be lying down, or in bed. Ex.: Sino kayd yaony nahihigd? (who is that lying down there?). X. Verbs in which the idea of expulsion is inherent do not admit of in as an ending for the direct object, which is replaced by an, han, etc. To place. Mfaglagady (1 root). Any lalagyadn, the place. Any ilagady, what placed. Any ilinagay; any inila 1 52 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To sow (as rice, corn, etc.).To use or make soap. To throw away. To erect; to set uip. To pay a salary or wages. gay; ang inalagay; what was placed, or has been placed. Malagay, to be placed. Ang kinalalagya'n, the place. 3fagpalagdy, to desert, to abandon. (Root gen. redup.) Ex.: Pinalalagaylagaly any manga sandlalo arig bayan (the soldiers are leaving the town). Sunam6bog. Any isdbog, what sown, i. e., the grain. Any sabugan, the place, the field, rice p)addy. Ex. as verbs: 18s1)0bog700 ito6 (sow this). I&Jabog mai ito sa iYong b~4k'id (sow this in your field). Sabugan W(), vito6 ang iyong b~tkid, or ang i 'yoiiy b~ilkid, sabugan ma ot, s~(,,-ame translation as with i, excelpt in thie first the emphasis is on the act, and1 on the place in the second. Afayuibog, to sow mutch. A,,ng ipags6iboy, what sown thus. (See tables for conjugation of s~fbog.) Mlagsabo'n, from Sp.Jab6n, soap. Ex.: An6 any sinasab~n 700? (what are you washing with soap?). Sabonwa?,a aitg daniit (use soap with the clothes). Wald ak-ong sabn (I have no soap). Mili ka nany sab~n (buy some soap). It will be seen that assimilated foreign words follow the same rules as native ones in all respects. Maytap)on. Any itapan, what thrown away. Ex.: Itapon mno it46 (throw this away). Itapon mao it' sa t~i big; tapanan mo any hi big nito6; or any tMbiy any taponan ma into (throw this into the water [in order to get rid of it]). Magytay'. Any i(pag)tayo6, what set up thus. Avy paytagoan, the place. Ex.: (i) Itay6' ma itany mdrTi-f/ haliyi (set these posts [pillars] upright). Itony loobany itoy siya' kony paytatayaan nang alkipy b6thay (I amn going to put uip my house in this yard). Tamnaye6, to stand erect (animate being). Ex.: Any svndata tunigmatay6 sa harap nang kani yang paunb (the soldier is standing [stands] erect in front of [before] his commnarder). JMatay6, to be erect (inanimate object). Any mantgat haliyi nany adk-ny bWay natatayol (the posts of my house stand [are] upright). -Matouid also means upright, but generally in a moral sense. Umnupa. Any iupa, the wage or pay. Any upahan, person paid or what paid for, as a rented house, etc. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 158 Ang pagupahan, the place. Ex.: Magkano ang paguupahan sa Ma-?Inil)? (how much is being paid in Manila?). XI. With some nouns denoting parts of the body an expresses personal adjectives with an idea of augmentation. Shoulder. Balikat. Balikaldn, broad-shouldered. Ex., verbalized: Balikatin mo itong kauayan (carry this bamboo on your shoulder). Isabalikat mo itong paniyo (spread this handkerchief over your shoulders). Balikatan mo siyd (catch him by the shoulders). Mouth. Bibig. Bibifidn, large-mouthed, also great or reckless talker. Ex.: Pinaybibig(an niyd ak6 (he talked a lot about me). Nose. Ilong. Ilonagd, large-nosed. For places expressed with pag-(-n and ka-an, see under pag and ka. CONSTRUCTION. XII. With an the direct object takes the accusative and the agent the genitive. Ex.: Iinahagkdn nang anak (agt.) ang kniyang indi (dir. object) (the child is kissing his [her] mother). Lit., " Is being kissed by the child the his [her] mother." Tukuran mo iyang kdhoy (prop up that tree). Lit., "Let be propped up by you that tree." XIII. If an indirect object expressing place is included in a sentence, however, it takes the accusative case, and the direct object the genitive or other oblique case, the agent remaining in the genitive, as explained in the preceding paragraph. Ex.: Tinatamndn ni amd nang sarisaring kdhoy ang halamanan (Father is planting different kinds of trees in the orchard [garden])-lit., "The garden (ace.) is being planted with different kinds (abl.) of trees (gen.) by father (ins.)." Pinaghanapan mo bagd sa cabayo itong daang ito? (Did you look for the horse on this road?)-lit., " Waslooking-place your perhaps (gen.) for horse (dat.) this road? (nom. as trans., same form as ace. )." XIV. If an is used modifying a place or person in which to, for, from, by, on, in, etc., precedes the place or person when translated into English, the place or person should he expressed. In these cases the agent, as usual, takes the genitive and the direct object the accusative. The indirect object may either precede or follow the verb, except interrogative pronouns or adverbs of place, which always precede. The person or place is emphasized by being placed before the verb in the sentence. Ex.: Isinulat niyd ang dking sulat (He wrote my letter for me)-lit., "Was written by him (her) the my letter." Sinusuldatan ko itong papel (I am writing on this paper)-lit., "Is-the-writing-place my this paper." Pagsusulatan ko itong papel ito (I will write on this paper). Same construction as foregoing, with future tense; Sino ang pinagbilhdn mo nitong cabayo? (To whom have you sold this horse?)-lit., "Who (was) the purchaser your of this horse?" Ang anak nang kapidbdhay ko (To the son of my neighbor) " The son of the neighbor my." THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE UM." I. Um is called the first verbalizing particle by the Spanish writers on Tagalog, and is generally used to verbalize roots when the action is primary or expressed as the act of the subject without special reference to the object. Umn also has the idea of action toward another person. Some roots differ 154 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. radically in their meaning with urn and mag, or rather in opposite ways from a neutral point. With other roots mag expresses intensity of what is expressed primarily with um. Urn, which is found in the so-called indefinite, changes to ungmr in the past and present tenses, and drops out in the future tense. There are also pluperfect and future-perfect tenses, but they are not generally used. For the conjugation of a root with un see the tables. There are some irregularities with some roots which are noted in the proper place. In the mechanical structure of the language um is prefixed to roots beginning with a vowel and infixed between the first letter and the following vowel of a consonant root. II. The philologist Keane gave G. W. Parker, author of the Grammar of the Malagasy Language (London, 1883), the following information as to the use and origin of infixes, which applies to Tagalog as well: "The infix syllable omn (urn, am, omn) is a feature which Malagasy has in common with Khmier (Cambojan), Javanese, Malay, Tagala (sic) (Philippine Archipelago), and no doubt other members of the Malayo-Polynesian family. "Khmer: S'gp, dead; sanmlap, to kill. Javanese: Ilurub, flame; humurub, to inflame. Malay: Pilih, to choose; pamilihan, choice. Tagala: Basa, to read (idea of reading); burnasa, to make use of reading (to read). "Originally a prefix, as it still is in Samoan (Ex.: MAoto, unripe; miomoto, to (lie young), this particle seems to have worked its way into the body of the word by a process of metathesis analogous to the transposition common to most languages (compare Anglo-Saxon thridda with third)." III. As has been stated, um is generally used to express the simple unreciprocated act of the agent, either toward himself or others, provided the action is not modified by conditions of time (not tense), manner, instrument, number (plurality), or otherwise carried away from its simplest sense. Many roots admit both urm and mag with little difference in meaning, and hence it is often difficult to decide upon a choice between them, but it is generally safe to use urn. Again, many roots differ widely with the two particles. Um refers more to subject and his action, nag to the object and the action of the verb upon it. CLASSES OF "UM" ROOTS. For convenience of reference the roots conjugated by um have been arraged into numbered paragraphs, those following the regular conjugation being given in Par. I-XVII, and those having irregularities coming under Par. XV1II-XXl. Diminutives are treated in Par. XXII. I. Roots which denote qualities capable of being slowly assimilated by the agent form the first class. There are some adverbs which are verbalized by unm in certain cases. To grow dark. Dumilim. Afagdilim, to grow very dark. Ang diliman, what is obscured by darkness. (Ang dilimnn, the osier with which fish corrals are tied. Diliman is also the name of a village near Manila). Ex. with unt: Dungmidilim ang gabi (The night is growing dark). Ang pagdidilimr nang drao, the eclipse of the sun. Madilim, to be overtaken by darkness; also adj. dark, obscure. Ex.: Nadiliman kami (excl.) sa dadn (We were overtaken by darkness on the road). Madidim na (It is dark already). * Madilim pa (It is dark yet). Mandilim, to travel in darkness. Ex.: Ilouag ipandilim iyang cabayo (Do TAGALOG LANGUAGIE. 155 To grow up; to become, large, etc. To grow cool or cold (as food or drink). To grow white; to bleach out. To increase, etc. not travel in the dark with that horse). M1akadifirn, to become dark (not limited to a slow lprocess, as with urni.) Tagdilimn, time or season of darkness. Twilight, LionakI. jEx.: Lungmaki, ako6 sa Mfaqoihl; (I grew up in Manilia). Mahgaki, o increase; to make something larger. Ang lakham, what mnade larger. Aing naglalalki, the agent. 3lakalaki, to cause or tobe able to grow larger. Ang ikalakil, the cause. Ang pakalakihi in, what is to he mnade larger. Kalakhdai, (abs.) size. Ang k-alakilak-i ham, the very largest. M3apakalakt, to grow greatly; or too large. Mfaypalakti, to rear (as a child); to educate. Ex.: Sbio any nagpapalaki sa~iq6? (Who reared you?) Ang 6king mama y siyang vagpalaki sa 61ki (My grandparent was the one who reared mne). Mfalak'f (adj.), lbig; large. Lumttant ig. Ex.: Lalamig ang sa (The tea will become cold). Ang qiakdalaniq (indef.), atig ikalamig (def.), the cause. ilfaglamig, to cool anything. Amyglaniiyan, what cooled. Any pakalamigiyi, what put to cool. Magpalamig, to put out to cool. Mialamig (adj. ), cold; (fig.) Malarnig ma bamfa or na l6ob, cold-hearted. Pumuti. Ex.: Pumymuputil any bulakiak- (The flower is growing white). Anygputim, what bleached. Magput;, to whiten anything. Any iputl, the means or the whitening material. Amy putian, what whitened, as the wall, etc. Amy paykaputim, what whitened greatly. Amy kaputiam many itlog, the white of the egg. Kaputian, whiteness (abs. ). Lurnubhd, from lubhd, very (adverb). Ex.: Am6' any layay namy amad rno? (How is your father?) Lumymuldubhd amy kaniyamy sakit (His illness is increasing). Nalulubhd, na siya' (He is near death's door)l it, " He is exceedingly ill." Maylublid, to increase much; (fig.) to be impudent. Nayiulubhd ka sa a6ki (You are too forward with me; you are impudent to me). II. Urn is used to indicate intentional acts of destruction, damage, etc., by the agency of an animate being. If caused by an inanimate agency, such destruction or damage is expressed by maka (maka). Ex.: Any lin 156 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. (101 ayrtakasiril.a ba hay (the earthquake destroyed the house). Examples in this class with urn: To kill; (2) to extinguish; to put Purnahty. Ex.: Ak6' bagad any papaout (as a light), lay itoiiy iao.? (Shall I put this light out? (Hindi, ak6; r7-a any papatay (no, I will put it out myself). To destroy. ~~~Suiuira. Ang sirain, what destroyed. To destroy. ~~~~~~~Ex.: ulnao anygson yrgnird ninygman~tgaI halainan? (WhTlat has destroyed the lplants?) Aug mariiga' balany aug siy/any lon yrnipol nanq lahat (the locusts have wiped out everything). (Luniipol, to devastate; exterminate; wipe out; lay waste; destroy). Ang isiril, the caUse of destruction. Maysird, to destroy mnuch. Any pagsirain, what thus destroyed. Ex.: Pinaysird' nang naimgia babuy itony mangat halarnan (the pigs have destroyed these plants greatly). Afaraniing halaman anyg pInagsisiral vi1 (niany lplants are being destroyed [by them]; or they are doing mnuch (lamuage to the plants). Masira', to be (lestroyed; to spoil. Sird, spoiled. K~ird no o~iigngatoant's (the preserves are spoiled already). M1alcasira, to cause to destroy. AfakasisirOd, destructive. Any ikasircl, the cause of spoiling (ainy ikinasisira', present tense). Manit-a, to destroy irreparably; comnpletely; or (2) by many. (Idiom.) M3anirang puri, to destroy the honor of another; to dishonor. M1agkasirdsira, to he destroyed completely. Ex.: Any ])rnayka hka-.4iraIsiraain nang uadfi~jd batya'y any pagba haha' (wear destroy s towns [fig., countries] completely). To set fire to. aumudnog. Sino bagal any sungyrnnog nitony ba'hay na WV6 (Who burned this house?) Aywaan ((ho, po6 (I don't know, sir). Any si ni'nog (what was or has been set fire to). Mfagsi'noy, to burn up (intentionally). Any pinaysinog, what burned up thus. Mastinog, to burn up; to be burned. Ex.: Naysdnog siya' any aiming bdhay (he burned our house). Nastlnog any dining baltay (our house burned down). Afakons'mnoy, to cause to set fire to; also to be burned, as from another house, etc. Maygkas1i nofy, to suffer (many) froma conflagration. Sanoy, conflagration (note accent). III. As a general rule, urn verbs have a corresponding definite with in. The reverse is not always true, as the acts of causing emotion in others, TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 157 expressed by in with (lefinite sentences, take the indefinite with mia (va). Certain other roots used with 7nagpa (na gpa) in the indefinite take the definite in an. These wiill be noticed in the proper places. IV. Uin, with roots (denoting weapons, tools, and instruments, expresses the use of such objects. Dagger. Iwa. Uiniwd, to st~ab. Ang iuaan, the person stabbed. Maqiaw(, to wear a dagger. Mfai~yiu'd, to use a dagger on one's self. Magpapa~ iwa to wound each other with daggers (as in a Mn'le'e). Spear. Sibat (syn., tandos). Sumi bat, to spear or to throw a spear. Aug 4ibatin, the object. A4ug isi bat, the spear thrown. Magsibat, to carry a spear. Ang pagsibatan, the place. A47ze. DarMIs. Dumnara's, to use an adze. Anyg ponidara's, the adze itself. Ang ranadarards, the user. Ex.: Darasin?no ito6 (plane this off). Scissors. Gunting. Gumurutin, to cut with scissors; to shiear.,,Ing gantbiyT~in, what cut off. Anqqutntin-gan, from what. Magurding, to use thie scissors on one's hair, etc. Magupit is the better word for this last. Plane. Kattain. Kunuatani, to plane. Manigangataman, planer. Druni. Gimbal. (Jurnimbal, to drum. Mangigimibal, drummer. V. Umn, is used with roots denoting postures to express such postures or positions when taken voluntarily. To stand up; to go to the defense of Tumindig. Anglindigqan, the person another; (3) to go to get mnarried, before whom standing; the place or (3) the woman to be married. Magtindig, to stand up much. Ang tindigan, (2) is the person gone against in the defense of another, and aIng itindig the cause. M1agtindigan (dual) two on foot facing each other, as warriors, etc. Katindigan, one of two opponents thus. Ang ipagtindigan, the cause of thus facing each other. Ang pJagtindiganan, the place. Aug tiniudigan, the scene of war; field of battle. Matindig, to be on one's feet; (2) to be risen. Ak6'y natitindig, I am on my feet. Ako'y natindig, I had risen. Aiagpatindig, to stand another on his feet, or to stand something upright. Aug patindig, the position of being on one's feet or being upright. Ex.: Patindigin mno itong taduo (tell this man to stand up). Ipatindig mo itong taduo (stand this man on his feet). Patindignm sa itong lamesa niyang larauan (stand that image [statuette; picture] upright 158 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To place one's self in front; to face the front; (2) to keep one's word. To kneel. on this table). Ang ipatindig, what stood up, or who. Manindig, to raise, as the hair. Trniapat. (2) Ang tapatin, the word kept. (1) ang tapatari, the person confronted; also tapatan, a cutoff, yardl, etc. Magtapat, to travel, talk, or do in a direct course or manner. (2) Ang ipagtapat, what just in. Ang pagtapatan, before whom. (1) Pagtapatin, two things placed facing each other. Afagtapat nawika, straigbttalk. Matapat, to be facing; (2) to belong to some one. Natatapat siya' sa asauang walang bait, he (she) has a wife (husband) without judgment. Afanapat, a just measure. Ex.: Manapat va gawd (a just deed). Ma gpatumiap((t, to feign to be just. A~ny nagkatatapat, the couple facing each other (dual). Ang nagLatapattapat, the persons facing each other (plural). Ex., with maytapat, in the sense of planting in rows, as trees, etc.: Badkit hindi mo p~inaf/tapat iyany maffjyai halamant? (Why didn't you set out those plants right?) Pagtapatin na f~tlHnf ai~g mariiga kadhoy (put the trees in rows, too). Lumuhod. Any luluhoran, before whom or what place. Luhoran, cushion. Magluhod, to kneel miuch; or by many; to cause another to kneel; to kneel with something. Ang 'iluhod, the object knelt with. Mialuhod, to kneel involuntarily or unconsciously; to be kneeling; also adj. kneeling; to be on the knees. Naluluhod sila, they are on their knees. Afapaluhod, to remain kneeling. Magpatiluhod, to kneel suddenly. Ang paluhod, the position of kneeling. Ang tdhod, the knee. Thmmdhod, to touich with the knee purposely. Matdhod, to touch with the knee accidentally or casually. (Afalu'i2 hod, to be humble.) Thmikluhod, to kneel (down). M3a gtikluhod, to kneel down much. Any tikluhoran, the place or the person knelt to. Ang ikapatikluhod, the cause of many kneeling. Also manikluhod, to kneel down. Aung panikiulhoran, the place or person knelt to. * Ang lpanikiluhod, the cause. Magpanikiluhod, to kneel much. Anygpagp~apanikluhoran, the kneeling people (many). See conjugation of manikluhod. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 159 To lean upon; to recline. To lie down. To lie face downward. To prostrate one's self. To lie on the side (action); to place one's self on one's side. To lie on the back (action); to place one'2s self on the back. To crouch on hands and feet (not bending knees). To sit down; to take a seat. To sit down to rest (briefly). Iluiii~g. Ang ihilig, what part of the body leaned upon. Ang hiligaun, the place; couch, etc. (Ilumiligis "to weave." Noteaccent.) Humnigd. (Previously explained in detail.) Thrnuob. Magluob, to place another face downward. Dumapd. Aliurupd, to fall prostrate (accidentally). Turnaqlilid. Magtagilid, to be lying on the side (state). Angpatagilid, the position of lying on the side. Gilid is side; also entrance to a house. Tmrnilhay4. Matihayd, to be lying on the back (state). Ex.: Bdkit ka ntatitihay&Y? (Why are you lying on your back?) Mapatihayd, to fall on the back. Ang patihayal, the position of being on the back. Thmaad. Magpatuad, to stand on all four feet (as an animal). Um'upo' (one). Magup6' (more). Maup6', to be seated (state). Ang paup6, the sitting position. Ex.: 1t6'y gugawcin mong nang paupo (This will have to be done by you while sitting down). Jfaglikm6l. Ang likmoan, the resting place. VI. Umn is usedI to express voluntarily or involuntarily (but consciously) performed life-supporting actions and organic functions of the body, except some which are used with. mug, and a few with man. Some actions of inanimate objects also follow this rule. To eat. Kuinuin. (Partly explained before.) Mugkain, to eat much; or by many. Magkainkainan, to nibble (dim.). Ex.: Nugkak-ainkainan siyad, he is nibbling (pretending to eat). MaiiTgain, to eat continually; to devour. Afak-ain, edible (adj.). Mukakain, able to be eaten. Magpakuin, to give food to another person or animal. Ang pakanin, who or what fed. Ang'ipakuin, the food given. Ang pakaninan, the place. Ex.: Pupak-ain ka kay Juan (ask Juan to gi ve you someth ing to eat). Ipapakuin mo sa "cocinero" itong batdl (Tell the cook to give this boy (child) something to eat). Ba/kit hindi mo pinakakain itong maTga tatdo ( Whyaren'tyoufeedingthese people.) Pak-anin mo?Tga sila', feed them. Ano' ang ipinakakuin mo sa kanila'! (What are you giving then. [to eat]?) Pinakain ko sidd nang kanin,p6'. (I havegiven them some rice, sir.) 160 TAG ALOG LANGUAGE. To swallow food. To swallow p)its or seeds of fruit. To (Irink. To swallow li(lui(1s. (b.) To show the teeth; to grin. To smile bashifully. To laugh (voluntarily). To sob. To shed tears; to cry quietly. To weep. To snore. Lurnaonon. (Already explained.) Lumunnol,:. Any hinok-in, 'what swallowed. Uminmntoi. 3laopnum, to drink much or lby many. (I Partly explained ibefore. ) A~ig pinaintrni, who or what giv-enadrink. Any gipainuni, the (Irink given. 1Paiainuit, habitual (drinker. Uminiuin, has an irregular form of conjugation like urnallis. Lumagok. Kalagok, a swallow. Kakalagok, only one swallow. AXgyuinisi. Also mag)Tij'isi and 77-ifi-gisiri7q;isi. Any iii7j-isi or any ipafi-jisi, the cause of showing the teeth, or the month and teeth. Any i77jini7-iisihoan, the person or animal the teet~h shown to. Syn., _Algumis7~/is. The wild hog is called Ngisi when the tusks begin to show. Nyumitf. Angifi~yitl, thesmnile or the mouth. A~i-ig jTfitian, the person or object smiled at thus. Tuniaua. 3leqtetua, to laugh much, or by a few. Afai-igaytaua, to laugh (by many). Tatava nany ta/aue, to laugh and laugh over again. Magytawtnan, to laugh at each other. Any tauanan, what laughed at by one or a few. 21) ny poytauanain, what laughed at by many. Any itanna, the cause (one or few). Anyg ipay/aua, the cause of many laughing. M31a/aun, to laugh involuntarily; to giggle. Badkit ka natataua? (W~hy are you giggling so?) M1akataua or miaypataua, to cause laughter. Anyg kataud, the companion in laughter. 3fetauanin, laughing person. Iluinibik. Also hibikhibik. Any ilhibik or anyg ikahtibik, the cause. A variation is hurnibmnbik or himbikhimbik. LumulO. Any niaglu/tha, the eyes shedding tears. A ny ih/u/c, the tears. Any liratuluheen, the person before whom tears are shed, etc. Megk-alulti, to shed tears unconsciously. Lupgrnalagoslo's anyglu/c, the tears are trickling. Turnaii-gis. (Already explained.) Iluanilik. Any hilik, the snorer. Also Jiumikab, var. h mnniyab. These last words also mean "to yawn." Jfayhilik, to snore much. Any payhilik, the great snorer. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 161 To spit; to expectorat~e. To bite. To scratch another. To blow the nose. To sneeze. To make water (voluntarily). To stool. To drip; to run through a pipe (as water and other liquids). To trickle; to run in a small stream. Also ma ghikab. Ex.: Naghihikab aug matkak-atulog (the sleeper is snoriug a great deal). Jlihikabhikab, to breathe with great difficulty', as a (lying man. Lamuird. To p~erform~ the same act as a sign of disgust at anyone, voonho~d. Lulara ii, spittoon; cuspidor. Kuma gat. (Already explained.) Kuuullniot. Madgkabnot, to scratch one's self. Ang paii-jrniot, the scratcher (instrument). Sumungo'. Bumahin. JPalabahin or nzapaoa hil,' a person who sneezes much. Urnihii. ]Ponilbig is a more polite term. Tonwoe. Sooin aug knmom'm (Where is the water-closet?) Tunmulo. Lumagosl6s. (Idiom) VII. Roots which express objects which may be produced by slow selfsustaining processes generally take uin to indicate the process, although some important ones take wian (q. v.), the latter usually commencing with b. To come up, to grow up (as plants); Tuniubn6. Tuboon, plant already to bear (to give birth to), as ani- sprouted (usually applied to cocoa mnals. AfM477ganak~ is "to bear a Ipalm). Mafgtubo', to gain; to win. child." Katutubo', of the, same age; born at the same time (no relationship idea). JMagpatubo', to invest; to put out at interest. Ex.: Balkit hindi rno siya' pinaultamtng nang salopil? (Why don't you lend him some money?) Sa pagka't wald, at ang 61king solapt' a,/ pinatuboan ko (Because I have none [to lend], and my money has been invested). Sa lirnang piso vao inutodng ko kay Juan, ay pinatutubo' ak6' niy6 so isang solopt' (for five pesos which I have borrowed from Juan he is now asking me a half peso as interest). An(? (What?) Isang solopi ang ipinatutubo' ni Juan sa aicing so limang piso no indttong ko so kaniya' (A half peso is the interest asked me by Juan on five pesos which I borrowed from him). Ex.: "To come up." Tungmutubo' bagdi aug mari-qd sili (Are the peppers [chiles] coming up?) To put forth shoots. Sumnibol. Sungmisibol ua aug maTga' halarnon sa halamanan, the plants in the garden are already putting out shoots. (2) Also applied to the growth of the beard and other actions of like nature. 3fasibol, to 6855-05-1 1 162 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. well out, as water from a well or spring. Aiig sibolin, the months during which the rice sprouts, etc. To bud. Umusbotig, from us bong, bud. Magusbong, to have buds. Syn., usbo's and ugbuis. UrnaugbcIIs, to bud, to sprout. Ex. with usbong: Lhngrnuusboug na ang mariya' kthot, (the trees are budding out now). To sprout (especially of tubers, like Sunmdloi, from st'llol, a sprout. the gabi and the caniote). To sprout (a-s suckers from -thietrunk Sumupling. Aug supliTan, the tree. of or at the foot of a tree). VIII. Lhn expresses (1) meteorological phenomena, provided the root does not commence with b; and (2) astronomical transitions, if the change, is represented as occurring and the phenomena are not otherwise expressed. Ex. (1): To rain; to be raining. To blow; to be blowing; to be windy. To lighten; to be lightening. To be struck by lightning. To thunder. Ex. (2): To dawn. To shine (as the sun); to be sunny (2) to grow light. Umuli~n. UrtnulanuloJn, to drizzle. M1agultku, to sow seed or to do anything in the rainy season. Ang tagnian, the rainy season. iPnmagulu'n, land which is planted in the rainy season. Auig ulun, the rain. Maulan, to have many rains; also to be caught in the rain. Ex.: Naglaldk-ad kami'y naulanan (We were walking along and were caught in the rain). I1timarTgin (from hacutgjin, wind). JfoghaJ-tgin, to blow continuously or much. MJagpahaiTijin, to wait until the wind changes; also to put anything out in the wind. ffagpahafigmi, to place one's self where the wind is blowing. (Note accent. ) Kionidlat (from lidlat, a flash. of lightning). Magk'idlat, to lighten much. Old form, kirlat. Syn., kilat (rare). Lumintik (from lintik. The "thunderbolt. ") Kuinulog. 3liagkulog, to thunder a great deal. Umag4 (from agcl morning). (2) to rise early. MagagO, to rise early (many), as a regiment, etc.; (3) to eat early. Ang agaan, what eaten thus, i. e., the breakfast. Paag4 to come early. Naag4I s'iya, he came early. Aug ipaagd, what is to be (lone early. U~rrdrao (from arao. (1) Sun; (2) day; (3) weather.) Afagamrao, to be very sunny. Afadrao, to be overheated by the sun. Ilouag kang malis 77i~;ay' ymraaaraudn ka' t ia iinitan (Don't go out now, because the sun will be out and you will TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 163 To become late. To become night; to do anything at night; to be overtaken by night. To grow dark. To grow cloudy; dark. To grow dark; to become twilight. To eclipse (lit. "to be dragoned "). get overheated). Man- 4rao, to use daily. Ang pailgdraodr~ao, what is use d aily or something for daily use. Afagpadrao, to wait until the sun shines; (2) to wait for day; (3) to sun one's self; (4) to put an object in the sunshine. Ex.: (3) Ilouag kang magpadrao (LDo not sun yourself). (4) MdIgpoarao ica nany darnit (Sun the clothes). Miagpaka6drao, to continue at a thing until daylight. Ex.: Nagpakwi rao siyadng mtagiral (He studied until daylight). Hurnapon (from h-apon, the time betwveen noon and dark; afternoon (Northern United States); evening (Southern United States). (2) To go to roost, as chickens. Afagltapon, all day. Kahapon, yesterday. K. nang umagdl, yesterday morning. K. nang hapon, yesterday afternoon (evening.). K. sa gablA, last night. Mfama yang hapon, later in the afternoon (evening). Mfahapon, to eat supper. Ang haponan, the meal. Aranighapon (from tighapon), to do something in the afternoon or evening (generally applied to looking after plants, etc.). (btanibli (from gabi'), night. Ex.: Mfagmnadalil ka't gagabihin sa gu'bat (Make haste or you will he overtaken by night in the timber). Nagabi han syat sa ddan (.Night overtook him on the road) ).MWagpak-agabit, to continue at a thing until night. Ex.: N~agpakagabi siantg magairal (They studied until night). Duwmilim. (Already explained.) Lurnimlim (from limlim). Malimlim, to be cloudy, etc. Lumimlirn also means to cluck, as a hen when she lays an egg. Ang linilimliman, the egg laid. Afagpalimlim, to set eggs. Sumilim. Ex.: Pasilimin ta muna bago lumaikad (Let us wait for dusk before we march). Lit. "Walk on". (2) To penetrate (as the cold). (2) Sinisilim ako6 nang larnig (I am chilled through by the cold). Lumaho'. Lumamon, "to swallow," and kumain, "to eat," are also used. Ex.: Linamon (kinain) nang lahi angbouan (The moon hasbeen swallowed [eaten] by the eclipse [dragon]). Rahu is the dragon of Hindu mythology which tries 164 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To rise; to shine out. To come out; to rise; as the sun, moon, or stars. (2) To fill up with people; as a church, house, etc. I To set (as the sun); primary meaning, "to drown." Application as to sun from fact that sun sets in the sea to Tagalogs. To dive; to plunge into; to go to the bottom. (2) To set, lit. "to dive," as the sun. to eat the sun and moon from time to time. Surniilag. ASungmdaag na ang 6roo (The sun has already risen). Sttsilming auig bouanq madali1 (The moon will rise quickly). Swngniisiloag ai-g mnatuga bituin (the stars are shining). Aig silaii-jan, the East. Ang sinda~hjan, what was lit up by the rise of the sun or the moon, or the shining out of the stars. M1agpasdauig, to wait until one of above-mientioned bodies rise. Ex.: B flit hiindi vio pinasis'llanig nuna aug f'rao? (Why don't you wait until sunirise?) 1Pasilairt-jin ta?nuana ang arao (Let us wait until the sun rises). Sumlikat. Ex.: (1) Sisilkat na ang arao (bouan) (the sun [moon] will rise soon). (2) Stoo'ifikat (nasisikatan) ang b6hay nang tiuo (The house is filling [filled] with people). 211agpasitkat, to -wait until risilmg of sun, moon, etc., takes place. Lx.: Pasik-atinn oanag area (Wait until the sun rises). Lurn.'nod..,I g k,,alunoran, the West; lit. "the drowning place." Ex.: Lungmmi nod ang airao (The sun has set). Luugrnmldnod afg ta'uo (The man is drowning himyself). Mallt'nod, to be drowned. With urn volition may be understood, and with ma accident. Lumni(Hog. Lurnmi bog ang arao (The sun hasset). Lit. "dived." N1ag1;ibog, to plunge another or an object under the water. IX. (ha iis used with roots whlen attraction toward thieagent is expre~ssed, or when the agent gains control of something. The opposite idea of losing control, etc., is sometimes expressed with the same root, and in other cases with different roots, the particle mag being then the verbalizer. To buy. To borrow. To exchange; to barter. To take. Burnil;. Mfaglbili, to sell. (Both of these hav-e already been explained.) Um~itang. Magiitang, to lend. (Both partly explained before.) Ex.: Uuta)T{;an ko si Totn(Is naeug linmang piso (I will borrow 5 pesos from Tomais). Kautasthjan, (abs.) debt. Peutang, credit. Puiiialit. Ang pinalit, what exchanged or bartered. kuonuha. Avg pagkuhia, the act of taking. (Forms with in, i, ike, ikina, and en have been explained heretofore. ) Sum4 lI.op. Afagsaikop, to redeem mi'uch. il14asdkop, to bedominated. To redeem; to ransom. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 165 Ang Mikop, the vassel or follower. Makasdkop, to be able to (lominate. Nasasak-opan niyd anq bayan (The village [towrn] is under hiis rule). Lit.: " The town is rulled by him." To encounter; to strike. Samumpong. To purloin; to filch; to steal. Umumit. Ang umitin, what purloined. 3faumitin or iuaqpagurnit, purloiner. To catch; to seize; etc. hlum u/i. Ex.: 1/i aug pogong hu/i na, sa htuhulihtin pa (Better the quail caught alreadly than that wh ich has yet to be caught.).-T. P. Mlanhlo/i, to live by robbery. Among other words coming under this class may be mentioned tumangap, " to accept or receive; " durndkip, " to seize or catch hold of; " umaibut, '"to overtake; to reach; " and suma/ibhong, "to go out to meet anyone;" all of which have been explained before. X. iLia expresses voluntary acts of agents upon others when mutuality, duality, or plurality is not denoted. The latter are expressed by wnag, an being generally suffxed for mutuality. Examples: To accompany. Sumama. Magsarna, to accompany each other (two or more). Ang kasarna, the companion (servant). Ang kasamnahan, the person accompanying another. Mak-isarna, to thrust one's self into the company of another. Magkasama, to gather, as a crowd. Surnarnal is "to go into partnership," and Srumamd is "to becomue bad or evil. " These examlples show the great importance of accent in Tagalog. To leave another. IHumiwalay. Aug hiwalayan, the person left. Maghiwalay, to separate mutually. Ma hi wa/ay, to part accidentally or casually, etc. Syn. tiwalag, with the same combinations and meanings as above. Both probably from waWl, without; not to have, etc. J7iwalag is often used in the sense of divide, but watak- is better. Magkawatakwatak, to be divided into many parts. To join with; to unite with. Puruisan. Magpisan or rnagkapisan, to associate together. Ex.: A ng pinagkakapisanan vaug marr-ga karunos57gan, the uniting place of the sciences (knowledge, diinong), i. e., scientific society, university, etc. Pisan as an adjective means "merely; purely." There is a noun pisan meaning ",sudden death. " Makapisan, to kill another suddenly. To talk to; (2) to sue another or (Tm ~sap. Ang usapin, the person bring suit. suied. Ang ka?'sap, the companion in conversation. Mags'tsap, to converse (twoormore); (2) to sue 166 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. one another; to litigate. Mangjy6 -Salp to talk mnuch; to talk to an audience. Ex.: Jlouag mno akony lakasan nany patlagmayasaj) (don't talk to me so much in such a rough way). (As the variations of the idea " to sue " are derived, they will be om-itted). Makipagl'isap, to converse with another; (2) to thrust one's self into a conversation. Ex.: Ibig monyrnakipagi'sap $a akin? ((10 you wish to have a talk with me?). Opo6 (yes, sir). Nay6'yhindf mnangyyayari, it is not possible just now). Makipakii'sap, to rush uninvited into a conversatioa between others. Palal'sap, a barrator or p)erpetual bringer of groundless,suits. Jieayinpalai'sap, to become a barrator. Ex.: Naginp~alaitsap siya' t nayinmalalangohin (he has becomne a barrator and common drunkard). The first vice, barratry, is very prevalent with Tagalogs; the second is very rare. It would be unusual to find the combination set forth above, but grammatically it is an excellent example wAith magin. To reprove. Umauay. 3lagana~y, to quarrel with. Kaabtay, antagonist; enem iv. Any ipagaiuay, the cause of quiarrel. Ex.: Anq ipinag(Jiuay nanyg mnainga' kapidbalhay namnin aY/ any aso ni Feliciano, p6' (a (log of Feliciano was the caus-e for the quarrel of our neighbors). Itang b61ay na ito6 any pinagauayan ni/a (this house is where they have been quarrelling [or where they quarreled]). MakipagyJuay, to pick a quarrel or to interfere in a (quarrel. MJagkaaduay, to quarrel (two or more). Nayka~luay anyg dalawany rnayasaua sa tiangi (the husband and wife quarrelled in the market place). XI. Uma also expresses movement in itself; movement from an outsidle agency being expressed by may, except for the root hai~yo, which takes urn. Ex.: To walk; to pass on; to march; to Lumaikad. A ny lakarin, what walked travel (on foot). for, i. e., the object of walking. Ex.: A4n6't hindi ka lunyrnaldkad nany matulin? (why don't you walk more quickly?). Maylaikad, to walk much or quickly; to carry something while walking. Any ilaikad, the means of walking, as the foot, or the object carried TAGALOG LAN GUAGE. 167 To run. To jump. To leap down. To leap or jump down; to alight. To swim. To dive. To stop. To cease; to end, etc. To run away. To hide (from fear). To pull out; to take out; to draw out. To crawl; to walk on all fours. along. I ng lakaran, the person walked to, or the place walked to. Ang paglakardin, the route, path, or roadl, etc., walked over. Ang maglalaikad, the walker; traveler. Maglakadhilkad (dim.), to stroll. Ang paglak-adlakar6n, the ground strolled over. M1agpahikad, to order or cause to walk up or go ahead. Mak-alik-ad, to be able to walk. Ex.: Palakarin mo iTga iyang ca bayo i!/(l i (mnak e t hat h orse w al k nI)). J-lindf 'niaka(ilkad siyai'tpilayl, po6 (he is not able to travel; he is lanie, sir). Nak-aalal~kad ak (I am able to walk). Nakalatl6kad eiyd sana (he may be able to walk). Lurnakbay is " to go a long ways on foot;" "to mnake a hike." It has the same changes and variations as la'kad. There are several other variations of the idea, all rare. Turnakb6j. Already explained. Lumokso6. Already explained. Turnalon. Ang talonan, the place. Ex.: Tuinalo'n ka sa tu'big (jump into the water). Lumiusong. Already explained. Lurnai~goy. Already explained. Lurn~bog. Already explained; syni., sisid. Tti inahain. iMagtahain, to stop another; Magtahanan, to stop each other (two). Nagtahadn street in Manila means "stopping place," as it ends at the bank of the Thisig River. Harnumpay. Walang hutmpay, endless. T~unanan. Thrnakas. Ang rnagtatakas, matakasin, or palatakas, the hider (person hiding). lluma i7go. This form originally meant to redeem another from slavery, and urn has been retained while the meaning has changed. Af'aghaiigo (now out of use) meant to redeem one's self from the same condition. Gumnapang. Ang bat4 ay nakagagadpang (the child is able to crawl). XII. Urn is used with voluntary actions upon or againsit another. Actions affecting the subject are expressed with mag. Urn is not used with involuntary actions, as mnatilsod, " to stumble." Ex.: To wash the face of another. Ilurilamos, evidently f rom damos; amnos, idea of dirtiness of the face. Ex.: Arnosamosan ang mukhd ma (your face is very dirty). Ang hilarnosan, the person washed. 168 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To comb the hair of another. To shave another. To cut hair. To cure another. To scratch another. To whip another. Th1big na hihilamosin, wash water. Afaghilamos, to wash one's face (occasionally). Mfanhilamos, to wash one's face (habitually).,,Ing ipanhilarnos, the means, i. e., hands, sponge, wash rag, water used, etc. Aug panhilamosan, the, place, i. e., the wash basin, etc. Svmuklay. 3lagsuk-lay, to comb one's hair. Ang suklayin, what combed, i. e., the hair. Ang pagsukia yin, what combed much. _Any pagsuklayan, what combed upon. Ang isuklay, the means, etc. Aug suklay, the comb. Afagpasukiay, to order to comb; also to allow one's hair to be combed. Urn ihit. Maga hit, to shave onesself. Aug pagd hit, the act of' shaving (another). Angpagaahit, the act of shaving ones-self. MimiTgahit, to shave (as an occupation). Augnmananhit, the barber. Ang pandhit, the means, i. e., the razor. Kagpaaihit, to order to shave; also to get shaved. Ex.: Magpad hit ka kay Juan (Tell Juan to shave you). 3afgpai hit k-ay Juan si Pedro (Tell Juan to shave Pedro). Ang pinagaahitan, the place of being shaved, i. e., the barber shop. A ng ahi tan, the person shaved. (See phrases also.) Gumupit. M1aggupit, to cut one's own hair. Ang ginuit what has been cut, or the person whose hair has been cut. Gunlupit also means to cut metal. The use of shears is implied in all cases. (See the phrases for examples.) Gurnamnot. Afaggainot, to cure onesself. Mamnga?not, to cure professionally, i. e., to practice medicine. Kagarmotan (abs.), medicine. Aug vnangagamot, the physician. Aug panjarnotin, the person cured. Magainot, to have much medicine, or to have many kinds of medicine. (Idiom:) Walang garnot aug lirnot, there is no cure for the forgetful. Ex.: Bago durtng ang sakit, lagyain nang garnot (Before illness comes, apply the rernedy).-T. P. 362. This seems to be an adaptation from the Spanish. Kumrntmot. (Already explained.) LMumainpas. ilfaghamnp6.s, to whip ones-self (as in penance). Ang hampasin, the person whipped. Any harnp~is sa kalabao'y sa cabayo TAGALOG LANGUTAGE. 169 ang laitay (the lash to the carabao, and the welt to the, horse).-T. P. 376. To cane or club another. Pnionai. J~fagpaloan, to cudgel each other. Ang pamal6, the garrote. XIII. Urn is also usedl to express voluntary acts of the senses, except with those roots which commence with b. Ex.: To look for; to see by so looking. To hear (by listening). To feel; to touch. To smell of. To taste; to relish (purposely). Kum'ito_ Magk'itl, to look at each other (two or more). A fagkitd, to look at intently, or at many things. Jfakita, to be seen. M1akakit4, to see (casually). Ex.: Ako'y nakakikifil (I am. able to see). Ak6'y nakakifil vang isang taduo diya'n (I saw a person there). NakitdI mo bag6' siyaif (Did you see him [her]?) IRindt,?7tgum't niakikcitd ko sana, (no but I may be able to [see]). Jfagkakifil, to be deceived by the sight. Ex.: Nagkakakini kit4 ako'? (Do I see visions?) Nagkakakinikitaan ako6 (My sight deceives me). Naqkakinitaan ak6' (My sight deceived me). Dumir7ijig. (Already explained.) Ilurnipo'. 3aghip5o, to touch much. Aug hipoin, what touched. Umarnoy. Ex.: Amoyin mo it6, (smell this). Muaamoy, to smell casually. Ex.: Naaamoyvma baga' ang bar7tiong isi'nasamb~iat nang mar7tild bulakiak? (D~o you smell the fragrance shed by the flowers?) llfakaamnoy, to be able to smell something. Nakaaamnoy ka? (Can you smellanything?) A6, smoke. Lumasap. Aug lasapin, what tastedl. Miakalasap, to taste (casually); also to cause a relish. XIV. Some roots denoting passions and emotions of a certain kind are conjugated by uni, when the idea of voluntary action is expressed. Other roots of this nature are conjugated by mag. When casual, ideas of emnotions, etc., are expressed with ma. R. To love. To care for; to dlesire; to wish. ASuminta'. (Already explained.) Of Sansk. origin, through Malay. Luminlag is a synonym, now rare. Urnibig. 3fagibig, to long for. Magibigan, to like each other (two). Aug inibig, what liked.' Aug Imibig, the person who is liked and reciprocates the liking. Angpagt'big, the wish, desire, liking. Aug pagk-aibif/ the act of liking, desire, etc. Aug pinagibigan, what mutually longed for. faI'big(adj.), loving, (2) capricious, (3) to have a liking for. A4ng natibig, the person liked, but who is unaware of 170 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. the fact. M~aibigtin, an amorous man; a flirt. JVaikaibig, to care for naturally. Kaibig(In (abst.), love, desire. Ang kaibigan (note accent),the friend. Ang kinaibigan, what loved. Kaibigibig (adj.), amiable; loving. Absolute, ibig. An6 arng ibig mno? (What do you wish?) Ibignmongsuminana sa4kin? (Do you wish to go with me?) Mar7gibig, (1) to like many; (2) to flirt habitually; (3) to care first for one thing and then another. Ex. with ibig, T. P.: 1, I q t~nay na pagbig lhanqcin sa huli matanun (True love is sweet to the end).446. Kung tapat ang pagibig, mapait man ay matamis (XWhen love is real even hitter is sweet).-447. Urnirog. Ang iroglin, the person caressed. A1airogin, an affectionate person. ilng biy'agat irog siyang nakalalansnny (ifts and caresses gain over what can not otherwise lbe gained).-T. P. 144. Pumnita. M1apitalhi, a desirous person. Agi any pita nang 1bob ko (It is the desire of my heart). Mlaypita In- sa k-aniya' nang anomnang ibi vmo (Ask him. for anything you wish). Pithaya is a rather rare synonym. Pumithaya, to like; to (lesire. To caress; to fondle. To like; (2) to desire. XV. Urn used with sa, " at" "Iitin,"~ denotes permanency in any place. Ex.: Ang marT-fj4 Americano sangmnasa sangykapuluan (The Americans are settling permanently in the archipelago). XV1. Urn is also used in some placcs to express the idea that what may be signified hy the root is taking place here, there, and everywhere; the idea of confusion being inherent. Ex.: Um('uay (or (mayant) do~n (all is quarreling there). Urnasdua (asauin) dito (everyone is getting married here). Urn is also used for the imperative in Manila, the tenses being distinguished by adverbs of time, but this is probably due to t~he fact that the speakers of Tagalog in Manila generally have some knowledge of Spanish, which confuses their grasp of the nice (listinction of tense in pure Tagalog. XVII. Urn, used with some roots indicating certain actions means to be occupied in a matter, although perhaps not actually performing the act indicated. Ex.: Surnusillat si Juan (Juan is busy with writing). IRREGULARITIES. XVIII. In some parts of the Tagalog, region the present tense of the indefinite with the primary idea (besides the regular formation with ungmn and the reduplications of the first syllable of the root.), is sometimes expressed by the particle na prefixed to the root. Ex.: To read. Bumasa, f romn San sk. wadchet " word," " discourse." There are three forms of the present indef. with primary idea. Ex.: Ak6'y nabasa (I am [or was] reading). AU` y TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 171 nabasa'y nakatalog ako; (I was reading and fell asleep). Aanawi ak6) (I an, reading). Bunyrnabasa aka' (I amn reading). (See tables for other tenses.) Any basah in, what read. zing basahian, the person read to. Bas/alm~, professor, lecturer. Mfagbasa', to read much, or byimany. Anygpagbasa, the act of reading. Mfabatbasa, anything legible. Ex.: Nabasa 7na na any librong ipinahtirain ka sa iy6?f (Ilad you [have you already] read the book I lent you?) Hlindi ka pa'nabasa (I have not finished reading it yet). 3Jagpabatsa, to order to read. Ex.: Nagpapabasa any mangqaaral sa mariyag batld (the teacher is ordering the children to read). M1abasahirn; mamarnasa or palabasa, reader. Tagabasa, reader by occupation. Basa is also applied to a gravestone. Bumasa (f roin basdt), is ''to wet, to moisten. " This last is evidently a Mlalayan word; Malay, basahkun, to wet or moisten. Basa (from Sansk. wecicha) means language, speech, in Malay, while bacha has been selected to represent the idea of reading. To write. Suromilat (from. Arabic s'urat, a chapter of the Koran, through Malay). This root has been softened to s?'dat in Visayan and Tagalog, hut in Bicol and Ilocano it is still surat. Ibaniag uses the root tilrak. There is also a root lt~ik- in Tagalog, meaning "to write," "to record." There is also a word meaning " to print. " It is miaypalaman, with a primary meaning of being implanted in the heart. E x.: Nasr'dat siya' (he is writing). &unymusmillat siya' (he is writing). Any sulatin, what written. iEx.: An6 any susulatin vany amavma sa iyony kapatid na lalaki? (What will your father write to your brother?) ismilat niya' itany paneil1at (let him write with this pen) (means of writing). Ainila'da na ni? J sa kaniya' na parita siya paydaka (he has written him already to come here at once). A ny sulatan, the paper written upon, or the writing desk, place, etc. Ex.: Sulatan ma i/any papel (write on this paper). Ano'bagd anysinulatan mao nany mari7ja pa7Tyalanf (Which paper did you write the namesupon?) I0Tagipapel naito'y 172 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To eat. To buyv. To obey; to follow. siyang sasulatan niyd (this paper is for him to write upon [fut.]). Ma (gsulat, to write muchorbymany. Ma!gsulatsulatan (din.), to write a little; to scribble. Ex.: Nagsusulatsulata i ako) (I arm writing a little; Ilam scribbling). Mana'lat, to write, as an occupation. Ang manunudlat, thme clerk; writer. Ang panudlat, the pen, styluis, brush, etc. (See also uinder inakca, magpa, and nacki). Mapagscdtat, a person who writes much. Katinain. (Already explained.) Ex. with na: NS'akain siya' (hie i's eating). Kungmakain siyga (he is eating [regular form]). Buioni. (Alreadyvexplained.) Ex.: Nabili ako6 nang damit (I am. buying some clothes). Also bungrnibili ako6 nang darnitI. Sumlonod. Nasunod siyal, he is obeying or obeys. Auigsundalong sungmnusitnod, sunorin siya' kun oficial (the obedient soldier will be obeyed when an officer himself). Magsunoran, to follow each other. 3fagstwodsaunod, to follow in rapid succession (many). Afagsu mun od, to follow closely, also two children born in succession. Miagkasumunod, to follow wherever another may go, or to obey implicitly. Ex.: Nagkakasumunod ang sundalo sa paniong nij/a (the soldier follows his officer wherever he goes). Sino au-g Jpinagk-asumtundain miof (Who are you obeying so implicitly'?) Ang punoug kjo (myv commnander). Ano ang ipinagkakasumnunod?no [ninyo6] sa kaniyd? (Why do you [ye] obey him so nimplicitly?) Ako'y sundalo, p6' (1 arn a soldier, sir). A8uinday. Xasi'ay sigd6, he is (lisobeying. Magsd'ay, to (lisobey, etc. (much). lI1asday, disobedient; contradictory. Magsuagaa, to contradlict each other. Magsist'tay, to disobey (many). Kasuayan, (lisobedience. Tuamd og. Ex.: Nataibog sign' (he shows anger; hie is turning aside). Turnindig. lNatindiq siyd (hie is rising to his feet). Verblhas already been explained. Urnup6'. Naupo' siun (they are sitting down). Verb has already been explained. Tumif'g'in. Natiri-gfin ak6 (I am looking). Verb has already been explained. To resist; disobey; tend with. contradict; con To show anger; (2) to turn asidle f romi. To standl up; to rise to the feet. To sit (lown. To look at. TAGALOG LANGUAGE.13 173 XIX. Bisyllabic (two-syllabled) roots3 commencing with b, k, )), t, or a vowel, generally admit of a similar irregularity in the imperative past, and present tenses; un being prefixed to vowel ro(Its for the past anT presemnt tenses and mt for the imperative, while the initial letter of b, Ak, p), andt roots changes to n for the past and p~resent tenses, andl to mt for the imperative. To read. To capture. To take. To go for; to bring; to call. To enter; to comie in; to go in (voluntarily). Bninasa. Ex.: (Irreg.) M1asa ka; (Reg.) B'unisa ka( (read). (I.) l~asa, (akm; (R.) Btmgrnasa, ak6 (I read [past tenses]). (I.) Nanasa ako'; (iL.) Btingiabasa (iko (I ani reading). The other tenses are regular. Ex.: Nakabasa, ak6( (I hadl read). Babasa, ak6 (I shall readl). M1akaba~sa ak' (I shall have read). Armg pagbasa, the act of reading. Buminhag. Kabihtagan, captivity. Same as foregoing. Kumnuhia (partly explained before). ImpI., Mulka ka; kruwmmha ka; kuha ka (take). Past, Nuia, ak6'; kungmu/ia ak6 (I took). Pr., Nunrihla ak60; ka?,nimukuhta ak' (I am taking). Plp., Nakakiiha. ak6 (I hadl taken). F., Ku/euha ak6 (I shall take). F. P., Makakuha ak' (I shall have taken). Mafi-guha, to take habitually. Ang pafi-yunn, what taken hab~itually. (Note that the u is all that remains of ku/ha.) Afak-akulha, to be able to take. Lx.: Nak-uha nila' iyarmg via~gT' bui~ga (they were able to take that fruit [pl.]). Kumao'n. Conj. like kumuha. (Already explained.) Pum6a'ok. Mdfasok ka; pufnalsok ka (come in). Na'sok siya'; pungmasok siya' (he went in). Nanaisok Silad; an grnapaisok sild (they are going in). Nakap(Jtsok ak6' I had gone in). Pap6sok ako6 (I will go in). Aug pagpalsok, the act of entering. Magpasok, to enter much. Magp('sok, to put something inside. Ang pasukin, the object of entrance. Ang ipomisok, what put inside. Aug pasukan, the door entered or the house, etc. Nasok silang walavg batibat'l (they came. in without any ceremony). Makapa'sok, to enter or go in casually; to be able to enter. Ex.: (1) Ak6o'y nagpapasial, ay makapdsok ak6o sa looban ni Gat Luis (I was out for a stroll, and without think. ing went into Don Luis's yard). Magpapdsok, to order to enter; to get into, as clothes. Ex.: Si Juan ay nagpapasok kay Pedro nang da 174 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. T T mit (Juan told Pedro to get into his clothes). Nagpapa'solk si Pedro nang damit (Pedro put on the, clothes). Miakapagpap("Isok, to be able to order another to go in. 'o pluck; to gather, as flowers. PumitdIs. (Already e xpl a inied.) Conj. like pumdsok. lo tempt; to try. Tumuks6'. Imp., Mluks6'; tumuks6' (tempt, try ). Past, Nuks's; tungmukso6 (tried). Pr., Nunuitk so; tunginutaeks6 (trying). Plp., Nakatuls( ) (had tried). F., Tutukso6 (shall, will try). F. P., Makatukso6 (shall, will have triedl). ilug pagpagtul.s6', the trying, teml)ting. Ulfagttk-s6, to tempt much or many. Aung tuksohin, the person tempted. Angpagtuksohi'n, the person greatly or many times tempted. Ang ituks6', the cause or means of temptation. Anug ipagtuk-so, the cause or means of great or repeated temptation. Aug tuksohan, the place of temptation. Aug pagtuk-.sohian, the place of much or repeated temptation. Mlagtu k-sotuk-sohan (diun.), to tempt a little, or in mockery. 3fanitks6, to tempt habitually. Aug manuwakso6, the tempter; temptress. MTa gpanuks0', to temnlt frequently and a great deal. Aug ipanuk-s6, the cause or ineans of the foregoing. Ang panuk~sohan, the place corresping to foregoing. 3fagpakatukso6, to tempt strongly. Ex.: Ano6 ang ipvingpakatutksohan (ipinak-apagtuksohan) nih? (WIhy were they so strongly temlpted?) lo peck (as a bird). Tumukdt. Conij. like tumuk-s6. Apparently applied to bite of snake. Ex.: Siya'y tinulkd' nang ahas (he was bitten by the snake). o leave; to go away. Urnilis. Imp., (I.) Mfalis ka; (R.) urialls ka. Past, Nalis ak6 (I.); Ungmalis ako6 (R.) (I left, went away, etc.) Pres., Nanalis ak6 (I.); ungmaali'S ako6 (R.) (I amrn going away, leaving, etc.). Plp., Nak-ali's ak6 (I had left). Fut., Aalis ako6 (I shall leave). F. P.. Mafknnls ak6' I shall have left). Aug pagalls, the leaving. (This root has already been partly explained.) The following roots are conjugated like alis: T T To ascend. Uonakyat. Aug inakyat, what ascended or the person ascending. Aug iak~yat, the cause. Aug akyatain, the place. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 175 Not to wish. To go for water with a pitcher. To drink. To turn back; to go back; to fall back; to retreat. To return; to come back. To lead; to go ahead. Umayao. Ex.: Paayao ka (say you do not wish to). Bakit siyd napaayaof (Why did she say she did not wish to?) Umigib. Uminunl. Imp., Minumn ka, drink. Malay minuml means "to drink." (This verb has already been explained.) Umn rong. Umuui. U.tund. (Already explained.) XX. Some polysyllabic (of more than two syllables) roots beginning with b, k, p, t, or a vowel, are conjugated with the particle man (q. v.). XXI. Some sixty-six polysyllabic verbal roots commencing with pa replace the first syllable with na in the past and present and with ma in the imperative and future. In the present and future tenses the second syllable of the root is reduplicated and not the first. This conjugation resembles but is not identical with man. There are also some euphonic vowel modifications. (See tables for synopsis of conjugation.) The verbal roots, which are conjugated in this manner, are the following: To verbalize these roots, change initial p to n or m1 as required for tense of indefinite. To rise early. To profit; to make (in business). To listen to (with attention). To solicit or urge (for good or evil). To bathe one's self; to take a bath. To swell. To dwell; to live in a house. To swell up (as a sting); also to swell badly. To supplicate; (2) to ascend into a house for important reasons. To wag the tail (as a dog' To incite; to provoke. Paagd, from agd, "morning." Pakindbang. Probably from a lost root tdbang, which still exists in Bicol and Visayan, with the meaning "to aid; hell); succor;" and the prefix paki, def. of maki. Pakinig. To listen to much, magpakinig. Pakii'sap, from usap and paki, def. of maki. Paligb. Magligb, to bathe another; also magpaligo. Syn. pambo (rare). Maligoka (take a bath). Paligoan mo ang cabayo (wash the horse). Pamagd, from bagd, "a tumor, abcess," and pan. Pamdhay, from bdhay, " house, " and pan. Pamanghid, from panghid, "to swell" (the nerves), and pan. Pamanhik, from panhik and pan. Pamdypoy (rare). Seiple thinks may be from lost rootpaypoy, variation of paypay, "fan." Mamaypay, to fan one's self or another. Usual word "to wave" is pumaspas. Paspasin mo ang bandila (wave the flag). Pamongkahz. Ex.: Pinamomongkahian tayo nang presidente municipal sa masamang gawd (The municipal president [mayor] is inciting us to do wrong). (Present tense, reduplication of modified syllable mo and suffix an. From pongkahz, 176 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To offer; to dedicate. To envy. To sigh; (2) to whistle. T7o dreani. To put one's self under the control of another. To pray. To trust; to confide. To vanquish; gain; conquer; win. To sing funeral songs. To descend by stairs or ladder; (2) to spend; to use up. a variation of pongkd, "to incite to a quarrel," and pun. This root is said to be of Chinese origin. Paruigan~o. Seiple says from Vis. part. panag and an6, "what."I Panoighii'. Seiple also gives this as from panag and hii, "envy." ELx.: Jlouag kang managlhili so kopua mio taduo (Do not envy your neighlbor). Syn. paJ-gimbolo (rare). Panoghoy, f rom toaghoy, "to pant, to breathe hard," an d pan. Panogo~ip, from yinip and pana, a combination found lby Seiple in but four words of polysyllabic structure. Lx.: NYaranaginip a bagi? (Are you dreaming?) Syn. -I ooi-!~oo/ito~ g, from ti~logI ''sleep.'' Poooagi~so-yo, from tayi~styo and pan. The ultimate root is suyo' with the same general neaning. PanalaOgioo, from dalaoi~yin and pan. Pooiq, from sdlig. Ex.: &iya any sinasaligan ko, kaya akok ota~pang (I trust in him, andl am- brave for that reason). Pinapanaligan nio (ponaliyon~in mno) ong Dios (let your trust be in God [trust in God]). Panalo, from taloandlpan. Sino ang nanaofo (Who was the winner?) Tuinalo, to dispute (one). Mofgtalo, to argue (two, etc.). Manolo, inde'f. of poowlo. M1agpatalo, to allow one's self to beconquered. Pataio, to consent to be vanquished. Mlakitalo, to interfere in a dispute. Ang niananalo, the winner; conqueror. Ang talonan, the vanquished. Panambitan,7 from sambit, "funeral song," an suffixed and pan. Pan(~wg. Seiple gives a Panay-Visayan root naog, but the SaimarLevte dialect seems to lack this word. Ex.: (Tag.) Paum~ianog, to (lescend a ladder (also, to go or comne (own stairs). Jlfagpanaiog, to do the above much. Mogpapomwyio, to order the above to be done; to use up; to spend. Ex.: Nagpapan~og nang art anyg narurukhd (The property has been used up onaccount of poverty). Napapanoogan ak6o nanq limiang pisos (I have spent five pesos). Also with ma. Ex.: Ang napanmiog sa, diki oy liinangpisos (The amount of my spending was five pesos). Maypandog also means to bring some TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 177 r() sit down (with the feet crossed andI knees apart.). To promise; to resolve. To lpersevere; to p~ersist; to last. To penetrate (a-s water). To be able to do. To kneel down; to kneel. To propl with the hand. thing (lawn stairs or oy means of a ladder..-ig ipanii'og, what broughIt (10wn. M1agpapagpam(iog, to order something to be brought down thus. Paworsi1(a, fromnsiM, with same meanwn %ithi may an(1 pan. Seiple thinks pana a root, but it may also be from the indef. A,,ng pinana2etsdlmm, the person sat (lown before, or the place. Panata. A ngpanatahini,, what promised. Joig panalahan, the person p)romised. Syns. PmThako'; Tumandang. The roots talagal and pandan have somewhat similar mneanings. Panatili, from tlii 7idea of propping up; andI pana. Panimtim (from timtim? and pan). Seiple gives tiyim as the root, meaning "to ooze into; to leak." Noceda gives panayirntimn as the word. Ex. Afapanay~imtim sa 1bob any masaniang asal (The evil habit penetrates the heart). Pangyari (from yari and pan). MIakapangyarihan, powerful; omnipotent. Kapangyarihan, power; faculty; authority. Ex. Mayr6on siyangkapangyarihan (he has power [or authority] ). W~ald siyang k. (lie is without a). Wald akong k. (1 am without a). Mangyari, to be possible. Ex. Hindi mangyayari (It can not be). Hindi manyyaring di a/c6pumnaroon (I can no~t possibly keep from going there). Mangyari bagang di' ako pumaroon? (Is it not possible for me to keep from going there?) An6't di'mangyayari? ( Why should itnotbeso?) May nangyari doon sa b6hay niyad (Something has happened in his house over there). Siikafm~angyari, (Suppose it may happen?) D11 sitkat mangyari (It should not happen). M1ao f/~tyari don, (It will indeed be possible). Yari alone means done; finished; completed. Ex.: Yari na any s~lat (The letter is already finished). Panikiuhod. (Already explained). Syn. Lumuhod. Paniin. Anqipinaniin, whatpropped thus. Mfagtiin, to put out the hands in order to rise; (2) also to stamp or print. Tiinan moo any papel, stamp or print it on the 6855-05-12 178 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To think; also "to regret:'" To squat. To believe; to confide in; to trust. To guide; to lead. To accomplish the will. To view (as a spectacle); to gaze at; to sight; to behold; to look at from far off; to view with astonishment. To make water. To lodge. To wait upon the pleasure of another; to flatter; (2) to serve. To promise. To dare; to venture. paper. Root tiin and pan. Tin means " to prop oneself with hands and feet in order to rise." Panhimdiin (from diiwdirn and pant). This root is domdoi~i in Bicol. Paninglkayad (from tinkayad and pan). Also turniingkayad, with same meaning. Parniwala (from tiwala and pan). Aing katiwala, the confidant; bosoni f riend. Panoyot. Panolos (from a lost root, tolos, suggests Seiple, who cites the Javanese word " tulus, sincere; faithful; loyal, etc." and adlopted in Malay). Ex.: Il1ind'i ako6 manolos lartn~ain, at ang nasasakit ak6o nang laynamt (I can not force myself to eat, because I am sick with fever). Paeoood (from n6od and pan). la.nood, to look at what contents and gives pleasure. Ang pinan"od, what beheld. Pern 41ig (from tmi big and pan). iPeneluyan (from tmiloy and pent). Ang panulayanan, the lodging place; also aIng tnioyan. Anyg ipanuat yan, the cause or person for whom lodging is looked for. Maopapanultnyan, to give another lodg-_ ing. Ang papanolayeoin, the person given lodging. Tinoiloy to lodge. Maatiiloy, to lodge many or much. Any tuluyan, the lodging place. Ang pagtuluyav, the lodging place of inany or munch. Any itilloy, the cause.,.ny ipa'!k tMiloy, the cause of many or much. lf~aflpatifoy, to give lodging. Any patuluyin, the person given lodging. Any pahtaluya?, the place where given lodging. Anyg papaytuluyin, the person given much lodging. Any mamgiypapagtuluyin, the persons given lodging. Any piiiegypapatuluyan, the lodging houses. Ex.: Sine any nanunulugan sa, b6thay nio? (Who is the lodger at your house?) Isanyg mah irap nap )inatuloy ko sa ai king baihey (a poor man whom I have allowed to lodge at my house). IPenuyui (from suyb and pan). See panagisuyo. 1Po6~hiako' (def.); mar77ejkii (indef.). Syn., panata. From eJkeo, "security, " and pan. Pafi-gah6ms; mamiTjahas (probably from dads "'idea of bravery," and pan). Seiple points out that the TAGALOG LANGUTAGE. 179 To become tired from much standling or being in the same position a long time. To become thin; emaciatedl. To become miumb (as thre arm or leg from inaction); to "go to sleep." To fold the arms. To rest the face upon the hand; to bury face in hands. To apprehend; to dread. To bear a child; to lie in. To be. with child for the first time. To dread. To look in mirror or other reflecting surface. To hurt; to damage; to mnalign; to make ashamed. To talk in sleep; to dream. To humble or ab~ase oneself. To make love; to woo. To be jealous. To tremble; to shudder. To warn; to guard oneself; to sneak away. regular formation should be panalhds. In Bicol, daha'8 means violence; force. PaiTg'61lay. Ex.: Nangangadlay ka na? (Are you tired already?) Hindi p6I (no, sir). The roots ii-giilay, hingdlay, 0g~alo, and ri-gimi have about the same meaning. Pai~fyalilrang (greater than yayat). Syn., pai-igatigang. Root, sTgaffrang andl pa i. Paigtalo (from?i-talo, "idea of pain from fatigue"). Syn., rnqimi. Pamijyalok'pkip (from halokipkip, to cross the arms). Var., panhalokipkip. Ult. root, kipkip. Ex.: Kuinipkip, to lay the arm or leg upon anything. Badkit ka na?-tfar-!1 -alokipkip? (Why are you folding your arms?) Seiple shows that htalo often prefixes roots composed of two identical syllables. Paritjalurnlbab&l (f rom. figalumbabil and pan). Var., C~gayumbabcl. Tauong mapait-galumnbaba', a melancholy person. P1ar7-gamba (less than a~ignb or tlkot). From gamba "idea of d read," and pan. Pari-janak (from anak, "child," and pan). Pa fi-g6n a y. Ila i7ganib (from gainib, " idea of being in danger"). (Greater degree than pafi-gamba.) Paffganino' (fromt anino, "image, shadow," and pan). ParTgjanyaya (from anyaya and pan). Mfakapani7(anyaya, to cause dam.age. Pairiganyaya'ng taduo, a person who destroys property, maligns, etc. Anyayang taduo, a lazy lperson. MakapaparTi-ganyaya (adj.), harmful; hurtful; slanderous. PaiTgj(irap (from airap, "idea of dreaming, " and pan). Paiigayupapil (from irgayupapa and pan). Par'i-big (from ibig and pan). See ibig. Pai~g-igbogho' (from bogho6, "idea of jealousy;" still found in panibuglh6, "ijealousy"). PafiT-ildbot (from kildbot, "idea of trembling"). PaTgdiag (def.); ma?7gjilag (indef.); both from Vlag. Unmilag, to flee. Yagillag, to draw aside; to avoid. Paffigilagan mo ang mafi-ga tduorng walang pinagaralan (avoid men without education [breeding]). 180 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To be scornful. To keep holidays. To become numb (as the arm or leg fromt inaction); to ' gro to sleep.'' To tremble (much with cold or fear). To feel a tingling p~ain in the teeth. To shake (as from the ague). To precede (as in roomi or street); to commnence; to start or lbegin. To lose in trade, business, or barter. To talk. Par~qilap. Seiple thinks may be from sillap, "idea of a wordy quarrel," and pan. PawThilin (from r7{jiling, "idea of observing holidays [fiestas], etc.," and Pon). Seiple obserNves that the final g of the root has been dropped, but this may be accidental. Palf7girni (from 77gimni). Syn. pa~Thalo. Pa~jinig (fromi kioig, really kiogyig). Kvininig, to tremble with cold or fear. MVagkin'ig, to tremble much thus. Mak-inig, to be trembling thus [state]. Masi7ginig, indef. of pauiqinig. 3fakapari~qinig, to cause to tremble with cold or fear. I`a75Tiijg~,i16 (from pa7T~lil6, itself from si7;i16, a tingling pain in the teeth. PaiTgiki (from- iT~iiki). Ak6'y nangiis7qiki (I amn shaking). Pah-gjuna (from unra, "first," and pan). IPai-Tfulugi (from i7qjulugi, a loss in business, and pan). J'ao~gostap (froiniit'sazpand pan). Ex.: Hlindi ka nmakapanyn(I~sap? (Can't you talk?) (See 'Lisap, already partly explained). DIMINUTIVES IN "U. Uin verbs are made diminutive by the repetition of the root if bisyllabic, or the first two syllables if longer. Ex.: To run. Tumaleb6. Tumakbo-takb6j, to ramible; to run a little. To rain. Ulnln nilaan-uloio, to (Irizzle. In ordinary composition the hyphens are generally omitted. THE VERBALIZING PARTICLE "MA G." The particle mnag is used to verbalize roots, as a general rule, either when a definite object is held in view or else when the verb does not require an object to express intensity (somnetimes plurality) -with roots which are verbalized in the simpllest sense withurn. Maybhas also areciprocal (mutual) idea, an. (htan) being -usually suffixed. Mugi~, wNhich is alw-ays a prefix, changes to nag in the present and past tenses. The first syllable of the root is redluplicated for the present and futuire tenses. Maka and naka, which are used to inmlicate the second future perfect and pluperfect, respectively, retain pag, the (lefinite of vlag, with the root, as they are also independent iparticles when used alone. in this respect, and also in the retention of the particle in front of the reduplicated initial syllable of the root. in the future tense, all particles differ from urn. (See the table for conjugation of snag roots.) I. M1ag, prefixed to roots which admit vrn and which do not change the meaning with mnag, signifies plurality either of persons or acts, this being the general meaning imparted by this lparticle. Mag (nag) sometimes throws the accent upon the last syllable of a root. Lx.: TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 181 To guard; watch for. To sit down. Tainanod. Magtanod, to guard much or by many. Ang tanoran', what guardled. Any pagtalnoran, what guarded much or by many. Ang itanod, the cause of guarding Any ipagtanod, the cause of guarding mnuch or by many; also the person for whom guarded, if there be a, person concerned. Umvpol. Magup', tositdown (miany). Among other verbs may be mentioned magb~as6, to read much or by many (burnasa); maykain, to eat much, etc. (k-uinain); rnaggiik, to thresh (gurniik); muygimnni, to drink mnuch, etc. (urninurn); magiakad, to walk much, etc. (iu),idkad); magsla, to write much or by many (smnrntlat); rnagtakb6, to run much or by many (tumakb6); rnagtanyiis, to weep much or by many (tui-nai~tyis), andl ffaytakn), to weep much (tumnuks6); all of which verbs bave been heretofore explained. 1I. Those roots which do not admiit urn as a verbalizing particle are not pluralized by mag, but simply verbalized in the primary sense. Besides others, all roots beginning with in fall in this class on account of cacophony (harshness) withurn. To grind (as grain).To enhance. To think with care. To see well (purposely). To inherit. To note; to experience. To start; to commence. AfagbayoJ. Any bayin, what ground. Any bayohari, the grinding place. Magyrnahal. Any miniamahal, the esteemed, etc., person. Ex.: A ny banal na, tuo ay niinarnahal (the just person is esteemed). Mamahal, to rise in value. Ex.: Nanmmahal any lak6 (the merchandise is rising in value). Map'pakamahal, to esteem highly. Ex.: Phiaypapakamiahtal ko sa kaniya' (I do esteem him highly). Also with?naka, alone. Ex.: Pinakamnamahal ko.sa kaniya'. Makimahal, to act like anoble person. Mapakimahal, to arrive at a state of being esteeinedl. Kamnahalan, dearness; nobility, etc. Magynahany. May-rnalas. To see well, casually, raakamalas. Maymana.. Any paymanahin, what inherited. Any magkamana, to leave property. Anygiparnana, the estate. Any parnana, the inheritance (verbal noun). Ex.: 1t6 any pan nas 'ki nany am a ko (This was my inheritance from my fathier). Any payrnanahan, the heir. Mi-akirnana, to ask for an inheritance. Mayrnasid. Any mapayrnasid, the person who notes or experiences. Magymuld'. Mulain mao NJ, commence this. Used only thus in imperative and past indicative. As " proceed " it is used in past and present. 182 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To recall to memory. To cheapen; insult; dishonor. Arg pinagmnl muldn, the point from which p)roceeding. Muld as prep. means "from; since." Malli))ul. Also means to open the eyes widely; and to look at well. Magfnlura. Maiura, to lower in value.,,lag itnahin, what cheapened, or who insulted, dishonored, etc. Magptaklatnralmura, to despise intensely. Mlagmurahan, to insult mutually. Ang ihokomanang pinagmlurahan nild, they insulted each other in the court room. There are comparatively few verbal roots beginning with m in the Tagalog. The foregoing are nearly all that are in common use. A few others are to be found, which will be noted later, used with other particles. III. Roots which change the meaning with '., and mag are pluralized in two ways with mag. If tile fical syllable of the root is accented norInally the first syllable of the root is a(ded extra in all tenses, but if the accent is not normally upon the last syllable of the root, plurality is expressed by changing the accent to the final syllable. It should also be noted that the meaning changes back. To buy. Bumili. 3Magbili, to sell. Nagbibili ak6, I am selling. Aqgbiibili akto, I aml buying much. This form is now rare, vran (q. v.) being generally used. Ex.: Narmimiili ako(t (I am buying much). To teach (as a doctrine). (Umcral. Magdral, to learn; to study. lMataral, to teach much; to preach. Now generally replacedt by man. Ex.:.Mangdr(dl, to preach. The reduplication of a bisyllabic root or the first two syllables of a polysyllabic root intensifies plurality with mag roots. This same construction with um roots indicates diminutives. Mag roots add an (han) to express diminutives or reciprocal verbal actions, which have to be distinguished by the context, meanirg, etc. Ex.: To think. To meditate. To follow; to obey. Maglsip. Magisipisip, to think deeply; profoundly. Miagnilay. Magnilaynilay, to meditate profoundly. Maynilay na tduo, a considerate person. Mlanilay, also means to fish. Paninilayan, a fishing canoe. Sumunod. lMagsunodsunod, to follow in rapid sequence (many). IV (a). Roots which may admit the idea of more or less take an additional repetition of the first syllable to signify intent or plurality. If the entire root be repeated the plurality is intensified. Roots of three or more syllables repeat only the two first, according to the general rule in Tagalog. Ex.: Nagsusumpd ak6 sa kapidbdhay ko (I have cursed my neighbor many times). Nagsusumpasumpdc ak6 sa kapidbahay ko (I have cursed [slandered] my neighbor times without number). (b) Mag and the doubled root in certain cases signify the performance of an act and its opposite. Verbs expressing an unsteady motion or quick change of position are also formed in a similar manner. (c) In the present TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 183 tense nag mnay be dropped, lbeing replaced by the reduiplicated initial syllable of the prim-iitive root. Some urn verbslhave this fortiiialso. Ex. (b): To pass. To go or comne out. Tfo turn over. To stagger; to reel. To shift about; to change continually; to turn over continually. To wander about aimlessly. (urn). To stagger. To tiptoe about; to walk on tiptoes. To bend over. To move (c). To walk with the head on one side (C). Duinaan. M1ayduan, to p)ass many timies orbyimany. 3JUJ1(Wfladaan~f, to pass and repass many times. Daanin, a made roadl. Df rmadaanan, impassible. Mak-aran, to be able to pass. Afagparaan, to allow to pass Ex.: Paraanin mio ak6' (let me pass). IHindi ko pararaanin hangan (It' vo ak-6 bibigyan nmang kauniinq tibig (I will not let you pass until you give mine a little water). Daan also mneans "hundred. Lonaba's. agbsto take out. M1aglabaslab6s, to go out or coine in (many times). Magbaligtad. Magbatlibal'igtad, to turn over. Ex. (c): Babalibaligtad ang mnay sakit sa hdihi g~n, (the sick man is turning over and over in 1)ed). Mragbalingbafling. Babalingballing yaong taiuo, that man yonder is reeling. Magpopagbalingbil'ing, to be staggering from walking, etc. Ex.: Pinapagbabalingbaflinginto ak6 nang paghintap sa iyo6 (I am ready to fall from looking for you. Syn. Magpalingpalding. Magbilingbil'ing. Ex.: BibilingbiliTg nmandin siya' (he is shifting about). Bibil'ingbiling ang l05ob ko (I have my doubts). Bibilingbiling ang may sakit sa hi hi gan (the sick man is twisting and turning in bed). Sumnuinmgsilling. Susuling~~ting siyal (he is wandering about aimlessly). Magsuraysil'atay, Susurays~ray siya6? (Is he staggering?) Op6l, ang lasinmg ay susuraysuray kung litmakad (yes sir, a drunken man staggers when he walks). Tumviad. Magtiadtiad, to tiptoe about much. Thtiadtiad ak6' (I am. walking about on my tiptoes). U~mi~kod. Magt~od, to bend over much. Matflcod, to be bent over. Magukodu'kod, to walk bent over or waveringly. Uukodt '1kod siyJi (he walks bent over). UTukodd'kod yaoitg viatandd (that old person walks haltingly). Kurn i b6. Magkibokib66, to move much. Magkilingkiling. lyang batcl'y kikilinqkiling kung lrnidkad (That child holds the head on one side when walking). 184 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To wabble (c). Kuminday. Magkindaykinday, to wabble mutch. Syn. Jfagkindingkindirng. V. Mag is also used to express personal actions which may be dual or plural in chbaracter, reciprocity or mututalitybeing imipliedl. If the plurality is to be intensified, the root is repeated, suibject to the general rule for polysyllabic roots. Ex.: To quarrel; to fight. To assemble (purposely.) To assemble; to meet (purposely). Mlagba bag. Aug pagba bag, the act of quarreling. Atapayba bag, quarrelsome, person. Aug babagin, the person (luarreled wvith. Magpt'ilong. Ex.: Nagpuptilong aug )tiaifl/ waiginoo sa bayan (the "~principales" of the town are assembling). An6 (tinq piuagpulor7fjan kanila? (Why have they met?) Aiig ipinagpi'loiig nil6'y nan-g pagsapn ang pagdaiting nang gobernador-ge'neral (The purpose of their meeting was to talk over the coming), of the governorgeneral). Muigtipon. Thmipoti, to join (one). MIagkatipon, to meet or assemble by chance (as a street crowd). Ex.: Nagkatipon aug mai~,f4a tauo sa 1Jtohay k-o (Somepeople have happened to meet in my house). Auig katipunan, the assenmbly. Also the popular name of the well-known revolutionary society, the K. K. K. Ex.: Aug pinagkakatipunan rainig mar7'IJyviwarur-inong (The meetingplace of the learned people-i. e., of learned societies, etc). Jfouag kang sumarna't hind?" nababagay sa isarig dalagang purnaroon sa pina! — kakatipunan naug maraning laaki (Do not accompany [himi, her, or them] because it is not proper for a girl to go where therc is a meeting of many men). Other verbs of this nature, all of which have been mentioned before, are maghiwalay, to separate mutually; ma gpisan, to associate; magkita, to see each other; mnagsama, to accompany each other; magtalo, to argue; and?nagatsap, to converse; to litigate. VI1. The distinction between plurality, intensity, etc., and mutuality, reciprocity, etc., is somnetimes made by a change of accent. Ex.: To approach (one). Luniaipit. Maglalpit, to draw near. Afaglapit, to approach mutually. Malaipit, near. fablapit siyd sa, akin (He is a relative of mine). To look at. Kunmibl. Magkitol, to look at each other. Magkitdl, to look at many things; or to look at intently. VII. Mag verbalizes reciprocal actions of a nature admitting competition or rivalry, provided that no special emphasis is placed upon the contention. Ex.: TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 185 To become reconciled (two). Magball (also to speak in a friendly way). M1agpabati, to become recon(lied (many). Tostir, mnixingatsametime; toshake. Jhionalb. A-ng haloinl, what shaken; stirred. M1aghalU, to mix two (or mnore) things together. Anygihalb, whatmixed. Ang haloan, the mixing place, etc. Any hinaM6, what shaken (past). Ang ihinalo', what mixedl (past). VIII. Voluntary reciprocal actions of certain classes are also conjugated with. mug prefixed to the root and an (hian) (nan) suffixed. Ex.: To mock; jeer at. 3fagbWr. Magbiroan, to mock each other. Mafkpaybiroan, to mock greatly; tojeeratanotherviciously. Birobir6, miapaybiro', pualabir6, all stand for degrees of being a jester, e tc. Muaypatabir', to jest with a good deal. T~tuong NMr6, an inconsiderate person. To suffer; to endure. Dunialitd. May(idalitawn, to suff er for each other, or mutually. Mfaypakadalidalita', to suff er intensely. Muapaydalifld, sufferer. Kadalitaan, suffering. DIf madalitd, intolerable; insufferable. To kick. Surniikud. Afaysikad, to kick much. Afaysikuran, to kick each other. Manikad, to kick habitually. Also muygsumik-ad, to work with rapidity. Synonyms for kicking: Tumadyak-, nmaytadyak, maytadyakan, tumindak, maytindak,?nagtindakan. To curse. Snmumpd. Any sumpain, who or what cursed. Any isumpad, the reason or cause of cursing. Maysonipd,, to curse much; also many at sam-e time. Any paysumpain, who or what cursed thus. Any ipaysunmpd, the cause or reason for cursing thus. Jfaystonpaan, to curse each other.. Manunipd, to curse habitually; also to take an oath. Anygpalasumpd, the habitual curser; also the witness. Any panunumpal, habitual cursing, or the oath taken. A ny panurnpaan, the person administering the oath; also the place. Any ipanumpa', the testimony given; also what sworn habitually. To help; to aid (another). Tunnvilony. Afaytulony, to help another much. Maytulo7Tgan, to help each other. Mfantilony, to help another often. ManulornTyan; maypanuloifyan, to help each other much or often. Any kat~'ng, the aid; assistant; helper. 186 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To use insulting or inde-enitlanguiage; ifagtucgayao. MaightusTayauan, to to say such words. abuse each other thus. Manurfi-y ayao, to abuse or insult thus continually or habitually. ]lapagtwoiyaya(o, abuser; insulter. Amiong other verbs of this (lescriptioll may be cited mayk-agatan, to bite each other; magibigan, to like each other; viagfpuloan, to cnulgel each other; rnagsintahan, to love each other; laiwgsunloraoi, t~o follow each other; and mnagtautanan, to laugh at each other. All of these have been mentioned before. IX. In the use of 2nag to verbalize actions admitting reciprocity, care is necessary in noting their nature and the intent and purpose for which the actions may be executedl, as there are local differences in this respect. Reciprocal verbs require an object which returns the action. (A) Thus, wnag prefixed and ant snffixed with a root which admits competition expresses rivalry. (B) If the action requires an object and rivalry is to be expressed, th~e suffix (in should be repeated. To jump. Lutiiol.s,. 3l1agloks6i, to jumip m-uch orblyimany. Jfagloksohan, to jump in conmpetition. (This verb has altready been explained.) To look. TarniiiT7fio. iM~tgt'i~Tyii, to look at much or by mnany. AMagtbimginao), to look at each other. (Heretofore explained.) To push; to shove off (as a boat). Tamndlak. Aliaghtlak-, to Ipush bard or by many. la gtaiakao, to push.against each other. Jla gtuiakanav, to push in rivalry or competition. X. Mfag andl the reduplicated root formn intensive reciprocal verbs which can only be distinguished from diminutives, verbs of feigning, mockery, imitation, etc., by the context. As usual, polysyllabic roots repeat the first two syllables only. Ex.: To embrace. Ymamdkap. Magydkap, to embrace each othcr; to tie up to a post. Ma gyakapyaca'pav, to cm-brace each other warmly; also means ''to embrace a little, to pretend to embrace, to imitate embracing," etc. Other verbs already cited are rnagabutabutaom, to reach many things; to pass many things from hand to hand, etc.; miaghatidhatiran, to send to each other, etc., and rnagtirrgintimiginan, to look at each other closely; to pretend to look, etc. XI. NVga may also be infixed with niag, forming rnia/i-ag, the particle thus made imparting the idea of great plurality when prefixed to a root. Ex.: To converse. Maging~sap. M1aiT!1fagid'sap, to converse (as a great crowd). XII. Roots with mayl may be used both with and without an object, the meaning varying more or less in such cases. Ex.: To divide into equal Jparts. Buiiiaha'yi. Ma1(glhalagi kayo)! Disperse! Magbahdgi kayo' nifong salapi' (divide this money). XIII. Movement caused by an outside agency is expressed by r-oag. As will be remembered,7 self-movement is exlpressed by 'am (P~ar. XI, urn). Il1umafigo, to pull out, take out, etc., is an exception to the rule. Ex.: TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 187 To fell trees; to blow trees down (as the wind). To part from- another; to go to a (istance. To rise (voluntarily, as a bird). Ifaybuai. Angbualin, the tree felled..1fi!/ iflLta, the person felling, or wind. Anybitalanthe place. Am; p)amual, the instrumnent, i. e., ax. Luiiiay4. Lumayo6, to remain left far away (by anothier). Mayigayo', to part (two); also to remove any'thing to a distance. Ma1drP16, distant; far. Turndas. Magytdas, to raise; to lift ul). M1atuas,q high; tall; noted. Kalwtsan, height. Kataastaasan, extreme height. Among other verbs of like nature, which heave already been explained, are mtagalis, to take away; viaybipit, to draw something near; miagpanaloy, to take or let anything down stairs or a ladder; viagpmdluk, to take anything upstairs or up a ladder, etc.; vuigsilid, to put anything in or into; maqtayo', to set, up; and nmagtiodig, to stand anything up)right. XIV. Bodily voluntary actions affecting one's self only, or those permnitted to be (lone, are expressed with m~ay. Those actions of like nature performed upon another take urn (Par. XII, Jmu). Ex.: To whip one's self (as in penance). Mayhampdls. JHurnarnj)otsi to whip another. Maypalhapq('s, t~o allow one'7s self to be whipped, etc. Pahampas, to consent to lbe whipped. Ex.: Jiouay A vrnypahampas sa sumomon (don' t let anyone whip you). Other verbs following this rule are fully explained in Par. XII under XV. As has been noted miay expresses for the indefinite the idea of losing control, as utrn expresses the idea of acquiring the same. What is l ost control of is expressed in the definite with i, com-bined with in for the past and other tenses where necessary. For the aid of the memory it may be saidl that verbs of throwing away, throwing at, etc., sowing, scattering, pouring out, mixing, placing, putting, giving, and selling follow this rule. Ex.: To throw away. To throw or dash down. To throw at (as with a rock). To throw at; to pelt. To throw up (much). To scatter rice seed. To scatter in the air; to emit. To scatter seed. Magytapon. (Already explained.) Mlaght'log. (Already explained.) 3fagpukol. Anygpuklin, what thrown at, or stoned. Any ipukol, what thrown. Miaghagis. Ex.: Nayhayis ako6 nany batb (I threw a stone). M11aysukad. Sumuka, to throw up. Mayhtasik. Manhasik, to sow much rice thus or by many working together. Maysainb'dlat. Any isambtiat, what scattered, as grain, etc. Sumanmbinlat, to scatter, disperse, as a crowd of its own volition. Ma4 -namibtdat, to scatter much, either by inside or outside agency. Mfaysaibog. (Already explained.) Syn., maywallat. Mlagkalat,already set forth; means to spread, propagate. Miagpunldl. Miaytanim, to plant, to set out (already explained). To transplant. 188 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To scatter. To break up; scatter (as parts of a house torn down). To pour out. To pour out; Shake out (not liquids). To saturate with water. To mix. To stew; to boil meal, etc. To put wood on the fire. To place. To put in the sun. To place in layers, etc. To give. To present with; to make a gift. To grant; to give. To give; primarily, to hand to another by reaching out t~he arm. To sell. To sell goods. To trade on a small scale; to sell at retail1. To sell at cost. Magbulagsak. (Already explained.) 3fagwasak. Mlagbob6'. Aug bobadn, what poured into. Aung ibobo', what pouredl out. Syn., ma~gbuhos (already explained)..Maghoho'. Ang ihoho', what poulredl or shaken out, as graiu, etc. Mafbisakh, var. magbaysak. Afaighaib'. (Already explained.) Syns., mogsahog; ronaglaihok. Lutmnahok, to join. Afagligao. Ang ill'gao, the material. Aug limoigao, the mush; stew. Aug 1'ugauaiu, the stewlpan, etc. Afaggd'tioog, also to stir uip the fire. Moigpaogutong, to ask that the fire be sti rred up. Ma gi gItong, to ask for a few coals to start a fire. Arig igaitong, the poker, etc. Aug gatoi77jin, what burned. Aug gatoi~an, the place. ilfglagay. (Already explained.) Moagbilad. (Already expldined.) 3algpatong. (Alrea~dyexplained.) Magbi gay. (Already explained).) Maglbiyaya. (Already explained.) Mlagkalo'ob. Ang ipagkaiOob, the grant. JMaggaiuad. (Jumaluad, to st retch out the arm in ordler to reach soinething. Ang gauarin, what.reached. A ig igaluad, what given or handed over. Ang iginauad, what, was or has been given, etc..2lagbilit. (Already explained.) Magiako'. Maglako6, to peddle from towNn to town. -Ang ilak6, what sold. Aug ilako6, what peddled from place to place. Aflagutay. (Already explained.) Mfagcirnot. Ang 4'pagamot, what sold at cost. Verbs of " permitting, sending, restoring, " etc., also follow the nuog andi conjugation. Ex.: To permit. Magtmitloi. A ng itilot, what permitted. To send; to rem-it. Magltatid. (Already explained.) To restore..Magsaoli'. (Already explained.) XVI. Being of like nature, verbs of "speaking, relating, telling," etc., are conjugated by mag in the indefinite and i in the definite. A few, however, have urn with i for the object. Ex.: To tell; narrate; report. Magsalitd. (Definites, already explained.) To report; to announce; to tell the Mlagbalita'. AIng ipinagbalikl, the news. news announced or reported; also the cause or means (past tense). TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 189 Jotlg poiagboilitaao, the person to whom told, etc. (past tense). Makinmalito, to ask for news. To converse (two). Ma gsabi. To talk (one), suW)afi. To talk much, viagsabli. (This verb has already been explained.) To converse (two or more). Ma fl4 sap. (Already explained.) Mlm77jausap, to talk. Ex.: Makapan usa ka (Can von talk?) Jlindi k-a. makapai-igfrIsap.? (Can't you talk?) To speak; pronounce. Magwik~l. Hlindi k() mawvik&l (I can not pronounce it). To explain. Magsaioysay. (Already explained.) Another word is?naqsa? /say, which with?Ofle has also the meaning of to arrange, as the hair of another, and with nuig to arrange something for one's self, as the hair, etc. Ex. with ma.: Hindi ko mPasay~sai (I can not exlplaifl it). To speak in a low tone; also to mut- la gb-along. Ex.: lay ibubulong ako6 ter; grumble; talk about another sa iy6' (I have samething for your in albsence, etc. ear only). To ask; to inquire. Tumanongl. Ma glanong, to ask about, or concerning. Anyg tanoTin, the person questioned. Ex.: A8ino arng tinanong mof (WVhorn did you ask, or of whom did you inquire?) Ang itanong, what asked. Ano ang Vinianong Tno (what did you inquire). To speak gently. fa ga n 6s. Ex.: fanas mo (tell it gentl y). To tattle. fa~gs~umbong. Mifapagsumbong, tattler. To say something; accuse, denounce, M ag qb iIa'c. Ang ibald, what said. notify. 3Afabala k-a (say something). Bau)abahn vio ang manffg t 0ont (not~ify the people of this). It should be noted that the definite here takes an extra ba. To forbid. Jfagbaiual. Ang ibaiual, what forbidden. Ang baualan, the person to whom something may be forbidden. Ang pagbabdual, the act of forbidding (present tense). Bn~io7ng bdmual, forbidden fruit. XVII. Mag prefixed to roots signifying nations, races, conditions, etc., means to behave to some degree as the root signifies, but if a complete assimilation is to be implied, the particle viaki (paki) is used. Lx.: To be somewhat Americanized. M3agamericano. Lx.: Nagaamericano siyda naimg damit (he [she] is quite Americanized in dress). To be quite Hispanicized; to be like Afagcastila. Nagcacastila sild nang a Spaniard in some ways. oisal (they are quite Spanish in Custom). XVIII. (a) Mag, with natural objects, signifies to produce them; (b) with artificial objects, to make them; (c) with articles of barter, to trade 190 190 ~~TAGALOG LANGUAGE. or sell them; (d) with edible things, etc., to eat them; (e) with property, to possesss it; (*f) with natnes of relatives, to know how to act toward them; and (g) with the possessive pronouns, to have: E x. (a): To put forth leaves (as a tree, etc.) Ex. (l) To build a house. To make soap. Ex. (c): To sell or trade rice. To sell or trade unhulled rice. Ex. (d): To sell or eat pickled fish. To eat fruit or to sell it. To eat or sell fish. To eat or sell eggs. To eat bananas or to sellI them. To drink chocolate. To use tobacco. Ex. (e): To have property. To have anything of one's own. Ex. (f): To know how to treat a father. To know how to treat a child, i. e., how to be a good parent. MTagdahon. Also means to put the food on leaves, as when out of doors. Ang tagap~agdahorn, the cook. Aing dahonan, the eating place thus. Mfagbaihay. (Already explained.) M1agsabo'n. (Already explained). _llagbigais. (Already explained.) Afagpailay. Ex.: Magpailay k-a nang pulot (trade palay for some honey). Magbagoon. M.Tigh'noTja. Ex.: Nagbuburi~ga siya' (she is selling fruit). Mfagisala. Ex.: Aagiisda sila' (they are selling fish). Umisdd, to have fish once more in a river or creek, etc. Ungmiisdd iiqay( n sa Rlog (there are fish now in the river). Magitlog. Ex.: Nagiitlog si?ya (she is selling eggs). Afagsd~ging. (Already explained). Magsiculate (from Mex.-Sp., chocolate; from Nahua ( Atec), chocolall, choco, cacao; and la/i, water). Miagtabaco (from Sp. and originally a West Indian word). Aiagari'. M3aari, landowner. AriaTnan, small farm; also household furniture. Hlagsarili. 3fagamai. Ex.: &i Joan ay maalarn magainai (Juan knows how to treat a father [i. e., how to be a good son]). M1ayamndalso means father and child. itkyanak. Ex.: Si Juant ay marunong maganak (Juan knows how to treat a child [i. e., how to be a good parent]). Also child and parent. Ex. (g): To have as yours. Magiy6. To have as theirs. Maykanila'. To have as mine. Magalcin. XIX. Words signifying articles of wearing apparel may be verbalized with may to express the wearing of the same. Ex.: Mirror; (2) spectacles; glasses. Salarinin. Magsala~min, to look in the mirror; (2) to wearglasses or spectacles. Any 8alarninan, what seen in the mirror. Trousers. ASalawal. Magsalawal, to wear trousers. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 191 Hat. Sambalilo (from Span. sombrero). Ma ysambalilo, to wear a hat (occasionall y). Manamibalilo, to wear a hat habitually. Shoe, sandal. Sapai. M1aysaphi, to wear shoes; also to line. Apron. Tapis. 3iiagtapis, to put on or wear an apron. XX. Mag generally governs all Spanish, English, and other foreign words not incorporated into the language. Ex.: To play baseball. Mfagbesbol. Ex.: Nagbebesbol avq ma —ga' bat(,l (the boys [childrenij are playing baseball.) To gamble. Maglmugal (from Span. yigar). Sugat is the usual term. Lar6' is the native word and means, like the Spanish, either to play ortogarnble. XXI. Roots denoting officials may take mag to express the discharge of duties pertaining to the office named. Ex.: To be governor. Maggoberoador. To be mnayor (presidente). Magpresidente. To be a councilman. Jlagconsejal. To be secretary. Magsecretario. To be treasurer. Ma~qtesorero. To be prosecuting attorney. M1agfiscal. XXII. May, prefixed to abstracts beginning with -ka andl ending in ane, signifies to dlo what is expressed by the abstract. Such words are used only in the infinitive, and should be clearly distinguishedl from those roots prefixed by the particle magka, which lack the suffixed an with the indefinite infinitive. Ex.: To do deeds of virtue or justice. To do right. To act chastely or in a cleanly manner. To behave obscenelv. Magbanalan (from kabanalan, virtue, justice). Magkatuiran (from katuaran, right, justice). Ex.: Hatolan mo silainang katuiran (Advise them what is right). Magkalinisan (from kalintsan, cleanilines-s). Mfagkahalayan (from kahalayan, obscenity). XXIII. With adjectives formed by prefixing ma to the root, may signifies to assume or boast of what is expressed by the adjective, if the meaning permits such assumption or boasting. In some cases mag means to regard as signified by the adjective. Ex.: To boast of good judgment. To boast of knowledge. To boast of beauty. M-agmabait. Lx.: Nagmamnabait si Juan (Juan boasts of his good judgment [or prudence]). Mabait, judicious, prudent. Magmarminong. Lx.: Nagmamariinong si Andre's (Andres boasts of his knowledge). Marminong, wise, learned (from dtinong). Karuno-?Tgan, wisdom, knowledge. Magmarikit. Ex.: Nagmamarikit si BiangofI (Maria boasts of her beauty). Mtari kit, pretty (from dikit). Dumikit, to grow pretty. Maydik-it, to beautify. 192 192 ~~TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To boast of elegance, b)eauty. To boast of bravery; to swagg er. Maymayandi.- Lx.: Nayrnarnayandd si' Loleny, JDolores (Lola) boasts of her elegance; beauty. MayandiJ, elegant, beautiful. Kagandaoha, elegance, lbeauty. MagiyiUiaMpaayj. E x.: Naymta t (p an g sRi Fautstiio (Faustino boasted of his brav-ery; or Faustino swaggered). Mataipany, brave. Katap(ogJ((l, lbraverv. XXIV. If an action (loes not admit of boasting, may used with a ma adjective denotes becoming, growing, etc., what may be signified by the adjective. The definite particle in is generally suffixed to the roots in these cases. Ex.: To become forgetful. MAlaymalimofin. Luininot, to try to forget. JMakalimot, to forget. Maliviot, forgetful. Any nalinotan, what forgotten. Maliliimotin, aforgetful person. Kalimotan, forgetfulness. To grow infirm. Magmiasaktin. Ex.: Naginaiasaktin siy6 (lie isgrowing infirm). AMay soait, to be ill. Aiasasaktin, an infirm, sickly person. Smna~kit, to feel pain anywhere. Any salitan, thieseatof pain. (See Par. XXVI). XXV. Verbs with may are made diminutives by repeating a bisyllabic root or the first two of a longer one, and suffixing anr, han, or nan, as required. Ex.: To write, a little; to scribble. MlaysilatmuAtan (from sdlat.). (Al To cry a little; to snivel. readly used). M1ayiyaliyak-an (from iyak). Ex.: Naqi'yakiyakan iyany bitany iyJn that child is sniveling. To nibble. Mfayka'ink-aiaan. (Already used.) XXVI. The same form as the above also signifies feigning, imitation, mockery, playing at, etc. Both these and those mentioned in, Par. XXV can only be distinguishied by the context from intensive reciprocal verbs formed in the same way. (See Par. X). To affect virtue, i. e., to play the hypocrite. To play at building houses (as children). To play at biting (as (logs). To malinger; feign illness. To tempt a little or to pretend to tempt. To sham insanity. To feign deafness. Mayifbanalbanalan (from banal). Ex.: Nababanalbanalan siya (lieis a hypocrite). Mutybahaybalhayan (from bihay). (Already used.) Mayk-ayatk-ayatanu (froyn kayat). (Alrea(lyV used.) M3aygsakitsa4kdan. (from sak-it). Ex.: N aysasak-its/aktan -a- (you are malingering). 3Maqiuksotak-sohan (from tuk-st). (U~sed before.) Mayeidubdlnln (fromini'tu). Umindlul, tod(Iv e another crazy. Mfaldlul, to become insane. Anyq ikaitdl, the cause of insanity. Kauluian, insanity. Mfaybinyibinyihan (from bifi-gl). Ex.: Houay kany mn;ybiicyibiTj'ihan (Don't try to sham (leafness). TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 193 XXVII. Some urn verbs admit prefixed mayg, the combination denoting the action t~o be executed with earnestness, endeavor, enterprise, etc. (b) Some roots with miaka also take the prefix miay, with the Samle signification. The infinitive form of the root with vrn or maka is always retained. Ex. (a): To make haste. Mlayduioiali (from duitall, to do quickly). Madali, quickly. Maymnadaht, to do something quickly. (Idiom.) Magdumaling drao, a short while. To force, oblige, compel. Alagpdtit. In Manila, purnitlit. May'o~lit, to en(Ieavor. To exert one's self; to work effi- Moyasaikit. Sirnalkit, to oblige another ciently. to work; to use force toward another. Magsumalkit, to exert greatly for the carrying out of an object. Ex.: Any tauony nagsusum'kit mat utu navy 7nabubilting kaa~salan, (ly igagalarig nany lahait (the man who exerts himself greatly to learn good mnanners, will be respected by everyone). (SotJrdkit regarded as a new root.) To follow closely, etc. Magysuinrtnod. (Already explained.) To be able to move to compassion. (b) M3agymakaau4a. (Already used.) See aud. To be able to shamne greatly. (1) M1agrnakah-iyd' (from?nakahild, to make ashamed). Ex.: Badki mo ip'inagmamakahiyd, any marfydgainiflitlang? (What is the reason you cause so much shame to your lparents?) al~aang h'iiyd, without shame, shameless. (See Par. VI, under ma.) To be able to placate another; to Magrnakaamoam'rn (from amo', idea of supplicate. (b) placating). Lx.: Nayna'makaavooarn6 any tauong it6' sa ipy6' (This inan issupplicating you). Amio is generally reduplicated, and it will be seen that mnakaavioarni is regarded as a new root., the ma of maka being reduplicated for the present tense. XXVIII. M~ayalso forms nouns indicating plurality, totalitv, and agency, which have been used many times heretofore. The article is usually prefixed to the compound word. May is the antit~hesis (or opposite in meaning) of ka, which limits the idea to unity. XXIX. May prefixed to noun roots which are generally used with the dual sense denotes such duality without the use of maii7ga' or other particles, which rather indicate plurality. Ex.: The married couple, the husband andl wi fe. The brothers-in-law (two). The two enemies. The parents; ancestors. Any magasdua. Mlagasdua, to marry. (See also Par. XV, under mnan.) Any mnaybayd'o. Any mayadway. Mayadway, to quarrel with each other. Any mnaydlany, from ygi'lany. KayulaTyan, ancestry, descent. Gumtilany, to grow old. 6855-05-13 194 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. The two sisters-in-law. Ang maghipag. The betrothed couple; the sweet- Ang magibigan. Magibigan, to like hearts. each other. (See next paragraph.) XXX. A root capable of expressing plurality is strictly limited to the dual sense by the insertion of ka between mag and the root. Ex.: The two friends. Ang magkaibigan. The two companions. Ang magkasama. XXXI. If plurality is to be indicated with words sometimes used in the dual sense, ka is reduplicated. Ex.: The friends (several). Ang magkakaibigan. The companions (several). Ang magkakasama. XXXII. Correlative nouns are expressed with mag prefixed to the root of the principal word. (See also Par. XVIII.) Ex.: Father and child. Magama. Mother and child. Magina. Father (or mother) -in-law and son MA gbiandn. (or daughter) -in-law. Master and man. Magpa7nginoon. XXXIII. If the second correlative is expressed, especially by a proper noun, jointly with the first, the particle is prefixed to the principal, the subordinate taking the genitive case. Ex.: John and his father. Magam( ni faen. Jose and his father-in-law. AfagbianniS ni,fose. Lola and her mother. Magin(i ni Loleng. XXXIV. Mag denotes totality with some roots of time. Ex.: The whole night; al! night. Magdamag. Ex.: Mafadamag akong natilog (I slept all night). Gabi is the usual word for night. The whole (lay; all day. Maghaepon. ltipon alone means the time from noon until dark. XXXV. Mag prefixed to roots conjugated with um and mag forms verbal nouns signifying the agent. The first syllable of the root is reduplicated and the article generally used. Ex.: The thief. Ang magnanckao. (Already used.) The laborer. Ang magsasaka. Mkcgsaka, to work in the fields. XXXVI. Mag retains pag with the definite in certain cases, but with these exceptions, which have been pointed out from time to time, the definite of -mag roots follows the same rule as the definite of um. (See Par. II, under pag. ) THE DEFINITE PARTICLE "PAG." I. As true auxiliary verbs are not found in Tagalog, the participle assumes as many forms as there are tenses, the imperative excepted. By prefixing the article of common nouns, ang, "the," or a demonstrative pronoun to the proper tense of a verb a particle is formed which may be translated in several ways, even by a clause in English. Pag and pagka are commonly used in Tagalog where the idea would be expressed in English by the indefinite particle, but the best way to obtain a clear understanding of the variations to which Tagalog verbal nouns may be subjected is to make a close study of the examples following or referred to. Ex.: To die. Mamatay. Angpagkamatay, the act of dying. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 195 To fall. Mahdilog. Ang pagkahulog, the act of falling. To eat. Kumain. Ang pagkain, the act of eating. II. Pag (definite) corresponds to mag (definite) in certain cases. As a rule verbs with mag have the same definites as um, except as noted. When pag is prefixed, in is inserted for the present and past tenses, forming pinag. Pag only is prefixed for the imperative and future tenses, in being suffixed at the same time. The first syllable of the root is reduplicated for the present and future tenses. (See the tables.) III. Pag sometimes expresses place in combination with suffixed an, where an alone is used to express the person who mav be the object of the action. (See hanapan and paghanrapan, Par. V, the definite.) (b) This rule also applies where the object takes an instead of in. To collect; to dun. Sumir;ljil. Ang sirTjilan, the unpaid debt. AngpagsirnTilan, the place of asking for a debt. ManiiTgil, to collect or dun as an occupation or habitually. IV. The particle pag is also used with the definite when place is directly expressed in the sentence, but not when implied or metaphorically (figuratively). This use of pag, however, is only with those verbal roots which admit an for the person or object of the action of the verb, and with other verbal roots pay is not used in this sense, even if place be expressed. Ex.: To bury; inter. Magbaon. Angpagbaonan, the burial place. Ex.: It6 angpinagbaonan nang sundalo (This was the burial place of the soldier). To endure hardships. Maghirap. Angpaghirapan, thehardships. Ex.: Ang bayang pinaghirapan nildt (The town in which they endured the hardships). To place. Maglagay. Ex.: Lagydn mo nang tubig itong banTyd (Put some water in this vase). Tald akong paglalagyain nitong salamin (There will be no place for me to put this mirror). To embark or travel. Sumakay. Ang sakaydn or sasakydn, boat or vessel of any kind. Ex.: It6'y ang brangkang pinagsasakydn nang marami (This is the canoe in which many have embarked). (b) See also magpulong, "to assemble," and magtay6, "to elect, set up." V. Pag is also combined with i definite, forming ipag, ipinag, as a prefix, when the person for whom an act is performed is mentioned. (See Par. VIII, the definite.) VI. W henever the sentence expresses plurality of acts or agents, or of feigning or reciprocal actions, pag (and ipag when required) must be used with the definite. The article aug being generally used, gives the compound the idea of a verbal noun in the majority of cases. For examples see Par. IX under the definite. VII. Pag is retained with the definite of the mag form when roots which differ in meaning with urn and mag are used. See Par. X, the definite for examples. VIII. The participle is formed from um verbs or roots by prefixing pag to the root. the compound preceded by the article or its equivalent. The 196 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. first syllable of the root is reduplicated for mnag verbs or roots. See also under ma, pa, and pan for other forms of the participle. To teach. Uminral. Ang pagdral, the teaching. To study. Magdral. Ang pagadral, the studying. To descend; to fasten upon. Humitlog. Ang paghoilog, the descending; fastening upon. To throw or dash down. Maghlog. Ang paghuhallog, the dashing down or throwing down. IX. Pag sometimes indicates the present tense. Ex.: Pagsabi ko sa kaniyd (as soon as I told himn). X. There is occasionally a tone of menace in its use. Ex.: Paghindi siyd pumarito'y hindi ko siyd babayaran (if he does not come here, I shall not pay him). "If" is generally understood, the idea being a future condition. XI. Pag, with verbal roots of some kinds, indicates action as transpiring. Ex.: Light; clearness. Liwidnag. Angpagliwcdnag, thegrowing light (of the day, etc.). Ang liwadng nang drao, the light of day or of the sun. XII. For verbal changes, see tables: THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE " MA." I. The indefinite verbalizing particle ma is used with roots which do not require an object when verbalized, or with those verbs expressing involuntary action. Ma changes to na for the past and present tenses. The first syllable of the root is reduplicated for the present and future tenses. Ma generally expresses a state or condition of being, but there is also a possessive idea of "to have," and hence many roots are made adjectives when prefixed by this particle, as is already familiar to the reader. II. Such adjectives in ma must express intrinsic states or conditions, and states or conditions which may or can be attained by the voluntary effort of an agent can not be expressed with ma. III. Actions which require an object when conjugated with other particles may be conjugated with ma if they take place unconsciously or by chance on the part of the agent. IV. The conjugation of roots with ma (na) has naka and 7naka of the pluperfect and future perfect respectively replaced by na and ma. Na is also repeated after the verb in both these tenses. Some roots beginning with p soften it to m after ma. (See tables for examples.) V. yJga added to ma forms the particles nangri and mangd used to express plurality when prefixed to a verbal root. MaTgad, as has been seen, is the usual indication of plurality when used as a separate word before nouns, etc. Ex.: To be hungry. MAagutum. Ex.: Marami nga ang nanyagyitum (many were hungry). Marami nga n ang nagagugutum (many are hungry). MAarami nga ang marnlgagugutum (many will be hungry). The root is gutuon, the idea of being hungry. VI. Ma is used to express actions of an involuntary nature or beyond the control of the subject. A few anomalous words also take ma. Ex.: To fall. Mahtlog. Ang nahulogan, the person or object on whom anything TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 197 falls accidentally Naht~og siy1I, hie fell. Ang kahlulogan, the place of falling. Ang kahulog6n, the meaning (range of expression). Aug kinahulogan, thlep lace where something fell or has Ialen. Ang kinahuhulogan, tile place where something is falling. Angkahuhulogan., the place where something will fall. (See index for hi'dog with other particles.) To fall on the face. Madapd. (Already used.) To stumble. Matisod. Ex.: Natisodi siya't nadapd (he stumbled and fell onl his face). 8aan natisod siya"'? (Where did he stumble?) Jyang batong iydn ang kinatisuran niyd (that stone was where hie stumbled, or over which he stumbled. To slip; to slide (invol.) (adj.) slip- JMadulais; maruld's. Ex.: Palakarin pery; slimy. mo1 Siydng marahan, makd marula'8 I ~~~~~~~~~(tell him to go slowly lest he slip). To stick in the throat; to choke. Mahirin. Ex.: Nahirinan siyd nang tinik, (she [he] was choked by a fish bone). To lose one's way. Maligdmo. Ang kaligaoan, the place of being lost.. To go astray. Malihis. Lumihis, to be away purposely. Palihis daan, to go out of the road for any reason. To loose; to miss; to lack. Mawaid. Nawala'n ak6 nang laka's (I lost [or lacked] the strength). Nawalain siya' nang loob (he lost heart [or thle spirit]). Magwald, to get rid of; to flee; to put out of sight; to conceal anything. To die. Mamatay. Ang pagkamatay, the act of dying. Ang mamataydn, the mourner; the bereaved. (See Par. XII, in.) To be proper or appropriate. Miabalgay. (See index for examples.) This verb is rather anomalous. VII. (a) Uncontrollable states are generally conjugated wit~h ma. These forms are also adljectives in the majority of cases. (b) Acts which are more or less controllable take the particle most suitable to express the degree. If uncontrollable, ma is used. Ex.: To be angry. Magdmlit. (See index.) To be cold; chilly. Magindo. Also adj. Maginauin, a chilly, cold person. To be terrified. 3fagalangtang. Ang ikagalangtang, the cause of being terrified. To be afraid. Matdkot. Ex.: NXatatdkot ka? (Are j~ou afraid?) Matatakotin, a faintKearted person. (See index.) To be astonished. Ma gudlat. Ex.: Nagutlat siydf (Was, he astonished?) To be hungry. Mag~itum. Magugutumin, a very hungry or starved person. (See index.) 198 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To be ashamed. To be pleased. To be sad. To be gla(1; amused. To be asleel). To be thirsty. To cry; to weep (uncontrollably). To giggle; to laugh uncontrollably. Ma hi yd. Mahihiyin, a bashful person. (See Par. XV, ma.) For Ihiya with other particles, see index. Malagod. Litmngod, to please; to recreate. Kaluyoran, friend; companion in recreation. M1alambay. Ex.: Tila nalulunmbay kay6j, you seem to be sad. (See index.) A1atu(I. Any katuaan, the person or object over whomn or which one is pleased or amused. (See index.) Alatalog. Angluloyan, sleeping place. Mfatulogin, a great sleeper; also mapayta'loyl. Tamidog, to go to sleep; to sleep (little used). M1aytuloy, to sleep a great deal. (See index. ) Mauhtao. (Already used.) Malany-is; m-a nai-yis. (Already used.) Mataua. Ttimaaa, to laugh. Maytaua, to laugh (two or three). Mar,~7jaytaua, to laugh (many). MIaytaii6, to laugh much. Mlakataua or imagypataua, to cause to laugh. M1ahtauarin, a laughing, siniling person. VIII. Unconscious or uncontrollable states of the mind are expressed with ma. Conscious or controllable states are expressed with urn or muag. Ex.: To forget. To forget to do. Malimot. (Already used.) Malisan. Lurnisan, to omit to do (on purpose). IX. (a) Ma (na) is used to express accidental or internal acts of a destructive nature, or when reference is made to an actual state of destruction. IDeliberat~e acts of destruction take urn or mnay. To break up; to spiit up. Ma1 bali. Ex.: Nabali any tunykod (the cane broke). Nabalian siya' nang paa (he dislocated his foot). Mfagbali, to break up, to s1)lit, as wood, cane, etc. Ex.: Balii mno iyany tubo& t ak6' y balian nangy munti (break up that piece of sugar cane and break me off a little). To break up (from internal causes Mabitsay. Ex.: Naba'say any?raso or accidentally). (the glass was broken). Mfagbasay, to shatter; break up, as glass, crockery, etc. Nagbdsay siyd nang rimaramainy vaso (he broke many To spoi; to b come l utrid.glasses [purposely]). To soil;to bcomeputrd. MabalkI. Ex.: Balok- na any isdd (the fish is spoiled now). (See mnaypa. ) To break (mnt. or acc.). Malayot. Ex.: Malalayot itony sindtlid (this thread will break). NValayot any sin~iiid (the thread broke). Maglayot, to break, as thread; to tear up, as vegetables, etc. To lpart; to break in two. Mapatid. (Already used.) TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 199 To spoil; to be destroyed. Ma8iret. (Already usedl.) To burn up. Mals'inog. (Already explained.) To dry out. Matuyd'. (See index.) (b) N'a following the root with verbs of destruction gives the adjectival idea with " already " or " now. " Other actual states are also expressed with thle root and na if the contex clearly indicates an actual state of being. (See under badsag, buo'ok, sirti, pata!/, tapus, tuy6', aiid yari for examlples.) X. With verbs expressing situation of posture ma (na) indicates the actual state of lbeing in such posture or position, or else thle involuntary or unconscious taking of such lposition. Ex.: To be lying down; to be in bed. To be 'on thle knees; to kneel involuntarily. To be lying on the back. To be on one's feet. To be seatedl. 3fahiqdl. (Already used; see index.) Maluhio(. (Already used; see iiidex.) 31lttihaydl. (Already used; see index.) Matindig. (Already used; see index.) Maupd'. (Already used; see indlex. ) XI. Conditions or states reached by slow transition in most cases or a return thereto are expressed by mia (na). To be deaf. To be stuttering. To be insane; crazy. To lose the mind (lit., to become turbid). fa b ii77ij. Ex.: lNabibib7tii,siyi' he is deaf). (See under magin.) Magaril. Ex.: Nagagaril siyet (he is beginning to stutter again). Maggaril, to stutter; to stammer. Garilin, stuttering; stammering. Maijlul. Ex.: Naulul siqdia (he went crazy). Nauulul siya (he is crazy). Afauulul siya' (he will go crazy). Nagulubduldan siya' (he was shamming insanity). Malabo'. Also adj. turbid; muddy; bleared (eyes); thick (speech). Ex.: Nalaboan siya' nang pagiisip (his mind became clouded). XII. The use of mia is sometimes governed by reason of the rationality or irrationality of the agent. Ex.: To be upright. Mlatay6l. (Already used; see index.) XIII. Miaka (rnaka) is sometimes used in place of ma (na), these particles having many analogies. (See maka, Par. XIX.) XIV. Other uses of mia have been explained under the adjective, q. v. XV. Ala prefixed and in (hin, nin) suffixed to rocts signifying mental emotions, passions, and involuntary actions form adjectival nouns, which generally require to be expressed in English by an adjective and a noun. Ex.: A humane person. An irascible person. A loving p~erson. An affectionate person. A loving person. An obedient person. A weeper; a weeping person. A smiling person. A sleepy person. An affectionate person. Alaauain (from and). (See index.) Alagalitin (from gallii, wrath; ire). Maibigin (from i"big). (See index.) Alairogin (from irog, affection; caressing). Masintahirt (from sinta', love).. Masunorin (from sunod). AlatariTgisin (from tatiTgis). Al'atauanir. (from taua). Matulogin (from td'log). Afawilihin (from wii, affection). 200 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. XVI. If the root admits of contraction, begins with 1, or an intensive degree is expressed, the first syllable of the root may be reduplicated. Ex.: A bashful person. A feverish person. A forgetful person. A joyful person. An infirm, sick person. A faint-hearted person. Mahihiin (f romn hiyf). (Root contracts. ) J~fdaalagnatin (from lagnat, fever). (L. root.) 3Malilirnotin (fromt linmot, forgetfulness). (L. root.) Malulugdin (from lutgod, joy; pleasure). (L. root.) JMasasaiklt' (from sakit). (Contracted root. ) Mat atakotin (from taikot). (Intensive degree. ) THlE DEFINITE PARTICLE59 'M Aly ANDitK.2 I. From the fact that ma verbs do not generally require an object, there is little use for some forms of the definite. Every action, however, may have a reason, time, or place, and thus i (lefinite and an definite are to be found, ma being replaced by ka as a rule, andl always with i definite. Ka ---- an, as has been seen, forms abstracts and Iplaces, as well as standing for persons and objects of the action. Ex.: To be glad; amused. To die. To be afraid. To stumble. To be deaf. To be blind. To be poor. To be ruined (as in busines-s). To be lame. To faint away; to swoon. To drop off; to drop something accidentally. M1atua'. Ang katuacn, the person or object over which one is glad, etc. Aing ik-atukl, the cause of gladness or amusement. Ex.: Katuaannma aiig nmacga batk (amuse yourself with the children). Kinatuaan niy6 ang m)ain jaJ batkI (she amiused herself with the children). KinatutmUa( vih' ang?vam5j6, bal (they are amusing themselves with the children). Katutuaan ko ang 7naffga' b~tk (I will amuse myself with. the children). Mamatay. (See index.) Matalkot. (See index.) Matisod. (See indlex.) MabiTqli. Ang ikabifiqi, the cause of deafness. Kabii~yihan., deafness. Mabulag. Ex.: Nabulagan siya nang ga'lit (he was blinded by wrath). Kabulaigan, blindness. Maduklhd. Aug ikaduklia, the cause of poverty. Kadukhaan, poverty. Dumukhd, to become poor. Aug dukchain, the person becoming poor thus. (See index.) Malugi. Ang ikalugi, the cause of being ruined. Lumugi, to decline (as from age or natural causes). Mapilay. A.ng/ ikapilay, the cause of lameness. Kapilayan, lameness. Mahdvb. Ex.: Nlahilo' siyal(she fainted away). Nahihilo' siya' (she is fainting away). Ang kahiloan, the place. Malaglag. Aug kalaglagan, the place of dropping. Aug ikalaglag, the TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 201 To be drowned. To be tired out. To be included; to be contained. To be finished; also concluded and extinguished. cause. M3agaglag, to drop something purposely. Ang ilaglag,what dropped. Ang laglagan, the place or the person to whom dropped. Lunmaglag, to drop down purposely. Ang laglagin, the person thus dropping down. Malunod. Ang kalunoran, the drowning place; hence the west, "the drowning place of the sun." MapJgod. A.ng ikapdgod, the cause. Ex.: Ano ang ikin(paptgod mo? (Why are you tired out? [Lit., "W hat is the cause of your being tired out?"]). Syn. pakang. The word ogod means great weakness, and looks as if it were a variation. Masakldo. Ang kasaklauan, the place where contained. Ex.: Ang marng utos nang hokbo' y kinasasakllauan nitong librong ito (the orders [regulations] of the army are contained in this book). Malutis. Var. lut(ls. Maglutds, to finish or conclude anything. Magkalutaslutds, to finishl completely. Ang kalutasan, the place. II. Ka is omitted with an when the person affected is meant, and not the place or deliberate act. See mnahirin, mamatay, and mawald for examples. III. Pagka is generally used to form verbal nouns for roots conjugated by ma, although pag may be used with some roots and pagkaka is occasionally found. Ex.: Ang pagkat'log or ang pagtulog, the act of sleeping. (See tulog. ) TIHE INDEFINITE VERBALIZING PARTICLE "MAN." I. This particle, known as the third to Spanish writers on Tagalog, has pan for the definite and is one of the most important of the modifying verbal particles. It admits in, i, and an with the definite. II. The great attention paid by Tagalog to euphony or smoothness in sounds is well illustrated by the changes demanded of the initial letter of a root when man (pan) is prefixed. This grammatical peculiarity is found most fully developed in western languages, in Irish and Scottish Gaelic, in which it is known as "ellipsis." English has this tendency to a slight degree, as shown by a, an, according to a following vowel or consonant sound. III. When preceded by man the following changes take place in initial latters of roots, the final n of the particle being either dropped or modified. B and P to M. K (and hard Cor Q) to Ng. S, T, and D (generally) to N. M, N, and Ng cause final n to drop out. A, I, 0, U modify n to ng. IV. Man has nan for the present and past tenses, the first syllable of the root being reduplicated for the present and future tenses. There is a I and a II pluperfect tense, the former adding na to the past tense and the latter prefixing naka to the root. The future perfect has also two forms, the first formed by adding na to the future tense, and the second by prefixing maka to the root. The present participle (verbal infinitive) is formed 202 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. by prefixing pan to the root, the first sy liable of which is reduplicated. The use of the definite particles in, i, and an follows the general rule. To ridicule; mock; scoff; ho~ax; abuse, Mianlibak. Ang libalkin, what or etc. whom ridiculed, abused, etc. Ang libak-ar; also ang mapaglibak, the scoffer, hoaxer, mocker, etc. For indef. with man, see tables. Ex.: Ba'k'it ka nanlilibak sa kaibigan ma o? (Why are you ridiculing your friend?) Syns. U1roy; uyami, uyao, and t'iyao. To give much; to lavish. Miamigag (from bigay). For definite with i see index, also the tables. To buy much. Mamili (from bili). For definite with in see tables. To be nauseated or disgusted. 2lMavniri. For definite with han see tables. V. Man is used t~o express plurality of acts rather than. of persons, with those roots which denote the simple action with umn or mag. With some roots of colors man denotes intensity, and with some other roots indicates continuousness. It is essential for thiese ideas that the meaning shall not be changed by man from what it is with urn or mag. Ex. (B roots): To divide up among others. To habituate; to accustomn. To pull up continually or continuously. Ex. (D root): To pray constantly. Ex. (G roots): To imitate much or habitually. To mix habitually (as a druggist). Marnahagi (from bahagi). Ex.: Ano6 kaya ang ipinamarnahagi ma.f (What are you dividing up?) Avg ipinamarnahagi ko'y naaalaman nang ma~iTg6L pinarnania haginan l,-a (What I amn dividing up is known to those for whom I am dividing). Mamihasa (from bihasa). Ex.: Houag kang mamomha'sang mnarninto'S sa manaiT/' lapidb~hay ma (Do not accustom yourself to complaining about your neighbors)..11ami'not (from biinot). Bumilnot, to pull up. Magbd'not, to pull up much. Manala'?Tgin (from dalalfigin). See index. Miangagad. Gumagad, to imitate. Miaggagad, to imitate (many). Alangarn~ao. Ang pangamaun in, what so mixed. Ang ipangam~ao, what used to mix with thus. Ang pangarnauan, the place of habitual mixing. Gurn~aloii, to mix. Avg gamauin, what mixed. Ang ig amao, what addeld or the instrument used to mix with. Avg gamauan, the place; the mortar; dish, etc. Maggamd'o, to mix much. Ang paggarnauin, what mixed much. Ang ipaggamado, the instrument thus. Ang paggamauodn, the place of much mixing. Gumamas. Ang gamasin, what cleared off. Ang gamasan, the To clear off (as land). TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 203 To reap; to cut rice. To quarrel loudly. with; to reprimand To cut dIown underbrush; to clear off land; also to speak freely. To thresh (by many). Ex. (H roots): To scout. To sow much rice; or by many. To wash one's face (habitually). To predict habitually. Ex. (I roots): To like (many); also to flirt. To avoid entirely. Ex. (K roots): To devour; to eat continually. To take habitually. To cling to with hands and feet (as a monkey does). To nibble much; to bite with the front t~eeth. To tremble much or frequently with cold or fear. To break off (as flowers or fruit) as an occupation. Ex. (P roots): land cleared off. A1iaggaml8, to clear off (by many). Manyamnas, to clear off much. Any pangamasan, the land thus cleared. Gumapas. Anygyapasin, what reaped. Ang gapasan, the field. Any ynapasan, the stubble left. Maygapdts, to cut or reap much. Manyapas, to cut or reap (many). Arng panyapas, the sickle. Any mnanyayapas, the reaper, harvester (person). Gumasc. Any yasaan, the person so quarreled with or reprimanded. Mayyasd, to quarrel with much, or to reprimand much or many. Mangasc4, to quarrel with or to reprimand habitually. Gumasak. Any gasakin, what cleared, i. e., the underbrush. Any gasakan, the place. Any yasakin is also the person spoken to freely. Margasak, same actions as foregoing by many..1langilik. (See index: gitik.) Manhainap. (See index: hainap.) Manhasik. (See index: hasik.) Manhilamos. (See index: hilamos.) Manhuid. Any man huhuld, the prophet; soothsayer. Humulcl, to predict; foretell. Any hulain, what foretold. Any hulaan, the person to whom told. 3fa~yibig. (See ibig.) 3fagyilag. (See flay.) 3raTain. (See kain.) Ma?7yuha. (See kuha.) Maii~yuydpit (from kuydpit). Any parfyuyapitan, what clung to, i. e., tree, etc. Kumdydpit, to grasp thus. Any ikuya'pit, what with, i. e., the hands, feet, etc. No oldworld monkeys have a tail which can be used for grasping, the Philippine Islands species included. Matigibit (f rom kibit). Kumi bit, to nibble. Mafiigyinyiy (from kinyiy). See index. Mafdjitii (from kitil). Kunmilil, the simple action. Mayk-itil, to break off thus much. Syn.: Pati; and see also pdtol. To pluck or break off much; or by Miamita's (from pitd's). See index. many. 204 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To break off (by many); to gather habitually (as flowers or fruit). To whiten intensely. To grow very pale. To cut up (as cloth). Mamtuli (from puti). pumuti, to break off. 3fagputi, to break off much. MiThgagputi, to break off (byrmany). Syn.: Kuiti; and see putol. Ang putihin, what broken off. Ang pagputihan, the branchfrom which much is broken off. Mamtuti' (from. putt'). See index. Mamutid (from putid). See adjective. Pamutid to grow pale. Putlain, a person who is always pale; pallid. Mla-put14, a person who may become pale or pallid. Kaputlaan, pallor. Makaputid, to cause pallor. Mamd'tol (already used.) See index. Plitol. Ex. (S roots): To (lisperse; also to scatter much in the air. To bite much (as a mosquito). Mianambdlat (f rom. sambu'lat). See index. Mianigid. Ang sitgdin, the person, etc., bitten. Ang pagsigddni, the place. Surnigid, to bite (as one mosquito). Masigid, to be bitten. Ex.: Naninigid ang mah-gal lamnok(the mosquitoes are biting hard [in plenty]). M1anirA (from sira&). See index. Manuaippd (from sumpd). See index. To destroy completely. To curse habitually. Ex. (T roots): To peck much (as a bird). Manukd (from tukd). See index. To tempt habitually. Mfanuks6 (from tuks6). See index. VI. With roots which admit of the idea of making a living by exercising the acts denoted by the roots, man expresses the idea of an occupation, trade, or profession. Ex.: To preach. To care for. To practice medlicine. To milk (as occupation). Mafcnythral (fromn aral). Ang marry-g affgdral, the preacher, but ang mzai;7g1a(ral, the master or teacher (of a doctrine, etc.). Ariy ipa~iTga'rat, what preached. Any ipinanygaa'ral, what is being preached; the subject of the sermon. Any pinaingany-arahlan, the persons being preached to (the congregation) or the pulpit. (See index for airal.) Mama/haId(from bahala'). This word is from Sansk. bihara, the root of the English "to bear," Lat. ferre. Kayd' bahalad, po' (you take care, sir [i. e., pay what you like]). /Smno ang nanmamahalA sa badhay? (Who is taking care of the house?), Si Juan (Juan) Mangarnat(from gamot). See index. Man gatas (from gatas). Aug nangagatas, the milkman (or maid). Gioiuaaits, to milk (occasionally). TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 205 To cook or do anything habitually. To live by robbery. To sew nipa (for a living). To collect bills (as an occupation). To dive (as an occupation). To write (as an occupation). To spin (as an occupation). Magaw.d. (See index; gawd,.) Manhuli (from huh). See index. Mawiluid (from pa-tiad). Ex.: An6 ang ginagawd niiny6 diyinf (What are you doing there?) Kanin'y vama~naitid (we are stitching nipa, [thatch]). Afamnyh-il (from simii7il). See index. Afanisid (from. siid). See index. Manmilat (from siait). See index..Ma'nmilid (from sauid). Alvg vanunit~lid, the spinner. Sinmiid, hread; anything spun. Sum'did, to spin (simple act). Alanahi (from MNh). See index. Mw'i-g'una (from una). See index. To sew (as a tailor). To go first; to guide. VII. Some roots with rnsan have the idea of running around doing the act expressed by the verbalized root; going about in. a certain manner, etc. Ex.: To advance, clinging to something. AfarT-yipit (from kapit). This verb would be used if bamboo rail, etc., was clung to crossing a bridge, etc. Kurniapit, to cling to; to support; to hold up from falling. To run around biting (as a vicious 31asigagat (from kagat). See index. dog). To go about sadly and mournfully. 3J`hsi7gulila (from ulila, an orphan). VIII. Man, with roots denoting animals or birds, expresses their chase; with roots meaning fish, etc., their seeking, and with other animal or vegetable names, the gathering of what is denoted by the root. Thle idea is generally that of an occupation or habitual engagement in such hunting, fishing, gathering, etc. Ex.: To gather the rattan ~called " bd- Mamdaging. This is a species of ivy. ging."7 To hunt or catch birds. MaTfqibon (from ibon'). Ebon is To cut or gather wood. To gather tortoise shell. To gather nacre or " kapis " (the shells used in windows). To gather rattans (oejuco). To hunt tortoises. To gather " pajos" (a kind of mango). To hunt frogs. To gather the rattan called "palasan."2 To gather palm leaves. "tegg's in Pamnpangan. kfai~isdd. (See index isdd.) MasTgd'Ihoy (from kdfhoy). Kakahoyan, woodland. Gabat is "forest; timber, etc." Mari-gala (from kala). MaTgaTqala., tortoise-shell hunter. Magicala, to sell tortoise shell. Ma.?Tgapis (from kap~is). Magkwpis, to sell nacre. Ang kapisin, the nacre. Ang kapisan, the place used, i. e., the window. Maigwvay (from way). Mamagong (f rom. pagong). M1amahb'. Magpaho', to deal in "pajos."I Masnalakd (f rom palakd, frog; syn: Kabkab). Mamalasan. Kapalasanan, place where the palasan is found. Mamalaspds (from palaspals, "palm leaf "). Magpalaspals, to adorn with palm leaves. 206 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To fish for eels. To hunt sea turtles. To gather or hunt for honey. To gather oysters. To hunt (leer. Marooal~s (fromn palo's, eel). Mamnutikan (from pawikan, sea turtle). MAamaulot (from I)ulot, honey). Mfanpulot, to buy honey. M3agpulot (1) to make honey; (2) to deal in honey. Any pulotin, the honey made. Pinulotdn, what has been madle from honey (from pulotdn, sweets made of honey). Pulotin is also a term of enidearment. Ex. with an. JHouag nio ak-ony pulotan (Don'ttflatter (honey)n-ue). Pulotgold, honey and cocoanut milk. 3fanoldab4i (from talabd). Katalabahan, oyster bed. M1angusa (from usa, deer). IX. Similarly any instrument, weapon, utensil, or animal which can be so usedl is verbalized with the idea of hunting, fishing for, or catching by man. Ex.: To hunt with dogs or hounds. To hunt with or to uise a gun. To fish with a hook. To fish with a small hook. To fish or hunt with a light. To use or hunt with a spear called To fish with the hook. To fish with a seine. To fish with anything that mnay be used to catch fish. To sein6 with the large net called " 4pangtf1. To seine with the netcalled "pdkot." To fish with rod, line, and hook..lfaii-gaso (from aso, dog). See index. M1amaril (from baril, a shotgun). Malay, bad'il. Any mamanmaril, the hunter. Mfaminuit (fromt binuiit). See index. Mfainiwas (f rom biwais). This mmeans to use a rodI andl line. Burn iwas, to lift the hook by the line. Magobiwas, to do this much. A k6y! mtain'tirw~as (I am going fishing with a rod and line). Mfaifilod~o (from ilao, a light). Ex.: MfaJ~iJ~iT~io ka bag6? (Are you,going fishing with a light?) 06 (Yes). Aliny bitkid ang pinar7iqi~ilyauan mio? (In which field are you going to fish with a light?) _~qarng btk'id i//any rnalayo savimono1 bhaqla (In that field over there far away from the houses). Unmilao, to light up. Magilao, to carry a light. Any idauan, the lamp or place of light. JAfa ug atI6w i t. Ma~nlaotbang (from lambang, a hook). Mafnlant bat. See index: lambat. Aomnalakaya (from palakaya). Puraalakaya, to fish occasionally. Mfamangt i. JAfam tko t. Alaniit (from siit, a thorn or hook). Magsiit, to make anything out of thorns or hooks; to make abbatis. Syn., tinik-. Tinik also means fish hone. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 207 X. With roots denoting arms, tools, or instruments mnan indicates the. habitual use or wearing of the arins and the constant use of tools or instruments. Ex.: a To use a dagger. Mar7;'(iwa (from. iwa). See index. To use a sickle. Manidiik (fromn lilik-, sickle). To use an axe. Mamialakol (from palakol, axe). Magpalakol, to have an axe. To use arms. Mianandafa, (from sandata, arm, weapon). Mfagsandata, to bear armis. Ai g s(10 ata/han, armed forces; levy en masse. To use a syringe. Manumpit (fromt samnipil). To use a k~nife. Manundang/ (from sundmolg, knife). Afagysmndang, to carry a knife. To use a "war bol" (tabak). Afaoabalk. Maigtabak, to wear a war bobo. Tumiabak-, to cut off with a war bolo. XI. With roots denoting certain places man indicates the living in such plac-es, earning the living fromt the products thereof, or traveling in such localitv. Ex.: To live (general idea). To (dwell in a house. To live in town. To live in the mountains; to wander there; to gain a living fromt the products thereof. To live in the open country. To lead a seafaring life; to be a deep-sea fisher. To live in the timber; to lay the timber waste; to wander in the woods; to live by wood chopping, etc. To travel or live on the bank of a river or the seacoast. Mamd'hay (from bdhagl). Idea is to reside, etc. Magbd hay, to live. Bumtiha?, to give life to. Buhtay, alive; living. Afamaha? (from bdhay). See index. Ex.: &man kayo' nariaamnayall?' (Where do you live?) Ang bdhay ko, P6, ditdj sa bayang it(; (My house, sir, is here in this town). Mamzayan (from bayan). Kababayani, fellow-towvmmsman, also countryman. 31Iagb(/ara(, (1) to look for a town site; (2) to found or build a town; (3) to apportion by towns and not by inhabitants. Bay~an also means space between earth and sky, (lay (rare), and weather (rare). Mamurodok (from bundok). This word may also mean to travel in the mountains. Tatga buridok, mountaineer; sometimes used insultingly, as "hayseed," in English. Manrakid (froin bdtkid, "field"). Manadgat (front dadgat, "sea"). Mfanand gat, sailor or deep-sea fisher. Also taga ragat; tauong dumadgat. Magdaigal, to travel by sea. JDu-?flagal, to flood the land..Mfang?'m ba t (f rom. gdtba t, " timinber; forest"). Ang 'ipangaubat, what carried in the timber; or the cause of wandering, etc. Ang pangubatan, the place of working, devastating, wandering, etc., in the forest. Gumil bat, to become a fcrest. Gubatav., timber land or forested country. Manlambay (from lamtbay). Maylamnbay, to carry anything to coast 208 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. or bank. Lumambay, to go to or along the bank or coast (single act). XIJ. With roots denoting certain articles of wearing apparel man indicates their habitual use or wearing. Ex.: To wear a shirt habitually. 312nnaro (from baro). See index. See also sambalilo, hat; sapin, shoe; and tapis, apron. XIII. With roots denoting vehicles, boats, or other means of artificial locomotion, man signifies to travel by what is denoted by the root. Ex.: To travel by canoe. Mfamarngkd'. Ex.; 11ang drao bangk-ain mula (dito htangan JMayn'il?i (How irany days by banka [canoe] from here to M\'anila?) Mfaghapon kayany banykain (Perhaps all of one (lay by banka.). To travel oil horseback. Mar~tpabaYo (from cabayo, "horse"). To travel by "quilez." Ma?7qigies (f romn kiles, a vehicle named from Guillerino Q~uilez, of Vigan, Ilocos Sur, who suggested it to his carriage maker, a native of Vigan). XIV. Man also denotes self-supporting and slowly developing actions from within such as the growth of flowers, fruit, etc. Many roots comnmencing with b, which would otherwise be conjugated with urn, take man for euphonic reasons. (Seeuon, Par. VII.) Ex.: To sprout; to put forth shoots, (as Manlabong (from. labong). Also the bamboo). lurnabong..iiaglabong, to have shoots. To open (as a flower). JMarukadkad (from bukadlead). Visayan, bukad. To bloom; to blossom (as a flower). Miamoulaklak (from bulaklak, flower). Visayan, burak; also applied to the ilangilang. Ex.: Narnurulaklak any maifga' halaman (the plants are blooming). To bear fruit. MammiTja (from buffqga, fruit). Ex.: Namumufoija na ang maTg' kdhoy (the trees are already bearing f ruit ). To bear fruit; to be full of fruit..liamusaksak (from busaksak). Ex.: N~arumusaksak itony punony lukban (this lukban tree is full of fruit). XV. Some roots have differing meanings with urn, may, and man. In some cases the variation is great, but in others little or none. Man, however, looks to the effect or result more than to the simple action, which is expressed by usa or may. The examples will best show these differences and resemblances. Ex.: Words differing in each case: To teach. Umdtral. Maga'ral, to study. 3fari~g6 -ral, to preach. (See index: dral; also talo and salarn'in.) Words agreeing with um (if used) and man; but differing with mag: To intrude or steal in. Dumikit; manikit. Maydikit, to fasten; to paste together. To throw a lasso or rope. Sumilb. Manilb, to lasso; to rope; to ensnare. Maysilo', to make a lasso or snare. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 209 Words agreeing with. urn and man, mag being little used: To admire; to wonder at. Gumtilalais; mangiala6. Ex.: Aking pina'ngig ilalasan ang kanklitan naiig mfan gat bituin sa 16 09it (I admire [my admiration is] the beaut~y of the stars in the sky). To dIrag along; to arrest.. 1!unuil6;?nanhila'. (See index: hild.) To shake (as a tree to get the fruit). Lnmioglog;?nailoglog. (See also in(lex for libak, idea of ridiculing, etc. ) Words differing with uin and man, mag being little used: To afflict. D~uitaig (from daig) M 3anaig, to To kill. overcome; to surpass; to vanquish. Pumatay. AMamatay, to die. (See index: ptitay.) XVI. Some few words which do not admit of frequency have the simple idlea with man. Others are generally used with the particle in a seemingly arlbitrary manner. Ex.: To bear a child. To die. The following are arbitrary: To allow light to pass (as glass or anything transparent). To feel nauseated. To have; to possess. To originate from; to comne from; to descend from;i to arise. To look at wrathfully. To find fault with; to complain of. MaATgana~k Matiaatay. Mat7yaninag. Miaanlinag, transparent (from anzinag). Mandiri, (from d~ir). Mandoott(from ndoon). (See index). Afang~lling. AuIg pinangalinigan, the place or source of rising; origin; etc. Aug gailing na 64rao, the sunrise. Galing is the idea of (loing good. (See index.) 3fanlisik. Ex.: Nanlfilsik aug mata' nang poot narilat (fixing the eyes wide with anger). Mlaminta's (f romn pinta's). Ex.: Ilind't m o baga' alam na mahailay ang pamirninta's sa iba6? (Don't you know the dishonesty of complaining about others?) Ang pintasin;- aug pintasain; aug 7napamintds, the critic; the fault-finder; complainer. Ang pamintasa'n. who orwhatfound fault with. Ang pagpintasain, who or what found much fault with. (See also index: tilawa, to confide in. ) XVII. Although pan, the definite corresponding to man, generally has a verbal meaning, there are several instances in which pan, prefixed to a root, signifies an instrument, utensil, or article. These roots then admit, although they do not always require, the euphonic changes, as have already been explained in Par. III. Ex.: The razor. The auger. The mop. Anygpaiiggdhit(from maii-g6hit). (See index: 6hit.) Aug parnutas (from ln'tas). Magbiitas, to bore; to make a hole in. Aug paiRguskus (from kuskus). Kumuskus, to mop up. 6855-05-14 210 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. The sickle. Ang pangapas (from gapas). (See index: goipas.) The spade. Aug panhu'kay (fromi h~kay). (See index.) The brush, ruler, etc. Aug pangiihit (fromt ghi/t). Gumui-t hit, to line, mark, or paint. The pocket handkerchief, napkin, Aug paui hd (from pumaihid, to rub; towel, etc. to dlean). The hammer. Aug parwik-puk (from pumukpik- or magpuk-puk-, to strike). The pen, pencil, etc. Ang paniidat (from mnani'lat, to write, [fora living]). (See index: si'tat.) The string, cord, rope, etc. Aung panalit (f rom tali). M1a gtali, to tie, fasten, bind. XVIII. With names of the days and nouns like "drao' ((lay) pan denotes something used daily or on the day named. Ex.: Something for daily use. Aug pangdraodrao. (Noun reduplicated. ) Something for use on Mondays. Aug panldnes. XIX. In like manner, rnan, with the reduplicated initial syllable of the root, indicates the habitual agent with those roots capable of denot~ing occupation, trade, or profession. It mnay also be used with some other roots. In sorne cases the particles are repeated with occasional euphonic changes. Ex.: Thc following have a simple reduplication: Barber. Mifanad'hit (from aihit), usually _11aihjaiF7g4 hit in Mianila. Hunter (with gun). Mfinaiu~naril (from baril). Sailor. MAananalgat (from do gat). Physician. ~~~~Maugagarnot (from garnot). Phyicane. ftlangagapa~s (from gaipas). Weaver. Maunhahabi (from Iambi). Ilumabi, to weave. Tinsmith, plumber, etc. Mianhihinaug (from hinang). lfuminaug, to solder. Sawyer. Mamdalagari (from lagar!). (See index.) Writer; clerk. Allanuni'lat (from sdiat). Spinner. Af-anuni'tid (from si'lidl). Tailor; seamstres-s. Mfananahi (from tah'1). Winner; conqueror. MAananalo (from talo). Rescuer; redeemer. MAfnunubo's (from titb6s). Tumub's, to rescue, to redeem (simple act). Tempter. Manunuskso' (from tukso6). In the following examples the root as conjugated with man has the initial syllable of the new word inserted betwveeu thenma and the rii- of the particle. Ex.: MJaid(a rigadral (from mafigdrai, to Preacher. preach). 1-unter wvith (logs or hounds. Maifgafi~gaso (from maurgaso, to hunt with dogs). Fisherman. Mac~~gidqisdd (from ma?7gisdd, to fish for a living).a XX. W~ith weights, measures, and similar nouns, man prefixed signifies "to each," Ior "~apiece," amounts as may be (lenoted by the noun. (See undler the numerals.) XXI. With many roots inan, signifies a resemblance to what may be denoted by the root, which is reduplicated. Ex.: TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 211 Hurricane; typhoon. Bagy6. Ex.: Manbagy6bagyo itong haTgin (This wind seems like a typhoon). Naglalayag sild'y binayy6 sili sa ddgat (They were coasting and were caught at sea by a typhoon). Anger. Galit. Ex.: Mangdlitgdlit yaong pangungnsap (That way of talking resembles anger). THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE "MAKA. I. This particle (naka in the past and present) has two distinct meanings, the first being that of cause and the second that of power, ability, etc. For this reason there are two definites, that corresponding to the idea of cause being ka, and that to the idea of power being ma (na). In both cases the true pluperfect and future perfect tenses are formed by na following the verb as existing in the past and future tenses, respectively. The idea of cause is indicated by maka with roots denoting conditions, torts (wrongs), and betterments, which have only one definite; that with i, which has in with the past and present tenses, forming ika, ikina. Ika and ikina also indicate time (not tense) in certain cases. (See index.) II. The difference in syntax between these maka verbs in the sense of cause and all others must be noted. In the definite these verbs have the agent in the nominative and the recipient or object of the action in the genitive. In the indefinite the agent is in the usual nominative also, but the recipient or object takes the accusative, which is invariably preceded by sa (never by nang). This use of sa is also found with some other verbs. III. Mag and man roots retain the definite forns pag and panwhen conjugated with maka, as will be seen from examples. To be able to learn or study. Miakapagaral. Ex.: Nakapagdralak6 (I was able to study). Nakapagadral siyd (He [she] is able to study). Miakapagadral sild (They will be able to study). Hindi ak6 makapagadral (I shall not be able to study). Napagdral ko ang idral (I was able to learn the lesson). Napagadral niyd ang idral (He [she] is able to learn the lesson). Mapagadral nild ang idral (They will be able to learn the lesson). To be able to teach. Makadral. Ex.: Nakadral ak6 (I was able to teach). The other tenses, both of the indefinite and the definite are formed in the same way. To be able to preach. Makapangdral. Nakapangdral ak6 -(I was able to preach). Nakapangangdral siyd (He is able to preach). Makapan7ganigdral siyd (He will be able to preach). The definite is formed in the same way as with pagdral. IV. Roots verbalized by maka reduplicate the first syllable of the root in the present and future tenses. In some districts the second syllable of the particle is reduplicated, but this is a provincialism. Ex.: To cause damage. Makapan~ganyayd (from anyayd and pan). See index. To cause anguish. Makabalisa. 212 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To cause satiety. To beautify or adlorn. To cause disgust. To do goodl. To hinder. To adorn; to embellish. To cause relief. To cause sadness. To hinder. To cause another to tremble with fear. To cause to tremble with coldl or f ear. To cause or do evil. To cause disgust; weariness; annoyance. To dazzle (as the suii or lightning). To cause anxiety. To cause nausea. To wound (lit., to cause to be wounded). To cause to be set afire. To cause loathing (as food). To cause fear. To cause laughter. To cause pleasure. MAaleabusog B'sog is a bow (weapon). MAalcaibuti. Bumuti, to grow handsome. (See buti in index.) Makadimd rim or makarimadrim. Mandillubrim, to disgust. Ex.: NadndimndIrim ako' sa pag/cain niya' (Ilis manner of eating disgusted me). Mfa/agaling. (See index: galing.) Ma/ca gambala'. Mfakagattda'. Ex.: Ang kahinhina'y nakcagaganddi sa maei~ga dalaga (Modesty is a beauty in girls). (Def.): Avg /caltinhinan ay siyang ilcinagagandd nang ma?iTga dalaga. Malcaginhciua. Ex.: M1a/a ginhdua sa inyo' ang gamot (Let the medicine relieve you). Nakaginhadua saakin ang gaitot (I was relieved by the medlicine). Nakaqiginhaiua sa kaniy6 avg gamot (He is being relieved by the medicine). Makla giginhltua, sa imlod ang yamot (You will be relievedl by the medicine). Avg pagk-agihtdua, the relief (act). llrak(ilthpis. (See in(Iex: hdpis.) Ma/calibang. (See index: liang.) 3fa/capasigildbot (from NcldOW and pan). Ka/cila/cibibot, horrible..1akcapas~i77lyiy. (See index: kinyig). MIa/casavid. Mfakasasamnd, noxious; nial ignant. Also future tense. Ex.: Ilauay ongn kanin itovy 1)010/0't mnakcasasaitoa sa ii,6 (Don't eat this fruit, because it will injure you [be noxious to you, indef.]). A ng ikinasasamda nang aicing loob ay avg kanitlang pagin unoUrang walang Iigil (Wh at p)uts me in bad humor is his everlasting slanderingv [lit., The cause of my bad humor is his slandering without cessation, def.]). Sumamd, to become, bad or evil. (See index: sama.) M~a kca sau b. Mfak/asilao. (Syn: pulag.) MIa/casuk/ani. M~a/asdgat. (See index: suyat.) Mfakasdvnog. (See index: sdnlog.) Ma/casuyc. (Syn. sunok.) Ma/catd/ot. (See index: tdkot.) Ma/cataua. (See taua: index.) Makatmna. (See index: tuil.) TAGALOG LANGUAOE. 213 V. The indefinite forms will be clearly seen by the conjugation of nmakaginchdua in the preceding paragraph, there being no irregularities and there is but one definite with ka, forming ika as a prefix to the root for the infinitive and future and ikina for the past and present tenses, in being incorporated in the latter cases. For the conjugation of this definite see hapis in index. VI. Prefixed to roots denoting actions maka signifies power or ability to perform what may be denoted by the root. Roots which are conjugated in the simple idea by mag or man retain pag or pan before the root in all tenses. VII. Ma is the corresponding definite to maka potential, and when used with the idea of attraction toward, etc., suppresses in completely. Ma becomes na for the past, pluperfect, and present tenses. Pag and pan are retained with those roots requiring it to preserve the meaning, as explained in the preceding paragraph. The definites with i and an also exist. The particle i is inserted between the particle ma (na) and the root, contrary to its use with ka, where it is prefixed to the latter particle. Ex.: To be able to go away. Makaalis. Makapagalis, to be able to take away. To be able to teach. Makadral. Makapagdral, to be able to learn or study. Ex.: Napagdral ko ang idral (I was able to learn the lesson). Napagdral na ko ang idral (I had been able to learn the lesson). Napagadral ko ang idral (I am able to learn the lesson). Mapagadral ko ang idiral (I shall be able to learn the lesson). (See dral in index.) To be able to preach, makapagariaral. To be able to do or make. Makagawd. (See index: gawd.) To be able to take, Makakuha. With idea of attraction toward, in is suppressed. Ex.: Nakuha ko iyang bunga (I was able to take that fruit). Nakukuha niyd iyang burfga (He [she] is able to take that fruit). Makukuha ko iyang buiTya (I shall be able to take thatfruit). (Seealsoindex: kuha.) To be able to go or come out. Makalabds. Makapaglabds, tobeable to take out. (See index: labcs.) To be able to walk; march; etc. Mlakalakad. (See index: ldkad.) Ex. with maka (indef.): Nakaldkad ak6 (I was able to walk). Nakalaldkad siyd (He is able to walk). Makalalakad sild (They will be able to walk). To be able to write. Makasuilat. With i inserted between ma (na) and root with definite. Ex.: Naisulat ko itong panulat (I was able to write with this pen). Naisusulat ko itong panutlat (I am able to write [can write] with this pen). Maisusdlat ko itong panulat (I will be able to write with this pen). Bukas maisusulat ang sulat na ipadadald m6 sa iyong amd sa Maynila (To-morrow I will be able to write the letter which you will 214 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. have to send to your father in Manila). Aaiis ako' nang maisti1at na, niyd' any iviutos ko sa kamiya' (Iwill go when he writes down the orders I have given him). (See index: si'lat.) To be able to run away. Mfakatakb6'. (See index: takb6;). VIII. 'With, negative particles the imperative is largely used instead of the present tense, although the meaning is the same as that of the latter, i. e., hindti akriny miakasllilat, I c-an not write; I am not ahle to write; instead of hindi ak-ong nak-asusulat. The definite is sometimes used in the same way with the negative, and even wit~h the affirmative. Examples: Hindi akonq mnakapayadral (I can not [amn not able to] study [or learn]). Hindt'7ma madampotf (Can't you pick it up[grasp it]?) Hindi ko maipahiyag (froml hadyag, mia, i, and pa) (I can not reveal it [make it puhlic]). ilindi ako' mak-aalnas sa Mfaynild't akd'7y mnay sak-it (I can not go down to Manila, because Ilam ill). W~ith urn thisiimay beexpressed hindi iakd mtan~gyaring lomiuassat Maynild't ako'may sakit. flindi kayd rnak-apart~qdsap? (Can't you talk?) Hindi ko mnawikd (I can not pronounce it). Hlindi ko masaysay (I can not explain it). Hindit ko masabi (I can not tell it). 1X. Aloa. (naka) with the indefinite and mia (na) with the definite signrify to (10 what is denoted hy the root mnechanically, casually, involuntarily, or suddenly (occasionally), especially acts of the mind and physical senses. Ex.: To smnell. MVdkoamoy. Nakaaamoiy kaydj? (Do To feel. To hear. To taste. To see. Acts of the, mind: To know (something). To think. To comprehend somewhat; to feel; to undlerstandl. To understand (naturally). you smiell anything?) IN-aaaroy ninyd' bagyd any bmaiy~oio isinasamba'lat nany m-ange9 bulakialk? (Do you smell the fragrance shed by the flowers'?) MAak-araioldaoi, from damdami. Na.',arndamdn mao? (Did you feel it?) 06, nadaramdam(in ko pa (Yes, 1 feel it yet). M1akoirofpqy (from dirnyig). See index: (iho gig. Ala kalasap. (See index: lasap.) Makakita'. Ex.: Ako'y nakakitdnang isany tauong diya'n (I saw a person there). Nak~itd bagyd silo'? (Did you see them?) Ilindti ~7uni't makikitdI ko sana, (.No, hut I may be able to see [them]). Afakadlam. Walany nakaaadlam (No one knows). Hlindi ko naaalamnan (Id(o not know it.) lakha isip. Hind'I'mat'sij), incomprehensible. Ex.: An6 any isip mio or Naiisip mno or Naiisi pan mro? (What do you think ahout it?) Kaisipan, opinion. Anygpagkaisip, the act of thinking. M1a kamalay. Mfakatalasids. Ex.: Nat atalasta's ninyd' bagyd? (Do you understand it?) W1a/any nakatatalasta's (No one undlerstandls). Tumalasta's, to understand (by an act of volition). TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 215 To remember ((casually, etc.). Mfakaalaala. (See index: ala(1la.) To forget. Mak1aliniol. (See index: liihot) Miscellaneous: To like (naturally). Mlakaibiql. (See indlex: 1biy.) To ascend or go upl (cas.). Mfa kop(nihiik Ex.: Napanlvikan ko (ngWybliao/ vang kailnyan 2iafin (1 wvent upl by chiance into the house of our friend). To enter (casually). Mooio.(See index: p050ok.) To fall asleep. M1akahilog. Ex.: Iha',igniasa ak6'y naatgo ako' (I was reading and fell asleel))...ng ikatifilog, the cause or time of sleeping. Ing ipaytiiloy, the cause or time of sleejping a great deal. X. Mfa (na) is used in connection with (oi (sometimes in) to express being overtaken by wind, weather, night, etc., and also to express the casual advent of a season, date, etc. Some phras-es of this nature are used with in only. The definite only is found. To be caught out in the sun. 31wirao. (See index: adrao and init for exs. ) To be overtaken by night. foyyab;. Ex.: Gagabihin ka sa daan (You will be overtaken by night on the road). To be caught in the rain. Afauic'in. (See index: uldn.) To be blinded. 31abulag. (See index: bulag.) To be hot (warni). Mainit. Ex.: Naiinitan ak6 (I am warm). Umtinit, to become hot. Mfagidit, to heat. Mfagpainit, to allow to become hot. To be clouded; turbid. 3lfabobb. (See index: labo'.) To be overtaken by July. Aliajulio. Ex.: Kami'y ncajuliohian sa Tarlac (July found us in Tarlac). (Any month may be used in this manner.) To be found at Easter. 31apascua; rnapasko'. Ex.: Napasku/han ako6 sa AMaynilA (Easter found me in Manila). XI. Maka also signifies the possible accomplishment of a purpose with the indefinite; mna being used with the definite. (Naka; na. ) The accomplishment of the end sought is always expressed in the past tense. To be able to lift. Ma1 ka btihat. Makabubgmhat, liftable. Ex.: Bubuhat'in ko itong bayong Lung mo-b i/mlat (I will lift this sack if it be liftable). To be able to overtake by running. 31ak-aliibol. Iluindbol, to run after another in order to overtake him (her). Ex.: Hindbol ko siya'y hindt'nahadbol (I ran after him [herlI but could not overtake him [her]). To be able to find. Al aLa hdnap. (See hadnap: index.) To get by asking. Makahifyi'Z. (See hir~yi: index.) To be able to catch fish. Makapai~gisdd. Ex.: Ako'y marg-9 ii-igisdd Lung makapa-iygisdd (I am going to fish if it is possible to catch any fish). To be able to pas55 an examination. Mfakas-ilit. Ex.: Sim'miit siya' nang superintendente ay (hindi) naka-sdlit 216 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. (lie was examined by the superintendlent anil Jpassed [(lid not pass]). Jlfakasus ~iit kayq6? (WVill you be able to pass?) ASuioi'lit, to examine; to giv~e an account of. To be able to hit with arrows. Afakuipanid. Puomana, to shoot at with bow and arrow. Ex.: Pungmam't siydl 5(?nifl(/aJ ihoni, i'//ufli't lhindt' rwakapanid siy'i (lie shot at the birds with bow and arrow, but was not able to hit them). XII. Maka, correctly used, expresses physical power or ability as a general rule, sik-at and mnargyari being usedl to express moral power or ability. By the uneducated, these words are usedl almost indiscriminately. (See M~ka and?mangylari: index.) XIII. Ma/ca is also used to verbalize kayd,; "perhaps, may be," etc., which is conjugated as in the following examples: Dili ko wk-aycitnanq daihini (I (10 not know if I will be able to carry it). Diii ak6() mak-akaya' ibi gay i16' sa kaniyad (I (10 not know if I will be able to give this to him). Wald ak-ong i/ca/ca y(t (I have no way to do it). Makakcaya' ka bagd bamili nito6? (Will you be able then to buy this?) Di ko ma/cayanang labanan kay6' (I am not able to fight against you [plural]). Jinurnin k-o, kunvma/ca yanan ko (I will drink it, if 1 can). Bagai, " perhaps, by chance, " etc., has a stronger meaning than kaya'. XIV. Maka (ma) is sometiues used in reluctantly admitting a fact or in avoiding too direct an injury to the feelings of another. Ex.: (Indef.) Nakcapagnakao s'iyi' (he may have stolen); (lPef.) napagnakao 71 (I,6 ito' (he may have stolen this). XV. Me/ca is also used colloquially in conversation as follows: Muakatanong kcaya6? (Is there anything more to be asked about it?) Makakita' bagd? (Is there anything more to be seen?) A more usual form.i is made with lalo, 'more," and the root with tio, viz: Luinalo sa tanofiig'in? (Is there anything more to ask about it?) Lumalo sa k-itain.? (Is there anything more to be seen?) XVI. 3Afak-a forms certain adjectives in Tagalog, which have the inherent idea of potentiality. These adjectives, which in English are generally formed by the suffixes able and ible or by ful, have three distinct forms in Tagalog. XVII. (a) Roots expressing qualities which may be felt by the mind are mnade adjectives by prefixing ka, the casual definite of ma/ca, to the root, which is reduplicated to the second syllable. Ex.: kaayaaya (aya) "delightful"; kaginhaginhdmua (ginhoiva), "wholesome; salubrious;" kaibigibig (ibig), "amiable;" kakilakildbot (kilabot), "horrible;" katakottaikot (tik/ot) ''fearful; dreadful." (b) Adjectives of similar meaning are also formed by maka, with the future indefinite. Ex.: M~akahihiyd (hiyd), "bashful;" ma/camamatay (matay), "mortal" (deathcausing); mnakcasisird (sirad), "destructive;" makjatataud (tau(m), "laughable;" makahtutud (tua'), "pleasant, agreeable." (c) When the roots may express aptitude or inaptitude or facility or difficulty in doing anything; if affirtnative the adjective is formed with the future definite of the potential particle mai, and if negative with the imperative ma (without reduplication of the first syllable of the root), which is generally preceded by the negative particle di', "not." Ex.: Ma/ca/ain, "edible;" dit makain, "unedlible, uneatable;" m-agagawd, "tpracticable;" di magawd, "impracticable;" maiinum, "potable, (drinkable; " di' mainurnt, " undrinkable;" mnak-iki~t, "visible; " di makilad, "invisible;" nasasabi, "tellable;" di masabi, "untellable, unspeakable;" mangyayari, " possible; " di' mangyari, "impossible; " di mabata, " intolerable;" di makalag, "indissoluble;" di' magarnit, di' malapitan, "inaccessible;" di matiisq, "insufferable;" di mating/cala, "incomprehensible;" di masalang, " Auntouchable. " TAGALOG LANGUAGE.21 217 (d) Adjectives of the classes above described take the " tie " ny when united to a following noun or verb if ending in a vowel, but remain unchanged if ending in a consonant. The following verbs take the definite imperative, which is best translated into English by the infinitive with. "to." Ex.: Kagalanggalany ainal "respected father;" k-adumnaldti'mnal tiymin, " disgusting to see; " kaayaayang paki~rgajn, " delightful to listen to;" madaling gawin, "easy to do or make;" mnaliwag sabihin, "difficult to say;" mahi rap kamtain, "hard to accomplish." XVIII. Afaka may be comipounded. with mag, resulting in magmn(k-a, denoting the idea of a great or excessive degree of what miay be indicated by the root, which is generally reduplicated. (See par. 27, mnay.) Ex.: Mfagmakaauaaua' (au4) " to be able to move to compassion; magmakagalitgailit (gailit), "to be able to move to anger;" magna'nzak-ayalitg6 lit ako6 iyang tatilo, " that man will be able to anger me; " mnakwaylit, " to cause anger;" maymrakahiyd, "to be able to shame greatly " (see par. 27, may); maymakalumbayi'namby (lamba~y), " to be able to move to grief; " naymnakalumbaylum bay ak6' any balMIt, "the notice was enough to move me to grief;" makalumbay, "to cause sadness; to make melancholy; " badkit mo ikinalulumbay anq ma-sasaman7 balita'? or An6't nakalulumbay sa iy6' any masasamany baiit&? " Why does the bad news sadden you?" XIX. Maka (naka) is sometimes used in the place of mna (na) indefinite, the two particles having many analogies. Ex.: Nakabuk~is arty pinto', "the door is open; " nakalirnat sbl', " he forgot;" nakatay' siyad, " he is standing up; " nakaupo6 siyat, "he is sitting down." XX. Miakad and its synonym bakad express fear or apprehension of possible danger, hurt, or injury. They are written as separate words and not as prefixes. Bakal is more common. These two words may be best rendered into English by "lest," "for fear that," etc. Ex.: Ako'y naydalang tdk-ot, bakd marigigji (I was afraid lest I should be heard.) I1iouay mony yawin i~i n, ma~kd mapahdnmak ka (do not do that, because you may lose). Houay kary rnaydaan sa bundok-, -inakad larar?!;fin ka nany mangyd tuliscin (do not travel in the mountnins, because you might be stopped by the "ladrones"). Ifumarany, to stop another on the highway. Makd may tduio diyaln (lest there be people there). (b) Miakd also denotes partial resemblance, as in comparing speech, fruit, flowers, etc. Ex.: Miak Taydlog ang capitain nang parguri~ymtsap (the captain is like a Tagalog in his speech). Makal bulakiak sa Amierica itong bulakiak many amoy/ (this flower is like an American flower in odor). XXI. In addition to the meanings of maka, as a verbal particle, it indicates completed verbal action, best translated by the adverb " after " and a verb. Ex.: Makamtisa nangy pare' (after he had said mass the priest ~). Makayari nito'y paroon ka sa-(aftervyou dothis go there to ~).It is also used idiomatically. Ex.: Makasakdaling may dunymatiny, bumili ka nany kakanin (in case anyone should arrive, go buy something [for him] to eat). THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE itMAGPA." I. This particle, signifying the ordering to do or make or permitting to be done what is denoted by the root, reduplicates the last syllable of the particle for the present and future indefinite tenses. The definite, pa, being a monosyllable, causes the first syllable of the root to be reduplicated for the same tenses. The definite has all three forms of in, i, and art. Alay and man roots retain this between maypa and the root. Pay sometimes precedes maypa in the definite form (paypa). Sam is generally used before the person commanded. Ex.: To order to teach. Maypa.amral. Maypatiral ka kay Pedro, order Pedro to teach. Maypapaygmral, to order to study. Maypapaytdral ka kay Juan, order Juan to study. Papagaralin?no 218 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To order to read. To order to do or make. To order to come or go out; (2) to order to take or bring out. To order to ascend. To order to go or come down; to order to descend. To trder to get into or enter. To order to write. anfgj iyong ana/c (order your child to study). Pinapagairal pa akc6 nany a kiny in~t (myi mother ordered ine to keep) on studying). Magpap~aiupard (1) to order to preachi; (2) to request to preach (if not comlpetent to order). Maylpabasa. AXagpapaIbesa any 7naestro sa; miamTg( bald (the teacher is ordering the children t~o readl). Maypagauwa. Aayl)agavn-d a/co (1 ordered [something] (lone or made). Naf/ppal ifaq,aw sii11d (hie [shie] is ordering [something] to be done or madle). Nakcapayp)agauwd ua/c6 (I was able to order [something] to be (lone or inade). -Magpapayawda ako' (1 willI order [.something] to 'be done or made). Makapagpagawd' a/c6 (I shall have ordered [something,] to be dlone or made). The definite withi i is: )Ipfi!Jewe mao i16 sa /ca)iy6 (order him to do [mnake] this). Jpinayaw~d /co sa iy6 il6 (1 ordered you to do [make] thiis). Ipmiyegaia'wd riype sa 'iy6 it6 (hie orders von. to do this). Ipayeyewld ko sa iyo6 ito6 (I shiall order you to do [mi-ake] this). (See index: qaiva.) 2lr`ygpaIlba's. Ma y-tpalabds kakay Juan (order Juan to get out). Malaypitebd's ka, kay Juan neang deanil (order Inan to get the clothes out). Palabasin imoo itony asa (have this dog iput out). M~agpajanhIk. Papanhikin moo any rniai7!a bald (tell the muchachos to come up). Ma/capaypapanhik, to be able to order to ascend. Ne/capayg)apanhik akc6 (I was able to order to ascend). Na/capaypapapan/oik ak6 (I ami alble to order to ascend). Mla/apagpapapah i/c Wk6 (I will be able to order to ascend). JIa ypapugpanh i/c, to order something brought upstairs, hoisted, etc. Papagpanhikcin ma any nmanga baldI nang tmibiy (tell [order] the muchac-hos to bring up some water). (See index: panhik.) Mlagypapanaoy. Also means to spendl; to use up. Maqpapaypanflog, to order something to be brought down. (See index: paniaoy.) MfaypapdsoIk. (For examples see index: paso/c.) 31agypeIs?"lat. Any mang~,daral ay naypasit/at s(t iy6 (indef.); piflasi'lat /ca namy maufiguaral (def.) (theteacher ordered you to write). The definite TAGALOG LANGUAGE.21 219 To order to lock. To order to sew. 'with in is: Pasulatin mio sRie nitong 8oNiat (order himi to write this; let.tei ). The dual (two) is used in the following examples, but they are translated as usual into English. Pinas6 i'lott kitda,it onqgst'lat (I ordered you to write this letter). PinasitIUlat kt(It 7i'tonq siilat (I am ordering you to write this letter). _Pasusilatin kata' nitonqg s~lat ( I will order you to write this letter). (See index: stilat.) M1tgayinisus. To lock; mfagsusl. ASusia.n M2O it(, (lock this). 1honey mo1 susian iti6 (don't lock this). 11) hindl nakasitsi (this is not locked). Aiisui W()o (Wy p1)altx flit) (un1 -lock this [lit., "release this condition of being locked '']). ASusian mno any pinto' (lock the door). A ng isusi, the key. Any sasian, what locked. Anyl paysusl, what locked much, or the act of locking. Any ipa~gsusi; what uised to lock much with. Ssit!, derived from Chinese, is distinct f rom ui, meaning clear, pure, or neat., which comes from the Sanskrit, cvchi. Afapatald. It' mn palit nhiyla( sa Iakn (this is what she told me to sew). (See index: Wuhi.) HI. Miagpa reverses the meaning in sentences where an inferior addresses a superior, or in which the subject has no power to command, the lparticle then meaning "to request, ask," etc. Ex.: Mfaypyagaw la nit(') sa inyonq ania "ask your father to do this," nlot "order your father to do this." Maypaaural kay6' pa, sa, inyony anak- sa esenelahan (indef.) or Papayaraiin niny6 pa, any anak niy saecuelahan, (def.) (let your child study for a while yet at school). III. The indefinite form will be seen by the conjugation of maypaygawd "to order to do or make; " there being but one irregularity of note, viz: In the pluperfect and future perfect tenses naka and maka, with pagpa, pre-fixed to the root and na following, express these tenses, respectively. (See tables for conjugat~ion.) IV. Pa, the corresponding definite verbal participle to maypa, and formed by dropping the first syllable of the latter, forms the three definites regularly. The examlples given in the tables are magpasmilat (stilat), "to order to write " (in); viaypagawa' (yawa'), "to order to do or make" (i); and vnaypatanim (tanim), " to order to sow" (an). V. Maypa may be preceded by 7-naka, forming niak-apagpa, the compound giving the idea " to be able to order to." (See under maypapanhik- in Par. I, vmaypa.) VI. Mi14ypa also denotes what is suffered willingly or what is done without restraint by others upon the subject; to allow or permit, with those roots which admit such ideas. The context serves generally as a guide to distinguish the idea of " to order to " from " to permit to." Ex.: To allow deception; cheating. Afagparaya' (from dayd). (See index: day,. ) To allow oneself to be crucified. Miaparp (fo aid. Seidx dip'.) To allow oneself to be whipped. Maypahampds. (See index:hampa's.) 220 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To allow oneself to be flatly con- 3fagpa.4oat. tradicted. To allow one's hair to be combed. 3afgpatsuklay. Also " to order to comb." (See index: suklay.) To allow oneself to be slapped. Magpatampul. Tarnampal, to slap. Maytaranpal, to slap much. VtI. Magpa, with a root denoting a state or condition resulting from gradual intrinsic action, indicates the purpose of the subject either to accelerate or allow the transition. To allow to become putrid. To order to throw down; raze; (2) to allow to fall into ruin. To allow to become hot. To allow to become cool; to cool anything. To allow to dry up or out; to put out to (Iry. Mcgpalbtlok. ilouag mong kabulokin coig mraiog16 sayging (don't let the bananas rot). 3,Vagpagiba!. Gumtiba, to do away with; to level; to throw one's self down..Anygginibd1, (1I)what thrown down or leveled; (2) what done away with. JMaggibd, to throw down many things. 31fagpainit (from init). 3faypapaginit, to order something to be heated. (See index: ini.) Micgpalamig. Palamigin natin ang 6rao (let us wait until the day is cooler). Mfagpalamig ka nany td'big (let some water cool [i. e., put some water out to cool]). Ipaldarnig mo any t~big (put the water somewhere to cool). Bdkit Ihirnd ka nagpapalaniig nang Mtbig? (Why don't you cool some water?) Scan ak6' may~poplamnig nany tdbig? ('Where shall I put the water to cool?) 1)iang batalan y a'n any parlpapalamzigaJn mo nany tMbig (let the water cool out there on that porch). Kahapon ay ang ibangsilid ang pinagpalcmiiyan ko, nang tn big (yesterday I let the water cool in the other room). Magpapaglamig, to order something to be cooled). ilfcypatuy4l. Ilouag many pctuyoin any niaithjd halanman (don't let the plants dry up). Tuy6 na po4 (they are dried up already, sir). Hindit ko ri-fla pinat'otuyo (indeed, I am not letting them dry up). Patuyoin mo iy"I~n, dIry that or let it dry. VIII. Maypa is also used to express acts of the Creator; of nature, and of persons beyond the control of the speaker, mainly with the idea of cause. Ex.: To cause waves. To cause the flowers to bloom. To cause it to thunder. To rear; bring up (as a child). JcgpcNon. Ano any naypapaVon sa ddgat? (What causes the waves at sea?) Any hcsi~gin (the wind). kfcgpablclklak. 3fcgpakulog. hicypalakil. (See index: lakcf.) TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 221 IX. Magpa, used with reference to the effect of such actions as the foregoing, which are beyond the power of a human agent, signifies " to expose to;" "to put in," etc. Ex.: To expose to the sun; to sun one- M1agpatardo (accent on the last syllaself. ble). (See indlex: airao.) To expose to t~he wind or air. 314gpahafi7-in. (See index: ha?~gin.) To expose to the rain. Magpaulain. (See index: uldn.) X. 3fagpa coupled with meteorological phenomena and astronomical occurrences, connected with a human agency, denotes a waiting on the part of such agent until the condition has changed or the event taken place. The context generally serves to give the correct idea. Ex.: To wait until the typhoon ceases. To wait for a change of wind. To wait for the (lay to become cooler. To wait until the sun (or moon) rises. To wait for a change (as in bad weather). To wait until the rain ceases. To wait until daybreak. Magpotbagyo'. AfagpalhonJgin. Mfagpalarnig nang o'rao. (See Par. VII.) 3fa4gpasiioang. (See index: silang.) Magpatibl. Pablain mo muna ang uli~n (wait until the rain ceases). The root is NMI, which alone means " to seem." TiRt td'uo or anaki ttu~o (it looks [seems] like a person). Tiid np(tproofl 8i10 (it seems they went there). Tiddnapapeirito.silad (it seems they are coming here). Mamgpaulaln. 3fagpaumaga (from 7nmaga, "to dawn;" root, aga)., XI. With roots expressing the indefinite idea of what may be given magpa expresses acts, which benefit another than the agent. These roots are generally those conjugated primarily with urn. Ex.: To give food; to feed. _Magpakaiin. (See index: kain.) To send; to forward. JMagpada1la. Do' ang padaid, niyad sa a6ki (this is what he ordered me to bring [carry]). 1t6'y padala'sa akin ni indI (this is what my mother sent [brought] me). Ang ipinadald (what was ordered brought [i. e., what was sent]). Magdalad, to carry, bear, bring or take (over). Ang dinala', what so brought, etc. (See index: dala'.) To clothe; to furnish clothing. Afagparamit (from damit). (See index: damit. ) To give something to (Irink; to wa- Afagpainum. (See index: inum.) ter (as animal or towl). To put at interest; to invest. Mla~gpatubo'. (See index: tubo6.) To give lodging. Alfa gpattdloi. (See index: tdloy.) To lend willingly. Maf~gpau'tang. (See index: ~itang.) There may be mentioned magpakitA, to restore the sight. XII. With roots expressing definites with muag in the primary verbal sense, magpa expresses the idea of compulsion, exaction, or request, as shown by the intrinsic meaning or the context. Definites exist with in, i, and an. Ex.: To collect taxes; to demand (or col-!Jagpabums (from buil, "poll tax," lect) tribute. etc. ). Pabuis ko si Pedro nang piso 222 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. (I asked Pedro to pay one peso in taxes). Isangpiso ang'ipinabuis ko kay Pedro (one peso was what I asked Pedro to pay in taxes). Itong bayan ag an itaypabuisa ko (this town was where I collected taxes). Magbuis, to pay taxes. To beg; to ask for alms. Magpalimo's (from Span., lirnosria). To ask for a pledge or pawn. Afagpasa'nl. Sangpisos ang sanladin k-o nitong singsing (I want to pledge this ring for one peso). XIII. Actions in which. the agent has a passive part are also explained by rmagpat. Ex.: To hear confession. Magpacurnp'isal (from Sp. con fesar). ASaaflnaroon ang pare'? (W~here is thle "padre?") Nagpapacumpisal siyga (H-e is hearing confessions). Alagcwaipisal, to confess. To pardlon. Afagpatauad. (See index: tauad.) To get shaved. Magpai hit. (See index: aihit.) To have the hair cut. Magpagzvpit. (See index: gupit.) To have cleaned (as shoes). Alagpalmnis. (See index: linis.) XIV. Magpa also expresses the idea of repeating something many times, or reciting the same much, anid sometimes by many. Pagpa is treated grammatically in many cases like magpa-i. e., the last syllable of the particle is reduplicated for the lpresent and future ten'ses. Ex.: Magpa "9we" k-ayo6 (All of you say -'we" many timcs). Nagpadiablo ak-6 $a k-aiya' (I called him. a devil many times). An,' atog iphinafpapaIdiablo niny6'? (Why do you say (levil so much?) Jlooag ninyongq Ijagp~apadiablohan ang lkapoua tiut~o (Don't say devil so inuch. to those aroumnd you). XV. In some cases magpa signifies to (10 voluntarily what is denoted by t~he root. Ex.: To adorn one's self. MiqJgparnnti (from buti). Nagpap abati yaong dalaga (That girl is adorning herself). To praise one's self. Afay~pamurl' (from par;). At yaong is~i'y tagparpaiimuri (and that one is [doing the same] for the lpraise). Ang mahinhing dalaiga'y piuuI nangq lahat (A sensible girl is praised by everyone,). Kapurihan, praise; honor; famne. Syn.: banyi. XVI. Magpa with. some datives and all adlverbs of place signifies "to go or come, intentionally," where denoted by the root, etc. Ex.: To come to me. M ayfp as a k-i n. To go to you. Mfaypasa hiy6). To go (come) to the person. Magpalsa tu'uo. To go to Pedro. 3Pagpalcay Pedro. To come here (near by). Magpadini. To go there. Magqpadoon. To go up the river, or up country. 3fagpa ilaya. XVII. Mapa, formed by dropping the g of iaagpa, signifies " to go in some direction naturally or accidentally, and without intention on the part of the subject." Igenerally precedes the root. Ex.: To run off or lower (as water). Mapaibabdl. Napapaibabd ang td'big (The water is becoming low [or is running off]). (See index: babd.) TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 223 To ascend (as smoke). Mapaitaas. Napapaitaasangas6 (The smoke is rising). Dt man makitd ang nilTgas, aso angy agpapahnyag (Although the flame may not be seen, the smoke will reveal it.T. P., 50). ro fly up in the air (as a bird). Mapailandang. Ang bdnoy ay napailandang sa imapaauid (The eagle ascended into the clouds). XVIII. It will be observed that the greater part of the roots verbalized by magpa require i in the definite to express " what is ordered done, given," etc., and in or an in the same form to express " the person commanded," etc. Ex.: To give food to another. To allow to be punished; or to cause or order to be punished. To permit to pass. Magpakain. (See index: kain.) Magparusa (from dusa). Ilouag mong parusahan ang walang kasalanan (Do not permit the innocent [not guilty] to be punished). Magpadaan (from daan, "road"). See index. To give another something to drink; Magpainum. (See index: inure.) to water animals or fowls. To cause to walk up. Magpaldkad. (See index: ldkad.) To cause or order another to stand Magpatindig. (See index: tindig.) up. XIX. A sense of ordering may be given to roots not having such an idea by inserting a second pa, although it is clearer to use mag with a following infinitive. This second pa (which remains in all tenses) with roots having the idea of ordering signifies to order a person to order another, although simpler forms are generally used. Ex.: Ang capitan ay nagpapainum sa mawjd cabayo (The captain orders the horses to be watered); or, Ang capitan ay nagutltos uminum sa manygd cabayo [same meaning]. (2) Magpapasu'lat ka kay Juan kay Pedro; or, Mag'utos ka kay Juan na magpasuilat siyd kay Pedro (Order Juan to order Pedro to write). XX. The tendency of Tagalog, like all languages, to simplify itself, is shown by the use of the root with pa prefixed, with the significance of a verbal noun. The agent takes the genitive and the object or person acted upon the dative. Ex.: Pabag7qo, "perfume;" pamuti (buti), "holiday or parade appearance;" padald, "burden or what carried;" pahiyas, "jewel;" pamana, "inheritance; " patago, " what hidden." Ito ang patago niyd sa akin (This is what he ordered me to hide). Pautang, "credit." THE PARTICLE " PA. 2 I. This particle has many affinities with magpa, as will be seen by the examples. It reduplicates the first syllable of the root for the present and future tenses, except when sa it attached to and incorporated with it. With roots of place, which require pasa, the first syllable of the particle is reduplicated for these tenses. Na is prefixed to pa in the indefinite past and present tenses with both pa and pasa. This latter particle should not be confounded with roots beginning with sa conjugated withpa. (See tables: tilong.) II. One of the principal significations of pa is to ask oorbeg for in reference to the subject, while magpa is generally applied under like circumstances to the object. Ex.: To ask for protection. To ask for mercy or compassion. To ask for shelter or support. Paampon. PaauA. (See index: aud.) Pakupkup. Kumupkup, to press to the breast or shelter under the wings. 224 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To ask for aid, succor, or a favor. Pasangalang. M1agsangalang, to aid, favor, or succor. To as,,k for defense. Patanqol. Tm~narngol, to defend. To ask for help. Pabtlhong. (See tables: tdlong.) III. At times' pa signifies " to permit" the action indicated by the root "9upon one's self," andI sometimes ''to ask," as above explained. It denotes greater w.illingness by the person affected than magpa. does. Ex.: To consent to be deceived. Paraydl (from dayet). (See index: daq4(. ) To ask to be kissed. Pahal'ik~. (See index: hialik-.) To consent to be whipped. Paharnpt's. (See index: hamnpas.) To consent to be vanquished. Patalo. (See index: t(a10.) To consent to be slapped. Patampal. (See index: tanqpal.) IV. (a) With the adverbs of place, and roots expressing place, pa signifies movemnent to or froin what is denoted by the root. (b) With roots of place sa is added to the particle, foriring posa, which bisyllabic particle reduplicates the last syllable of the particle for the present and future tenses. The initial d of the adverbs changes to r after pa. Ex. (a): Parirni, ''come here; '' parito, ''come here; "paripa~n, ''go there;'' parooo), "go there." (See index: dini, dito, diyan, do~on.) These four adverbs admit the definites i and an. That in i is compounded with ka, forming ika, ik-na. lit may be used if compounded with?oagpa*, signifying "to order to come or go." (See tables andl index: (dit.) Some localities are to be found where the last syllable of the particle is reduplicated with these adverbs of lplace for the present and future tenses, but this is irregular and incorrect. The practice is unknown to the earlier writers. The four adlverbs which have been considered are also f urther conjugated with urn, making infinitives, etc. Ex.: Painarini, puonarito, "to comie here; " pmunariydn, pumatro6,n, " to go there." (b) Pasaba hay, "to go to the house. " (See tables: bahhay. ) Pasabd kid, "to go to the country " (fields); pasada'gat, " to go to sea; " p08sa109, " to go to the. river; " pasabundok-, " to go to the mountains; " pa~sa A~nirica, " to go to America; " poaqa Kastila, "to go to Spain." iXapasaan siya? (Soon ang taRITo niydt?) (Where did he go?) Napatusi~go sa Miaynila (He went to Manila). V. P-a also indicates to say what inay be denoted by the root, but without the plurality indicated by raagpa. Ex.: To say "yes." Pa6o. Pao'o k-a! (Say "yes!") Na To say " no. " To say "no." To say not to wish. To say " devil. " To call "chicky-chicky." paoo ka, so kamlyoal (1)1( you tell him- ''yes?") Padidi. Padili k-a! (Say ''no'') Dili rin (No, indeed); var. dirt. Ang pitiadiri' 'ian; person to whom "gno" is being said. Magpadirl; to say "no" repeatedly. Any pinagdirian; person to whom " no" has been sa'id often. Pahindt'. Pahindi' ka (kay6) (Say ''no''). Paayao. (See index: ayao.) Padiablo. (See index: diablo.) Pakorukihit. VI. Pa, prefixed to roots denoting bodily positions, forms words expressing the position taken. Ex.: Lengthwise; lengthways. Pahabd. Putlin mo it6' nang pahabd (cut this lengthwise). Mahab64, long. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 225 Crosswise; crossways. Pahailang. Lying down; prone (position). P1ahlifL (See index: higa.) Lying Onl the side (position). Patagilid. Lying on the face (position). Patatob. Lying on the back (position). Pat ihayo. (See indlex: tihayod.) On foot; afoot. Pativdiq. (See index: findi'j.) Seated (position). Paulpd. (~See index: upd(.) VII. Pa, prefixed to roots (lenoting articles w%.hich. may be bought, sent, carried, sewnV, left, lent, etc., forms nouns indicating what affected by the action. In comlposition these nouns take the nominative, the agent the genitive and1 thc recipient the dative. Ex.: What bronght. Padald. (See index: dabi.) What borrowed or lent (not money). Pahirain. Io aaams knn katibiqari nimpj (this is what your friend lent mre). WXrhat left as an inheritance. ai~cna'oo. (See index: monom.) What sewn. Potalit. (See index: taM.) VIII. Some roots, such as k-ain, eating; and inoun, drinking, are not clear when used with pa, alone in this sense, and are (conjugated with both the particle p~a and the definite of rnagpar (pa() forming papa. Ex.: Papakalin koa kay Joan, (ask Juan to give you something to eat). Papai mum ka k-ay Toinaht (ask Tonuias to give you somiething to drink). IX. Formerly mapam, with roots indicating relatives, signified to call others by such names. This custom exists to some (degree yet. Ex.: Mo apool, to call " aunt. " M1apanvno, t~o (call " grandfather " (or " grandi other ''). THlE INDEFINITE PARTICLE it"MAGPAKA." I. This particle, which may be analyzed into paka with mag prefixed, generally signifies to (lo, suiffer or voluntarily allow what may be denoted by the root, and has two forms for the (definite, pagpala and paka..Mlagpakaw andl paypaika, form the present andl future tenses in a lpeculiar manner. Thie last syllable, ka, adheres to the root in all tenses, andl pa is redluplicatedl for the present and future. The wag of wiagpaka changes to nag for the past andl present tenses. When pak-a is used with a root it is not divided, the first syllable of the root being reduplicated for the present and future tenses. Pa-ka also retains paygwith verb~sconjugated l)rimarilvywit-h may, forming the p~refix pak-apag. Paka admits in as well as i and an. Roots conjugat~ wih apaka, m-ay have either a reflexive or transitive imeaning, or both, according to the context. II. For the conjugation of roots with nmaypak-a, see the tables:mniatay, buti, sisi, and aJral. III. Some verbal roots conjugated in the foregoing sense by magpaka are: To allow one's self to be insulted; p~atronized. To humble; humiliate or lower one's self. To satiate one's self. To adorn one's self. Magypakaapi. Mlaypakababd. (See index: babd.) Mfagpaka busoy. Ma gpaka buti. Ang kahinhinan ay nagpaJpakabuti sa dalaga (modesty befits a girl). Aug ipinagpapakabuti nang dialagarng iydln ay nang siyo.'y mnapuri (the reason why that girl is adorning herself is to be admired). Magpakadukhd. Af1apakadukhd, to come to poverty. Miagpakagaling. (See index: galing.) To impoverish one's self voluntarily. To improve or reform one's self. 6855-05 1 5 226 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To diminish (voluntarily). To esteem one's self highly. To allow one's self to be killed; (2) to commit suicide. To despise one's self. To repent (deeply). To exert one's self; to make efforts. To enrich one's s~elf. Ma gpakaliit. Maijit, small; little. Miaypakarnahal. (See index: mahal.) Afaypakamatayl. Nagpakamnatay aip tduo kusa. miya (the mnan allowed himself to be killed). Nlaypakamatay/ any taga llapoau sa kaniyany sarili (the Japanese voluntarily killed himself [committed suicide] ). Miaypakasamd. (See indlex: satndt.) Mlaypakasisi. (See index: sisi.) Maypakataipany. Iap~ai yam (pakatapro7ji'n) mo any loob mo (exert yourself; "brace uip"). (See in(lex: tdpaa7.) 3faypakayd roan. (See index: ya'man.) IV. As usual, i stands for cause, reason or instrument of the action with maypaka, and1 an for the lplace or the object, according as the verb for the direct object admits it or not for the direct object. Ex.: To take exact notice. 3faypakatandd. Pakatandaan mo any sinasabi ko sa iy6( (pay exact attention to what I amn telling you). (This word should not be confounded with its homonym tandad, idea of age.) V. The foregoing sense of magpaka generally applies to actions which do not go beyond the subject or to verbs which do not require an object to complete the mleaning; but when usedI with verbs admittingy a direct complement other than the subject or capable of voluntariness, maypaka gives greater force or intention to the root. In this signification the particle admits in, i, and an, the reduplication being generally from. the first syllable of the root, as paka is the usual form of the definite in such cases. Roots conjugated thus must be capable of expressing the idea, of more or less. Pag is retained in this sense with may roots, forming pakapag or paylpaka, as the case may be, and in certain cases paypakapay may be formed. Ex.: To teach earnestly. To have great prudence. To go very slowly. Maypak-aaral. Pakaaralan niny6 any maTyd batA (try to teach the children earnestly). M1aypakapaydral, to study earnestly. Paypakapayaralan nimyo any wikany Taydlog, (try earnestly to study the Tagalog language). Araypakaparmjd~ral, to preach earnestly..Magypaka tbait. Maypak~arahan (from dahan). Mayfpakarahian kany lumalkad (walk very slowvly). Pakarahanin mo any payhila (throw it very deliberately). Dahanan ma iyany yawd ma (do that work of yours slowly [carefully]). M1apakarahan, to slow down; to become quiet. Napakarahan na (it has become quiet already; it has slowed down now). Dumahan, to go away slowly. Maydahan, to go slowly. (See index: dahan.) TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 227 To love greatly. To guard one's self well. To think earnestly, deeply. Magpakagilio. Pinakagigilio kong k.apatid na babaye (my dearly be- loved sister). AMa pakaifi-at. Magpakailsip). Magpakaisipisi'p, t o think very deeply. (See index: I'Sip. ) To arrange well. ~Magpakahi'say. (See index: husay.) To rectify well. Affagpak-afuid. (See index: tuid.) To telnji greatly. Mar gpakatuk-s6. (See index: tuks6'.) VI. By reduiplicating the root, roots capable of expressing the idea of more or less acquire still greater force or intensity with niagpaka. They are generally us~ed in the definite with this construction, and the reduplication does not extend beyond the first two syllables of the root, accordling to the general rule. Ex.: Magpak-adalidalif 4, " to suffer intensely or to endure greatly." Pakaisipisipin mo, " think intensely." Pakasipagsipagin, "take the greatest of care; care for it sedulously." VII. Dropping the ka from pa4-o, there remains pa, which pronounced long and almost as paa, has the same mneaning as paka, but should not be confounded with pa (the definite of rnagpa), pa (the particle), nor withpa, "yet." It is generally used in the imperative. Ex.: Pabuk-s6n rno (open wider [or quicker]). Papalo mo (strike harder). Patap~onan mo (throw it with more force [or quicker]). (See index: Bukds; paib; and tapon). ) VIII. A further use of iaagpaka with nouns or verbs expressing time is to signify to persevere or remain until such time, doing what may be (lenoted lbv the root usedl. This signification admits of in, i, and an. Ex.. To until morning. Afagpakaadrao. (See index: drao.) To until evening. 3fagpakahapon. (See index: hapon.) To all night awake. 3Jiagpakap'Iyat. Aug ipinagpapakapliyat ko'y itong gawd, (This work is the cause of my having to remain awake all night). Itong silid it6'y ang pinagpakapuyatan ko (This room is the place where I remained awake [or watched] all night). IX. When an accidental or fortuitous action is to be expressed with rnagpak-a the g is dropped, making mapak-a, an analogous particle to m~a. Pinak-a, formed f rom. pak-a and in, should not be confounded with. pinaka, used in a very different sense. (See index: 1pinak-d.) Ex.: To multiply. M1apak-arami (from darni). Applied toanimals,etc. (Seeindex: dami.) To come to poverty. Mapakadukhd. (See index: dukhd.) To grow greatly. Afapakalakit. (See index: laki.) To be delayed more than usual. Afapakaladwig. THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE "CMAKI." I. This particle, known as the sixth to Spanish grammarians, has paki for the definite, and reduplicates the second syllable (ki) of the particle for the present and future tenses. The pluperfect and future perfect tenses are wanting. Mfak-i changes to naki for the past and present tenses, and paki takes in for the same, forming pinaki. 11. The principal signification of maki with roots capable of expressing companionship, etc., is joining with, accompanying another, interference or intermeddling in what may be denoted by the root. III. Msaki n-lay be combined with urn, mag, man, ma gpapa, and pa, as well as with itself (paki). There are some verbs which resemble mak-i in form, 228 TAG.ALOG LANGUAGE. such as palkind bang, pakiniy, etc., which are classed as urn verbal forms, and should be carefully distinguished. Ex.: To join with or interfere in writing. To join with in lplay or gaining. To join inl fishing with a casting net (ailed '' dala.'' To join with in saying ''ye~-! To join in a conversation uni'nvited. Mak-is dlat (f rein suminidat). Ipinakikisdtlat ko ilod doo'n (1 am putting this in so it may be written there). [-yang 1/( fUsu lot ay paikailiatan mo nitdJ (Put this in to be written with those letters). M1alapagp~astulat; to join (or interfere with) in ordering to write (from rnaypasitlat). Ma~k'ipa(glard (froiy rnaglaro'; to play or gamible; see tables: laro'). Also: Padkipa(glaroan )ioo si Pedro (Play with Pedro). (With pa) P'apakilaroin mo si Pedro sa kani 'id' (Tell [make] Pedro play with him). Makoiparulala (from mandala; to fish. f or a living thus). Dumnala; to fish (occasionally) with a ''dala.'' 3laydala, to use a " data. " Makadala; to be able to catch anything with a "dala." Mlak'ipao o (f romn 1pado; to say " yes." Mlak-ipaki(tsap (from makidsap). IA'. See tables:?ounmral; mnagairal, and sitmakay,. V. Maki by itself admnits only of i and an in the definite. Irepresents the reason, cause, or object of the action, andl an the person interfered or meddled with, or joined, accompanied, etc. For the conjugation withi see the tables: smilat and homudid. For the (lefinite with an see mayglardI. VI. In is only usedl with viaN in comimination with waaypa. (pa). Ex.: Papak-ifgaw~in voo ang alila mao sa mnaiga' a'uooi iyn (Tell your servant to join those men in their task). See also aak-ipa glatro in Paragraph III, preceding, and tables. VII1. Some roots conjugated with the principal signification of niaN are: To join or meddle with teaching. To imick a quarrel. 17ro claim a part in; to participate. To carry along with; to join; to interf ere. To embark with. To thrust oneself into the company of another. To thrust oneself into a dlispute or argu iment. To join with in weeping. To join (or mieddle) in poleasure. Ma 1 u-iircd. (See tables.) Ma kpaga'mal, to join or meddle with studying. (See tables.) MlakipaiTi'16ral, to join or meddle with preaching. M3a kipagdoay. (See index: duay.) Mak-iramay (from ddrnay). fakihatid. (See tables.) Afak4isakcay. (See tables.) Mak-isarnta. JMakitalo. (See index: talo.) 1a kitai~jis. (See index: tafi-jis.) Makitud'. (See index: tual.) VIII. -,n is sonmetiines sufixed to roots conjugated with maNi to express intensity of the idea denoted by the root. Peag is generally retained in expressions of this class. Ex.: To mock greatly; to minake, fun of, Mak7.ipagbiroan. (See index: bird'.) maliciously. To join eagerly in play or gambling. Ma kipaglaroan. (See index: lard'.) To thrust oneself into an alterca- Makipaygsagut(mo. Ano't nak-ik'ipaylsation; to answer with vehemence. gutan sa kapidbdhay mol (Why TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 229 To thrust oneself into a conversation; to interrulpt a report. To hate intensely; to (letest. are you getting into an altercation withi your neighbor?) Strntagut; to answver; to reply. Maikipag.salitamo. (See index: salitld.) Makipagtaiiiman (frons taiiirn). Not to be confounded with its homonyni1, tatim, ''to sowN.'' Nakikitanuwin si Jotan kay Pedro (Juan detests [hates] Pedro intensely). Ilouag k n;i a p ~ t u n ' sa kapidbdhiay ma (IDo not (detest [hiate] your neighbor so). IX. The asking for such articles of food, etc., as are generally exchanged among neighbors for cooking and household work is expressed by niaki, wvith thieroot (lenotiiig whatiimav be asked for. A small qUan1tity is always undlerstoodl. The cause, is expressed with 'i and the, person asked by an, should the definite 1)e used. In is use(l1 only in comb~ination with magpa (pa(). Ex.: To ask for a little wineC. liukl (from /ac) This word is To ask for a few coals (tire). To ask for a little salt. To ask for a little rice. froin the, Arabic araq, fromn araqa, "to sweat.; lperslpire. " It is found in English as arracko. Af`ak-iapiiy. Makiasin. (See index: asin.) Makibiga's. Nakikibigals ak6o sana sa iny1 6, p6 (1 would ask you for a little rice, sir). ASino ang iinakikib igd's mui '? (Who are you asking it for?) Akinq ipiuakikib (igs ang ina, kongy may sakit (I am asking for the rice for mny mnother, who is ill). Pa(id! (Is that so!) X. With roots verbalized into actions, maki dlenotes asking that the,action expressed b)y the root be done for the subject. Ex.: To ask another to reach something. 3fakidJbot. (See indlex: dibut. To thank for. M[akith'~IJt (f romn Iruniruii; to request; see index: lPt-gi~). XI. With notuns donoting partition miaki signifies to ask for what may lie denoted by the ro)ot; and with ordinal numbers, in using which the initial letter i, is dtropped, miak-i signifies to ask for the part designated by the ordinal used. Ex.: To ask for an inheritance. Makimiana (see index: mvana). To ask for a part or piece of any- Ma kipis4ang. M1afyp'isa(ng; to break thing- (as ibread). up and divide a cracker or bread. 31agpixang kit/4 (let us break it up and divide it). To ask for a fifth, tenth, etc. M1akik-alim)a; miakik-apuo. XlI. With roots olenoting work which may be joined in by snore than one, wak.i somietimies, expresses the idea of asking to join in such work. Ex.: Si Ju~no aY vakikahta/iy no 6Ikin (Juan asked me to help him in getting some, water). The particle ka(, expressing companionship, is prefixed to the roo)(t. XIII. Soume roots commencing with b, p), s, and t chbange with mik-i in a similar manner as with roan, when used in the signification of " to ask, request," etc. Ex.: 230 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To ask for news. M1ak-imalitd (from baiitd; see index: balitdl). To ask for a passage (as on a vessel). Mfak-inakay (f rom saka y). XIV. W~ith roots signifying nationality, race, state, condition, occupation, profession, etc., mak-i is sometimes used to signify that one acts like, bears himself like, or resembles what is (denoted by the root. This idea, however, is generally otherwvise expressed, as some roots used thus are not clear unless fully explained by the context. XV. With 'ma, maki has a neuter meaning similar to that borne by na, alone. Ex.: To appear like a noble (casually). To act like or resemble amn A merican. To act like or resemble a Spaniard. To act like or resemble a Tagalog. To act like or resemble a person. To act like a woman. To act like a manl; to runl after men. To act like a beast. To conform to iii customs. Napakirnahal. iNapakik-imnuahl ang alipin (The slave looks like a nob~le [has become so casually]). Mlakiainericano. illakicastila. Mak-itagailog. Nakik-itagallog itong atdo sa 1pm yungusap (This manl resembles a Tagalog in his manlner of sjmeakirig). 3ak-italuo. Namkkit~tuo arnq a tof 0(aogoy) (The inonkey acts like a Ipersoi). 3fakibabaye. Nakil'be beye si Juan (Juan acted like a woman). This also means to run after womien. Makilalal-i. N~akilaleki itong babayeng it(; (This woman acted like a manl). Jfak-iheiyop. Na/.ihkV pop ilong tiuo if,,. (This man acted like a b~east). Afak-ioqlali. TILE I NDEFINITE' PAjrTICLE 4MAK.I I. MIagka, the ninth particle of the Spanish writers upon. Tagalog, may 1)e analyzed into ee!! amnd he, one, of the definites of mia. This p~article genierallyvexpresses the iMea of having (or being) what was not had or possessed (or existed as a state) before. As a rule, soagla refers to condlition, or state, while moian refers more to the action. by which a state or condition is b~rought about. The second syllable of the particle is reduplicated for the present and future tenses, while m changes to n for the lpast and present, following the usual rule. There are a few exceptions, the first syllable of the~ root being reduplicated in some words. (See tables: tep) I leflnite expresses the cause or reason of the action, wh ile 00n stands for either place or person, according to the nature of the action. (See tables: s'tang. ) Some very correct and widely used expressions are miade by using an with magka. Ex.: closely. To amuise one's self. Uniaainao. M ahle okormg slfikat pagk-akaanirnavan (There will be no place where I will be able to look at it [inspect it; study it out]). Maigkalibang. lVWe/a $41/eu! pinafykalibangen (There was mne oplace where they could amnuse themselves). Malilibeng, to be aniusedl; diverted. (See index: pisan; tipon.)' TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 231 Some roots conjugated inl the foregoing signification with magka are: To have children. To pos~sess prudence. To have crocodiles again (as a river). To be laden with fruit. To have (there). To have reason. To be lucky; to have hick. To h ave rice againi (al so to hiave much rice). To err; to sin. To forbid. To have money again. To be ill. To have enough. To have gray hair. To owe a debt. Mfagkaanak. 3fagkaba it. 3lagkabitaya. Nagkakabuayaa ilwqon 'log (This river is infested with crocodiles again). Magkabufi-ya. N-alk-abuiTya ma itonf/ kahoy na itOr (Has this tree borne fruit alreadly?) Hlfhidt pa nagkabaThga (As yet it has not borne f ruit). Marqk-aro6n. (See index: do6n.) M[agk.a i-sip. Nagkakaisip na idong batanql it(W (H1as this child reason yet? [i. e., has it yet arrived at the age of reason]). M1aflk-apalad. Afagk-apdla y. M1agkasala. JMagkalkasalaL. 3fagk-asalapit. Magkasak'-it. Ang ipagkasakit, the cause of illness. Ano6 ang ipinagk-asakit mo.9 (What m-ade yOil ill?) Pasaktin, to lbe pained. Arny papa gkasaktin, one ill from his own fault, also a sick lperson. Magkasiyd. TIaid p4, hindi nagkakasiyd sa kardyanq pagkabitioay (No, sir; he does not get enough to live on). Mfagkad ban. Magkaritavg. (See tables: d6tang.) II. The casual, accidental, or chance assemblage of many people or things, even thiough ii mnaterial, is somnetitnes expressed by r'oagk~a. The particle denotes a plurality of subjects in such cases, as opposed to a plurality of acts, as expressed by some other particles. Ex.: To quarrel (as two or more). Mayk-aducay. (See index: dIuay.) To be equal; to coincide; to accord. MIalk-aayon. To meet casually; to gather (as a Magk-asaldtbong. (See index: salidcrowml). bong. ) To assemble casually (as a crowd). Mfakawsama. (See index: sania.) To meet casually (as a cr-owd). Mfagkatipon. (See index: tipon.) IJJ. Mfaaka also indlicates universality or plurality of subjects suffering from or affected in some way by what is denoted by the root. Ex.: To suffer from a typhoon. Magkabagydj. To suff er from an epidemic of small- Mfagkabuliltong. pox. To suffer from a famine (also for M1a gkagdtuin. many to be hungry). To suffer from a conflagration. M1 agk4-asdnog0. To enjoy a holiday.Afktm. To have a riot or tumult. Mgaud To be squeezed or pressed inl a crowd. Jlaykadagdn. 4 232 232 ~~TAGA LOG LANGUAGE. IV. Another use of nmaglka is to express an unintentional or casual error in what miay be notedl by the root. The imperative is made with 7mio' d or bokd (q. v.). Ex.: To say one thing accidentally for another. To err in counting. To equivocate accidlentally. Magkaitd. Nagkaiba' siya' (He accidentally said one thing for another). Mo1gkohlmang..Magkowoli.Nagk-airoolf ak (i 6 equivocatedl a ccid(ent all y). JRoooa vioooq akal(,oin ak-o'y ~/ okawoouil (Ion't you think I made any mistake). V. Mfagk-a is also lisedl to express self-deception by t~he sight, hearing, etc., the (lefinite past tense wvith ((n suffixed being taken as the root. For the present tensc, the first sy, liable of the root is reduplicatedl and not the second syllable of the particle. Ex.: To be deceived by the hearing. To be (leceivedl by the sight. M1alk-arioejow. Nagkarir~i?77yan ak6 (My hearing deceives.me). (See0 inldex:dii. MpA/lto.. (See index: k-itd).) VI. A further uise of moqfka; is -with the vin infinitive of somle verbal roots andl some adlverbs of place, -with -which infinitives lnaglka expresses the idea of making the said movement or going to or fromn the lplace indicatcd. by the adverb) for somre lparticular reason or cause. Ex.: To follow (or obey) for a particul~ar Mo1gfkwseiownod (from s000(1). Also cause or reason. to follow wherev-er another may go. (See indlex: s~mol.) To be here for a particular cause or Moag4adawito. (See index: (1lao.) reason. VII. Doublingy the root intensifies the meaning with miagka in s-omte (cases. Ex.: To be very late or tardly. To be broken into very small pieces. Mog lo ablomt l inaml n. Nagkak-abalornba'lao( ka (You are very late [tardy]). 3J(t!/k11,a(!eogl(tq((rs((g (from l((nsag). Lbowos($og, to break anything into smnall Dieces. To be finished or concludled com- Jlfogkoltfuiluto (fromt ltids). pletely. To be completely broken uip (as a ilq opobajatdpoaiei (fromt po(tid; see rope or cordl). index). To be, completely destroyed..lrogl a,4rotsir (f romn.sira, see indlex). To be torn into tatters (as clothes, iqi($oagwdng(from 'windetc. ).(o) VIII. Sometimes kaw, the definite of $00a, combines with p~ay to denote the source of something. (See index: siro THE, INiDEFINITE PARTICILF "M AG IN." I. 31yn which Minguella, thinks a " disguised liassive " in conception redllplicates the gi of the last syllable of the particle for the presemnt and future tenses. It also changes?n t~o n for the past and lpres-emt imlefinite. it expresses the conversion or transformnation, either graduial or sudden, of omme thing into another, as a general rufle, the root being thiat into which the other thing is converted or transfornied. Jlaayin is also used to express TAGALOG LANGITAGE. 233 such idleas as " to beget," etc. Being a neuter lparticle generally there is no imnlerative in such cases, as there can lbe no volition in the action excelpt with personal pronouns. II. For slow, self-converting processes umn is generally used, but in some cases the use of wagin is correct. Besides the indefinite the definites with iand an exist. (See tables: (i1ak.) As magin generally denotes a state or (condition, it adinits ika with some roots, and in combination with pa, the definite of mnagpa, it also admits in with others. (See tables: daipat.) III. As will be noted, magin is commonly used to express such acts as the turning of wine into water by miraculous agency, etc., as well as natural processes. Some of the roots usually conjugated with magin are: To be converted into wine. To be converted into gall or bile. To be turne(1 into stone; to become lpetrifie(l. To be converted into vinegar. To be lbegotten. To be made man. To become a Tagalog. Ma1giruiilak. (See tables: aliak. ) Afaginapdo6. Nagiginapd6 ang 6king bibig (my mouth tastes like gall). 3faginbato6. Aug asa~va 'ni Loth ay naginbatong asin (the wife of Lot became a rock of salt). 3raginsukM. (See tables: snkd.) Afaqinanak (from anak, "child"). Nagianaak- ni Abrahamn si Isaac; at vayinartak ni Isaac si J1acob; at naginanak ni Jacob si Jiudd at kaniyang wa,7yga kapatid (AXbraham. begat Isaac; and Isaac begat Jacob; andl Jacob begat Judas and his brethren)-Matth. II, 2. M1agintaluo. Ang anak- nang JDios ay nagintanlo (the son of God was made man). (But if volition is included other particles or expressions must be used.) Aug anak nang Dios ay nagkatauang tuiuo (the son of G'od assumed the form of man). Magintaflalog. Nagigintdigalog ang capitan sa p)ai7Ta?Tgjt'tsap (the captain resembles (or seems to be) a Tagaloog by his speech). IV. It should lie noted that vagin in the past tenses is the only sense which can really b~e saidl to denote comnllete conversion, etc., the present and future tenses conveying the idea of ''seems to be,'' "may be," and ''might be,'' respectively. V. 11yi is also us.edl in a neuter sense to express the assumption of office, states, conditions of mind, morals, or body, etc., if intention is not meant., in which case other Iparticles are used. To becom.i '' presidlente.'' To become just or virtuous. To become a miser. To become worthy. Marginpresidente. Naginpresidente si Got Simeon at sa/ed nagingobernador (Don Simeon became presidente and afterwards governor). ilaginba~nal. Maginraarabnot (from mardmot, miszer; see dcimot). Magind(~at (from d~lpat; see tables: dd~pa). Mfar6pat, fair; just; deserving. Karaptan, merit; deserts. Ang ik-apaginddipat, the reason or cause of being worthy. 234 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To be converted into an animal. To become, an habitual litigant (barrator). To become (leaf. To become blind. To become dumb. M1agirnhlopo. Mayclhayop, to sell, deal in, or raise animals. Jfa?/opan, corral for animals; pen. Kahayopan, brutishness. Anyf pagk-ahoyop), brutality. Maffiipalat6.sap. Aagftnpalavsap si(l/ (he has becomne an habitual litigant). M2lagodnbigi. Ar-aginh~ulag. 31agjnpil~a. VI. With somie roots viag~in mnay express the idea of "to be." Ex.: To be the motive or cause. To befall. To turn out to be true. To be a servant. afg in da /i ~in. Ito' any nagindahil4dn (this was the reason). 116 aaq naffigindah~lolon (this is the cause). 3 faginp ala(1. A lA l O(J l n ia'aid~ ko?' (X NNhat wN-ill my lc e [What will })efall me?]) Mayintotio. Xayqintotojo anysinahivio sa 6kin (what you told me turned out to b~e true). 31fapi;1idu. -Itony hwto itoj'y?oaifligirnalilda niiiil (this man will be your servant). VII. The idea of volition is sometimes admissible, with moagin when used Iwith personal pronouns. Ex.: To be thine. To be Mine. 3 Tg i niy 6. J- oyag 6k-in. A,,/W(;y t)ia gyiqg n y o't ik-6o ay nlagiygaaki-.(I will be yours and you will be mine). VIII. (a) Miagin is also used in combination with the interrogative adverbs iidn? (how many?) and miagkmoo? (how much'?) and with the answers thereto. (1h) With viagin Jprefixed to a number and na followingo it the completion of the period named is (lenotedl. Mlayi)n expresses the idea of "about" in these cases. Ex.: (a).Jfayi!iniI~n sii6~? (about how many will there be?) 31ayigiiailaln any pnurorooO? (about how many will go there?) 3fagigbidalaivaig puo (about twenty). J)ltgoyiybooaytano WV6 (How much will this be worth?)I (1h) Kunyg i)maivi~sany budn na (After about a month). Nang magyiadariy crao (after a few days). Kuny rnaginsanytao'n na (after about a year). IX. Mayin may be used sometimes in the sense of "be it" or 'eith er''-' r.)'' Ex.: f14 qinit6;?uagyniywtn (he it this or- be it that). Miaginlalaki siyad; maypinbabaye (be it man or be it woman). 1a,ginsiTgayo'n; maginbudkas ay paroroon ak6 (either to-day or to-morrow I will have to go there). THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE itMAGSI." I. This particle, which changes initial ma to n for the indefinite past and present, reduplicates the last syllable of the pairticle for the present and future tenses. It has all three definites, andl may be combined w~ith all other particles, which are placed between it and the root, except waka and ma definite in the sense of power, which lprece(Ie it. (See tables: aohs; gawd; tapon, and kvha. ) It has no other signification than to (lenote a plurality or universality of subjects in connection with the verbal action. _Natural ly there is no singular n umber. N~(jd may be inserted after the first two letters of the particle to indicate an extreme degree of plurality. See tables: parydral. Ex.: To teach (many). M1aysiaral. Mfaysipagalral, to study (many). Any maiJiyd batlk dito sa TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 235 To corflf-s (many). Togo out (inany). To look; behioldl, etc. (inany). To enter; come in (mnany). To laugh (many). bayafl iio'y magsisipagdral va lahmat (all the children here in this town are studying). Ang maiTqa WaMi vitonl! escuielaihan nai;galqsisipagaral (all the children in this school are learning [or studying]). Maysimpangdral, to preach (many). Mu~yj6gsiparTgdra1, to preach (by a great number). Mwjgsipaqyciopisal. To hear confessions (many Ipriests(; magsipatypacuamisa. (See index: cumpisal.) Magsilaba's. lags-ilabdis kagong lahmat na naririto sa 100o) (all of you who are inside go out). Magsipaw~od. Bdkit ipinagsisipano'od nila' (mg ddyot igang uiaK7~d Mb'o iy~in? (Why are those men looking at thle sea for? ) Maigsipaisok. 3Mag~sipa'sok ka~jong lahat na nariri yang walany gawd11: (Come in all of you who are out there mloing nothing [or without work]). Magyntaua. THE INI)EFINITE PARTICLE "4MAGPATI.") I. This particle is little used, and besides the usual change of m to n for the past and present indefinite reduplicates the,~ecoadlsyllable (pa) of thle particle for the present and future tenises. it is used with roots expressing the idea of motion or positions of the body, andl signifies to perform such m-otions or take such positions voluntarily, and with briskness or suddenly. If such sudden motion occur or lposition be assumed involuntarily, the g is dropped, forming mnapati, equal in meaning to mapa. The definites with i (ika) in the sense of cause, and an (han) for place exist. (See tables: luhod.) Ex.: To prostrate one's self quickly. Magpatirapd (from. dapd). To lie down quickly; to throw one- Maypatihigd. Magpatihigyd ka (lie self down. down quickly). To fall on one's knees. Magpatiluhtod. Any ikapagpatiluhtod: To turn the back abruptly. To spring to thle feet. To sit down suddenly. the cause or reason for falling on the knees. Any pagpatduhorain: the place where or person knelt to. (See tables.) illagpatitalikod. To do the same without intention, mapatitalikod. Maypatitindig. Naypapatitindig siyd (he is springing to his feet). Napapatitindig ako' (I sprang to my feet unconsciously). Mifagpatiupo6. To sit (town suddenly without meaning to: mapatiup6'. THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE "tMANHI."~ I. This particle beside the change from mn to n for the past and present indefinite, reduplicates the second syllable (hi) of the particle for the present and future tenses. This particle is used to express verbs of searching for minutely, for those expressing the idea of removing (lirt, etc., fromt the face or body, and for miscellaneous ideas which will be better seen from the examples. Certain letters beginning roots are modified by manhi, the same as they are by man. The definites with i and panhi, in the sense of 236 236 ~~TAGALOG LANGUAGE. cause, with an and either panhi or hi in the sense of place, and with in and either pa/thi or hi for ordinary definite sentences exist. (See tables: matay; mailay; tifigo.) IJ. A reciprocal form of many of the verbs conjugated with man/ti may be formed with an suffixed or with miaghi in lplace of mian/ti, retaining an as a suffix, however. Ex.: To search for carefully; to glean. M11an/timalay (fromn pdlay, " un husked rice"). Panhimalayin (himala yin) nto any iyong kakanin (look for [glean] what you have to eat). Any guturn ay any ip~inan/ti/timailay niyad (hunger is the cause of his gleaning). Ang b~i kid ni Juan ay angpinant/timalayan niyd (hie was gleaning [he gleaned] in the field of Juan). Af1anhinuka' (from tukad). To peck here antd there (as search of graimin). To search for grains of mminerals. To wash one's face; to) reino smuildges, etc. To comb the mustache. To pick the teeth. To clean the ears. To clean the eyes. To treat swelled eyelids themn. To clean the nails. To cleanse fromt head lice. To follow by trailing; to memory (niet..). To rebel; revolt. To avenge or take revenge. To peddle; to sell bad goo(] To act like a child. a bird in netals or 3fan/tim,6los (from p~Itos, "all of one color"). Jtilo~s also means the grains themselves. ye stains, M1an/i hhnos (from lMios, 'stain, smnudge"). The root hildunos is from this com-bination. Man/inintisay (from mnisay, ''ninstache"). fan/tiniJ'{ia (from tiZg~a., "what adlheres to the teeth". See tables). M21a,/tihitoli (from tutuli, ''earwax''. M1anhitnutt (from rnutd', "secretion of the eye").or wash Man/tihintokt (from pokt6), "swelling or inflammration. of the eyelids"). Pa otokto/hin, a person frequently affllicted thus. Moohid iyokI-k (from koko6, " nail, claw'' )..Man/tiiT~ytu (from kutu, ''head louse "). M-art/ti-gtT~u/hn or m-ay/tirijnltuhaoi, to cleanse each other thus. Manhinorma, to cleanse of body lice. Toninahin, person afflicted thus. hold in Man/tia/iaoJs (from bakd6s, "footprint, sign, trail, etc."). Bakasin mio at naifjato no '/ptk (follow' it, here is the footprint). Miaf/timak-asan, to follow each ot~her on the trail, etc. MAan/tin~tysiko (fromn baysik, "cruel, tyrannical''). ~a~n/tigautdi (fromt yanti, ''reward, premiutm ''). Pinan/tiyai-ti ni/ta siya' (they avenged hfin [her]). Sila any panhi/igiantihan niya' (he will take revenge on them). M40oAlanin/ko (from /otko). Alan/iti oosiiiom, (from mofintis ''chiltl'). Mo~stntis Ma itV (Is this your child?) -)alm. Man/timdacla (fromn p4/ad, "palm"). To tell t1-he fortune by the I TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 237 To pretend to work, or to work without purlpose. To be uneasy on account of solitude. To mne(Idle; intrude. To faint; swoon. To suspect evil. To beat about the bush. To change color or the expression of the face. To feel badly for lost work. To embark in t~he boat of another. To exert one's self. Ma rdiinaiiday (from pandayI, ''smith''). PawidaY wiko, great talker, 'wordlsiith.'' MfaihinimaJgldo (from 1panglao., sadness, fear, or uneasiness caused by being alone). Miapaigido na bdhay (a lonely [solitary] house). MAa~nhiniasok (from pdsok). Ifouag mong panhimnasukon ang bi41hay nang ibang mangad taluo (don't m-eddle with what passes iii the life of other people). Mfanhiimntag (from matay, ''idea of dying." See tables: matay.).Jaohooutila (frorm pul, ''idea of not believingy and blaming another") Pild is the idea of redlness. Mon/d iinilig (from piling, ''bank, shore''). Houng 5110 akonf/ pans-i linggrnilifigan (Don't beat ab(,ut the, bush with me; don't try any red tape on ine). Mlan/i irnuitt(fromnput, 'i(Iea of whiteness'' ). Manhinabiang (from sdyang). Mfanhinakay (from sakay, "boat, vessel'' ). Ma~nhtindpang (from tapang). THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE "MiINAGSA." I. As usual, this particle has the past and present indefinite take n in place of mt, while the s~ec~ond syllable (sot) of the particle is reduplicated for the pr~esent and future tenses. All three definites exist. See tables:, insik. The signification of this lparticle is imitation, adoption or followving the customs, dress, or language of another people. It is little used, maki being more customary. iEx.: To follow American customs. To follow IBicol customs. To follow Visayan customs. To follow SpanIshcso s To follow Spoanos customs. To follow Mlorao customs. To follow Tagaog customs. Magsaamericano. Mia~gsabikol. Al-agsabisaya. tliagsacastila. Magsailoko. Mifagsakamorosarn. Mag~satagilog. Aug sinasatagdlog, what followed or imitated, etc.; Ang ipagsatagailog, the reason or cause of such adoption. Pag is dropped with in. IL..2agsa; isa; as in the expressionsrniagsadrao ka nang damit; put the clothes in the sun: isahaui~gin mo itong baro'; hang this shirt in the wind, etc., are not from this particle but from sa, the preposition "in," conjugated with mag and i respectively. III. The signification of magsa may be expressed by other particles than maki, among them being magka and ma with an suffixed. Ex.: 8 Jfuan ay numgkaka~stiladn (Juan is very Spanish in h is ways [speech, etc. ]). Nat atagalogan siya (He is very Tagalog in his ways). By doubling the root, if a bisyllabic one, or the first two syllables thereof if longer, a diminutive meaning is imparted. Ex.: Natatagatagalogan siyd (He is somewhat Tagalog in his ways). 238 TAGALOG LANGUAG1E. THE INDEFINITE PARTICLE "tMNAGKAPA."y This particle changes initial rn, to o for the past and present indefinite, and reduplicates the 1(1st syllable (pa) of the particle for the present and future tenses. The sole use of the particle is to express, prefixed to roots denoting positions of the body or mnotions of the parts thereof, the involuntary remaining in such position, etc., as the result of fright, surprise, or other violent emotion. The definites with i, to express the cause, and with an, to express place, exist. (See tables: msitlai.) Ex.: To remain with staring eyes. Magkapadilat. Dumilat, to open the eyes. Aladilat, to be open (as the eyes). Syn., rmagkapaioilat, to remain with the eyes open. Alrg ipatqkap7a~iooilat, thiecause of remaining with -staring eyes. Ang pagka))(naltan, the place of remaining thus. To be left with the mouth open; to 31agk-apafTijar?7gd, from?TgarT jd. Ngustand with open mouth. Illat go, to ol)ef the mouth. To'stand showing the teeth (as an 3fagkapal~gisi (from ii7jisi). animal, etc. THE INI)EFINITE PARTICLE itMAGKAN" I. This particle takes n in the past and, present indefinite in place of sol, and has the peculiarity of reduplicating the initial syllable of all roots conjugated by it. For the present and future tenses the second syllable (ka) of the particle is reduplicated in a similar manner to the reduplication of the gi of mnagin. (See tables: MOh.) M1agkans signifies primarily the involuntary flowing out of the secretions of the body, and has the definites of i for the cause and an for the place. 1n a metaphorical sensevmagkan is also used to express involuntary emotions, actions, etc., as will be seen by the examples: To bleed. To sweat from fear or illness. To slaver; to drool. To weep or shed tears unconsciously (as from a wood fire). To blush. To undress or lose the clothes (involuntarily). To overflow; to exceed. To drop off. To burst into laughter. To be stunned by a blow. ila~gkandudugo'(frorndugo', "blood'"). Magk-anpapalwis (from pabcis). XAagk-anlaldway (from ladway, " saliva"). MAagkanluula'a (from Mluh, " tear"). Aiiagkanhihtiyd (from hiyd). Kahiyadhiy', a shameful thing. M~agkanhiohobo'. Aagkakanhohobo& si Juan., nang pagtaua (,Juan is shaking his clothes off with laughter). Afagkanlalabis. Linabisan mo ang utos ko so 'iy6' (You exceeded m-y orders to you). Afagkanlalaglag. Aiiagkantataua. Magkantitilap. COMBINATIONS OF PARTICLES. The combining of various particles is called " transcendency " by the writers upon Tagalog, and may be said to have the following characteristics: With two exceptions, double or triple combinations of particles prefixed to a root demand that the one immediately before the root take the definite form. (See tables, duat; al~k. ) First exception. Some roots conjugated by sniag and rnagka admit urn. (See tables, pilit; dali; sunod.) TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 239 Second exception. The particle mak-ap recedes other particles, a property also possessed by Maysi, except when in combination with maka, which goes before maysi in such cases. (See tables, laro'; gawd; hlufloq; dito; alis. It must further be borne in mind that roots which are primarily conjugated lby may retain pag as a lprefix invariably, as do also those roots differing in meaning with urn and mag. THE DESIGNATION OF PARTICLES. For convenience of reference to the Spanish works and also to the work of Humiboldt, the numbers given by the early writers to the various lparticles modifying roots are of use. They are: 1st. uln. No (lef. 10th. Mayin. Pa gin. 2d-. May. Pay. 11th. Maysil. Paysi. 3d. Ma1(n. 1'an. 12th. Magsa. Pagsa. 4th. Maka...a..... Ka. 13th. M1a nhIi. Panhi. 5th. Mfagpa. Paygpa. 14th. May9paka.. Pagpaka.. 6th. Maki. Paki. 15th. Maypali. Paypati. 7th. Pa. Pa. 16th. Maygkapa. Pagkapa. 8th. M1a. K....... Ma. 17th. Magkan. Paykan. 9th. Mfagk-a. Payka. ITn, i and an are the three particles always accompanying the definite. THE PARTICLES itKAPAG"2 AND diKAPAGKA."Y These particles are much used in Tagalog to express the ideas given in the following examples. The agent takes the genitive (or possessive) case and the object or effect of the action the accusative. Ex.: When my father left, I left also. Kapagalis nang dikiny arnd'y ako'y unygnalis din. After he finished his work, he came Kapagkatd pus niya' nany kani yang to where I was. yawd' Iy p~inaritoh an niyad ak6. THE PARTICLES "4PAG"7 AND "PAGKA" The same expressions as the above may also be rendered by pay and pagka. Ex.: When my father had gone away, they Payal's ditonanygdking am'y si yang arrived. paydaftsny nild. When it strikes twelve, we will rest. Pagtuytuy nany a' las doce ay maypapahi77iyd iayo. After you pay your respects to him, Paybat'l mo sa kaniyd'y parini ka. come here. After I eat, I shall go for a walk. Paykakain ko'y ako'y maypapasial. THE PARTICLE "tPINAKA," This particle, prefixed to roots, signifies to be held or reputed in what inay be expressed by the roots. It may also mean " number of times made " in some cases. Ex.: Rice is considered to be the bread of Any kanin ay siyany pinakatinadpay the Tagalogs. nany rnai-gyd tayadlog. We regard you as a parent. Kay6' po6'y pinakamagsilang namin. He is regarded as their leader. Siyad any pinakapun6 nila'. 240 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. FORMATION-S OF NOUNS FROM ROOTS. Nouns are formed in various manners in Tagalog fromt roots. I. Some nouns are formed by prefixing tunpag to the root. Ex.: Mocker; scoffer. 3fapagbirci. I Respectful person. 3falpagpitagan. Generous Ipersorl. M,1apaf1lnyaya. Destructive person. Mapagsi'rd. Scoffer; hoaxer. Mapaglibak. Proud; arrogant Jfap agpalaI6. person. II. Palid prefixed to roots forms other nouns. Lx.: Quarrelsome person. Palawabt!. Blasphemer. Palasumpci. 1)runkard. P'alaacam111. Barrator (litigant to P'alausap. Glutton. J'alakain. excess). Loving, (amnorous4) J'aiasintaci. Boaster; great talker. P)alawi kit. lperson. Some of the above miay he v-erhalized lbv changing the initial p to n or mi. Ex.: Xaiakain si?'~,. (he became a glutton). Nuialainum~ si,1im (he is hecomning a drunkard). JMalalawihit siyd( (lie will become a boaster). This is now provincial. I11. Some nouns of the classes under con-sideration are formed by prefixing nua either to the imperative or future of the root, as combined with inl. E'X.: Friendly person. Ma(ibiginl..Amorous p)erson. Ihiiroyioi; niasiitah in. IDisobedient Iperson. Masua iin (fromn sidoy). Obedient person. Jfasmlor('a (froin.srood). A jolly person. Mcatauaoitii (from taua). An affectionate person. Mawlilihi-t. A timid, hashful person. 3fa(hihtiyi'n (fromn hiyci). A forgetful person. Jifaliiiiortin (from- limo~t). A pleasant person. Mfaidai'ogcin (fromt lugocl). A sorrowful person. Moiainoo bo~yin (from laur bay). A delicate, sickly lperson. ilfascaaktin (fromi.sakil). A timid person (cowardly). if-atatakcrtin (from tik-ot). IV'. Other nouns indicating occujpations-, professions, trades, etc., are formed by man with the future tense of the indefinite. See list of such at end of section three. V. Nouns indicating a person suffering from a chronic (lisease or fault are to be found formed by suffixing 'in to the root denoting such disease or fault. (See Par. XXIII, inl.) These nouns may 1)e verbalized by in. ELx.: ASiyay hinihikad (he suff ers from asthma). ~Sia~y ti'nctamlad (they are lazy). VI. Some nouns with an idea of lplace inherent are formed with the future tense of some roots with aii. Lx.: T'gabonncmeey buyn place (from bacin). P-agh~ibinyagan), bap~istry (from binyiag). Poypopo)tayain, abbatoir. Place of execution, P'agbibi1)twty(tn (fromn biuoy). VII. Somte nouns indicating occupation are formed by tinga (combineci with pag (tagapay) before a root. Ex.: icayapoiglnodacm, sentinel, watchman. Syn.: Tagapagltinod. Tagapagsdtirg, cook (from sding, "cooked rice"). Sometimes taga alone indicates this. Lx.: Tagaligao, wanderer,,stroller. MISCELLANEOUS WORDS. The following words arranged alphabetically by roots in Tagalog will show the use of many idiomiatic phrases, etc.: 'To try; to intend.Mgkaa(fo ka) Ylbala (syn.: gaied). 3149ak-ala (from akala). TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 241 Rancid. To look after and follow a person. To heed; to note. The. To reap or cut rice. What? Unaccounted for; without reason; at random. Rancid (usual word). To growl. To sing. New. To arise; to get up. Widower or widow. To change the clothes. To launch or put a vessel into the water; also to place a ladder. To travel on horseback or by means of horses. To palpitate. To weigh anchor. A kind of rice. To clear off timber in order to cultivate the land. 6855-05-~16 Ala (rare). Ang pinaala, what is rancid. Ang pagala, the rancidity Umala, to become rancid. Makaala, to make rancid. Magpapaala, to let everything become rancid. Magalagbay (from alagbay). [Rare]. Urnanmin, from amin. Ang. Sometimes used as "because." Hindi ak6 makapagbaitrgon, ang ak6'y mnay 8akit (I am not able to get up, because I am ill). Plural ang maTgd. Magani (from ani, "harvest") An6? An6 bagd? (What then?) An6 pa? (What else?) An6t Pagkakastilaan kita? (What? Must we speak in Spanish?) An6an6. Walarig an~ano6 ang 8alapi ito6 (this money is unaccounted for). Tinapal 8iyad niya' walang an5an (he slapped him without reason). Antd (same changes as ala). Umaiigil, var. umifi-gil (from arryil;i',gil). Magawit (from awit). Silang lahat ay nagawit (they all sang). Bago. Bagongtduo; bachelor. Bagong damit, new clothes. Ka-bagongtauohan, youthfulness; bachelorhood. Bagong pan-ginoon, bagong ugali, new lord, new customs. Magbago, to renovate. Mamago, to wear for the first time; also to renew. (See bago, adverb. ) MagbaTgon ( from. ban4Tgon, a Javanese word; see tindig). MagbaTgon ka (get up). Also means to lift. Hindi ak6' makaba77gon nang tapayan (I am unable to lift the jar). Bauo, var. Balo. MaYgbihis. Mabungsod. Bungsoran mo ak6 nang hagddn (place th ladder for me). MAaigabayo (from cabayo, "horse"). Derived from Sp. caballo, which in turn is from L. bat. caballu8, "nag; pack horse." Kurniabag (from kadbag). Nagkalcdbag ang dibdib ko (my heart [lit, chest] is palpitating). Kakabagkd bag, to palpitate greatly. Kumabag (from kabag). Note the difference in accent. Kabog. Magkaiiigin (from kaiiigin). 242 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To pick (as a guitar); to twang; to pluck at. To snatch; to take by force; to pull up by the roots. Iron or other chain or wire. What's his name. What (10 you call it. To (atch on the wing. Bad or stagnant water along a shore. To seal or close a letter. To belong to. To be restless. To order to elect. Girdle. To recline; to lean against. To dig a hole. To tease; to end. To wash the hands or feet. To speak nasally. To unite or bind together. To look blankly (as a blind person). To sparkle (as the eyes in excitement). To roll up (as sleeves or trouser legs); to lift the skirt. To give alms. To look first at one thing and then another. To avert the eyes. To look here and there on account of noise. To look here and there hurriedly. To glare in a wild manner. To act foolishly. To relish. To wish; to desire. Wing (of bird). To pardon; forgive. Afagkalahit (from kalabit, var. kalbit). A'omarnkain (from k1a?nkatu). Kauad. Jfagkauad, to use a chain or wire.,Si k'win. Ang kudin. This word can b)e verbalized by urn, mnay, magpa, mo/ki, etc. Juuoi lit (from la'kit). Dikyi'. Madikyd itong dalampasig ito6 (there is stagnant water along this shore). Mfagdit. Pandiit, seal, wax, gumi. Guinandn (fromn fanarin). (Gavan sa 6lki' it6 (This belongs to me). Gumiaso (frouingaso, are). Gasohan, person disturbed. Miangaso, to disturb another. Gagasohan, restlessness. Gagas~ogaso, very restl ess-. Mlagpahialal (from- halal). 1ifi g) it. Maltigp it,tight. Afaghigpit, to tighten; to cinch up (as a girdle, strap, etc.). Malang higp~ithigpit, slovenly. Iluiniig (from hilig). lu iii okay (froin hikay). Anygpanho'kay, the spade. l1111nurnp(iy (fr-om humpoi). Afaghugas (f rom hugas). (See lamos, uigb)..1fahuhuniahiho ol (from humal)..afgl(ongk(q) (frominn 1ugkopl). 2lfaglilani-g (from liaiaql). Lurnilap (from lilap) [rare]. Maglilis. Bd-it ha rnaglililis narig sotlawal? (Whyli are you rolling uip your trotisers?) Afagliimos (fromn S1)i. lbizosna). Mag})olniro.s, to ask for alms. LunribTgoip (from lit-gap), var. firganap. Lumifi-gat (froin liii-g'at). L urniN jifi~ ig (fr m li girT -g ig, ra re ). Probably a combination of diqgg, idea of hearing. Luminbfos (fomor lifi'?(os). Lniiriyap (from liyaop). 3afona ogal. Mo(gmomoor~t hjtgdmai7-ga.hani, to feign stupidlity. Nomniamo aw (from namnaoio). M1agruasa (see p ita). P'ak-pak. Lunuiipad, to fly. Magpataiuad (from patlunad, syn., tauad). Mfagpataua'ran, to forgive each other. JJ'alang patomanga6. Without respect; limit or consideration. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 243 To choose; to select. To pick up. To become dull (as a knife or i zor). To boil rice. Pest; epidemic; to suffer from. To profess; to vow; to believe in. To pass between rocks, hills, etc. To peep. To care for most diligently. To grasp); take hold of; Ipinch. To put vinegar oil anything. Can be. To run away from or hide froi i. To betray. To cut grass; to mow. To patch. To be gaping stupidly. To look upward. To stare at. Friend. Pleasure. To (10 anything swiftly. To look (lown. To assign to; to turn over to. To sprinkle. Orphan. Punmil. Ang piliin, what chosen or selected out. Anig piniliaon (sing.) or Anig pinagpilian (plur.), what. selected or chosen from. M a qjP a'Io0t. Pimioroi (from purol). Aug purolin, what dlulled. Tianomal (from tomal), to be dull (as business). Katuimalan, dullness. A ng itomal, the cause of such dullness. Suimiing (from isding). Sinding, boiled rice. iliagkasdlot. Suinampalataya. Aug~ sumasampalalaya, the creed, faith or believer. Surnilang (from silang). Sumilip (from silip). 3fagpakasipagsipag (from sipag). pit, an anchor. Mfagsuki'. Ang sukaan, what dipped in or flavored with vinegar. S4'kat. Dit silkat, can not be. S~dcat bagd siyang pagkatiwaiaan? (Can he be trusted?) Sd'kat [di sd'katj.siyang paniwalaan (He can [can not] be trusted). Turnakas (from takas). Taimaksil (from taksil). Taksii na taruo, a traitorous or treacherous mman. Kataksilan, treason, treachery. Tumagpas (from tagpas). Magtagpi. Tatafigaitari7qd. Afagtafiata7!Tgdhan, to feign stupidity. Turnisigald' (from tis7gald). Ang tiffgalain, what seen thus. Tumitig (fromt titig). Katoto. Katotohin mo siya' (befriend him). Tad'. -,ng pagddting niny6'y nakatutul sa 4kin (Your arrival causes me pleasure). Rindtutud ko aug pagdalting niny6' (Your arrival is a source of pleasure to me). Turnulin (from tulin). Mafgtuin, to go swiftly. Aug ipagtulin, the cause of going swiftly. Tumuifg{ I (from tuTg6). Also to bow or incline the head. Ang turTghu,6n what looked at thus or the person bowed to.. Magdkol. Si Pedro nagd'kol nang kaniyang gagawin kay Juan (Pedro turned over the work to be done by him to Juari). Magwisik. Aug panurisik, the, sprinkler. Ulila. 244 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. To order. Maguitos. Sundin mo ang vitosR ko sa iy6' (follow my orders to you). The following examples, taken from the Tagalog edition of the Renacimiento, a paper of Manila, will give an idea of ordinary Tagalog coinposition as applied to modern conditions, and the use of foreign words in connection therewith: I. Singapore, i/ca 12 (dalawa')?'irg (nang) Abril (1905). Ang paraan ni Roqjestvens/cy ay ma/caradting siyad sa cabo (Iaoi7gos) 1Padaran na nasa baybayin?rg Indo- China, at 150 milla ang agwat sa Saigon. Doon n-ga magpipisan ang nagkahiwaiay na hi'kbong-dagat iig nipd-a (,maifga) ruso, kun sakdling sild'y hindi mahdrang kcapuwd( fig nfipd japon. Ang isang pang/cat iiTg hz'kbong-ddgat na pinafi-uTguluhan ni Roaqjestvenskcy ay nasa baybayin vfig Muntok 07gay6n na iilang milla ang agwat sa Sumatra. Ang ibang Vi-ga sasakydn ay nasa pagitan pa irg Ban/ca. Ang 7iii-a' sasa/cyang it6' y nasa raang t iwasay sa pagitan s7, Malaca. Ilindi sild nahadrang, sapag/ca't ang M'd japon mardhil ay nasa, malapit sa Formosa na doon nild ibig ma/cilaban. Mardhil ang Batavia ang susuntod na daraun-gan irg mgd ruso, sapag/ca't doo'y may cableng cibut hltngang Rusia. [Translation.] Singapore, 12th of April. The plan of Rodjestvensky is to try to (arrive at) make Cape Padaran, on the coast of Indo-China, and 150 miles distant from Saigon. There the separated fleets (sea armies) of the Russians will unite, if the two are not encountered by the Japanese. One division of the fleet commanded by Rodjestvensky is now off the coast of Muntok a few miles from Sumatra. The other vessels are yet in the region of Banka. The other vessels of this (fleet) are remaining in the route (or neighborhood) of Malacca. They were not molested, because the Japanese continued to remain near Formosa, where they wish to commence the struggle. Russian vessels continue to follow each other into Batavia, because there is a cable connecting with Russia there. IL. Newchwang, i/ca 7 77g Abril. Ang 500,000 /cataong bumubuo ir htu/cbo ni Ogama ay sumasala/cay na maigi sa hd/cbo ni Linevitch na na/capagtibay sa Kirin.I Mabuti ang paraan?Tg pag/ca/ald'sob figj nija japon at ang habd vi~g /canilang lupa~ng nahahanayan ay may dpat na puo d' limang puong milla. I1naa/cala ni Oyama na itaboy untiunti ang n7fi-g ruso hadngang sa /canilang madaig na lubusan. Ang htikbong pinamamahalaan ni general Linevitch ay hindi hihigit sa bilang na 200,000, sapag/ca't bukod sa nama~tayan siyd ri-g marami sa labanan, ay marami pa angv nabi hag i7g n?pid' japan. [Translation.] -Newchwang, 7th of April. The 500,000 men composing the army of Gyama are advancing in good order upon the army of Linevitch now intrenched at Kirin. The plan of advance of the Japanese is good (excellent) and the length of their front (ground) is 40 or 50 miles. Oyaia, is trying to push the Russians gradually until he can vanquish them all (unitedly). The army under the charge of General Linevitch does not number more than 200,000, especially because besides the many who have been killed in battle there are many also who have been captured by the Japanese. III. San Petersburgo, i/ca 6 77g Abril. Ang iiip4 japon ay na/cassulong na urdi-unti sa da/cong /cinalalagyadn ni general Lineiitch at ATg /caniyang hu/cbo. lgang drao pa't ang Harbin ay hindi na marahil matatahanan fitg Vt-ga ruso, 8apagka't pinagiisipang gibain?ig /cadway. Hindi na pina~gari~gatawanan?rg TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 245 iitdruso ang pagpapakatibay sa IHarbin, sapagka't may nakikinikinita silaug rnalakitug pafiTgarnib na sasapitin doon. Ang dakong uutrusigan siTg ni-ig ruso ay ang Vladivostok na kanilang irtasahang inapagtitiba Yang maigi hdingang sa magkaroon?T kapayapaan. Mdasamd ang tay6 ii-g sig'4 hd'kbong ruso, data.puwa't hifldt' namdn mtapahtusay, 't6 dahtil sa gulong nangyayari 8a Rusia. Marami sa. Rusia aug naniniwald na madadaig any hukbo ni general Linelvitch, at kung magkagayo'n ay magkakaroon fi-g kapayapaan. [Translation.] St. Petersburg, 6th of April. The Japanese are advancing little by little upon the position of General Linevitch and his army. One day more, and Harbin miay possibly not be remaining to the Russians, because they think it may be (lestroyed by the enemy. The Russians are making no efforts to strengthen themselves in Harbin, because they believe themselves to be in great danger of capture there. The place of retreat for the Russians is Vladivostok, which thiey hope to fortify so well as to hold it until peace. The situation of the Russian armies is bad, but it can not be bettered on account of the riots taking place in Russia. Many in Russia believe that the army of General Linevitch will be defeated, and that in that event there will be peace. IV'. Mianila ika, 14 rr-g Abril. Ibinabaiitc& si~ Gobernador Dancel (Lalawigany Rizal), na noony umag~l rThj ika 5 fi~ bd'wang lusnalaikad ay may nadakip sa Baybayin na tatlonyg taluony laba's at si yam na kaiabao sic ninanakao sa Novaliches, daluwvnug baril at dalawang revolver. Noong ika 11 ay may nadakip na isnurg tdtuony laba's na may dalany, isang kalabao, at isang r~fleng mouser, dalawcang puony cartucho't dalawvang puony rifleng remington. Noong ika 10 ay may nasumpuri-gan any presiderte sa Taytay na isang remiington sna may sampuony cartucho. Avy i7~tgd kalabao ay, dinala' sa tosoreria miunicipal. Noony ika 11 ay nakadakip din namadn si Gobernador Dancel 07g isang nayi7-gaidgalang Pedro Pio, na dti umano' ysyn nanybagabag na maigi sa Baranka at Miarikoina noong viernes. 1t6'y ibinigay kay mayor Haskell 7-1g constabulario. Mlay nadakip pa ring dalawang tduong labds na may isany revolver colt at sampuony cartucho. [Translation.] It is announced by Governor Dancel (Rizal Province) that on the morning of the 5th of the current month there were captured at Bagbagin three outlaws and nine of the carabao stolen from Novaliches, two shotguns, and two revolvers. On the 11th there were captured one armed outlaw, one carabao, andl one Mauser rifle, twenty cartridges, and twenty Remington rifles. On the 10th the presidente (mayor) of Taytay secured a Remington and ten cartridges. The carabao, were sent to the municipal treasury. On the 11th Governor Dancel was also able to capture one called Pedro Pio, said to be the person who made trouble at Baranka and Mariquina last Friday. This person was turned over to Major Haskell, of the constabulary. There were also two outlaws captured who had a Colt revolver and ten cartridges. V~ Hindi malalanunan at magtatay6 rit6' sa Miaynild ri-g bagong hospital. Tt 6 y isngabagan na hiningi si-g lit. Rev. Opispo Brent ii-g siyd' y nasa Estados Unidos. Any salaping gugugulin ay kaloob 77g- limany universidad sa Harvard, Yale, Princeton, Pennsylvania at Columbia. Any masiga?7gasiwa nit6 ay any Jyqlesia Episcopal, datapuwa' t tantangapin any sinomany nau'kol sa ibang religion. [Translation.] It will not be long until there will be erected here in Manila a new hospital. This will be from a subscription solicited by the Right Reverend Bishop Brent when he was in the United States. 246 TAGALOG LANGUJAGE. The money to be offered is from the funds (interior) cf five universities: Harvard, Yale, Princeton, IPennsylvania, and Columbia. The direction of this (hospital) will be under the Episcopal Church, but anyone will be received belonging to another faith. VI. Ang gqobernador sa Bataan si G. Toma's del Rosario ay nag alay sa Balar7-ga rT-g isang lupang may 15 hectarea at r4,000, ang halagyd, upang mapagtayttan rvg isang " 9secondary school. " Ang yaong lopang yau;n ay magagamit sa pagatiral si~ agricultura 6 ri} m-ga' ddno'ng tangk-ol sap~amtond'l~,d, at magingaralan din vamain rT{ n1~gja pagsasanay 'sgi pangpalakais rii katawvan. Sa akala rimnnarndn rJi-g (obernadoray mnabutingmagkaroonnigisang maestrong americano sa bayan bayan upang maitanyag ang 7i~gda paraan at ugaling americano sa 7i-igafilipino. [Translation.] The governor of Bataan, Hon. Tom~i-s del Rosario, has given a piece of land comprising 15 hectares and worth 114,000, in Balaiig'a, in order that there may be a site for the erection of a "secondary school." That land may be used for teaching agriculture or for sciences or occupations lpertamingm to the land, and for instruction in the means of strengthening the body (mianual training school). The endeavor of the governor will be to have one American teacher in each town in order to show the cuistomns anti habits of the Americans to the Filipinos. VII. D' umano'y hihtilii7gjin!57ig Compania 7i7 tranvia el'ctrico na tulutan na ang sasakyang it6'y marapaiting paratingin hangan sa Palanygag. ITpinagbibi gay alam, din namarn nigayo'n sa gobernador general ri-g nafi-ga~ii-asiwa sa tranvia electrico na sa lunes ay pasisimulang patakbuhan ang daan sa Santa Ana. [Translation.] It is said that the electric street-car company will ask that the line be permitted to be extended to reach as far as Paraflaque. Notice has also been given to-day to the governor-general by the management of the electric railway that osi Monday it will commence the operation of the road to Santa Ana. VIII. Paunawa.-Ipinamanhik- sa sinomang nakaptilot?iAg isang Jsong lalaki ma may balah'ibong kulay cafe at may putil sa dibdib at sa dulo r77 paang kanan sa unahadn, may taglay ma collar sa lug at isang chapa ma may numerong (billang) 1965, ay mangyaring ibalik- 6 isauli sa daang Arranque billang (blg.).158 at doo' y kakamtan ang isang pabuya at dakilang pasasaldmat. [Translation.] NOTICE.-It is requested that anyone who may pick up a male dog with coffee-colored hair and with white on the breast and the end of the right front foot, bearing a collar on the neck and a tag with the number 1965, will be able to return or restore him to No. 158 Arranque street, where a reward will be given, together with many thanks. ITX. Nawald. Sa badhay ma bilang 74 sa. daang Rada, Tondo, ay nawald ang isang manuk ma sasaburi-ging balah'ibong lasak, maitim, ang tahid, maputi au "ait baldado ang datu sa kanan. Sinoman angnmakapagdal' 6 makapagturo6 si~ kinalalagyadn rT'g naturang manu k ay bibigydn fiTg pabuyang hala gang 'walo' 6 sampuong piso. [Translation.] LosT.-From the house No. 74 iRada street, Tondo, there has been lost a gamecock with whit~e and red (lasak) plumage, black spurs, and white feet, with the midIdle claw of thieright footecrippled. Anyone who may be able to bring or point out the whereabouts of the said fowl will be given a reward to the amount of eight or ten pesos. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 247 A careful study of the foregoing examples will enable one to clearly understand the general run of the lmodern language. Reading the native press, both for practice and keeping track of what is of interest in native circles, is recommended to all who may be stationed in the Tagalog region. SECTION EIGHT. The following table of the contractions and variations of the roots of Tagalog words will be found of use in quickly finding the form: English. Root. Contraction, variati on, etc. To salute; hail....-. ---....l bd........... Abin. To remnember -. —,-.......Ilaalaa -....... Al(tlahdnin. To be lazy..-............. Alisagd........ is(agi. What?.-.............. ----. A) 6?.-l..... nhin? Spouse; to marry -.-.........Ascdua -......- Asauin. Salt; to salt -....-...-....- Asin -—.. --- — AIsnan. Roof; cover; to roof........Atip-.. Aptan. To carry on the shoulders-. - Babd -.......... Bhih. Uneasiness.. —... —..-... — Balisa.........Kabdllisanhdn. To moisten. —.-..-.. —.-.... B(rs.......... Basin; basdn. To suffer; endure -—.... --- Botd..........Bath in. To pound rice —. --- —. Ba!/o...... Bayin. To give -. --- —-....- -..- Bimjgay -....... Bigyirn. To accustom -......-........ Bihasa -...... Bisanhin. To buy.................... Bil -B......... ilhin; bilhdn. To change the clothes.......Bih -...........Bisin; bisdn. To open -.. --- —-.... --- —- Bukds........ Buksdn. To separate. —. --- —-..-..- Bukod.........Bukdin. To spill.-....-..-.... ----.- Buhos........ Busan. To pass.-..-...-.-........ ])(Dan -....... Danan; danin. To bring; carry....-...-.. Dald..........Dalhin; dalhan. To seize; arrest; detain -—.. Dakip -....... Dakpin. To arrive ---—.......... —.- Diting....... Datin,; datndn. To stick..................... Dikit -....... Diktin; diktdn. To stretch out the arms.. --- Dip.... Dip-bin; dip-hdn. To hear -.....................iDi ig........ Din-ggin; dinTg-gn. Blood D....-..g........... Dng6 -......... Dugin; dugad. To do one's duty. —....... Ganap a........ papda. To work.-..... —......... Gawd (........ Gawin; gawdn. To pull down; destroy thus._ Gibd.... Gibin; gibdn. To awake.. --- —-------—. Gising.........Gisnan. Deposit...-.la ---.....-.... Habilin -... - Habinldan. To kiss.. —..-........H... lIalik -........ H agkan. To substitute.-.la-..li.... — Hali......... Ilalinhdn. Ribbon; band... ---..-..... IIapin......... apnan. To sow; scatter seed la...... Hasik......... askdn. To conduct; escort -a........ j atid......... atddn. To lie down ---- —.........- - ligd,........ Higan; hihigdan. To blow -----------------. ihip..... Hipan. To complain -.. ---....-l.... Iinanakit.. - Hinanaktdn. To wait for --......-... -. Iiniay.-....... intin. To ask for -.....i.r.......... ir.Y. g......... iiin; hingdn. To borrow (except money) -- Hiram......... Hirmin; hirmdn. To change..-...-.-... ---.. Jlbda.........-lbhin; ibhrn. To go for water............. Iqib....... Ibin; igbdn. The other side............... Kabild........ abilin; kabildn. 2948 TAGALOG LANGUAGE. English. Root. Contraction, variation, etc. To bite. - -...K-.. —. —..- h-Kagat......... Kagtin. To deny; cloak -. ---. --- —-- Kaild -....... Kailan. To eat -........-.... --—.- Kain.. Kanin. To untie; loosen.-. —...... Kalag........Kalgin; kalgdn. Left.. —..- ----.. --- —-.-.'aiwd........ K; liv; kawdn. To obtain............-...- Kawmit -........Kamntr,. To grope for................. Kapd........ Kapin; kapin. To grasp; embrace -.. apit.........Kaptin; kaptdn. To nibble.......-A —..- Kibit.. Kibti; kibtdn. To cut off........... --- —-.- Kitil......... Kitlin; kitldn. To know; be acquainted with. Kila......... Kilanlin. To exceed.. —..........- Llabis -....... Labthdn. To place I.. —....-.... -- La gay/.........Lagydn. Strength -...... --- —-...... Lakads.........Laksdtn. To grow..... --- —----—..- Laki.Lakhin; lakhan. Contents; pulp.. —... —... — Laina........ Laimiab. To soften.-....... Lard......... Latin; latan. Far; distant.. --- —------—. Layb......... Layi. Five...-.-.. —. —.- - Lin)d... Limlnhn. To err; to mIake a mlistake - -- Malt. it.. Malin; malan. To observe; experience -... —.lfsid.........I Musdadn. To begin; commence --—. --- JMuld.......... IdTn. To settle; appease. ----.-.. Patlt gay.-.. I - Palagy(in. From lagay. To contain; include, etc -—.- Pal(min.....Palamndan. From lamrdn. To listen. ---......-.......... - t'iig.......- Pakingd. To dreanm.................. anip..... Pgiiampan. Name....-... --- —-.-a... )ai/latn -.... Pati/anlan. To break (as a rope, etc.)..-. Patid l........ a Ptdan. To squeeze ---—.. ---.. Pi.......... P igin; pigan. To wring -P.................. Psil -........ Pitsll. To cut........... Ptol.... Putl;n; pntldn. To embark; to mount ----—.(takay......... Slakyli(. To be ill --—.. --- —...-... —!akit -..........Stat i; saktdn. To err; sin.-.-............ - S'tla........... Sa'nln. To tell; report....-...-..-..ISalild I-...... Salitin. Evil -.S —. --- —--—. ----. md- S..... S t; sarnmn. To come back; to give back..Saol -.S ---a..-.S(tolin; saoltil. To burn rubbish. Sa —......Sigd........... Sigan. To devour; eat -....S —........ Sil i; sildn. To put into —......-..t... ---. ilid --—...... Sidlan. To follow; obey.. ---..-. S —. t tod.........- Sundin. To wonder at -....... —... — TaIkd.......- Takhcin. To cover -....... —....... -- Takip —...... Takpan. To turn the back........... Talikod........ alikdan. To sow --—... —...l ---.. —. Tanimn....... amna n. To grasp; to hold to......... Tatrtan - Ta....... Ttlnn. To stand.. —.... —......... i-.......... — T(ytan. To taste; try -.. ----.-. ---.I Tikim -.... Tikmn. To look.. — ----......... Tir r....'.... Tinn. To redeem................. Tub6os -....... Tubsin; tubsan. To dry..................- Tuyb.. —. Tuyin; tuyan. To move.. --- —------- ----— U....... Ugn. To return; repeat.... ---..- UlIt.......-. (Tl;.; Ulan. To sit down.................Up6......... Upan. To lack -....... Wald........WadWaln; wal/in. TAGALOG LANGUAGE. 249 II. For names of animals, birds, fishes, and invertebrates not given in this work the student is referred to Jordana's Bosquejo Geogrdfico t Historico Natural del Archipielago Filipino, Madrid, 1885; to the work of Friar Casto de Elera, Dominican, entitled Catdlogo Sistematico de Toda la Fauna de Filipinas, Manila, 1895; and to the book of Montero y Vidal, El Archipielago Filipino y las islas M3arianas, Carolinas y Palaos, Madrid, 1886. For the fauna the great work of Friar Blanco, Augustine, will be of great aid, as well as the reports of the forestry and agricultural bureaus at Manila. The work of Father Delgado, S. J., Manila, 1892, deserves attention as revised and annotated. In conclusion, it is hoped that a careful study of the language under discussion will lead the student to explore for himself, andt note the localisms and changes in each province. Any suggestions, corrections, or criticisms will be welcomed by the author. Cn 0T TYPE SCHEME FOR PARTICLES, ETC. Roots and unchanged words.................indicated by.. roman 1. c. Infix IN and NAKA-MAKA as tense particle.. —.......do.... ROMAN S. C.. Particles i and an (han)............................ do.... gothic italic I. c. Verbalizing particles mac, na, etc..................do... boldface italic 1. c. (When retained as part of compound particle in Q pairs)................................ indicated by.. boldface 1. c. Adjective prefix nla...............................do.... boldface 1. c. 0 Euphonic "tie" g or ng.............. --- —.....do —.- celtic 1. c. Reduplications I, i, su, etc....... --..-.. ---.do —.. italic 1. c. Oversized Fold~out Oversized Fold~out Oversized Fold~out Oversized Fold~out Oversized Fold~out Oversized Fold~out I N D E X E S. GRAMMATICAL INDEX. Accent, change of, 18. Changes meaning, 19. General rules of, 18. Accents, 18, 19. Acute, 18. Grave, 18. Circumflex, 18, 19. Active (voice), 20. Adjectives, 20, 38, (full analysis of) 55, 56, 57. Prefixed to noun, 31. Adjectives, comparison of, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76. Equality, 72, 73. Inferiority, 73. Superiority, 73, 74. Superlative, degree of, 74, 75, i6. Adjectives (regarded as to meaning): Colors, 63. Of condition, 61, 62. Of physical conditions of body, 63, 64. Of quality, 58, 59, 60. Of quantity, 62. Mental, moral, or personal attributes, 64-71. Miscellaneous, 71, 72. Adjectives, negative, 57. Adjectives, plural of, 57. Adjectives, position of, 57. Adjective, predicate, 32. Adverbial numerals, 79, 80. Adverbs, 20, 38, (with adjective) 74, 75, (fully discussed) 83-86, (definition of) 83, (verbalizing) 83, 84. Adverbs: Affirmative, 99. Negative, 99, 100. Of degree, 72, 75, 98. Of measure, 72, 75, 98. "Flat," 83. "Flexional," 83. "Phrasal," 83. Interrogatiye, 32, 33. Of doubt, 100. Of manner, 93, 98. Of quality, 93, 98. Of motion, 84. Of place, 34, 84, (list of many) 86, 87. Of time, 87-92. Of succession, 87-92. Affirmative adverbs, 99. 251 252 INDEXES. Affirmative particles, 37. tafangan, (adverb), 73. an (suffix), 18, 56, 108, IV, 141, I, II (full discussion), 142-153. Antonym, definition of, 57. Arabic element in Tagalog, 14, 38. Article, indefinite: Substitute for, 31. Article (of common nouns, places, countries, etc.), 28. With possessive pronouns, 37. Article (of proper nouns, nouns of relationship, etc.), 27, 28. Declined, 27. Plural, 27. Special plural, 27. Syntax, 28. Articles, instruments, etc., with pan prefixed, 209, XVII. ay (particle), 32, (with antonyms), 106, VI. Be to, (verb) 32. To be there, 85. Cardinal numerals, 76, 77, 78. Cases, 20, 38. Chinese words in Tagalog, 14, 38. Clauses of equal force, two, 32. Comparative: Of adjectives. 72, 73, 74. Of equality, 72, 73. Of inferiority, 73. Of superiority, 73, 74. Conjunctions, 102-104. "And" 32. Adversative, 102, 103. Alterative, 102. Binding, 102. Causative, 103, 104. Conclusive (illative), 104. Conditional, 104. Contractions, 247, 248. Definite, the, 20, 30, (discussion) 108, I, II, III. Which definite, 108, IV to XV. Dialects, 35. Diminutives, 110, IX, (urn) 180, (mag) 192. Direct object, 109, V, VI. One, 109, V. Distributive numerals, 80. Do (make) to, 108, I, II, 110, XI, XIII. Do not, 100. Dual number, 35, 36, 38. Endings, 31. Consonant, 31. In diphthong, 31. In "n," 31. In vowel, 31. Euphonic changes, 32, 34, 81, (with man and pan) 201, 209. Exclamations, 104, 105. "Exclusive (editorial) we," 35, 36, 38. Future perfect tense, 106, X. Future tense, 106, X. ga (interrogative particle), 74. gaalfn, 74. gaano, 74. ganga, 74. gaya, 74. INDEXES. 253 Gender, lack of, 38. General terims, lack of, 19. Genitives, doulle, of personal pronouns, 35, 36. lian (suffix), 18, 56, 141, I, II, (full discussion) 142-153. Itin (suffix), 18, 56 (with weights, Ileasures, etc.) 82. Homonyln, definition of, 57. i [particle], 108, IV, (cause, instrument or time) 109, V, (combined with in) 110, XII, (fully discussed) 132-141. Idioms, 20. ika [compound particle] (with adverbs) 84, 85, (meaning cause) 108, IV, 138, XVIII, 211, I. ikiina [compound particle] (with adverbs), 84, 55, (meaning cause) 108, IV, 138, XVIII, 211, 1. ikinapa [compound particle] (with adverbs), 85. Imperative, 105, II. Intensity, quicknesss, with, 105, III. Imperfect tense, 106, X. in (suffix) 18, 56, (inserted) 57, (with weights, measures etc.) 82, (with pa) 84, 85, (motion toward or control of) 108, IV, (combined with i) 110, XII, (discussion) 112, I, to 114, VI (idea of attraction toward) 114-115, (possession) 115, (verbs of calling, 115, (of reaching for) 116, (verbs of carrying, cutting, measuring or weighing) 116-119, (verbs of destruction) 119, (verbs of receiving) 120, (of inviting) 120, (of eating, drinking, etc.) 122, (acts of senses) 123, 124, (acts of will or mind) 124, 125, (verbs of making) 125, (of wearing) 125, (various) 126, (suffixed) 127-130. In can, 130. Inclusive "we," 35, 38. Indefinite, 20, 30, (discussed) 111, I, to112, V Principal particles of, 111, I. Indicative, 106, IX. Indirect object, 109, VI. Infinitive, 106, IX. ini [compound particle], 110, VIII. Intransitive verbs, 107, XI. ipa [compound particle] (explained), 109, VIII. ipag [compound particle], 109, IV (explained), 109, VIII. ipagka [compound particle], 109, VIII. ipagkaka [compound particle], 109, VIII. ipina [compound particle] (with adverbs), 85 (explained), 109, VIII. ipinag [compound particle] (explained), 109, VIII (example), 110, IX. ipinagka [compound particle], 109, VIII. ipinagkaka [compound particle] (with adverb), 85 (explained), 109, VIII. ka (particle expressing likeness), 72. kasing (compound particle), 72. ka (imparting idea of intensity, etc.), 105, III. (linking opposite ideas), 106, VI. ka [particle], 211. ka an [compound particle], 200, 201. kapag [particle], 239. kapagka [particle], 239. kulang (adverb meaning "less"), 73. ma (adjective forming particle), 55, (use) 111, I, (fully discussed), 196 -201, (def. of maka) 211. ma in (hin), 131, 132. mag (nag), 56, (verbalizing adverb) 84, 85, (use) 110, X, 111, I, (fully discussed) 180-194. magin [particle], 232-234. magka [particle], 38, 85, (combinations) 109, VIII, (use) 110 X, (fully discussed) 230-232. magkan [particle], 238. 254 INDEXES. magkapa [particle], 238. magkapantay (compound particle), 73. magkapara (conpound particle), 73. magkaparis (compound particle), 73. magkasing (compound particle), 73. magma (compound particle), 56. magpa [particle], 109, VIII, (use) 110, X, (fully discussed) 217-223. magpaka [particle], 225-227. magpati [particle], 235. magsa [particle], 237. magsi [particle], 235, 236. maka [particle], 201, IV, (fully discussed) 211-217, (when meaning "cause") 56, (peculiar construction with) 112, VIII, (indicating completed action) 93. maki [particle], 227-230. mala (forming adjectives), 56. man [particle], 37, (with weights, measures, moneys) 81, (with adverbs) 85, (fully discussed) 201-211. manhi [particle], 235-237. mapa (as adjective forming particle), 56. mapag (as adjective forming particle), 56. may (use) 110, XIII. mayroon (use), 110, XIII. mina (minam.a) [particle expressing opinion], 56. na (as adjective forming particle), 56, (use) 111, I, (fully discussed) 196 -201, (def. of maka) 211, (with irregular form of verb) 171-175. nag [particle] (with adverb), 85, (use) 111, 1, (fully discussed) 180-194. nagin [particle], 233. nagka [particle] (with adverb), 85. nagkan [particle], 238. nagkapa [particle], 238. nagpaka [particle], 225, I. nagpati [particle], 235. nagsa [particle], 237. nagsi [particle], 235. naka [particle], 201, IV, (fully discussed), 211-217. naki [particle], 227, I. nan [particle], 201, IV. napa [compound particle], 223, I (with adverbs), 85. napasa [particle], 223, I. Negative adjectives, 57. Negative adverbs, 99, 100. Negative verbs, 30. Nominative case: Preceded by article and followed by genitive, 28. With genitive inserted between nominative and article, 28. Noun: In genitive modifying nominative, 31. Nouns, 20, (common) 28, (exp.), 38. Source, 28, (from roots) 240. Numerals, 76-80. Adverbials, 79, 80. Cardinals, 76, 77, 78. Distributives, 80. Ordinals, 78, 79. Occupations (with man prefixed), 205, 210. Ordinal numerals, 78, 79. pa, the 66 roots beginning with, 175-180. pa (with adverbs), 84. papa (do.), 84. pa (yet, still), 73. pa [definite of magpa], 109, VIII, 217, I, (fully discussed) 223-225. INDEXES. 255 pag [particle], 110, VIII, IX, (retention) 110, X, 194. pagka [particle], 194, 201, III, 230. pagp(tka [particle], 225, I. paka [particle], 225, I. paki [particle], 227, I. pala (forming adjectives), 56. pan [particle], 201, 209, XVII. panhi [particle], 235, 236. para (particle of comparison), 72. Participle, 106, X. Particles, combinations of, 238, 239. Designation of, 239. Particles, verbal, 19, 20, (most important) 106, VIII. Particularizing verbs, 19. Passive, 20. Past tense, 106, X. Phrases, ordinary, some, 20-27. pimog [compound particle], 110, IX, 195, II. pinag — n [compound particle and suffix], 110, VIII. pilnaqkal [compound particle] (with adverbs), 85, (discussed) 230. pin ak,, 227, IX. pin(aku [particle], 239. pinaki [particle], 227, I. pinapa [compound particle] (with adverbs), 84, 85. Place (how expressed), 141, II. Pluperfect tense, 106, X. Plural (of adjectives), 57. Plural (of nouns), 28, 38. Special plural of si, 27. Prefix, retention of, 106, VII. Prepositions (fully discussed), 100-102. Present tense, 106, X. Pronouns, demonstrative, 33, 34, (idiomatic use) 34. Pronouns, indefinite, 37, (exp.) 38. Pronouns, interrogative, 32. Pronouns, personal, 35, 36. dialects, 35. idioms, 35. Pronouns, possessive, 36, 37. With ang and ang sa, 37. Syntax and order, 37. Pronouns, relative, 38. Proper nouns (article of), 27. puma [compound particle] (with adverbs), 85. Reduplication of roots, 56. With ka( an (han), 75, 76. Of first syllable of numerals, 77. To form diminutives, 110, IX. Respect, great, how indicated, 37. Root words in Tagalog, number, 13. Roots, reduplication of, 56. Roots, differing with um and mag, 154. Roots, the 66 beginning with pa, 175-180. Sanskrit words in Tagalog, 13, 38. Sex, how indicated, 31. Sbng (particle meaning "as"), 72. Spanish element in Tagalog, 14, 38. Superlative: Of adjective, 74, 75, 76. Absolute, 75. Relative, 75. Simple, 74, 75. 256 INDEXES. Synonym, definition of, 57. Synonyms, 19. Tagalog language, importance of, 13. Dialects of, 13, 35. Relationship of, 13. Preservation of verbal system of, 13. Number of root words in, 13. Sanskrit element in, 38. Chinese element in, 14, 38. Arabic element in, 14, 38. Spanish element in, 14, 38. English element in, 14. Lack of Japanese element in, 14. Tagalog: Pronunciation of, 15. Structure of, compared, 107, XIV, XV. Verb, compared, 107, XVI. Tenses, 106, X. Lack of change within, 107, XII. "Ties," euphonic, 31. Transitive verbs, 107, XI. r, when considered as consonant, 31. Umr (particle), (with adverb), 84, (Use shown), 110, X, 111, T, (Fully discussed), 153-170, (Diminutives), 180. Verb (understood), 32. Verbs, 20, 38, (discussion) 105-108. Completeness of Tagalog verb, 107, XVI. Definite, 108, I, II, III. Definition of, 105, I. Intransitive, 107, XI. Modes, 106, IX. Particularizing, 19. Superlative form, 76. Tenses, 106, X. Transitive, 107, XI. Wold (with adjective), 74, (use) 110, XIII. Words, number of in Tagalog, 19. EN(,GLISH INDEX Able to --, to be, 211, III, 213, VII. Able to do, to, 177. Accept, to, 120. Accompany, to, 133, 165. Act like a —, to, 230. Acts of the senses, 123, 124, 214. Acts of will or mind, 124, 125. Add, to, 137. Advise, to, 134. Afraid, to be, 129. Aid, to, 185. Animals, domestic, 28, 29. Approach, to, 184. Arrange, to, 120. Arrive, to, 140. Ascend, to, 174. Ashamed, to be, 198. Ask, to, 121. Asleep, to be, 198. Assemble, to, 184. Attraction toward, idea of, 114. INDEXES. 257 Bathe, to, 150. Bed; bedding, 28, 29. Bed, to be in, 199. Bed, to go to, 151. Bite, to, 122, 123. Blow, to, 162. Body, parts of, 49, 50, 51. Borrow, to, 114, 115, 137, 164. Breaking, verbs of, 198. Bridges, 43. Bring, to, 114, 115. Build a house, to, 133. Buildings, kinds of, 43. Bury, to; inter, to, 195. Buy, to, 114, 131, 133, 164, 172, 182, (at retail) 138. Calculate, to, 124. Call, to, 115, 173. Calling, verbs of, 115. Capture, to, 173. Care for, to, 169, 204. Carry, to, 116, 133, (different ways) 116, 117. Cause -, to, 211, IV, 212. Charitable, to be, 145. Choose, to, 114. Civic dignities, 53. Clothing, articles of, 52. Cold, 47. Come down, to, 130. Come here, to, 147. Come in, to, 173. Come out, to, 129. Coming or going, 20. Communication, means of, 43, 44. Compare, to, 141. Compass, points of, 47. Compel, to, 193. Complain, to, 114. Conform, to, 140 Conquer, to, 176. Consider, to, 124. Conteid with, to, 172. Contradict, to, 172. Cook, to, 133. Cooking utensils, etc., 40. Cooking, verbs of, 135. Country, character of, 44. Cover, to, 142. Curse, to, 185. Cursing, Tagalog, 105. Cut, to, 117, (different ways) 117, 118. Cut hair, to, 168. Dark, to become, 163. Dawn, to, 162. Deceive, to, 144. Descend, to, 176. Desire to, 169, 170. Desire, to, 124. Destroy, to, 119, 138, 156. Destruction, verbs of, 119, 120. Die, to, 119, 141. 6855-06 17 258 INDEXES. Dignities, civil and military, 53. Directions (of compass), 47. Disappear, to, 136. Diseases, names of, 51. Disentangle, to 120. Disobey, to, 172. Dive, to, 128. Dream to, 176. Drink, to, 122, 127, 159, 175. Drinking, 24, (drinkables) 28, 29. Drowned, to be, 201. Dwell, to, 175. Earthquake, 47. Eating, 24, (materials) 28, 29, 39, (verbs of) 122, 127, 159, 172. Edifices (list of), 43. Embark, to, 140, 195. Empty out, to, 141. Endure, to, 185. Enter, to, 173. Envy, to, 175. Equalize, to, 141. Erect, to, 152. Evil, to do or cause, 212. Exchange, to, 120, 164. Explain, to, 125. Extinguish, to, 119, 156. Faint away, to, 119. Fall, to, 196. Fall back, to, 175. Feel, to, 123. Ferry, ford, 44. Fight, to, 184. Finished, to be, 201. Fire, 40, (conflagration) 43, (signal fire) 43. Firewood, 40. Fish, edible kinds, 39. Fish, to, 121, 122, 206. Fishing, terms used in, 49. Fly, to, 128. Follow, to, 139, 172. Foodstuffs, 28, 29, (cooked) 113, V. Forage, grass, 43. Forbid, to, 189. Force, to, 193. Ford, ferry, 44. Forget, to, 198. Fractions, how expressed, 79. Fruit (kinds), 29. Game, names for, 39. Gather, to, 141. Get ready, to, 140. Get rid of, to, 136. Give, to, 136, 143. Give back, to, 134. Glad, to be, 198. Go, to, 129. (Go away, to, 133, 174. (Go back, to, 175. Go down, to, 130. Go far, to, 173. (ro in, to, 173. INDEXES. 259 Going or coming, 21, 22. Good, to do, 212. Grasp, to, 147. Grass; forage, 43. Graze, to, 127. Greetings; salutations, 20. Grin, to, 160. Guard, to, 144, 181. Guide, to, 208. Have, to, 30, 85, 86, (not to have) 30. Hear, to, 123. Hearing, verbs of, 145, 146. Heap up, to, 137. Heat, 47. Heavenly bodies, 45. Help, to, 185. Horses and horse equipments, 42. House, 40 (parts of) 40, 41. Household furniture, 28, 29, 41, 42. Hungry, to be, 128, 196, 197. Hunt, to, 121, 206. Inquire, to, 121. Insult, to, 182. Inviting, verbs of, 120. Join with, to, 165. Join with in —, to, 228. Jump, to, 186. Jump down, to, 130. Kick, to, 185. Kill, to, 119, 156. Kiss, to, 145. Kneel, to, 158. Knees, to be on, 199. Land (features of), 44, 47. Laugh, to, 160. Lead, to, 175. Leave, to, 133, 174. Leavetaking, 23. Lend, to (money only), 138. Lend willingly, to, 138. Lie down, to 151, (various postures of) 159. Like, to, 124, 170. Listen, to, 123. Look, to, 186. Look at, to, 123, 148, 172. Look for, to, 133, 169. Looking for, verbs of, 116. Look out of, to, 127. Lose, to, 129. Love, to, 124, 125. Make (do), to, 108, I, II. Make haste, to, 193. Making, verbs of, 125. Malinger, to; play sick, to, 192. March, to, 166. Maritime terms, 45, 48. Meals; food, 39. Measure, to, 118. Measures, moneys, weights, 81, 82. Meet, to, 184. Metals, minerals, 49. 260 INDEXES. Military grades, 53. Miss, to, 129. Mock, to, 185. Moneys, weights, measures, 81, 82. Months, names of, 46; days of, 79. Moon, 45. Motion to, to, 115. Moving, verbs of, 116. Mutter, to, 189. Natural divisions (of islands), 48. Nautical terms, 45, 48. No, 99. Not, 99. Numerals, how expressed, 76-80. Obey, to, 139, 172. Occupations, etc., 54, 55. Open, to, 142. Order, to -, to, 217-219. Overtake, to, 131. Pass, to, 182. Pay for, to, 147. Persevere, to, 177. Personal possession, 115. Physical acts, 160, 161. Pierce, to, 147. Place, how indicated, 148-151. Place, to, 136. Plant, to, 136. Political divisions, 48, 49. Poor, to be, 200. Positions, to be in certain, 199. Pour out, to, 137. Practice medicine, to, 204. Preach, to, 204. Professions, 53, 54. Promise, to, 177. Pronounce, to, 189. Proper, to be, 184, 197. Provoke, to, 175. Push, to, 186. Put, to, 136. Quarrel, to, 184. Rain, to, 162. Reach, to, 131. Read, to, 170, 171,173. Reap, to, 203. Receive, to, 120. Receiving, verbs of, 120. Recommend, to, 134. Relatives, kin, 31, 113, V. Remain behind, to, 139. Remember, to, 124. Remit, to, 133. Report, to, 134. Reprimand, to, 121. Request, to, 114, 132, 146. Resist, to, 172. Resolve, to, 177. Retreat, to, 175. Rice, kinds of, 113, V. Rice, to trade or sell, 143. INDEXES. 261 Rivers, streams, 44. Roads, trails, etc., 43. Rub, to, 124. Run, to, 128. Sad, to be, 138, 198. Salutations, greetings, 20. Scatter, to, 137. Scattering, verbs of, 187. Sea, 45, (phenomena) 45. Searching, verbs of, 116. See, to, 123. Seize, to, 114. Sell, to, 132, (at retail) 138. Send, to, 114, 133. Servant, hiring, 25. Sew, to, 127. Shaking, verbs of, 116. Shave, to, 168. Shellfish, kinds, 39. Signal, to, 135. Sit down, to, 159, 172, 181. Sleepy, to be, 139. Smell, to, 123. Snatch, to, 132. Sorry, to be, 145. Sow, to, 136. Speak, to, 134. Speaking, verbs, of, 188, 189. Spend, to, 176. Spin, to, 205. Split, to, 118. Spreading, verbs of, 137. Stagger, to, 183. Stand up, to, 157, 172. Steal, to, 145, 165. Stir, to, 185. Streams, rivers, 44, 45. Stumble, to, 197. Suffer, to, 185. Suicide, to commit, 120. Sun, 45, (setting and rising of) 164. Sweep, to, 122. Swim, to, 127. Tableware, 28, 29. Talk, to, 134. Talk to, to, 165. Take, to, 114, 132, 173. Take out, to, 129. Taste, to, 123. Teach, to, 145. Tear, to, 117. Tear down, to, 119. Tell, to, 134. Tempt, to 174. Think, to, 124, 125. Thirsty, to be, 128. Threaten, to, 143. Throw away, to, 136. Throw down, to, 136. Throwing, verbs of, 187. Time, divisions of, 45, 46, 92, 93. 262 INDEXES. Toilet, thie; (dressing) 24. Tools, list of, 42. Touch, to, 123, 124. Trails, roads, etc., 43. Translate, to, 141. Translations, 244-246. Transfer, to, 141, Travel to, 140, 195, 208. Traveling, 22. Trees, plants, etc., 53. Trench, to make a., 151. Tuirn back, to, 175. Uncover, to, 142. Untie, to, 146. Use, to, 11 4. Utensils, cooking, 40. Utensils, list of, 42. Vegetables, kinds, 39, 40. Verify, to, 125. Wait for, to, 120. Walk, to, 166. Watch, to, 144. Water, 29. Water courses, 44,9 45. Wearing, verbs of, 125. Weather, conditions of, 23, 47. Weep, to, 139. Weigh, to, 119. Weights, measures, mioneys, 81, 82. Win,7 to, 176. Wishi, to, 169, (not to wish), 175. Words, miscellaneous, 240-243. Wound, to, 151. Write, to, 171, 172. Writing materials, 43, 44. Yes, 99. TAG'ALOG, INDEX. Abut, 131. AhR7t 168. Aicaala, 124. Anya~yo, 120. Arao, 162. Asinf, 147. A z (, 145. Auay, 166. Ayao, 175. Babd (mababd), 58. Barob, 125. Binuit, 121. Biro', 185'. Bulag, 200. Buti (mabutti), 58. C (only retained in words of Spanish origin). Daan,2 183. Do/tan (marahan), 95. Dala', 114, 116. Dami (miarami), 58. Damit, 144. Dayd (magdarayad), 69. Difi-gig, 123, 146. INDEXES. 263 Dipa', 82. Dito, 34, 133, 147. Doon, 34. Dakhd,1 200. E (begins Spanish words onl y). Gialing, 138, 148, VII. (;azo, 108, I, II, 110, xi, XIII. Giik, 130. Gup-it, 118, 168. Halik, 145. fl~ipamps, 1.29, 168, 187. Ilnarp, 109, V, 116, 133. Ilcoigjin, 162. H6p is, 138. Il-apon, 163'. Ilasik, 18 7. TVig, 1 51. Hilainos, 1.67. THi ', 1 65. Flusay, 120. Init (mainit), 60. Inuit, 122, 160. Isdd, 122. Isip, 124, 182. -hr't 157. Juan, 27, 37. kay J., 27, 28. ni J., 27, 28, 37. ninmi J., 27. si J., 27. sina'J., 27. Kagat, 122. Rcain, 122, 140, 159. Kinyjig, 123. 14 Kita, 123, 169, 84 Labo', 199. Ladkad, 166. Laki, 155. Lainbat, 122. Lirnot, 192. Lhiis (malinis), 59. Luhod, 158. M1ana, 181. )7gja, 25, 30, (exp.) 37. Parnaog, 176. Panhik, 21. Pdsok, 173. Patay, 119, 140, 141. Pita's, 141. PIt, 155. Q (retained only in Spanish words or foreign names). R (only begins a word in Tagalog by reason of euphonic change from "d) rin, 37. rito, 25, 35. Salitdt, 134. Salii bonig, 120. Sama, 165. S~amd (viasam'), 58. 264 INDEXES. Sanbiulat, 187. Silang, 164. sirdi 119, 138, 156. Sisi, 139. Sukclay, 168. Su'lat, 171. AS~tmpd, 185. Sunod, 139, 172. 182. 81"Mog, 156. Tahi', 127. Tak-b6, 128. Tikot, 129. Thiiigis, 139. Tdpang (matdtpang), 65. Taua, 160. Tap6, 152. Tihiycl, 159. Tindig, 157. Tipon, 184. Ta4,I 200. Tu66, 161. Thid ('matuid), 62. Takcd, 174. Taks6, 174. Mhoy, 178. Tuy,6 (matuy6, 60. Ulm, 162. Undt, 150. UjpA, 159. UTtang, 114, 138, 164. V, Only retained in some Spanish words; generally changed to "B." Ydman (mnaydman), 69. 'y, 32, 38. 0 I I ARMY WAR COLLEGE LIBRARY, 'i, ~ ~ <V.~~,~.~~~~~~~~~~~~~,..~ ~ **1S J U~%~No v*ojq~ Got C up~~~~~~~ 7d1cLnc I5; /;7 ox X 3 9015 01103 3175 7594 PL 6056 M21 c.3 f \, -i f -,.. - k N i~~~t; th . 'iKr W S~~~~~~~~~~~~! '., D:;;d -n ' j: 0 ~:~ ' Si S